JP7259702B2 - Combined heat cooker, kitchen furniture, and control program for combined heat cooker - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a composite heating cooker for heating an object to be heated such as a pot placed on a top plate, kitchen furniture such as a kitchen counter equipped with the same, and a program for controlling the composite heating cooker. is.

There are roughly three types of heating cookers in view of the environment in which they are used.
One of them is a so-called "built-in type" installed in kitchen furniture such as a kitchen counter. The second type is a "stationary type" that is placed in a predetermined position of kitchen furniture like a gas stove (also called a "gas combustion table") or the like. The third type is a small and portable "desktop type" that is used by placing it at any position on a dining table or the like.

There are many types of "built-in type" heating cookers that are equipped with multiple types of heating sources, and they are popular because they can handle various types of cooking. However, since it is installed inside the kitchen furniture, the external dimensions must be designed according to the standard of general kitchen furniture. The degree of difficulty is remarkably low, and the degree of difficulty to make it a practical product is high.

As a typical built-in cooking device, a grill chamber (also called an “oven chamber” or “heating chamber” that is heated by an induction heating source inside the main body so that the range of cooking can be expanded). (referred to as a "heating chamber"), and microwaves from a microwave heating source are introduced into the heating chamber (see Patent Documents 1 and 2, for example). A cooker equipped with a plurality of heat sources with different heating principles is called a "composite type" cooker.

In addition, it has been proposed to move a cooking utensil such as a pan containing the food to be cooked by moving it between a plurality of places in order to complete one food to be cooked. Since the heating space (environment) is changed by changing the heating place, there is an advantage that various types of food can be handled (see Patent Documents 3 and 4, for example).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-031202 (page 1, FIG. 5) JP 2016-207400 (page 5, FIG. 9) JP 2011-129529 A (page 1, FIG. 6) JP 2011-96484 A (page 1, FIG. 14)

As described above, a conventional built-in cooker equipped with an induction heating source, a radiant electric heater, and a microwave heating source has been proposed. However, in any one of them, it is necessary to coordinate a plurality of heat sources to be used when performing one cooking.

As proposed in Patent Documents 3 and 4 above, when using a plurality of heating sources at distant locations, even if the user's operation command is incorrect, an unintended heating source may operate or stop. It is necessary to take measures to prevent If this countermeasure is not sufficient, it may cause user confusion and cooking failure. In other words, it is necessary to overcome difficult technical problems such as coordination of a plurality of heat sources and timely notification and display of the coordination status of the heat sources to the user.

In addition, as multiple heating sources, heating with different heating principles such as heat sources such as induction heating sources and radiant electric heaters (also called "electric heaters that emit radiant heat"), microwave heating sources, gas combustion burners, etc. When using a heating source, each heating source has different heating characteristics. It can be used for cooking that cannot be realized with a heating source such as a heater, and is expected to be used.
However, when an input operation unit and a display unit are provided for each of the heat sources having significantly different heating characteristics, it is possible to heat each heat source independently and to operate them in a predetermined order as described above. In the heat cooking in the linked cooking mode in which the sequence is specified, if the user is not provided with appropriate information in a timely manner, there is a concern that the user's operability and convenience will be impaired, and quick cooking will be hindered. In addition, there is also a concern that it may lead to cooking failures and impair user's expectations.

A first object of the present invention is to propose a heating cooker that can effectively use a plurality of heating sources such as an induction heating source, a radiant electric heating source, and a microwave heating source, and to further improve user operability. Thus, the object is to obtain a highly convenient composite heating cooker that can be widely used for various types of cooking.

A second object of the present invention is to provide kitchen furniture equipped with a composite cooking device that solves the above-described problems.

A third object of the present invention is to provide a control program for a computer suitable for a composite heating cooker that solves the above-described problems.

The composite heating cooker of the first invention related to the first problem is
a first heating means for heating the object to be heated from below in the upper part of the main body;
a second heating means for supplying microwaves to a heating chamber located inside said body;
a third heating means for heating the heating chamber;
an input operation unit;
display means;
a control unit that controls the first, second, and third heating means,
The control unit controls the group of the second heating means and the third heating means and the first heating means.
The heat means has a function of performing a coordinated cooking mode driven with a time difference,
The control unit drives the second heating means and the third heating means simultaneously or with a time difference,
Alternatively, it further has a function of performing a compound cooking mode that switches automatically,
The input operation unit includes third selection means for selecting the first heating means and the linked cooking mode.
a first selection means for selecting a mode, and a second selection means for selecting a composite cooking menu.
picture,
After the power is supplied, the control unit
(1) When none of the first, second and third selection means is operated, the standby initial screen is displayed.
is displayed on the display means,
(2) after the standby initial screen is displayed, the second selection means and the third selection means;
When the input operation of the first selection means is started before the stage, the cooperative cooking mode is input
is displayed, and the first selection means and the third selection means are displayed prior to the
When the input operation of the second selection means is started, the second specific screen for inputting the composite cooking mode
displays and
With the second specific screen displayed, in the input operation unit, the second input means for the combined cooking mode inputs one combined cooking menu in the combined cooking mode, the second heating means or the one single cooking menu in a single cooking mode using the third heating means, and
It is a configuration characterized by

The composite heating cooker of the second invention related to the first problem is
a heating chamber inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated in the upper part of the main body;
a second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
a third heating means for heating the heating chamber by a heating principle different from that of the second heating means;
an input operation unit;
display means;
A control unit that controls the first, second, and third heating means,
The control unit includes a group consisting of the second heating means and the third heating means, and a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means is driven with a time difference, A combined cooking mode in which the heating means and the third heating means are driven simultaneously or with a time difference, or are automatically switched and driven, and the first, second, and third heating means are each independently It has a function to perform a single cooking mode driven by
The control unit, in the input operation unit,
(1) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected, displaying a first specific screen on the display means;
(2) when the combined cooking mode is selected, displaying a second specific screen on the display means;
(3) when the single cooking mode using the first heating means is selected, displaying a third specific screen on the display means;
When the cooperative cooking mode is selected and when the combined cooking mode is selected, the control unit determines whether the permission condition is satisfied, and when the permission condition is satisfied, the first specific screen Or display the second specific screen
It is a configuration characterized by

The composite heating cooker of the third invention related to the first problem is
a heating chamber inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated in the upper part of the main body;
a second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
a third heating means for heating the heating chamber by a heating principle different from that of the second heating means;
an input operation unit;
display means;
A control unit that controls the first, second, and third heating means,
The control unit includes a group consisting of the second heating means and the third heating means, and a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means is driven with a time difference, A combined cooking mode in which the heating means and the third heating means are driven simultaneously or with a time difference, or are automatically switched and driven, and the first, second, and third heating means are each independently It has a function to perform a single cooking mode driven by
The control unit, in the input operation unit,
(1) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected, displaying a first specific screen on the display means;
(2) when the combined cooking mode is selected, displaying a second specific screen on the display means;
(3) when the single cooking mode using the first heating means is selected, displaying a third specific screen on the display means;
The input operation unit is arranged on the upper surface of the main body and includes an individual operation unit and a cooperative operation unit of the first heating means,
The cooperative operation unit is provided with first input means for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, second input means for selecting the combined cooking mode, and input means for starting heat cooking,
A single cooking mode that uses the first heating means can be selected by the individual operation unit,
In the program of the compound cooking mode executed by the control unit, the heating means to be driven and the order of driving are determined in advance for each compound cooking menu,
By selecting one of the compound cooking menus while the second specific screen is displayed, a single cooking mode using the second heating means or the third heating means can be selected.
It is a configuration characterized by

The composite heating cooker of the fourth invention related to the first problem is
a first heating means for heating the object to be heated in the upper part of the main body;
a second heating means for heating an object to be cooked in a heating chamber disposed inside the main body;
a third heating means for heating the heating chamber by a heating principle different from that of the second heating means;
an input operation unit;
display means;
a control unit that controls the first, second, and third heating means,
The control unit controls a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the second heating means, the third heating means, and the first heating means are driven with a time difference, and the second heating means. A function to perform a combined cooking mode in which the third heating means are driven simultaneously or with a time difference, or automatically switched and driven, and a single cooking mode in which the first heating means is driven alone. have
The control unit selects a first specific screen for executing the linked cooking mode, a second specific screen for executing the combined cooking mode, and a third specific screen for executing the single cooking mode on the display means. displayed in a unilateral way,
In a state in which any one of the first specific screen, the second specific screen, and the third specific screen is displayed, the control unit receives a cooking start command from the input operation unit. go to
The input operation unit has a dedicated operation unit for the first heating means and a common operation unit for the first, second and third heating means,
The shared operation unit includes first selection means for selecting the linked cooking mode and second selection means for selecting the combined cooking mode,
After power is supplied, the control unit
displaying the first specific screen when the input operation of the first selection means is started before the second selection means;
displaying the second specific screen when the input operation of the second selection means is started before the first selection means;
The control unit displays the third specific screen when an input operation of the dedicated operation unit is started before the first selection unit and the second selection unit.
It is a configuration characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a highly convenient composite heating cooker, kitchen furniture, and a program for controlling the composite heating cooker, which are capable of coordinating a plurality of heating means to handle a wide variety of cooking. can.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a perspective view which shows the whole kitchen furniture in which the built-in type compound-type heating cooker which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention is installed. It is a perspective view which shows the state of the kitchen furniture before incorporating the heating cooker shown in FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows the intermediate stage of the operation|work which incorporates the heating cooker shown in FIG. 1 into kitchen furniture. It is a vertical cross-sectional schematic diagram which shows the kitchen furniture of FIG. 1, and the dimensional relationship of a heating cooker. FIG. 5 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing an enlarged front part of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. 4 ; FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. 4 when viewed obliquely from the front; Fig. 2 is a plan view of the heating cooker shown in Fig. 1; FIG. 8 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker of FIG. 1 taken along line ZZ of FIG. 7; FIG. 8 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker of FIG. 1 taken along line ZZ of FIG. 7 and showing the flow of cooling air. FIG. 9 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker of FIG. 1 taken along line WW of FIG. 8; FIG. 8 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker of FIG. 1 taken along line YY of FIG. 7; FIG. 9 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker of FIG. 1 taken along line VV of FIG. 8; FIG. 9 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker of FIG. 1 taken along line XX of FIG. 8; Fig. 2 is a transverse cross-sectional view of the main part of the right side when the heating cooker of Fig. 1 is installed in kitchen furniture; FIG. 2 is a simplified plan view for explaining an input operation unit of the heating cooker of FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a plan view of the front portion of the heating cooker of FIG. 1 for explaining the layout of an input operation section and various display sections; FIG. 2 is an enlarged plan view showing a central operation section and an integrated display section of the heating cooker of FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is an enlarged plan view of a right operating section and a right display section of the heating cooker of FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is an enlarged plan view of a left operating section and a left display section of the heating cooker of FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit of the heating cooker of FIG. 1; 2 is a block diagram 1 showing main control relationships of the heating cooker of FIG. 1; FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram 2 showing a main control device of the heating cooker of FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is an explanatory view showing main cooling air passages of the heating cooker of FIG. 1; 2 is a circuit diagram showing details of an inverter circuit of the heating cooker of FIG. 1. FIG. 1. It is a list which shows the correspondence of the main control menus and display areas in the integrated display part of the cooking-by-heating machine of FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the storage device of the integrated control device of the heating cooker in FIG. 1 and a central operation unit; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the storage device of the integrated control device of the heating cooker in FIG. 1 and the central operation unit; FIG. 2 is a flowchart 1 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a flowchart 2 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 1; 3 is a flowchart 3 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 1; 4 is a flowchart 4 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 1; 1. It is explanatory drawing 1 for demonstrating the control action of the heating cooker of FIG. 1 in a time series. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 1 in chronological order; 1. It is a list which shows the correspondence of the cooling fan of the heat cooker of FIG. 1, and the kind of heat cooking. FIG. 2 is an explanatory view showing a control operation when fried food cooking (automatic), which is one type of induction heating cooking, is performed in the heating cooker of FIG. 1 ; 1. It is explanatory drawing 1 which shows the display operation of the integrated display part immediately after starting of the heating cooker of FIG. 1. It is operation|movement explanatory drawing 1 of the left operation part of the heating cooker of FIG. 1. It is operation|movement explanatory drawing 1 of the left operation part of the heating cooker of FIG. 1, and an integrated display part. 1. It is explanatory drawing 1 which shows the display operation of the integrated display part at the time of compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during combined cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. 1; FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during combined cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. 1; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit during combined cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. 1; 1. It is a top view which shows the relationship between the display operation of an integrated display part at the time of compound cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. 1, and a central operation part. 1. It is a top view which shows the relationship between the display operation of an integrated display part, and a central operation part at the time of cooperative cooking of the heating cooker of FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing input operations and processes when implementing the cooperative cooking menu and when implementing the independent cooking menu; FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between a cooking process of a cooperative cooking menu and a single cooking menu; Fig. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking menu and the independent cooking menu; 1. In the heating cooker of FIG. 1, it is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship of input operation and display until each transition of the compound cooking mode by a compound cooking menu, and the cooperative cooking mode by a cooperative cooking menu in a time series. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between various processes and operations of cooking according to a cooperative cooking menu (cooperative cooking mode) in the heating cooker of FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between various processes and operations of cooking (cooperative cooking mode) according to the cooperative cooking menu in the heating cooker of FIG. 1 ; FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between various processes and operations of cooking according to a cooperative cooking menu (cooperative cooking mode) in the heating cooker of FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated control device before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated control device until the cooking device of FIG. 1 shifts to the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions before transitioning to a cooperative cooking mode and determination results in the heating cooker of FIG. 1; FIG. 2 is a flow chart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking menu of the heating cooker of FIG. 1 is selected; FIG. 2 is a flowchart 2 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking menu of the heating cooker of FIG. 1 is selected. 3 is a flowchart 3 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking menu of the heating cooker of FIG. 1 is selected. FIG. 1 is a plan view 1 showing control operations of an input operation unit and a display unit (integrated display unit/left display unit) when a linked cooking menu of the heating cooker of FIG. 1 is selected. FIG. 10 is a plan view and an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the central operation unit and the display operation of the integrated display unit when the cooperative cooking menu of the heating cooker is selected. It is explanatory drawing which shows the kind of cooperation cooking menu at the time of selecting the cooperation cooking menu of a heat cooker. It is a list which shows the display content of the 1st specific screen in an integrated display part at the time of selecting a cooperation cooking menu. Fig. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing display contents of an integrated display section and an input operation section when a cooperative cooking menu is selected; Fig. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when the cooperative cooking menu is selected; Fig. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when the cooperative cooking menu is selected; Fig. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing display contents of an integrated display unit when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking menu; Fig. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking menu; Fig. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking menu; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking menu; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram 5 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking menu; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 6 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking menu; FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram 7 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking menu; FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram 8 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking menu; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram 9 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking menu; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram 10 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking menu; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram 11 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking menu; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram 12 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking menu. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram 13 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking menu; FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram 14 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking menu; FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram 15 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "hamburger" is cooked in the cooperative cooking menu; Fig. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "fried chicken" is cooked in the linked cooking menu; Fig. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "fried chicken" is selected in the cooperative cooking menu; Fig. 3 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "fried chicken" is selected in the cooperative cooking menu; Fig. 4 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "fried chicken" is selected in the linked cooking menu; Fig. 5 is an explanatory diagram 5 showing the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section when "fried chicken" is selected in the cooperative cooking menu; FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door is closed in the built-in combined cooking device according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention. FIG. 86 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door is opened in the heating cooker of FIG. 85; FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the heating cooker of FIG. 85 with the top plate removed. FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the heating cooker of FIG. 85 with the top plate and the IH coil removed. FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 85 with the top plate, IH coil and cover removed. FIG. 90 is a reference perspective view showing the flow of cooling air in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 89; 86 is a bottom (lower) view of the upper unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 85. FIG. FIG. 86 is a block diagram illustrating the overall control function of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 85; 86 is an enlarged plan view showing an input operation section and an integrated display section of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 85; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking menu and the independent cooking menu; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section in the cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the storage device of the integrated control device and the central operation unit of the heating cooker according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention; FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the cooperative cooking menu of the heating cooker 1 of FIG. 96 is selected. FIG. FIG. 11 is a plan view 1 of the front portion of the heating cooker according to Embodiment 4 of the present invention for explaining the arrangement of an input operation section and various display sections. FIG. 99 is a plan view 2 showing the relationship between the input operation section and the central operation section in FIG. 98; FIG. 11 is a simplified plan view of a built-in composite cooking device according to Embodiment 5 of the present invention; FIG. 101 is a plan view 1 of the front portion for explaining the arrangement of the central operation unit and various display units in the heating cooker of FIG. 100; FIG. 101 is a plan view 2 of the front portion for explaining the arrangement of the central operation unit and various display units in the heating cooker of FIG. 100; FIG. 101 is a plan view 3 of the front portion for explaining the arrangement of the central operation unit and various display units in the heating cooker of FIG. 100; FIG. 100, which shows a modification of the heating cooker of FIG. 100, is a plan view of the front portion for explaining the arrangement of the central operation unit and various display units. 101 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a central operation unit in the heating cooker of FIG. 100; FIG. 101 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit of the heating cooker of FIG. 100; FIG. 100. It is explanatory drawing 2 which shows the display operation of the integrated display part of the heating cooker of FIG. 100. It is explanatory drawing 3 which shows the display operation of the integrated display part of the heating cooker of FIG. 100. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the display operation of the integrated display part of the heating cooker of FIG. FIG. 11 is a plan view showing the relationship between an input operation section and a central operation section in a built-in combined cooking device according to Embodiment 6 of the present invention; FIG. 111 is a plan view showing another display operation example of the left operation unit and the left display unit when the cooperative cooking menu is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 110; FIG. 11 is a plan view showing still another display operation example of the left operation unit and the left display unit when the cooperative cooking menu is selected; It is explanatory drawing which shows the input operation of the cooperation operation part of a heating cooker, and the relationship of the display information of an integrated display part and a left side display part. It is explanatory drawing of the modification which shows the input operation of the cooperation operation part of a heating cooker, and the relationship of the display information of an integrated display part and a left side display part. FIG. 12 is a plan view of the front portion of the heating cooker according to Embodiment 7 of the present invention for explaining the arrangement of an input operation section and various display sections. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the execution operation of the cooperative cooking menu of the heating cooker in FIG. 115 and the display information of various display units; FIG. 116 is a plan view 1 of the front portion of the heating cooker of FIG. 115 for explaining the arrangement of the central operation unit and various display units. FIG. 12 is a plan view of the front portion of the heating cooker according to Embodiment 8 of the present invention for explaining the arrangement of an input operation section and various display sections. 119 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated control device before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 118. FIG. FIG. 119 is a flowchart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device until shifting to the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 118; 119 is a flow chart 2 showing the control operation of the integrated control device until the heating cooker of FIG. 118 shifts to the linked cooking mode. FIG. 119 is a plan view of the front portion for explaining the arrangement of the input operation section and various display sections showing a modification of the heating cooker of FIG. 118; It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing mainly the heating chamber portion of the heating cooker according to Embodiment 9 of the present invention. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking process of the linked cooking menu and the operation of the input operation unit of the heating cooker according to Embodiment 10 of the present invention. 125 is a flowchart 1 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 124; 125 is a flowchart 2 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 124; FIG. 20 is a simplified plan view of a built-in composite cooking device according to Embodiment 11 of the present invention. FIG. 128 is a plan view 1 of the front portion for explaining the arrangement of the input operation section and various display sections in FIG. 127; FIG. 129 is a plan view 2 of the same portion as FIG. 128; FIG. 129 is a plan view 3 of the same portion as FIG. 128; FIG. 129 is a plan view 4 of the same portion as FIG. 128; FIG. 129 is a plan view 5 of the same portion as FIG. 128; 128 is a plan view of an input operation unit and various display units showing a modification of the heating cooker of FIG. 127; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 30 is a plan view of the front portion of the heating cooker according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention for explaining the arrangement around the input operation section and the integrated display section. 136 is an enlarged plan view for explaining a change in display content of the integrated display section in the heating cooker of FIG. 135; FIG.

Embodiment 1.
1 to 84 show a built-in composite heating cooker according to Embodiment 1. FIG. It should be noted that in the following description, unless there is a particular contradiction, it will simply be referred to as a "cooker".
In each figure, the symbol RT indicates the right direction of the heating cooker 1, and the symbol LE indicates the left direction. FT indicates the front, and BK indicates the rear.

In this Embodiment 1, the "induction heating cooker" refers to a device having a heating portion based on the principle of induction heating. When there are a plurality of heating units, there may be a heating source using a method different from the induction heating method, such as a radiant electric heat source (for example, a sheathed heater, a carbon heater, a mica heater, etc.).

In this Embodiment 1, the "composite heating cooker" is provided with a plurality of heat sources that heat according to different heating principles, such as a microwave heating source and induction heating. It refers to the one that can heat and cook one food.

It is preferable to use a closed space "heating chamber" as a place to heat one food item. However, it is not necessary to carry out all the cooking steps inside the heating chamber.
Alternatively, for example, an object to be cooked is heated by an induction heating source outside the heating chamber, and then the object to be cooked is moved into the heating chamber, and the wall surface of the heating chamber is heated by a radiant electric heating source, and A form in which the inside of the heating chamber is heated by microwaves is a kind of "composite heating cooker".

In this first embodiment, the "heating means (hereinafter referred to as "oven heating source")" of the heating chamber may be a heating source that heats the wall surface of the heating chamber from the outside. A heating source installed in the internal space may also be used. A mode in which these two are used in combination may be used.
Alternatively, a heat generating member that heats to a high temperature by an induction heating method may be arranged, and the heat generating member may heat the wall surface of the heating chamber from the outside or heat the air in the heating chamber.

For example, in Japanese Patent Documents, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-74305 discloses a second heating element ( A heating cooker has been proposed that includes an induction heating coil) and a third heating element (induction heating coil) that heats the food to be cooked from the side.

Furthermore, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-85996, an electrical insulator is provided below the heating chamber, an induction heating coil (hereinafter referred to as "IH coil") is provided in the space below the electrical insulator, and the IH heat Arrangements have been proposed for inductively heating a cooking plate placed over a coil. The cooking plate is made of a material that can be heated by induction. For example, iron, stainless steel, a carbon material with a carbon content of 90% or more, a ceramic material containing Si (silicon) or FeSi (ferro-silicon) as a conductive material, or the like is used. It is

In addition, as a typical method in which a heat-generating member that becomes hot by induction heating is arranged, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-071695 discloses that a high-frequency current is supplied to an IH coil to generate a high-frequency magnetic flux in the IH coil. A high-frequency magnetic flux is interlinked with a heater arranged in a heating chamber so that an induced current flows through the heater, and the food to be cooked in the heating chamber is cooked by Joule heat generated by the electric resistance of the heater itself. is disclosed.

Furthermore, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-247048, an electrically closed circuit heater is arranged inside the heating chamber, and a high-frequency magnetic flux generated from an IH coil arranged outside the heating chamber is linked to the heater. It has been proposed to heat the heater to a high temperature to dissipate heat into the heating chamber. The heater referred to here is an electrically closed circuit formed by bending a round bar or round pipe made of stainless steel or high-nickel alloy into a predetermined shape and joining the ends by welding or brazing. It is formed in an endless shape.

As a representative example of the "IH coil" referred to in the first embodiment, about 30 thin copper wires or aluminum wires of about 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm are bundled, and a plurality of the bundles are twisted into a spiral shape. (For example, Japanese Patent Document, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-79580).

Another patent document, JP-A-2018-32551, proposes an induction heating cooker using an annular conductor made of a flat plate-like conductive material and formed in an annular shape as an IH coil.
Any one of these forms corresponds to the "IH coil" which is the main part of the induction heating source.

In this Embodiment 1, the term “coordinated heating cooking” means that the heating location for one object to be cooked (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.; hereinafter the same) is different, and the heating operation conditions (hereinafter, (referred to as “control conditions”) can be set using two types of heat sources. Some of these control conditions may not be set by the user, and may be automatically set by the integrated control device MC or the like, which will be described later. Hereinafter, "cooperation heating cooking" is referred to as "cooperation cooking".

The control conditions refer to, but are limited to, at least one of a heating power value indicating heating intensity or combustion power, calorific value, heating power level, power consumption, microwave output value, heating target temperature, and heating time. not. Other physical conditions may be used as long as they affect the finish of the food to be cooked.

The above-mentioned "cooperation cooking" corresponds to a case where a plurality of heat sources are used with a time lag. For example, in the process of completing one cooking, after completing microwave heating and preheating, the food to be cooked is moved to another place, and at the place after the movement, it is heated by the IH coil 17L described later. In the case, it is a kind of "cooperation cooking" referred to here.

Coordinated cooking has been proposed in the form of a built-in type heating cooker in Japanese Patent No. 5833699 and Japanese Patent No. 5500944.

1 to 84, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 is, for example, a heating cooker incorporated in kitchen furniture (including furniture called a system kitchen) 2 with a sink. 2A is an installation opening formed in the kitchen furniture 2 . The heating cooker 1 is supplied with AC power having a voltage of 200 V and a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz from a commercial power supply 99 as described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 15, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 has two induction heating units on the left and right sides.
In FIG. 15 , CL1 denotes a center line passing through the center point of the left and right of the upper unit 100 in the front-rear direction, and AL denotes the area where the top plate 15 is exposed on the upper surface of the upper unit 100 .

In FIG. 15, 17HR is a right heating section (corresponding to a "first heating section") provided in a range on the right side of the center line CL1, and induction heating can be performed directly above this.
17HL is a left heating section (corresponding to a "second heating section") provided in a range on the left side of the center line CL1, and induction heating can be performed directly above this. As described above, this heating cooker 1 is a cooker provided with two “heating ports” (two mouths) on the upper surface of the top plate 15 .

Further, another induction heating unit may be provided between the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL so as to straddle the left-right center line CL1, thereby forming a three-burner cooking device. Alternatively, any one of the IH coils 17L and 17R (details will be described later) constituting the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL may be replaced with a radiant heat source such as a radiant heater or an infrared heater.
In the following description, 17H is used as a reference number when referring to an "induction heating section".

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 15, circular position marks 17LS and 17RS are provided to indicate desired positions for placing an object to be heated N (not shown) such as a metal pan or plate (grilled plate). , are provided on the upper surface of the top plate 15 . The position marks 17LS and 17RS are formed on the upper surface of the top plate 15 by printing.

By looking at the circular position marks 17LS and 17RS, the user of the heating cooker 1 can recognize that there are two induction heating portions 17H on the left and right. It should be noted that the user can also recognize that there are two induction heating units on the left and right by the voice guidance of the voice synthesizer 95, which will be described later.

Immediately below the position marks 17LS and 17RS, IH coils (induction heating coils) 17L and 17R, which will be described later, are installed. Note that the position marks 17LS and 17RS do not need to be circular. can be indicated by

Since the position marks 17LS and 17RS are circular marks indicating the approximate positions where induction heating can be performed by the IH coils 17L and 17R, they are drawn with a slightly larger diameter than the maximum outer diameter of the IH coils 17L and 17R .

In the first embodiment, when the IH coils 17L and 17R are collectively referred to as IH coils, reference numeral 17 is used. Therefore, when the term "IH coil" 17 is used, it may be either the left IH coil 17L or the right IH coil 17R.

In this Embodiment 1, the "induction heating source" 9 refers to a configuration including the IH coil 17 and inverter circuits 81R and 81L, which will be described later.

(Basics of heating sources and cooking menus)
The heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 includes three types of heating means with different heating principles. That is, the first heating means is the induction heating source 9 and the second heating means is the microwave heating source 189 . Additionally, the third heating means is the oven heat source 188 .

The three heating means can be used as follows.
(1) Since the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 can be energized independently of each other, each heating means can be used for cooking.

(2) The induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189 can be used together for one cooking. This is the "cooperation cooking menu" to be described later, and the operation pattern for carrying out this is the "cooperation cooking mode".

(3) Both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used together for one cooking. This is the "compound cooking menu" described later. Hereinafter, "compound heating cooking" will be abbreviated as "combined cooking", so "combined heating cooking menu" will be referred to as "combined cooking menu". The operation pattern for carrying out this complex cooking menu is the "compound cooking mode". The term "operation pattern" used herein refers to the case where the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are operated in series, operated simultaneously, or operated with a time lag. including any of

(4) The induction heating source 9 has a dedicated input operation section. Specifically, they are the right operating section 40R and the left operating section 40L. By operating the right operating section 40R and the left operating section 40L, it is possible to start the induction heating operation, set the heating conditions (thermal power, etc.), and stop the induction heating operation.
(5) Both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 do not have dedicated input controls. The central operation unit 40M is shared.

(6) The induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189 can be energized independently of each other, so that each heating means can be used for cooking alone (such a cooking mode is called "independent heating"). heating cooking mode") (hereinafter referred to as "single cooking mode").

(7) There is a superiority relationship between the single heating cooking (single cooking mode) using any one of the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189, the cooperative cooking mode, and the combined cooking mode. no. The rule is that the cooking of the heating source that started to be used first is given priority. Therefore, for example, even if an attempt is made to select the linked cooking mode using the induction heating source 9, if the induction heating source 9 has already performed a single heating operation for another cooking, the linked cooking mode , the induction heating source 9 cannot be used, so the heating source is limited in the cooperative cooking mode.

(8) Regarding the input operation, there is a superiority relationship between single heating cooking using any one of the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189, and the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode. no. Therefore, for example, if you try to set the cooperative cooking mode and leave the input halfway without shifting to the cooperative cooking mode (for example, for 30 seconds without inputting anything), the Input is canceled. In the middle of the process, for example, if an input for single heating is performed from the right operation unit 40R of the induction heating source 9, the cooking can proceed to induction heating.

(Kitchen furniture 2)
As shown in FIG. 4, the heating cooker 1 is placed and supported on the rim upper surface 2P of the installation opening 2A. As shown in FIG. 2, the kitchen furniture 2 in the first embodiment includes a water tank 2CP that can temporarily store water coming out of a water supply port 2D. 2B is a front opening formed at a predetermined position of the kitchen furniture 2 . The front opening 2B is for exposing front components (a door 114 and a front cover 112, which will be described later) forward when the heating cooker 1 is installed.

If the sizes of the front opening 2B and the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 are standard, they are mostly formed in advance with standard dimensions because standardization is promoted by the industry. be. More on this later.

A typical method of incorporating the cooker 1 into the kitchen furniture 2 is as shown in FIG. This FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing an intermediate stage of the work of incorporating into the kitchen furniture 2 .
As shown in FIG. 3, while the front side (front side) of the heating cooker 1 is tilted downward, the heating cooker 1 is inserted into the installation opening 2A, and then the rear side of the heating cooker 1 is placed. is lowered as indicated by a solid-line arrow BD, the heating cooker 1 is placed on the periphery of the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2. As shown in FIG.

After that, the screws are tightened to move (rotate) a fixing metal fitting (not shown) installed on the rear periphery of the lower unit 100 to be described later, and the fixing metal fitting is strongly pressed against the kitchen furniture 2. to complete the installation. Since such an installation method has already been widely adopted, detailed description of the structure will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 3, the main body 110 of the heating cooker 1 is combined and integrated with the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 stacked vertically. 3, only the upper unit 100 is (directly) fixed to the kitchen furniture 2 with the screws in the assembly work shown in FIG. The entire heating cooker 1 can be removed from the kitchen furniture 2 by removing the fixing metal fittings (not shown). Thereby, after that, inspection and repair can be performed outside the kitchen furniture 2. - 特許庁When the upper unit 100 alone is referred to as the “main body”, the reference numeral 10 is attached to distinguish it from the main body 110 .

In this Embodiment 1, the “main body case” HC is a general term for the upper case 16 forming the outer shell of the upper unit 100 and the lower case 101 forming the outer shell of the lower unit 200 . Note that the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 may be configured as an integrated case (housing).

The installation opening 2A formed in the kitchen furniture 2 has a rectangular planar shape as shown in FIG. However, the four corners are arcuate.
The width dimension W1 of the installation opening 2A is 560 mm to 564 mm. Also, the dimension D1 in the front-rear direction is formed to be 460 mm to 464 mm.

In FIGS. 1 and 2, 3 and 4 are surface materials forming the surface of the kitchen furniture 2. FIG. 5 and 6 are surface materials adjacent to the left and right sides when the heating cooker 1 is incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2 .
The front surfaces of these surface members 3 to 6 are substantially flush with the front surface of the cooking device 1 when the cooking device 1 is incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2.例文帳に追加In other words, when the heating cooker 1 is incorporated, the surface members 3 to 6 and the heating cooker 1 can provide the user with a sense of design as if they are on a unified plane.

In FIG. 3, reference numeral 8 denotes a wall that vertically partitions the interior of the kitchen furniture 2 into a plurality of rooms, and the area below this wall is often used as a storehouse for kitchen utensils, food, and the like. Note that the illustration of the wall 8 is omitted in FIG. Alternatively, the wall 8 may be detachably installed inside the kitchen furniture 2 .

With the configuration described above, when the heating cooker 1 is incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2, the entire front surface of the kitchen furniture 2 presents substantially one plane. When the user sees the kitchen furniture 2, it is designed so that the front (front) as a whole can be recognized as having a clean and unified design.

The kitchen furniture 2 and the heat cooker 1 do not have to be designed by the same manufacturer. They are often on sale.

1 and 2, reference numeral 7 denotes a frame line printed on the front surfaces of the surface materials 3-5, and does not form physical irregularities on the front surfaces of the surface materials 3-5. In addition, it is also possible to attach a thin glossy metal veneer, tape, or the like to indicate the presence of the frame line 7 to give a high-class feeling. Conversely, the frame line 7 may be omitted.

The four types of surface materials 3 to 6 may be the same. Moreover, these surface members 3 to 6 do not have to move back and forth like doors and drawers. For example, it may always exist in a fixed state on the surface of the kitchen furniture 2 and may not move at all.

If the four types of surface materials 3 to 6 are unified in front surface color and surface form (pattern, presence/absence of gloss, unevenness, etc.), the sense of uniform design of the kitchen furniture 2 is enhanced. For example, if the entire front surface of the surface material 4 is unified in a single color or wood grain design, the front surface of the surface material 3 may also be unified in the same single color or wood grain design.

Next, FIGS. 4 and 5 will be described. FIG. 4 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the dimensional relationship between the kitchen furniture 2 and the heating cooker 1 in FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing an enlarged front part of the kitchen furniture 2 shown in FIG.

In addition to the Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) for kitchen furniture 2, etc., standardization (common) of housing parts and materials is being promoted by the "Long-term Use Housing Materials Standardization Promotion Council" (abbreviation: Nagajukyo) in Japan.

According to the "Long-term Use Material Standards for IH Cooking Heaters (Built-in)" enacted by the "Choujukyo", the conditions that the countertop (kitchen furniture 2) on which the IH cooking heater is installed are as follows. stipulated.
(1) The installation opening 2A has a width dimension W1 of 560 mm to 564 mm. Also, the dimension D1 in the front-rear direction shall be 460 mm to 464 mm.
(2) The height dimension C1 of the front descending portion 2F should be 40 mm or less.
(3) The depth (front-rear direction) dimension D3 of the front descending portion 2F should be 45 mm or less.
(4) The ceiling portion depth (front-rear direction) dimension D2 of the front descending portion 2F should be 58 mm to 70 mm.

Furthermore, according to the above-mentioned "Long-term use parts standards", the external dimensions of the built-in type IH cooking heater (induction heating cooker) are also specified as follows.
(1) The height dimension H2 from the bottom edge of the top plate to the bottom edge of the front panel must be 215 mm to 223 mm.

The heating cooker 1 of the present invention is designed so as to satisfy the above various constraints.
In FIG. 4, A1 is the longitudinal dimension of the top plate 15, which will be described later, and is 510 mm. A2 is the maximum longitudinal dimension from the front surface of the front cover 112 that covers the front surface of the main body 110 to the rear end of the main body 110, and is 498 mm. A3 is the longitudinal dimension from the inclined portion 111 formed in the rear portion of the main body 110 to the front surface of the front cover 112, and is 451 mm.

The front cover 112 is formed by integral molding of plastic or metal. Further, the front cover 112 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape, and has several protruding mounting legs 112P formed on the back side where it is mounted (see FIG. 14). The mounting legs 112P are inserted into a plurality of vertical fitting holes (not shown) formed in the front plate 102 of the lower case 101, and slid downward a little to engage the mounting legs 112P with the fitting holes. I am trying to In this state, the front cover 112 is fixed to the lower case 101 by fasteners (not shown). This fixation prevents the front cover 112 from moving upward, so that the front cover 112 is attached to the lower case 101 .

In FIG. 4, 113 is a heating chamber, which will be described later, and is formed inside the lower unit 200 . The front surface of the heating chamber 113 is formed with an opening 113A (see FIG. 11) through which a cooking utensil such as a frying pan or an object to be cooked can be taken in and out. The opening 113A is covered with a door 114 so that it can be opened and closed.

The front surface of the door 114 and the front surface of the front cover 112 are designed to be flush with each other. The door 114 has two hinges 176 (see FIG. 8) and two left and right arms 116 (see FIG. 8) so that the front surface of the door 114 is flush with the front surface of the front cover 112 except for the handle portion 115. (not shown) are rotatably supported with respect to the main body 110 . Therefore, the door 114 functions as a "front-opening" door that opens forward with the hinge 176 at its lower end as a fulcrum (rotating center).

The front cover 112 is attached to the front surface of the cooker 1 by an expert such as a store or an installer after the cooker 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2 . The door 114 is installed at the stage of shipping the cooking device 1 from the factory, so that it cannot be removed later by a person other than a specialist, that is, a user of each household. This is to reliably prevent microwave leakage from inside the heating chamber 113 .

In FIG. 4 , H1 is the maximum height dimension of the heating cooker 1 . That is, the dimension from the upper surface of the top plate 15 to the bottom surface of the lower unit 200 is 227 mm.

In FIG. 4, H2 is the height dimension from the lower end of the top plate 15 to the lower end of the front cover 112, and is 215 mm to 223 mm. H3 is the dimension from the top end to the bottom end of the front cover 112 or the door 114, and is set to 171 mm. H4 is the height dimension of the top plate 15 and is 11 mm. With such a dimensional relationship, when the heating cooker 1 is installed, a front gap 302, which will be described later, is secured below the lower surface of the door 114 and the lower surface of the front cover 112, respectively. ing.

Next, FIG. 6 will be described. Figure 6 is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in Figures 1 and 2; In FIG. 6, 2G denotes stepped portions formed at both left and right corners of the front opening 2B. This stepped portion is a portion where the front cover 112 of the lower unit 200, which will be described later, comes close and faces. W2 is the maximum width dimension of the installation space formed directly below the installation opening 2A. This maximum width dimension W2 is about 560 mm.

Next, the configuration of the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 7 to 20. FIG.
FIG. 7 is a plan view of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 8 is a longitudinal sectional view of the heating cooker 1 taken along line ZZ in FIG. FIG. 9 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker 1 taken along line ZZ of FIG. 7 and showing the flow of the cooling air. FIG. 10 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker 1 taken along line WW in FIG. FIG. 11 is a longitudinal sectional view of the heating cooker 1 taken along line YY in FIG. FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker 1 taken along line VV in FIG. FIG. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the heating cooker 1 taken along line XX of FIG. FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the right side when the heating cooker of FIG. 1 is installed in kitchen furniture. FIG. 15 is a simplified plan view for explaining the input operation section of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 16 is a plan view of the front portion for explaining the arrangement of the input operation section and various display sections of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 17 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation section and integrated display section of the heating cooker. FIG. 18 is an enlarged plan view of the right operation section and the right display section of the heating cooker. FIG. 19 is an enlarged plan view of the left operating section and the left display section of the heating cooker. FIG. 20 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit of the heating cooker.

(Upper unit 100)
In this Embodiment 1, the upper unit 100 alone functions as the heating cooker 1 . Therefore, commercial (AC) power 99 is supplied only to the upper unit 100 . However, a power cord 106 (not shown) for direct connection to the commercial power supply 99 via a plug 106A (not shown) is pulled out of the heating cooker 1 from the lower unit 200 .

The upper unit 100 includes a box-shaped upper case (upper case) 16 that forms the outer shell of the main body 10, and a metal frame-shaped reinforcing plate (support frame) 22 (see FIG. 8), and a top plate 15 made of heat-resistant tempered glass or crystallized glass superimposed on the upper surface of the reinforcing plate 22 so as to cover substantially the entire upper surface of the reinforcing plate 22 except for the rear portion. In other words, the main body 10 of the upper unit 100 includes an upper case 16 and a top plate 15 that serve as outer shells.

The upper case 16 is formed by pressing a thin metal plate such as a galvanized steel plate. Alternatively, a plurality of thin metal plates are joined by spot welding or screws to form a box shape.
In the first embodiment, the upper case 16 is formed by vertically bending the peripheral portion of a sheet of metal sheet, as will be described later, to form a bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, a rear wall 16B, a front vertical wall 16F, (right and left ), the side vertical walls 16L and 16R are integrally formed. The bottom wall 16S also serves as a "partition wall" as will be described later.

The upper case 16 may be formed in another form. For example, one metal flat plate is pressed to form one "body" having three surfaces: a bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, a rear wall 16B and a front vertical wall 16F. On the other hand, two side vertical walls 16L, 16R are separately formed separately. Then, these two side vertical walls 16L and 16R are attached to the ends of the above-mentioned "body" by screws, spot welding, or the like, to finally form a box shape with an open top surface.

The top plate 15 is formed in a flat plate shape with a substantially uniform overall thickness, and the entire lower surface thereof is covered with a painted surface that does not transmit visible light. Therefore, from above the top plate 15, the functional parts below it, such as the IH coil 17, cannot be visually recognized.

The right IH coil 17R has a doughnut-like planar shape. And the maximum heating power of this IH coil 17R is 3200W. The maximum outer dimension (diameter) is 168 mm.

Similarly, the left IH coil 17L also has a donut shape. The maximum thermal power of this IH coil 17L is 3200W. The maximum outer dimension (diameter) is 168 mm. In addition, the diameter may be increased to about 180 mm so as to be able to handle objects to be heated such as large pots and frying pans. FIG. 7 depicts the IH coil 17L when the diameter is increased.

In FIG. 8, 18 is a laterally long opening formed in the rear part of the upper case 16, 19 is an exhaust cover installed above this opening, and has a shutter or a number of through holes for ventilation. is formed. 20 is an exhaust port formed between the exhaust cover 19 and the opening 18 .

8 and 10, reference numeral 22 denotes a metal reinforcing plate fixed to the rear upper end portion of the upper case 16 as described above. The reinforcing plate 22 has a length equivalent to the lateral width of the rear edge of the upper case 16 . 21 is a metal decorative frame fixed to the upper surface of the reinforcing plate 22 . The decorative frame protrudes rearward from the upper case 16 and is formed longer than the width of the upper case 16.例文帳に追加In other words, when viewed from above, the rear and left and right sides of the exhaust cover 19 appear to be surrounded in series (see FIG. 7).

In FIGS. 7, 8 and 10, 25 is a metal decorative frame, which is installed so as to protect the left and right end faces and the front end face of the top plate 15 from external impact as shown in FIG. ing.
Reference numeral 26 denotes an annular cushioning member made of a highly elastic material such as silicone rubber, which is attached to the entire bottom surface of the decorative frames 21 and 25 . Thereby, the upper unit 100 is placed on the kitchen furniture 2 via the cushion material 26 . The top plate 15 may be designed so that one decorative frame 25 surrounds three parts (sides) of the left and right end faces and the front end face or four parts (four sides) including the rear end face.

(Integrated display unit 30)
7 and 15, 30 is an integrated display unit. The integrated display portion 30 is installed in the front portion of the top plate 15 and below the center portion in the left and right direction. 31L is a left display portion and 31R is a right display portion. These left and right display portions 31L and 31R are also installed one each on the front left side and right side lower side of the top plate 15, respectively.

The integrated display section 30 is display means used in a linked cooking mode and a combined cooking mode, which will be described later.
A first specific screen 30SP used in the cooperative cooking mode and a second specific screen 30SC used in the combined cooking mode are alternatively displayed on the integrated display section 30, respectively.

The integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R are mainly composed of a liquid crystal display screen (not shown). It is installed on the installed horizontal operation board 41 . Note that the lower surface of the top plate 15 is not provided with a painted surface that blocks visible rays as described above, corresponding to the position directly above the integrated display section 30 and the left and right display sections 31L and 31R. Therefore, the display contents of the integrated display section 30 and the left and right display sections 31L and 31R can be visually recognized from above the top plate 15 .

The integrated display section 30 displays common information and alarms of the heating cooker 1 . For example, the selection results of the three types of heating sources of the heating cooker 1, caution information and warning information indicating the operating states of these heating sources are displayed. That is, since the integrated display unit 30 may display information related to three heating sources, namely the induction heating source 17, the oven heating source 188 described later, and the microwave heating source 189, the integrated display unit 30 It is called

The integrated display unit 30 also has a function of displaying the names of various types of cooking corresponding to the later-described "linked cooking menu", their control conditions, and the like.

(Right side display portion 31R/Left side display portion 31L)
The left display section 31L displays information regarding the operation of the left IH coil 17L. For example, as will be described later, when timer cooking is set, it can be set in units of one minute, and the set time can be displayed. It also displays the elapsed time from the start of the heating operation and the "remaining time" until the timer set time expires. Furthermore, when preheating cooking is selected, the automatically set temperature (default temperature) and the current temperature are displayed. The "remaining time" is displayed as 9 minutes and 59 seconds from the stage of less than 10 minutes, and the remaining time is displayed in units of 1 second.

Similarly, the right display section 31R displays information regarding the operation of the right IH coil 17R. The right display section 31R basically displays information about various control conditions such as the timer setting time of the right IH coil 17R, the preheating temperature, and the elapsed time, similarly to the left display section 31L.

(Input operation unit 40)
In FIG. 15, 40 is an input operation unit. The input operation unit 40 is arranged long in the horizontal direction along the front edge of the top plate 15 behind the frontmost portion of the decorative frame 25 .
The input operation unit 40 is arranged on the upper surface of an operation board 41 which is horizontally elongated and arranged in a strip shape.

Various electronic components are mounted on the operation board 41 . The operation board 41 is made of a plastic material that is highly electrically insulating. A central operation board 32 supported by a holder 50 is provided on the rear side of the operation board 41 of the upper unit 100 . An integrated control device MC, which will be described later, is mounted on the back side of the central operation board 32 .

Below the operation board 41, a flat auxiliary support plate (illustrated) is installed so as to face the operation board 41 with a gap therebetween. In other words, it has a two-layer (two-layer) structure facing each other with a space between them, so that as many electric parts and circuits as possible can be mounted.

F2 is a second air passage through which cooling air flows from a second cooling fan 61, which will be described later, and is formed by a space between a cover 70, which will be described later, and the front vertical wall 16F in front of the upper case 16. (See FIGS. 8 and 20).

In FIG. 8, 16B is the rear vertical wall of the upper case 16. As shown in FIG. A lower case 101 and an upper case 16, which will be described later, are integrated with screws 51 at a plurality of locations.

As is clear from FIG. 8, the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 and the upper end of the lower case 101 closely face each other within a range of about 20 mm to 30 mm, and the facing portion is tightened by the screw 51. is fixed.

In FIG. 8, 104 is a cavity having a large depth and a large planar area. This cavity 104 is a space from the lower surface of the bottom wall (bottom surface) 16S of the upper case 16 to the upper surface of the bottom plate 101U at the rear of the lower unit 200, which will be described later. BH indicates the depth (vertical) dimension of the cavity 104 .

As is clear from the structure shown in FIG. 8, the first embodiment has a flat upper case 16 (constituting the outer shell of the main body 10) whose top opening is closed by the top plate 15. ing. When the upper case 16 is placed on a lower case 101 to be described later, the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 also serves as the ceiling surface of the lower case 101 .

As described with reference to FIG. 8, the cavity 104 is the space where the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 face each other at the largest distance.
In the cavity 104 , a waveguide 123 forming part of a microwave heating device 120 to be described later is arranged long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113 .
Furthermore, behind the waveguide 123, a housing case C154 for the power supply circuit board 127, on which circuit components for supplying power to the microwave heating control unit 130 are mounted, is arranged long in the left-right direction.

The microwave heating control unit 130 is mainly composed of a microcomputer and is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 inside the case C154. In other words, the power supply circuit board 127 housed inside the case C also serves as a control board on which the microwave heating control section 130 is mounted. The control board and the power supply circuit board 127 may be provided separately, but in the first embodiment, they are integrated in order to minimize the installation space.

In FIG. 8, 101T is a front horizontal wall made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101 . The front horizontal wall 101T is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F (see FIG. 11) of the lower case 101 backward.

Reference numeral 198 denotes a connecting support fitting made of a metal plate, and has a horizontal portion 198H and a vertical portion 198V. The horizontal portion 198H is fixed to the front horizontal wall 101T of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG.

One or both of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are box-shaped formed of thin metal plates, and by fastening the screws 51 and 51F, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are formed into a single rigid box. It is a shaped structure.

In the first embodiment, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are tightly fitted together as follows.
That is, the vertical and horizontal dimensions (inner maximum vertical and horizontal dimensions) of the upper opening of the lower case 101 are the maximum front-rear width dimension D5 (not shown) of the upper case 16, the maximum left-right width dimension W4 (not shown), They are the same size in terms of design. Applying a slight outward force to the left and right vertical walls 101L and 101R and the upper end of the rear wall surface (rear vertical wall) 101B widens the upper opening of the lower case 101 slightly, so that the upper case 16 can be tightly fitted inside. It can fit (snugly).

The term "fitting" as used in the first embodiment does not necessarily refer to a state of close fitting as in the first embodiment. The outer dimensions of the upper case 16 inserted inside may differ by up to 1 mm from the inner dimensions (in the front-rear and left-right directions) of the lower case 101, which is the outer side, and the whole is in close contact. It doesn't have to be in that state. Moreover, even if there is such a slight dimensional difference, it is possible to secure the main body case HC with screws 51 or the like to form a strong main body case HC.

Since the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 form one strong box-shaped structure, a support structure for the door 114, which will be described later, can be firmly realized, which is useful for preventing microwave leakage from the door 114 portion.

In particular, since the top plate 15 of the upper unit 100 is supported by the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2 and receives the full load of the lower unit 200, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 as a whole should not be distorted or deformed. is important. Since the cushion 26 is attached to the entire lower surface of the decorative frames 21 and 25, it is the cushion material 26 that actually contacts the upper surface of the kitchen lower part 2. As shown in FIG.

In FIG. 8, 80 is an inverter circuit board, which is installed in the center of the upper case 16 . The inverter circuit board 80 has a rectangular planar shape elongated in the horizontal direction.

The inverter circuit 81 mounted on the inverter circuit board 80 includes an inverter circuit 81L that supplies high-frequency power to the left IH coil 17L and an inverter circuit that supplies high-frequency power to the right IH coil 17R. and a circuit 81R. These will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 and 24. FIG.

A total of four aluminum heat sinks (radiation sinks) 82 are attached to the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 . As shown in FIGS. 8 and 11, the heat sinks 82 are arranged in two rows so that the two radiating fins 82F face each other and are placed close to each other by several mm to 10 mm.

As can be seen from FIG. 8, the heat sink (radiation sink) 82 has power control switching elements forming part of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R on the inclined surface opposite to the side facing each other. 83 is installed. Therefore, the heat generated during the operation of the switching element 83 can be cooled by the cooling air RF1 passing around the radiation fins 82F.

The power control switching element 83 is, for example, an IGBT (insulated gate bipolar transistor). The power control switching elements 83 on the one inverter circuit 81L side are located behind the heat sinks 82 arranged in front and rear two rows, and the power control switching elements 83 on the other inverter circuit 81R side are located in front of the heat sinks 82 arranged in front and rear two rows. attached to the side. In addition, you may make it attach to this opposite side.

In FIG. 8, 70 is a cover made of a thin metal plate or a plastic material that covers the entire upper portion of the inverter circuit board 80 . Both left and right ends of the cover 70 are open. As shown in FIG. 20, the left end face of the cover 70 serves as an inlet FI for the cooling air RF1 described later, and the right end face of the cover 70 serves as an outlet FO for the cooling air RF1. Configure.

The cover 70 is positioned to secure a certain gap (several millimeters in a straight line) between the lower surfaces of the IH coils 17L and 17R. The size is such that a certain amount of space is secured on both the uppermost surfaces of the substrates.

Since the cover 70 is directly below and close to the IH coil 17L, if the cover 70 is expected to have a magnetic shielding effect, the cover should be made of a metal such as aluminum, and the upper case 16 is even better. For example, a screw (not shown) for attaching the cover 70 may directly reach the screw hole of the cover 70 .

Since the upper case 16 is connected to a lower case 101, which will be described later, with metal screws or the like, it is also electrically connected to a ground terminal (not shown) provided on the lower case 101, and noise is absorbed by the ground. By doing so, the magnetic shielding effect of the cover 70 can be expected to provide a noise shielding effect for various electrical components mounted on the inverter circuit board 80 .

Also, if the cover 70 is injection molded from a plastic material, the cross-sectional shape of the cover 70 can be relatively freely determined. Therefore, there is an advantage that the flow (direction) of the cooling air RF1 flowing through the first air passage F1 can be adjusted. For example, a rib-shaped wind direction plate or the like may be integrally formed on the lower surface of the cover 70 so that a large amount of cooling air RF1 flows particularly to a specific portion of the heat sink 82 .

The two IH coils 17L, 17 are supported from below by a component called a coil base 17C (not shown) made of heat-resistant plastic. Alternatively, one structure may be commonly used for the two IH coils 17L and 17R.

The coil base 17C is directly placed on the upper surface of the cover 70 and fixed to the cover 70 with fasteners such as screws. Alternatively, an elastic body such as a compression spring is interposed between the cover 70 and the upper surface of the cover 70 so that the cover 70 is always pushed up toward the top plate 15 and supported. A detailed description of these support structures is omitted. In any case, the IH coils 17L and 17R do not change their facing distance (distance) from the rear surface (lower surface) of the top plate 15 over a long period of time.

Due to the above configuration, during induction heating cooking, the distance between the cooking container, which is the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15, and the IH coils 17L and 17R does not change. As a result, changes in the high frequency voltage and high frequency current generated in the inverter circuits 81L and 81R that supply high frequency current to the IH coils 17L and 17R can be suppressed, and the induction heating performance can be stabilized.

The IH coils 17L, 17R are on one horizontal line (second horizontal line HL2). In other words, it exists on one plane (second horizontal plane HL2) defined by the second horizontal line (see FIG. 10).

The cover 70 is in a position where it is not in contact with both the coil bases arranged below the IH coils 17L and 17R and the heat sink 82 .

The cover 70 is fixed so as to be in close contact with the upper surface of a flat support plate 71 larger than the planar shape of the cover 70 . Between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 19, a first air passage F1 that is long in the horizontal direction is defined. The support plate 71 is made of an insulating material such as heat-resistant plastic.

8 and 11, 102 is a metal exhaust duct through which the exhaust flow from the lower unit 200 is guided. An end portion 102E of the exhaust duct 102 extends through a gap GP1 formed between a later-described partition plate 52 and a rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 (see FIG. 9). That is, the exhaust duct 102 vertically penetrates the gap GP1 like a chimney.

In FIG. 10, 16A is a horizontal flange formed by bending the upper end portions of the side vertical walls 16L and 16R of the upper case 16 outward at a right angle.
A horizontal flange 101A is formed by bending the upper ends of the side vertical walls 101L and 101R of the lower case 101, which will be described later, to the outside at a right angle.

In the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, the flange 16A described above overlaps the flange 101A. In this overlapping state, the side wall surface of the upper case 16 and the side wall surface of the lower case 101 are fixed by the screws 51 (see FIG. 8). Therefore, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 form a strong integral structure by fixing with the screw 51 and closely fixing the flange 16A and the flange 101A. In other words, the total weight of the upper case 16 is supported by the upper surface of the flange 101A of the lower case 101, so even if the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are made of a thin metal plate, they are still integrated. can be made into a box-shaped structure with mechanical strength.

Means for fixing the flange 16A and the flange 101A in an overlapping state may be other fastening means such as bolts and nuts, instead of the screws 51 described above. The flange 16A and the flange 101A do not contact the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2. As shown in FIG. Since these flanges 16A and 101A are made of a hard material (metal), there is a concern that they may damage the kitchen furniture 2. Further, if the flange 16A and the flange 101A come into contact with the kitchen furniture 2, the cushioning material 26 cannot be installed while being compressed. If the cushion material 26 is not in a tight contact state, there is a concern that the effect of preventing water or the like from entering may be impaired.

Next, the gap between the main body case HC, which is the outer shell (housing) of the heating cooker 1, and the kitchen furniture 2 will be described.
4 and 8 to 11, reference numeral 311 denotes a lower space formed between the kitchen furniture 2 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 constituting the outer shell of the main body case HC, and having a size of about 10 mm. be.

301R is a right side gap formed between the right side vertical wall 101R of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.
301L is a left gap formed between the left side vertical wall 101L of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.

Reference numeral 302 denotes a front space of about 10 mm formed between the lower surface of the door 114 or the lower surface of the hinge portion 176 and the kitchen furniture 2 when the door 114 is closed. Since the position of the lower surface of the front cover 112 also coincides with the position of the lower surface of the door 114 on the horizontal plane, a gap of the same size as the front gap 302 is secured below the front cover 112 as well. configuration.

The size of the front space 302 changes depending on whether the door 114 is opened or closed, but as shown in FIG. It should be secured. In the following description, "outside air" refers to the air existing outside the heating cooker 1, and does not refer to outdoor air.

The lower space 311, the right space 301R, the left space 301L and the front space 302 communicate with each other. Therefore, when outside air is sucked from the front gap 302 by starting the operation of the heating cooker 1, the sucked outside air is appropriately distributed to the lower gap 311, the right gap 301R, and the left gap 301L. 14 also communicates with each of the gaps 311, the right side gap 301R, the left side gap 301L, and the front gap 302. As shown in FIG.

Next, FIG. 14 will be described.
W3 is the maximum width dimension of the front portion of the heating cooker 1 . This width dimension W3 is larger than the maximum width dimension W2 (560 mm) of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2, and is, for example, 595 mm. A space 303 is formed between the inner surface of the right side wall member (hereinafter referred to as the “right side”) located on the right side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2 and the right end surface of the front cover 112 . This gap is ensured so as not to collide with the kitchen furniture 2 when the heating cooker 1 is installed. The size may be about 1 to 2 mm.

Also in the left front cover 112, a gap similar to the gap 303 is formed between the inner surface of the left wall surface material (hereinafter referred to as "left side") present on the left side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2. . Note that the sizes of the left and right gaps 303 may differ slightly depending on the installation of the cooking device 1 . Also, depending on the type of kitchen furniture 2, there may be cases where elastic sealing materials (cushion materials) are arranged on the stepped portions 2G (see FIG. 6) and the gaps 303 are almost closed. However, even in such a state, the internal cooling function of the heating cooker 1 does not suffer at all.

As shown in FIG. 14, the front cover 112 extends outside beyond the right side space 301R and the left side space 301L. Therefore, when the heating cooker 1 is installed, the front sides of the right side space 301R and the left side space 301L are covered by the two left and right front covers 112 . Therefore, when the user views the kitchen furniture 2 from the front side, the user does not feel that there is a large gap between the heating cooker 1 and the kitchen furniture 2 . In the installed state of the heating cooker 1, the right side space 301R and the left side space 301L are secured, so that outside air is introduced for the upper air passage AH of the upper unit 100 and the lower air passage UH of the lower unit 200, which will be described later. can be done with certainty.

In FIG. 14, WS is the width of the door 114 facing the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. In FIG. This width dimension is necessary for the door 114 and the lower case 101 to be brought into close contact with each other to prevent leakage of microwaves, and also for forming choke chambers 194 (to be described later) at the front, rear, left, and right positions of the opening 113A ( See Figure 11).

(First cooling fan 60, second cooling fan 61)
As shown in FIG. 20, a first cooling fan 60 (upper cooling fan) and a second cooling fan 61 are installed near the left side vertical wall 16L of the upper case 16, respectively. A rotating shaft 60T (not shown) at the center of the rotor blades (not shown) of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 extends in the vertical direction, and the rotor blades are Rotate on one horizontal plane (first horizontal plane HP1).

A centrifugal fan (blower) is employed for the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 . This is because static pressure is high and air resistance is high in a space with high mounting density. In general, there is a type of centrifugal fan that has a single suction port and blows out (discharges) in all radial directions. However, Embodiment 1 is of a type having only one blowing direction.

20, 60A is an outlet formed integrally with the fan case 60C of the first cooling fan 60, and 61A is an outlet formed integrally with the fan case 61C of the second cooling fan 61. As shown in FIG. The outlet 60A is directed toward the inverter circuit board 80. As shown in FIG. Also, the outlet 61A is directed toward the holder 50 below the operation board 41. As shown in FIG. In other words, the two outlets 60A and 61A both exist on a common horizontal plane (HP1) and are oriented rightward. This horizontal plane HP1 is a first horizontal plane which will be described later.

The holder 50 is made of an insulating material, such as a plastic material. The holder 50 has a size corresponding to the entire area of the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30, the right display unit 31R, and the left display unit 31L, and is elongated in the left-right direction. The central operation board 32 is attached to the lower surface of the holder 50 so as to overlap with a small gap.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same "rated specifications", and are assumed to be operated at the same rotational speed during normal induction heating operation. . However, in the first embodiment, the IH control unit 90 varies the number of rotations to change the amount of air blown. For example, when increasing the driving power applied to the IH coils 17L and 17R to increase the heating capacity, or when it is detected that the temperature of the integrated display unit 30 or the input operation unit 40 is higher than normal, In some cases, the number of revolutions is increased to increase the air flow rate in order to increase the cooling effect. In addition, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 may be operated with different rotational speeds in order to deal with "beat noise", which will be described later.

Rated specifications include, for example, rated voltage, working voltage range, rated current, rated rotation speed, maximum air volume, maximum static pressure, sound pressure level, and the like. By changing the applied voltage or voltage application time (on-duty time) within the working voltage range, the number of revolutions can be changed.
In contrast, in Embodiment 1, a PWM control (Pulse Width Modulation) method is adopted, and the pulse width duty cycle (pulse width The ratio of H and L) is changed to control the motor of the first cooling fan 60 . This PWM control is also employed in the second cooling fan 61 .

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have fan cases 60C and 61C surrounding rotating blades (not shown). not shown).

Directly below the suction ports (not shown) of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are ventilation holes 64 (Fig. 10 and FIG. 12). This vent hole 64 is formed in the bottom wall surface of the lower case 16 . This vent hole 64 communicates with a vent hole 164 formed in the left side wall surface of the lower case 101, which will be described later. Therefore, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 can directly introduce external air from the outside of the lower case 101 through the ventilation holes 164 thereof.

In FIG. 10, 165 is a recess (air intake duct), which is provided to directly communicate the vent hole 64 with the vent hole 164 of the lower case 101 . The recess 165 is formed by recessing from the left side by a certain depth (dimension) DP1. Note that this dimension DP1 is 99 mm.

As shown in FIG. 10, the vertical center point of the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60, the vertical center point of the heat sink 82, and the electrical components mounted on the upper surface of the power circuit board 55, which will be described later. The vertical center point of 85 is located on one horizontal line HL1. In other words, the positional relationship is such that the cooling air RF1 blown out from the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 reaches the heat sink 82 and the electrical component 85 when traveling straight to the right. A horizontal plane defined by this horizontal line HL1 is hereinafter referred to as a "first horizontal plane" HP1.

In FIG. 10, AC power from a commercial AC power supply 99 is supplied to the power circuit board 55 through a filter circuit board 54 which will be described later. Then, the power circuit board 55 converts alternating current into direct current. Therefore, electric parts 85 such as a diode and a transformer 57 (not shown) for converting AC to DC are mounted.

When the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80 rises abnormally, the IH control section 90 that controls induction heating reduces the amount of heating of the IH coils 17L and 17R. In addition to this operation, the amount of air blown by the first cooling fan 60 per unit time may be temporarily increased. The temperature of the heat sink 82 is detected by contact-type temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 (see FIG. 20), such as thermistors, which are fixed on the surface of the heat sink 82 in close contact.

If the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 have exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same rated specifications, the procurement cost at the time of manufacturing can be reduced.
If cooling fans with the same specifications are arranged in parallel and operated, there is a high possibility that a roar will occur. For this reason, in the first embodiment, as a countermeasure against the beat noise, control is performed so that the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are set to different values within the range where the beat noise is likely to occur. there is That is, it is not always operating at different rotation speeds.

In FIG. 20, 52 is a metal partition plate that is installed in the rear part of the upper case 16 and is fixed to the upper case 16 . The partition plate 52 is a wall extending vertically so as to partition the internal space of the upper case 16 into the front and rear. It should be noted that the term "dividing" as used herein does not mean strict shielding such as complete blocking of air circulation. It is sufficient that the rearward flow of the cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 over the upper end face of the partition plate 52 can be suppressed to some extent.

An upper air passage AH, which will be described later, refers to an air passage within the upper unit 100 extending from the ventilation hole 64 to the partition plate 52 . The exhaust duct 102 from the lower unit 200 is present in the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52 . For this reason, a lower air passage UH, which will be described later, does not pass through the upper passage AH, and has a structure that substantially communicates with the outside of the heating cooker 1 .

In FIG. 20, 52A is an exhaust window formed in the left half of the partition plate 52, 53 is an exhaust port plate installed so as to cover the front side of the exhaust window 52A, and has a large number of through holes 53A. , the cooling air directed to the exhaust window 52A of the partition plate 52 passes through. The cooling air that has passed through the exhaust window 52A is discharged to the external space of the heating cooker 1 through the exhaust cover 19. As shown in FIG.

In FIG. 20, LF is the exhaust port dimension indicating the range (width dimension) of the exhaust exhausted from the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L and 17R. The size of the exhaust port is determined by the formation range of the through hole 53A and the width dimension of the exhaust window 52. As shown in FIG. When the width of the exhaust window 52 is narrower than the formation range of the through hole 53A (the form shown in FIG. 20), the width of the exhaust window 52 determines the exhaust range LF.

In FIG. 20, 54 is a filter circuit board arranged at the rear right corner of the upper case 16 . In this filter circuit board, the noise in the power supply from the commercial power supply 99 is removed and supplied to the output terminal side, and conversely, the noise is prevented from flowing out (reverse) to the commercial power supply side on the input terminal side. It contains electrical components (not shown) such as resistors, inductors (choke coils), line-to-line capacitors, relays, and current fuses. The end of a power cable (not shown) connected to the commercial power source 99 via a plug is connected to the filter circuit board 54 via the inside of the lower unit 200, which will be described later.

The power supply circuit board 55 is located on the opposite side (right side) of the first cooling fan 60 with the inverter circuit board 80 interposed therebetween. In other words, since the power supply circuit board 55 is located on the right side of the outlet FO of the first air passage F1 formed between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70, cooling immediately after coming out of the first air passage F1 Cooled by the wind.

In FIG. 20, CL3 is a center line passing through the center point of the left IH coil 17L in the longitudinal direction, and CL4 is a center line passing through the center point of the right IH coil 17R in the longitudinal direction.
CL5 is a center line that crosses the center points of the two IH coils 17L and 17R in the horizontal direction. CL2 is a center line passing through the rotation center of each rotor blade (not shown) in the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the front-rear direction. As is clear from FIG. 20, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are arranged on a straight line in the front-rear direction.

In FIG. 20, RF1 indicates the cooling air blown out from the first cooling fan 60. In FIG. RF2 indicates the cooling air blown from the second cooling fan 61 .

RF3 indicates the cooling air after exiting from the outlet FO of the first air passage F1. Further, RF4 indicates the cooling air after passing through the second air passage F2. Part of the cooling air RF3 after exiting from the outlet FO and the cooling air RF4 after passing through the second air passage F2 merge in the middle. In other words, the cooling air RF3 and the cooling air RF4 join before reaching the through hole 53A of the exhaust port plate 53 .

20, GP1 is the gap formed between the partition plate 52 and the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16. In FIG. The width of the gap GP1 in the front-rear direction is about 30 mm to 50 mm.

(Detailed Configuration of Input Operation Unit 40)
Next, referring back to FIGS. 15 and 16, the main part of the input operation section 40 will be described.
15 and 16, reference numeral 40 denotes an input operation portion formed on the upper surface of the front side of the top plate 15. As described below, the input operation portion utilizes changes in capacitance when a user touches it lightly with a finger or the like. Various input keys that can be input by pressing are arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction.

The input operation section 40 includes a right operation section 40R, a central operation section 40M and a left operation section 40L. Reference numeral 98 denotes an operation button or operation key (touch input type) of a main power switch 97 capable of supplying and shutting off a commercial power supply 99, which will be described later. This operation button or operation key 98 is arranged at a position adjacent to the right end of the right operation section 40R. The following description is based on the premise that the operation button or operation key 98 is within the range of the input operation section 40 (see FIG. 15).

The right operation unit 40R is for inputting only the induction heating source 9, so it is sometimes called an "individual operation unit". Similarly, the left operation section 40L may also be called an "individual operation section".
On the other hand, the central operation unit 40M is sometimes called a "common operation unit" because it is commonly used for both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. FIG. This "common operating section" also includes a "cooperative operating section" 40MC for executing a cooperative cooking menu, which will be described later. These will be described in detail in FIG.

The main power switch 97 is attached to the filter board 54 of the upper unit 100 as shown in FIGS. The commercial power source 99 is supplied to the power circuit board 55, the inverter circuit 81, and the power circuit section (not shown in FIG. 21) of the lower unit 200. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 18, a total of five touch input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R are arranged on the right operating section 40R. These input keys 43R1-43R4, 44R are assigned one or more input functions as described below.

43R1 is an input key for selecting heating in the right heating unit 17HR. Also, the operation of the right IH coil 17R, which has started the heating operation, can be stopped. Therefore, when the button is pressed once for the first time, the selection function of the right heating unit 17HR is exhibited, and when the button is pressed once after that, there is a function of instantly issuing a command to stop the heating operation. In this way, every time the input key 43R1 is touched, the content of the command to the IH control unit 90, which will be described later, is automatically switched.

The input key 43R1 may be called third selection means. That is, the input key 43L1 and the input key 43R1 are used to start the heating operation in the "single (heating) cooking" mode using either the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9. It is a means of commanding.

43R2 and 43R3 are a pair of input keys for designating thermal power (power consumption) during induction heating.
When the left input key 43R2 of the two input keys 43R2 is touched, the heating power is lowered by one step each time the input key 43R2 is touched. For example, in the case of 3200 W (rated maximum thermal power: thermal power level 9), when this input key 43R2 is touched once, it is lowered to 2500 W (thermal power level: 8).

When the right input key 42R3 is touched, the heating power is increased by one step each time the operation is performed. For example, if the thermal power is 2500 W (thermal power level 8), touching the input key 42R3 once allows selection of 3200 W (rated maximum thermal power: thermal power level 9).

43R4 is an input key for selecting a timer cooking control menu. Timer cooking is a control method in which a user can set a cooking time, and the induction heating operation can be performed only during the set time. For example, when 10 minutes is specified and timer cooking is started, a predetermined display is performed on the right display section 31R when 10 minutes have elapsed, and the voice synthesizer 95, which will be described later, automatically notifies the completion of cooking by voice. is performed on When the set time (for example, 10 minutes) elapses, the induction heating is automatically stopped, but the induction heating time can be extended by performing an extension operation before the elapse of the set time.

In the first embodiment, both the display units such as the integrated display unit 30 and the right display unit 31R, and the voice synthesizing device 95 may be collectively referred to as notification means.

44R is a touch-type input key for selecting a "control menu" for induction cooking, and one of a plurality of control menus can be selected each time a touch operation is performed. In this induction heating cooking, the "control menu" means the control mode of the induction heating source 9, such as boiling water, boiling, frying (automatic cooking), etc., as shown in FIG. is the type of That is, the driving time of the IH coil 17R, the heating power, the driving pattern for changing the heating power, and the like are different for boiling water, stewing, frying, and the like.

The "control menu" for the right heating unit 17HR is different from the final name of the food to be cooked or the name of the ingredients obtained by induction heating. For example, "hamburger" and "tempura" are the names of food items to be cooked, not the "control menu" referred to here. In other words, it can be said that the "control menu" comprehensively expresses the types of heating, cooking methods, conditions, etc. until cooking is completed.
The control menu for the induction heating source 9 is sometimes called an "IH control menu" to distinguish it from the control menus for other heating sources.

Next, the left operating section 40L will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 19. FIG. The left operation unit 40L has a total of five touch input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L.

43L1 is an input key for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL. Further, after the heating operation of the left IH coil 17L is started, the operation can be stopped at any time. That is, when the button is pressed once for the first time, the function of selecting the left heating portion 17HL is exhibited, and when the button is pressed once after induction heating is started, the heating operation can be instantaneously stopped.
The input key 43L1 may be called third selection means.

43L2 and 43L3 are a pair of input keys for designating thermal power (power consumption) in the left heating section 17HL, like the input keys 43R2 to 43R3 of the right operating section 40R. As with the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R, each time the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 are touched, a thermal power level raised by one level is selected from the specified thermal power value data table, or specified by a thermal power level lowered by one level. You can choose the firepower of

43L4 is an input key for selecting timer cooking. This input key 43L4 can specify the induction heating cooking time similarly to the input key 43R4 of the right operation unit 40R. When the timer cooking ends, the left display section 31L displays the end of the timer cooking, and the voice synthesizer 95 also informs the end of the timer cooking in the same manner as the input key 43R4.

44L is a touch input key that can select a "control menu" for induction heating cooking. As with the input key 44R of the right operation section 40R, one control menu can be selected from a plurality of "control menus". The control menu selectable with the left input key 44L is exactly the same as the control menu selectable with the right input key 44R.

A total of five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4, 44L arranged on the left operating section 40L are arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction, as is clear from FIGS.

In FIGS. 16 and 17, a total of 10 touch-type input keys are arranged on the central operation unit 40M. These input keys are assigned one or more input functions.
The ten touch input keys are described below.

The leftmost input key 43KP is used to set various operations and displays of the heating cooker 1 as a user desires.

When the input key 43KP is pressed, the later-described integrated control device MC switches to the "function mode" and displays the following "function setting menu" on the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30. FIG.
(1) Child lock setting (setting to disable operation of various input keys)
(2) Ventilation fan interlocking mode setting (3) Cleaning guide setting (automatic notification function setting for cleaning timing of heating chamber 113 and exhaust cover 19)
(4) Peak cut setting (select one of four levels of maximum power consumption: 5700W, 5000W, 4800W and 4000W)
(5) Audio guide audio setting (6) Audio guide volume setting (7) Setting to prevent forgetting to take out food to be cooked, cooking utensils, etc. from heating chamber 113 (speech synthesizer 95 and integrated display unit 30 Necessity of warning)
(8) HEMS registration settings (settings related to the power usage limit function of a home power control device)
(9) Time unit setting for timer cooking (1 minute unit setting changed to 5 minute or 30 minute unit)

After pressing the input key 43KP to switch the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 to the "function mode", by operating touch type input keys 43M1 to 43M3, which will be described later, arranged on the central operation unit 40M, the heating cooker The nine individual functions defined in 1 "Function setting menu" can be individually changed.

In the integrated display unit 30, when the control mode and control conditions (temperature, heat power, time, etc.) of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are being selected, the input key 43KP is pressed so as not to switch the function mode. input function is disabled. Therefore, the light emitting portion 27M1 corresponding to the input key 43KP does not emit light during the setting operation of the control mode and control conditions (see FIGS. 40, 43 and 44).

For example, the setting of the peak cut value of the heating cooker 1 will be described. Even if the default value at the time of shipment from the manufacturer is 5400W, it can be set to any of 5000W, 4800W or 4000W when installed in the user's home. In this way, the functions of the heating cooker 1 can be changed according to the user's wishes, usage environment (electric power situation of the home where the appliance is installed), and the like. Note that when such a peak cut value is set, the setting result is stored in the integrated control device MC or the power control unit 72, so that when the user selects the cooperative cooking mode as described later, the It is used to determine whether or not to permit use of the cooperative cooking mode.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the range of the central operation unit 40M, there is a common operation unit or RG operation unit 40M2 which is commonly used for both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. Includes range. The range of the central operation unit 40M is the range surrounded by the one-dot chain line in FIG.
On the other hand, within the range of the central operation unit 40M, the area excluding the input key 43KP is a cooperative operation unit 40MC for executing a cooperative cooking menu, which will be described later.

In the following description, the "individual operation unit" 40M2 also serves as an input operation unit for the microwave heating source 189 (second heating means), so it may be referred to as a "second operation unit" 40M2. .

43MC is an input key for selecting a cooperative cooking mode arranged at the left end of the cooperative operation section 40MC. Consists of touch keys.
The input key 43MC is illuminated from below by a light-emitting diode (LED) or the like, so that the user can easily confirm the characters "cooking" and the figure indicating it. However, the relevant input key 43MC appears to shine only during the period of the cooperative cooking mode. In other words, after all the cooking steps in the linked cooking mode are completed, the LED stops emitting light to indicate that the linked cooking mode is not valid.
The input key 43MC may be called a "first input key".

43M1 is an input key for selecting cooking in heating chamber 113 by oven heating source 188 and microwave heating source 189; A compound cooking menu using both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 can also be selected. That is, this input key 43M1 is an input means (input key) for selecting the "compound cooking mode". When the input key 43M1 is operated, as will be described later, by executing a "compound cooking menu", either microwave heating or oven heating alone can be performed.

When the input key 43M1 is operated, the integrated display section 30 switches to a special display screen configuration. That is, the second specific screen 30SC used for the composite cooking mode is displayed. This point will be explained later with reference to FIGS.

Also, when the input key 43MC is operated, the integrated display section 30 displays a special display screen so that the cooperative cooking menu can be executed. That is, the configuration is switched to display the first specific screen 30SP. This point will be described later with reference to FIGS. 48 and 61 to 84. FIG.

The display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30 is a single liquid crystal display screen in terms of hardware, but as shown in FIG. It is divided into 30R and displayed.

Of the three display areas, the left display area 30L is hereinafter referred to as the "first area". Further, the display area 30M located in the center is hereinafter referred to as "second area". The display area 30R located on the right side is hereinafter referred to as "third area". It should be noted that a method of dividing and displaying a single display screen into a plurality of sections is proposed in Japanese Patent No. 5425171 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-172940, for example. omitted.

43M1 is a pair of left and right input keys for switching the screen displayed in the first area 30L of the display screen 30D after operating the input keys 43M143MC. The information to be displayed in the first area 30L is selected by the display section driving circuit 63 according to the display program of the integrated control device MC.

Next, a state in which the input key 43M1 is operated to display individual names indicating "compound cooking menu" or "single cooking menu" on the integrated display section 30 will be described.
In the following description, the "composite cooking menu", the "single cooking menu" for independently driving the heating means, and the "cooperation cooking menu", which will be described later, are collectively referred to as the "control menu".

When the left input key 43M1 of the two input keys 43M1 arranged side by side is operated, the display screen of the first area 30L moves forward, and the information displayed on the rear side is displayed in the front-rear center. The display screen switches with the image displayed. That is, when the left input key 43M1 is operated once, one of the desired display information (for example, a name that identifies one) can be selected. Note that the display screen itself does not actually move forward, but only appears to move forward visually.

Conversely, when the right input key 43M1 is operated once, the display screen of the first area 30L moves backward, and instead, different information is displayed in the center of the front and back of the first display area. to switch the display screen. That is, even if the right input key 43M1 is operated, one of the "display information group" defined by the display program of the integrated control device MC is selected, but the selection direction (selection order) of the displayed information ) is reversed. The "display information group" referred to here is the "control menu group" in the case of the first area 30L.

Thus, by operating either the right input key 43M1 or the left input key 43M1, the user can display the desired information from the display information group in the central portion of the first area 30L. .

43M2 is a pair of input keys for switching the screen displayed in the second area 30M of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of the input keys 43M2, the display information of the second area 30M can be sequentially switched one by one in the same manner as the input key 43M1.

43M3 is a pair of input keys for switching screens displayed in the third area 30R of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of the input keys 43M3, the information displayed in the third area 30R can be sequentially switched one by one in the same manner as the input key 43M1.

43MS is a touch input key that can command the start of microwave cooking and oven cooking using the heating chamber 113 . It also serves as an input key for commanding transition to the linked cooking mode.
45MT is a touch input key that can stop the operation of microwave heating and oven heating. It also serves as an input key for issuing a command to cancel the transition to the linked cooking mode. As is clear from FIG. 17, the ten input keys arranged on the central operation unit 40M are arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction.

When the operation key 98 of the main power switch is pressed to start cooking, for example, the five touch input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R on the right operation unit 40R do not always need input functions.

Similarly, in the left operation unit 40L, the five touch input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L do not always need input functions. The same applies to the central operation unit 40M. In order to avoid unnecessary input such as when the user touches without recognition, the integrated control device MC immediately after starting the heating cooker 1, according to the process of inputting cooking conditions, the progress of cooking, etc. Except for the input keys that require input, the input functions of other input keys are temporarily disabled so as not to accept input.

Therefore, in order to show that the input function of each input key as described above is effective, as shown in FIGS. , 27M.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 18, in the right operation section 40R, individual light emitting sections 27R1 to 27R4 are arranged immediately behind the five touch input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R. Since the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 are a pair, the individual light emitting section 27R2 shares one.

Each of the individual light emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 has one or a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) arranged below the right operation unit 40R. is controlled. Alternatively, it is controlled to change the emission color.

For example, before the input key 43R1 (see FIG. 18) of the right operation unit 40R (individual operation unit for the right heating unit 17HR) is operated, the individual light emitting unit 27R1 immediately behind and adjacent to the input key 43R1 is activated. emits blue light. As a result, it can be seen that it is in a state in which it is possible to receive an operation input.

When the user operates the input key 43R1 and the integrated control device MC accepts the input, the individual light emitting units 27R1 emit light in a unified color (red) to notify the user that the operation is accepted. indicate. The control for this display is performed by the display section driving circuit 63 based on the command from the integrated control device MC. It should be noted that instead of emitting light in one color, the light emission color may be changed from blue to red, for example, to indicate to the user that an operation is being accepted. This also applies to individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 and 27L1 to 27L4, which will be described later.

In addition, before the input key 43R1 is operated, the individual light emitting section 27R1 adjacent to the input key 43R1 immediately behind is not illuminated, and when the operation is accepted, the light emission is started and continues to be emitted. good. In addition, it is also possible to adopt a method in which only the fact that an operation input is possible is indicated by light emission in advance (at the stage before the operation), and the reception of the operation input is not indicated by light. Furthermore, it is also possible to employ a form in which the light blinks when an operation input is possible and is waiting for an input, and changes to continuous light emission when an operation input is received.

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 16 and 19, also in the left operation unit 40L, individual light emitting units 27L1 to 27L4 are arranged immediately behind the five touch input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L. Since the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are a pair, the individual light emitting section 27L4 shares one.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, also in the central operation unit 40M, the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 are arranged immediately behind the ten touch input keys 43KP, 43MC, 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS and 43MT. are doing.

The input key 43MT can cancel the input of the control menu and the cooperative cooking menu. For example, when the cooking process of the linked cooking menu is started, if this input key 43MT is pressed, the setting of the linked cooking menu is canceled in the middle, and as described later, the left heating unit used in the linked cooking menu The occupied state of 17HL is immediately released.
Therefore, after this release, the input of the single cooking mode using the left heating section 17HL for other cooking can be started.
The input key 43MT may be called a "second input key".

When the input key 43M1 or the input key 43MC is operated to display the cooperative cooking menu or the composite cooking menu on the integrated display unit 30, if the input key 43MT is operated before the cooking process starts, all the previous input settings are changed. be released. Therefore, if the cooperative cooking menu is to be displayed, it is necessary to operate the input key 43MC again.

Each of the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 has one or a plurality of light emitting diodes arranged below the central operation unit 40M. light emission and extinguishing are controlled. Furthermore, it is also possible to employ a form in which the light blinks when an operation input is possible and is waiting for an input, and changes to continuous light emission when an operation input is accepted. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

A pair of input keys 43M1 share one individual light emitting section 27M3. Since each of the two input keys 43M2 and 43M3 also has a pair, each of the individual light emitting portions 27M4 and 27M5 is shared. In the following description, when collectively referring to the individual light-emitting units in the central operation unit 40M, the reference numeral 27M is used.

As shown in FIG. 18, an individual light-emitting portion 27R5 is also arranged directly behind the operation key (or operation button) 98 of the main power switch 97 located adjacent to the right end of the right operation portion 40R.

In order to avoid user's unnecessary confusion and misunderstanding, it is desirable to unify the lighting modes (continuous lighting, blinking, lighting colors, etc.) of the lighting display sections 27R, 27L, and 27M as described above for the three operation input sections. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the light emitting display portions 27R, 27L, and 27M of the right operating portion 40R, the left operating portion 40L, and the central operating portion 40M have the same light emitting form.

In order to indicate that the input function of each input key is valid, there is also a method of lighting the operation part of the input key itself. However, it is necessary to manufacture them with a light-transmissive material, and there is also the problem of ensuring the sensitivity of the input key operation part, so there are many problems in terms of structure and cost. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the light-emitting display units 27R, 27L, and 27M are provided at adjacent positions avoiding the operation unit of the input keys as described above. Here, "adjacent" means a positional relationship in which the two are close to each other from the user's point of view, such as the relationship between the input key 43R1 and the light-emitting display section 27R, and the one-to-one relationship can be instantly understood. . Therefore, for example, the case where the input key 43R1 and the light-emitting display section 27R are partitioned by a structure such as a wall protruding upward with respect to the surface of the input key 43R1 is excluded. However, since the input key 43MC is particularly important for indicating the cooperative cooking mode, it adopts a structure that is illuminated from below.

In FIG. 16, heating power display sections 67L and 67R are provided behind the right operating section 40R and the left operating section 40L so as to indicate the heating power level during induction heating cooking.
These thermal power display portions 67L and 67R indicate the thermal power levels in the right heating portion 17HR and the left heating portion 17HL by emitting light (red). Nine stages are indicated by light, from the rated minimum thermal power (thermal power level 1: 150 W) to the rated maximum thermal power (thermal power level 9: 3200 W).

The thermal power display units 67L and 67R are composed of a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) installed in the space below the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L. The luminescent color may be changed according to the magnitude of the heating power. In this Embodiment 1, for example, thermal power levels 1 and 2 are configured as follows.
(1) (Minimum) Thermal power level 1: 1 red light, the remaining 8 blue lights (2) Thermal power level 2: 2 red lights, the remaining 7 blue lights The left end of the thermal power display sections 67L and 67R , when the object is heated with a thermal power lower than the minimum thermal power level 1 in the "thermal insulation mode" (see "display screen 3A" in FIG. 38), the LED is illuminated to display the thermal insulation display. 67H is provided.

The left display section 31L displays the thermal power level value of the left heating section 17HL with numerals 1-9. When the minimum firepower level is 1, "1" is displayed, and when the maximum firepower level is 9, "9" is displayed. The thermal power display on the left display section 31L matches the thermal power level displayed by the thermal power display section 67L, and is displayed at the same timing.

Also, the heating power level value of the right heating section 17HR is displayed with numerals 1 to 9 on the right display section 31R. The display conditions are exactly the same as for the left display section 31L.

As can be seen from FIG. 16, the three light-emitting display sections 27L, 27M, 27R and the two heating power display sections 67L, 67R are arranged on a straight line in the horizontal direction. Moreover, the three light emitting display portions 27L, 27M, 27R and the two heating power display portions 67L, 67R are arranged in the horizontal direction.

In this way, the three light-emitting display units 27L, 27M, 27R and the two thermal power display units 67L, 67R are located behind the three input operation units 40L, 40M, 40R on a straight line in the horizontal direction. Because it is lined up, operability and visibility are good. Furthermore, the integrated display unit 30, the left display unit 31L, and the right display unit 31R are also arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction. It has a good design and visibility.

In FIG. 16, reference numeral 68 denotes a heat source display section arranged behind the integrated display section 30. As shown in FIG.
Since the heat source display unit 68 uses a plurality of heat sources using the central operation unit 40M, the heat sources that are actually in operation are displayed with LED light.

The heat source display section 68 is composed of three display sections as shown in FIG. The leftmost display section 68L is a display section that indicates that the microwave heating source 189 is used, and near the front side, the character "range" is displayed to easily indicate that it is microwave heating. It's made for you to understand.

The display portion 68M in the center is a display portion that indicates that "grill cooking" is being performed in the heating chamber 113 using either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. "Grill" is written on the front side so that it is easy to understand that it is grill cooking.

The rightmost display portion 68R is a display portion that indicates a case where “oven cooking” is being performed in the heating chamber 113 using either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B.

Unlike grill cooking, "oven cooking" grasps the temperature in the heating chamber 113 and reflects (feeds back) the temperature in the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. These will be explained in detail later.

16 and 17, reference numeral 69 denotes a high temperature display section provided immediately behind the heat source display section 68. As shown in FIG. The high temperature display section 69 causes the LED light emitting section to emit light based on a command from the integrated control device MC to display that the temperature monitoring target portion is at a high temperature.
The integrated controller MC issues a high temperature display command based on the temperature information from the temperature detection circuit 93 which receives temperature detection signals from various temperature sensors and the heating chamber control section 159, as will be described later.

The high temperature indicator 69 is not shown in FIG.
The high temperature display section 69 defines three temperature monitoring target portions, namely, the left heating portion 17HL, the heating chamber 113, and the right heating portion 17HR, and individually displays the conditions of these temperature monitoring target portions. Therefore, for example, after induction cooking is performed in the left heating part 17HL, the user can be alerted by notifying that the left side range from the center of the top plate 15 corresponding to the left heating part 17HL is high temperature.

In order to shorten the period during which the high temperature display section 69 displays the high temperature, for example, when the temperature of the top plate 15 is still high immediately after one induction heating cooking is finished, the IH control section 90 continues the operation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 to cool the internal space of the upper unit 100, that is, the upper space 300A, with outside air.

Returning to FIG. 15, description will be made. 46L and 46R are windows for transmitting an infrared signal as a command signal for starting operation to a ventilator (not shown) installed outside. An infrared transmission unit 48 (see FIG. 21) is installed below this window. In practice, the windows 46L and 46R are covered with an inconspicuous surface sheet so that they cannot be seen from above the top plate 15. FIG. The sheet is of course made of a material that is transparent to infrared signals.

In FIG. 15, reference numeral 49 denotes a wireless communication unit (communication module), which includes an antenna (not shown) for receiving radio waves from the outside and for transmitting radio waves to the outside, and a transmitting/receiving circuit (not shown). . The wireless communication unit 49 is installed below the right end of the display substrate 41 with a small gap from the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. As shown in FIG. The purpose of maintaining such a distance is that there is a concern that the reception sensitivity of radio waves may be lowered if the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16 is too close.

In FIG. 15, AL indicates the range where the top plate 15 is exposed on the upper surface of the upper unit 100 as described above. It should be noted that the upper surface of the heating cooker 1 is exposed above the kitchen furniture 2 when installed on the kitchen furniture 2 . Therefore, the input operation unit 40 can also be operated from above, and the exhaust air from the exhaust port side end 102E (see FIG. 11) of the exhaust duct 102 can be similarly discharged above the kitchen furniture 2. FIG.

(Control means of upper unit 100)
Next, control means of the upper unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG.
21 and 22, part of the configuration is omitted, and the filter circuit of the filter circuit board 54 is not shown.

21 shows the control means of the upper unit 100 and the control means of the lower unit 200. FIG. In FIG. 22, only the main control means in FIG. 21 are extracted, and arrows indicate transmission/reception of control command signals, power supply relationships, and the like.

In FIG. 21, 97 is a main power switch that is opened and closed by the user, and is connected to a 200V commercial power source 99 via a power cord and a power plug (not shown). Reference numeral 91 denotes a power supply circuit to which electric energy is supplied via the main power switch 97, and 92 denotes a DC power conversion section for converting AC power from a commercial power supply into DC. The power supply circuit 91 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 55 (see FIG. 20).

MC is an integrated control device and has the function of a main controller or a host computer. This integrated control device MC is a control device mainly composed of a microcomputer. A predetermined constant-voltage current is supplied from the power supply circuit 91 to the integrated control device MC.

The integrated controller MC is located on the lower surface of the central operation board 32 as described above (indicated by a dashed frame in FIG. 20). However, it may be arranged on the back (lower) side of the operation board 41 . In any case, the integrated control device MC is built in the upper unit 100 and is not provided in the lower unit 200 .

The integrated control device MC is composed of four parts: an input part, an output part, a storage part, and a CPU (arithmetic control part). (stored). In addition to the storage unit (ROM, RAM) of the microcomputer, a large-capacity storage device (main memory) MM for recording abnormality monitoring information is incorporated. The storage device MM may store an energization control program for the three heating sources.

Reference numeral 90 denotes an IH control section that controls induction heating, and is mainly composed of a microcomputer. The IH control unit 90 stores in advance an energization control program corresponding to various cooking menus for induction heating. It also incorporates a storage device (not shown) for recording abnormality monitoring information.

Part of the functions of the IH control section 90 may be performed by a second IH control section 90A (not shown). For example, a microcomputer may be mounted on the inverter circuit board 80 to control the inputs and outputs of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.

During all heat cooking operations such as induction heating cooking and microwave heating cooking, the presence or absence of an electrical abnormality is centrally monitored by the integrated controller MC.

Reference numeral 96 denotes a clock circuit also called a real-time clock, which is supplied with power from a dedicated power supply (built-in battery) BT1 separate from the power supply circuit 91 connected to the main power switch 97, and is driven for a long period of time. It has become so. For example, this may be a radio-controlled clock, and if requested by the integrated control device MC, it always informs the current date and exact time in seconds. there is Therefore, even if the main power supply of the heating cooker 1 is turned off and then turned on again, the time information of this clock circuit is not affected, and there is a function to always transmit the latest correct time to the integrated control device MC. For this reason, the abnormality monitoring information recorded in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC is always recorded and saved at the correct time. Note that this clock circuit may be omitted and the integrated control device MC may have the clock function.

In FIG. 21, 72 is a power control unit (also called a "demand control unit"). This power control unit 72 analyzes a command signal for induction heating or microwave heating by the integrated control device MC, and the total power consumption of the heating cooker 1 exceeds the specified value or the upper limit set individually by the user. It also has a function to automatically limit the thermal power (power consumption) during induction heating, microwave heating, and oven heating so that the total power consumption does not exceed a specified value or an arbitrary set value. There is

In general, a "demand control device" or "demand control device" refers to a device that controls the value of demand (power demand). Automatically check the power usage status, and if it is likely to exceed the set value, notify with an alarm, etc. If you set the automatic stop of the equipment that can be stopped, the device itself will stop as decided. Automatically shuts down electrical equipment when possible. After that, it is known that the electrical equipment is automatically reset after a certain period of time has passed, and it is said that it will be very effective in managing the contracted power with the electric power company in each household.

The power control unit 72 of Embodiment 1 is provided to allow the heating cooker 1 itself to have the function of suppressing power consumption as described above. The power control unit 72 may be provided as a control function in the integrated control device MC without providing special hardware. Anything added later can be implemented.

The power control unit 72 of the first embodiment can set the maximum power consumption of the heating cooker 1 as a whole by operating the function setting input key 43KP to set only one of the four levels as described above. Note that this setting can be made in the input operation unit 40 while viewing the above-mentioned four-level numerical values displayed on the integrated display unit 30 when a plurality of specific keys in the input operation unit 40 are pressed at the same time. . Such a simple setting method is introduced in Japanese Patent No. 6012780, for example. 16 and 17, when the input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the integrated control device MC switches to the "function mode", and the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 displays "Peak Since a display that allows "cut value setting" and "HEMS registration setting" is performed, the function of suppressing the total power consumption of the heating cooker 1 as described above can be easily added, changed, canceled, etc. can be set. The upper limit value data for the maximum power consumption (total power consumption) set in the power control unit 72 is used in the determination of the “permission condition”, which will be described later.

A signal transmission unit 73 is provided to transmit various control signals between the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 . For example, it corresponds to a signal line and a connector that can transmit a signal by wire. Also, for example, an infrared communication unit may be used so that signals can be exchanged wirelessly. The signal transmission section 73 is also provided between the integrated control device MC and the IH control section 90 .

The IH control section 90 obtains temperature information from the temperature detection circuit 93 and monitors whether the main parts of the upper unit 100 are at an abnormally high temperature. For example, in the central operation unit 40M, electronic parts and semiconductor parts corresponding to the various input keys 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS, 43MT, etc. are arranged. (For example, 60° C.) is monitored through the temperature detection circuit 93 so as not to exceed the temperature.

When the measured temperature exceeds the predetermined temperature, the IH control unit 90 determines that the "abnormal preliminary state" has occurred. The abnormal preliminary state is limited to when the detected temperature is in the range of 60.degree. C. to 65.degree. If the temperature exceeds 65° C., the danger increases, and the IH control unit 90 recognizes that it is a true abnormal condition.

In this abnormal preliminary state, the induction heating operation is not immediately stopped, and control is performed to lower the heating power of the induction heating. However, when the temperature exceeds 65° C., the IH control unit 90 determines that the temperature is abnormal, and immediately stops the induction heating operation. Specifically, for example, when the IH coil being driven is the right IH coil 17R, the power supply to the inverter circuit 81R supplying high-frequency power to the IH coil 17R is cut off. Then, the operation of the induction heating circuit 94R including the IH coil 17R, resonance capacitor, etc. is stopped. 94L is an induction heating circuit for the left IH coil 17L.

In the above-described abnormal preliminary state, it may be improved by increasing the blowing capacity of the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61 cooling the IH coil installation space CK of the upper unit 100 while maintaining the thermal power of the induction heating. Furthermore, it may be used together with measures to lower the thermal power of induction heating.

Then, at least during the period from such an abnormal preliminary state to an emergency stop, the electrical and physical changes in the main parts during induction heating (for example, the temperature of the integrated display section 30 described above) are indicated (abnormality monitoring). Information is stored in the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90. FIG.

In the above-described abnormal preliminary state, the induction heating operation is not stopped immediately, the air blowing capacity of the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61 is not increased (the rotational speed of the rotor blades is not changed), and the IH coils 17L and 17R are The firepower may be improved by forcibly lowering it.

The abnormality monitoring information stored in the storage device of the IH control unit 90 is acquired during the period from the time when the activation command is received from the integrated control device MC until the cooking is normally completed. Therefore, the "IH control menu" (for example, "boiling", "simmering", "deep-frying", etc. in the case of the left operation unit 40L) and the thermal power information of the induction heating are also recorded in chronological order. If an emergency stop occurs due to an abnormal condition on the way, the abnormality monitoring information and the information for identifying the IH control menu are stored in the storage device 90R in chronological order up to that point.

Furthermore, in this first embodiment, in order to monitor the operation of the heating cooker 1 over a wider range and acquire data, after the main power switch 97 is turned ON, all heating on the upper unit 100 and lower unit 200 sides is performed. The integrated controller MC acquires monitoring information about the cooking state. The integrated control device MC acquires monitoring information on the presence or absence of an abnormality from the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 via the signal transmission unit 73 .

In the inverter circuit board 80, one inverter circuit 81R dedicated to the right IH coil 17R and one inverter circuit 81L dedicated to the left IH coil 17L are mounted.

These two inverter circuits 81L and 81R are driven by the IH control section 90 independently of each other. In addition, when these inverter circuits are named generically, the code|symbol "81" is used.

Details of the two inverter circuits 81L and 81R will be described later with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 21, reference numeral 95 denotes notification means, which is a speech synthesizer for synthesizing electronically produced speech. The voice synthesizing device 95 notifies the user of the input operation guidance and the notification of the occurrence of an abnormality by voice from the speaker 95S each time.

The temperature detection circuit 93 described above is connected to at least seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9. Specifically, there are temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 for detecting the temperature of the top plate 15, the ambient temperature of the IH coil installation space CK, the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80, the temperature of the integrated display section 30 and the like. . The temperature detection circuit 93 receives temperature detection information from each of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 and sends the temperature detection results to the IH control section 90 .

The temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 may be of a non-contact type such as an infrared sensor or a contact type such as a thermistor, and they are used alone or in combination.

Of the temperature sensors TS3-TS9, two temperature sensors TS5 and TS6 are non-contact sensors such as infrared sensors. These two temperature sensors TS5 and TS6 are arranged in respective gaps in the IH coils 17L and 17R, as shown in FIG. 15, and receive infrared signals from the top plate 15 direction. In other words, the bottom surface temperature of the object to be heated N, such as a metal pot or frying pan containing the object to be cooked, can be measured in a non-contact manner.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, two temperature sensors TS3 and TS4 use thermistors as contact sensors, and as shown in FIG. placed inside the cavity. These temperature sensors TS3 and TS4 are in direct contact with the bottom surface of the top plate 15, or are in contact with the bottom surface of the top plate 15 via thermally conductive interpositions. Thereby, the temperature of the top plate 15 can be measured.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, one temperature sensor TS7 (see FIG. 15) uses a thermistor as a contact sensor and is installed on the upper surface of the holder 50. As shown in FIG. Then, the ambient temperature of the integrated display section 30 and the input operation section 40 is detected. The two temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 use thermistors and are mounted on the upper surface of the heat sink 82 as described above.

At least two temperature sensors TS1 and TS2 are also provided on the lower unit 200 side to detect the internal space temperature of the lower unit 200, the details of which will be described later.

In FIG. 21, reference numeral 62 denotes a cooling fan drive circuit, which controls power for driving motors 60M and 61M for driving the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61; That is, under the control of the cooling fan drive circuit 62, the blowing capacities of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are changed in multiple steps independently of each other.

In FIG. 21, reference numeral 63 denotes a display section drive circuit, which can control the operations of the integrated display section 30, the left display section 31L, and the right display section 31R, and has the function of displaying necessary information.
The display drive circuit 63 may be composed of a dedicated microcomputer. Also, the control program (software) that exhibits the functions of the display section drive circuit 63 may be incorporated in the integrated control device MC. The display drive circuit 63 is mounted on the upper surface of the operation board 41 (see FIG. 20).

Reference numeral 84 denotes a vibration sensing device that senses shaking at the time of an earthquake, and when it senses a seismic intensity (acceleration) equal to or greater than a predetermined seismic intensity, it sends a vibration sensing signal to the integrated control unit MC, which receives the signal. It is determined that an earthquake has occurred, and the power supply to all heating means in use is cut off instantly.

In FIG. 21, 49 is the wireless communication unit 49 also shown in FIG. 15, which receives commands from the integrated control unit MC and transmits information. Also, it receives a command from the integrated control device MC and acquires information from the outside. For example, it receives a "peak cut signal" that reduces total power consumption.

(Lower unit 200)
Next, the lower unit 200 will be explained.
8 to 11, 101 is a lower case (lower housing) that constitutes the outer shell of the main body 110 of the lower unit 200. As shown in FIG. The lower case 101 is formed by pressing a thin metal plate such as a galvanized steel plate, or by joining a plurality of thin metal plates by spot welding or screws. In Embodiment 1, as described below, it is composed of three thin metal plates.

Reference numeral 101H denotes a body portion that constitutes three planes (vertical planes) of the rear and left and right portions of the lower case 101, and 101U is a flat bottom plate that completely closes the bottom opening of the body portion 101U. 101C is an inclined portion, which is a wall surface that is inclined forward as it goes downward so as not to hit the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 when the heating cooker 1 is installed on the kitchen furniture 2 .

A front plate 101F constitutes the front surface of the lower case 101 and is a single flat plate as a whole. When the door 114 is closed, the rear surface of the door 114 is brought into close contact with the front surface of the front plate 101F to prevent microwaves from leaking through the gap between the front plate 101F and the door 114.例文帳に追加101B is a rear wall surface (rear vertical wall) that rises vertically continuously from the upper end of the inclined portion 101C of the lower case 101 .

The lower unit 200 has two independent heating sources. One of them is the microwave heating source 189 of the microwave heating device 120 . The other is the oven heating source 188 of the oven heating device 140 . The oven heat source 188 heats the heating chamber (oven chamber) 113 from the outside of the wall surface thereof, but may be present inside the heating chamber 113 to directly heat the food to be cooked. It should be noted that the following description is based on the premise that the "microwave heating source 189" does not include the "inverter circuit board 121", which will be described later, unless there is a particular contradiction.

8, 10 and 11 show the main parts of the microwave heating device 120. FIG.
They are installed in the following order from the front side.
An inverter circuit board 121 (see FIG. 10) on which an inverter circuit 121A (see FIG. 21) is mounted is arranged on the frontmost side.

Behind the inverter circuit board 121, a magnetron 122 serving as a microwave generation source and a waveguide 123 surrounding an oscillator 122A of the magnetron 122 are arranged.

Further, behind the waveguide 123, an antenna case 124 connected to the waveguide 123 and an antenna 125 inside the antenna case are arranged.
A motor 126 for rotating or rotating the antenna 125 during microwave heating is arranged behind the antenna case 124 (see FIG. 11).

Reference numeral 127 denotes a power circuit board for supplying microwave heating output and electric power to the magnetron 122. A power circuit unit 120P (not shown) that receives commercial power from the filter circuit 54 and a microwave heating control unit (to be described later) 130 are implemented.

7 and 8, reference numeral 128 denotes a third cooling fan (one of the lower cooling fans, sometimes referred to as "cooling fan A"), which is a box-shaped case housing the inverter circuit board 121. Located directly below the A150. The entire lower surface of the case A150 is open. That is, it has a box-like shape with no bottom surface.

Reference numeral 129 denotes a fourth cooling fan (one of the lower cooling fans, sometimes referred to as "cooling fan B"), which is arranged directly below a box-shaped case B151 on which the heat radiation portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is placed. It is Several heat radiation fins are formed in parallel in the heat radiation part 122H for the cooling air from the fourth cooling fan 129 to pass through. The case B151 has a box shape with an open bottom and no bottom.

The case A150 constitutes one of the inlet ends of the lower air passage.
As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the case A150 has a vertical portion 308 extending vertically away from the side wall surface of the heating chamber 113 at a position directly above the intake port 152F.
The inverter circuit board 121 for the microwave heating source 188 is vertically accommodated in the vertical portion 308 .

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are, for example, axial fans. It is supported by the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 so that the rotating shaft at the center of the rotating blade is in the vertical (perpendicular) direction.

The case A 150 and the case B 151 have the entire bottom opening as described above, and the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are arranged inside the opening, respectively.

In FIG. 8, the wind direction plates 199 provided in two rows inside the case A150 are integrally or separately formed inside the case A150. The wind direction plate 199 is installed to efficiently flow the cooling air from the third cooling fan 128 to the inverter circuit board 121 and two communication ports 138A and 138B which will be described later.

A reference numeral 152F denotes a front intake port, which is formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG. The air intake is composed of a large number of small circular through-holes or rectangular or oval through-holes. This intake port 152F is for the third cooling fan 128. As shown in FIG.

152B is an intake port on the rear side, which is formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG. The air intake is composed of a large number of small circular through-holes or rectangular or oval through-holes. This air intake port 152B is for the fourth cooling fan 129 described above.

A ventilation hole (first intake port) 164 for introducing outside air for cooling the induction heating source 9 into the inside of the upper unit 100, and an outside air for cooling the microwave heating source 189 inside the lower unit 200. The second intake ports 152B and 152F for introducing the heat are arranged on opposite sides of each other with the heating chamber 113 interposed therebetween. That is, as is clear from FIG. 10, when the heating cooker 1 is viewed from the front side, with the heating chamber 113 interposed therebetween, there are the second intake ports 152B and 152F on the right side, and the air vents on the left side. There is a (first inlet) 164 and a vent 64 .

A duct 153 is installed above the heat radiation portion 122H, and guides the cooling air RF6 from the fourth cooling fan 129 that has passed through the heat radiation portion 122H to the downstream side as shown in FIG.

8 and 9, reference numeral 154 denotes a case C, which accommodates the power circuit board 127 and the microwave heating control section 130 in a sealed state. This case 154 is made of a plastic material that is highly electrically insulating.
The case C154 is configured by overlapping two members, a lid 154A on the rear side and a main body 154B in the shape of a container or box on the front side. A large opening formed in the front side of the main body 154B is closed from the rear by the lid 154A.

The case C154 has a main body 154B on the front side and a substrate (not shown) on which the power circuit board 127 and the microwave heating control unit 130 are mounted. At the time of maintenance and inspection, the lid 154A is opened so that various inspections and repairs of the power supply circuit board 127 and the microwave heating control section 130 can be performed.

The case C154 is installed as far away from the back surface of the heating chamber 113 as possible so as not to be affected by the heat from the heating chamber 113 . It is also installed away from the bottom plate 101U, so that even if liquid such as water or cooking liquid enters the inside of the lower case 101 from the upper unit 100 side, the electrical insulation will not be impaired. ing.

As described with reference to FIG. 8, the cavity 104 is the space where the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 face each other at the largest distance.
In the cavity 104, a waveguide 123 constituting part of a microwave heating device 120, which will be described later, is arranged long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113, and behind the waveguide 123, A housing case C154 for the power supply circuit board 127, on which circuit components for supplying power to the microwave heating control unit 130 are mounted, is arranged elongated in the left-right direction.

As described with reference to FIG. 8, the front horizontal wall 101T made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101 is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101 backward. The support bracket 198 on the lower case 101 side is fixed to the upper case 16 .

In FIGS. 8 and 9, 131 denotes a door opening/closing detection mechanism provided as a countermeasure against radio wave leakage during microwave heating.
In order to secure the safety of the microwave heating device, it is legally required to install the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 . A representative door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 of this type is known from patent documents such as Japanese Patent No. 4372099 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-214147.

According to the patent document, the door open/close detection mechanism 131 incorporates three types of switches: a latch switch, a door switch, and a monitor switch. is proposed.

Further, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 11-214147, a first interlock switch and a second interlock switch are used to open and close the power supply of an inverter circuit, and when the first interlock switch is short-circuited, the switch is inserted into the power supply circuit. It has been proposed to provide a monitor switch in order to turn off the fuse that is in the circuit.

8 and 9 show the main parts of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 employed in the first embodiment. In these figures, 132A is a latch switch and 132B is a door switch. If either one or both of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B are not opened due to an abnormality, a monitor switch 133 (Fig. not shown) are also provided.

The latch switch 132A is pushed by a pin 134 fixed to the door 114 and protruding to open and close the built-in contact. The door switch 132B is pushed by a pin 135 fixed to the door 114 and protruding to open and close the built-in contact.

Reference numeral 136A denotes an interlocking rod that transmits movement of the door 114 to the latch switch 132A, and is urged toward the door by a compression spring so as to always return to the door side.
Reference numeral 136B denotes an interlocking rod that transmits the movement of the door 114 to the door switch 132B, and is biased toward the door by a compression spring so as to always return to the door side.

Reference numeral 137 denotes a support plate on which the latch switch 132A, door switch 132B, monitor switch 133 (not shown), interlocking rods 136A and 136B, etc. are collectively attached. This support plate 137 is fixed to the lower case 101 with a plurality of screws. The door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 is mainly composed of various switches mounted on the support plate 137 as described above.

If the mounting positions of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B vary during the manufacturing process, there is a concern that the timing for operating each switch will deviate from the specified value. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the support plate 137 is attached with a closing detector 139 (see FIG. 21) of the door 114, which will be described later, so that the support plate 137 as a whole can be removed. Specifically, as described above, the lower case 101 is firmly fixed to the support plate 137 with a plurality of screws. Operation check, adjustment, replacement, etc. of the closing detector 139 can be performed during manufacturing and after-sales service.

8 and 10, 138A is a communication port formed in the upper portion of the case A150 containing the inverter circuit board 121, and 138B is a communication port formed in the upper and lower intermediate portions of the case A150.

The communication port 138A guides part of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 as shown in FIG. 10 to a space 141 which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 10, the communication port 138B guides part of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 to a space 142, which will be described later, and is used for cooling the infrared temperature sensor 160, which will be described later. there is

The temperature sensor 160 includes a hollow sensor case, a sensor substrate housed inside the sensor case, one or more infrared detection elements mounted on the surface of the sensor substrate, and the infrared detection elements. and a lens attached and fixed to the sensor case as main components. The temperature sensors 160 may be provided at a plurality of locations in the heating chamber 113 so that the temperature can be detected over a wide range. Alternatively, the temperature may be detected over a wide angle. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-54250 proposes the use of a plurality of temperature sensors.

In FIG. 10, reference numeral 161 denotes a detection window facing the temperature sensor 160, and a gap may be formed between the temperature sensor 160 and the outer peripheral surface of the temperature sensor 160 so that the cooling air can pass therethrough. In Embodiment 1, a gap of about several millimeters is formed.

162 is a cooking plate made of porcelain or heat-resistant plastic. The cooking plate 162 is formed to have external dimensions such that it can be taken out and put in from the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113. As shown in FIG.

In FIG. 10, HV is the effective height dimension from the upper surface of the cooking plate 162 to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113 . HX is the maximum height dimension from the upper surface of cooking plate 162 to the ceiling surface of recess 113T formed in the center of heating chamber 113 . In this Embodiment 1, the effective height dimension HV is 94 mm, and the maximum height dimension HX is 100 mm. This is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this size configuration.

In FIG. 10, WH is the inner width dimension of the heating chamber 113 . Since the heating chamber 113 is formed up to the front opening 113A with this inner width dimension, it can be said that it is the frontage dimension that determines whether or not the food to be cooked and cooking utensils such as a frying pan can be inserted. The inner width dimension WH is 310 mm.

In FIG. 11, WB is the depth dimension of the heating chamber 113 . Similar to the width dimension WH (see FIG. 10), it can be said that it is a dimension that determines whether or not the object to be cooked N, the cooking plate 162, and cooking utensils such as a frying pan can be inserted. This depth dimension WB is approximately 310 mm.

Reference numeral 163 denotes an electric radiation heater for heating the heating chamber 113 from the outside, such as a sheathed heater. Alternatively, it is a mica heater in which a heater wire is wound around the entire support plate made of thin mica.

The heater 163 is composed of two heaters, an upper heater 163A and a lower heater 163B. The energization of these two heaters 163A and 163B is controlled independently of each other.
163A is an upper heater fixed on the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113 in close contact or close proximity, and 163B is a lower heater fixed under the bottom surface of the heating chamber 113 in close contact or close proximity. .

The upper heater 163A can select multiple levels of heating power within a range from maximum heating power of 1000W to minimum heating power of 50W. Also, the lower heater can be selected from multiple levels of heating power within a range from maximum heating power of 1000W to minimum heating power of 50W.

In FIG. 10, 166R is a right side partition plate which is vertically installed so as to form a gap GP5R with the right side wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is formed of a thin metal plate.
A left partition plate 166L is vertically installed to form a gap GP5L with the left wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is formed of a thin metal plate.
A heat insulating material (not shown) is inserted into the gaps GP5L and GP5R on the left and right sides of the heating chamber 113 to suppress heat conduction (radiation) from the heating chamber 113 .

Reference numeral 167 denotes an upper heat shield plate that covers the entire upper portion of the upper heater 163A, and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.
GP6 is a gap formed between the upper heat shield plate 167 and the upper heater 163A, and its size is several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP6 is a closed space so that there is no circulation of air with the outside. The peripheral edge of the upper heat shield plate 167 is fixed to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113 in close contact with the upper edges of the right partition plate 166R and the left partition plate 166L.

Reference numeral 168 denotes a lower heat shield plate having a longitudinal cross-sectional shape vertically symmetrical to that of the upper heat shield plate 167 . The lower heat shield plate covers the entire area below the lower heater 163B and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.

GP7 is a gap formed between the lower heat shield plate 168 and the lower heater 163B, and its size is about several mm to 10 mm. This gap is a closed space so that air does not flow with the outside. The peripheral edge of the lower heat shield plate 168 is tightly fixed to the bottom wall surface of the heating chamber 113 with the lower edges of the right partition plate 166R and the left partition plate 166L sandwiched therebetween.

Reference numeral 169 denotes an upper case superimposed on the peripheral portion of the upper heat shield plate 167 so as to cover the entire upper portion of the upper heat shield plate 167 . A lower case 170 overlaps the peripheral portion of the lower heat shield plate 168 so as to cover the entire lower portion of the lower heat shield plate 168 .

As shown in FIG. 10, the upper case 169 and the lower case 170 have vertically symmetrical vertical cross-sectional shapes, and are made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic. GP8 is a gap formed between the upper case 169 and the upper heat shield plate 167, and its size is about several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP8 is a closed space so that there is no circulation of air between it and the outside.

GP9 is a gap formed between the lower case 170 and the lower heat shield plate 168, and its size is about several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP9 is also a closed space so that air does not flow.

A sheet or plate-like heat insulating material 175A (not shown) is arranged in the gap GP6. Similarly, a sheet or plate-like heat insulating material 175B (not shown) is arranged in the gap GP8.

A sheet or plate-like heat insulating material 175C (not shown) is arranged in the gap GP7. Similarly, a sheet or plate-like heat insulating material 175D (not shown) is arranged in the GP9. If each of these heat insulating materials 175A to 175D has a structure in which multiple layers are stacked instead of a single layer structure, the heat insulating performance is further improved. The planar size (vertical and horizontal dimensions) of each heat insulating material 175A to 17D is at least larger than the installation range of each of the upper heater 163 and the lower heater 163B.

In FIG. 10, reference numeral 171 denotes a partition plate defining a passage 172 above the upper case 169 through which the cooling air RF5 flows. A communication port 173 is opened in the upper part of the rear wall surface of the partition plate 171 , and the inlet end of the exhaust duct 102 is connected to the communication port 173 .
A communication port 174 is formed in the rear portion of the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113 , and the inlet portion of the exhaust duct 102 is connected to the communication port 174 . 102E is the terminal end which is the final outlet of the cooling air.

As shown in FIG. 11, the exhaust duct 102 has two independent upper and lower internal passages 102A and 102B. After that, the cooling air RF5 flows.
In addition, the cooling air RF6 introduced into the heating chamber 113 and having a raised temperature flows through the other internal passage 102B.

23, the exhaust duct 102 has an internal passage (internal route) 102A passing through the outside of the heating chamber 113 and an internal passage (internal route) 102B passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113. This is the merging part.

The air velocity of the cooling air RF5 is increased by the outlet of the cooling air RF5 with the opening area of the air passage narrowed. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 is attracted by the cooling air RF5 in the vicinity of the outlet. Due to such action, the gas inside the heating chamber 113 is sucked into the internal passage 102B.
As a result, the two cooling airflows RF5 and RF6 are both efficiently discharged from the exhaust port 20 to the outside of the heating cooker 1. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that a method of merging at an upstream stage before entering the exhaust duct 102 may be adopted without adopting such an induction structure.

In FIG. 11, 180 is a large feeding port formed in the rear wall (rear wall) 113B of the heating chamber 113, 181 is a cover that closes the feeding port 180 from the outside, and is made of heat-resistant plastic that transmits microwaves. It is formed in a plate shape from heat-resistant glass. The cover 181 is fixed to the outside of the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B.

The cover 181 is in close contact with the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B. The antenna case 124 is fixed to the back wall 113B of the heating chamber 113 so as to cover the entire back side of the cover 181 . The cover 181 is inserted inside the front opening of the antenna case 124 as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 11, 123 is a waveguide connected to the rear side of the cover 181 . The motor 126 for driving the antenna is thus fixed to the back side of the waveguide 123 via the heat-resistant sealing material 184 .

Reference numeral 126A denotes a rotating shaft of the antenna driving motor 126, which is installed horizontally in the front-rear direction. The antenna 125 is fixed to the free end side (front end) of the rotary shaft 126A. Although the rotary shaft 126A is made of plastic or ceramic material, only a certain range from the antenna 125 side is made of metal, and the area from there to the antenna drive motor 126 is made of plastic, ceramic, or the like that is heat-resistant and insulated. It may also be formed of a material having excellent properties.

In FIG. 11, reference numeral 185 denotes a radio wave sealing chamber formed around the rotating shaft 126A with a predetermined size. This radio wave sealing chamber has a so-called choke chamber structure. Further, in order to effectively prevent microwave leakage, a radio wave absorber (not shown) is placed on the side closer to the antenna drive motor 126 than the choke structure, so that microwaves from around the rotation shaft 126A are absorbed. You may try to prevent leakage. In addition, the choke structure in the microwave heating device is disclosed in Japanese patent documents, for example, JP-A-2011-174669, JP-A-2010-255978, JP-A-63-172828 (a quarter-wave choke combined use of the room and the radio wave absorber), etc., so a detailed explanation is omitted.

In FIG. 11, LA indicates the dimension from the back wall (rear wall surface) 113B of the heating chamber 113 to the rear end of the antenna driving motor 126. In FIG. Henceforth, this dimension is called a "projection dimension." It is desirable to reduce this projecting dimension LA, but in reality, as described above, the dimensions of the antenna case 124 and the radio wave sealing chamber 185 are also necessary, and even if the external dimensions of the antenna driving motor 126 are reduced, there is a limit. There is This projection dimension LA is 70 mm.

In FIG. 11, GP10 is the gap between the back surface of the antenna driving motor 126 and the inclined portion 101C of the lower case 101. The upper end of the motor 126 is 69 mm, and conversely, the gap between the lower end and the lower case 101C is 53 mm. degree. It is dimensionally impossible to dispose the case C154 in the gap GP10. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the case C154 is shifted rightward from directly behind (behind) the antenna drive motor 126. As shown in FIG.
This made it possible to incorporate the microwave heating device 120 in a narrow space behind the heating chamber 113 .

(Door 114)
Next, the internal structure of door 114 will be described.
In FIG. 11, reference numeral 190 denotes a metal or plastic frame that constitutes the outer shell of the door 114, and is shaped like a picture frame when viewed from the front side. 192 is an inner frame, which is made of a metal plate. An opening serving as a viewing window 192W is formed in the central portion of the inner frame 192. As shown in FIG.

Reference numeral 191 denotes a cover whose outer peripheral edge is fixed between the inner frame 192 and the frame 190 so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 192, and is transparent and heat-resistant so that the heating chamber 113 can be seen. It is made of plastic, glass, or the like.

Reference numeral 193 denotes an inner seal frame formed with a large number of small holes having dimensions that do not transmit microwaves in a portion corresponding to the viewing window 192W. The inner seal frame is formed entirely by press-molding a thin metal plate, and has a choke chamber 194 formed with an entrance (slit) on the heating chamber 113 side at the outer peripheral edge.

195 is a seal plate made of a metal thin plate. The outer peripheral edge of the seal plate 195 is continuously bent toward the inner seal frame 193 as shown in FIG. The choke chamber 194 is a space surrounded by the outer peripheral edge of the seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193 .

When the door 114 is completely closed, both the outer peripheral edge of the seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193 are in contact with the surface of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the microwave supplied to the inside of the heating chamber 113 does not leak from the door 114 and the opening 113A on the front surface of the heating chamber 113. FIG.

A transparent seal plate 196 is provided inside a portion of the inner frame 192 corresponding to the viewing window 192W, and is made of heat-resistant glass. 197 is a metal upper shielding plate along the upper surface of the door 114 and having a width dimension at least equal to the width of the door 114 . The upper shielding plate 197 is provided in the shape of an eave close to the upper surface of the door 114, and is fixed to the lower case 101 with fasteners such as metal screws so as to be electrically connected to the lower case 101. FIG.

Since the lower portion of the door 114 is supported by the lower case 101 by a hinge 176 (see FIG. 8), the door 114 can be opened to the horizontal position by pulling the handle 115 toward you.
At the initial stage of such opening, there is a concern that a portion of microwaves may leak due to a momentary gap in the overlapping portion between the door 114 and the lower case 101. However, in the first embodiment, the upper shielding plate 197 can suppress such unwanted microwave leakage above the door 114 .

In FIG. 13, reference numeral 201 denotes an introduction port formed in the front portion of the right side wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is formed of a large number of through holes having a diameter that does not allow leakage of microwaves. The reason why the inlet 201 is provided at the front portion of the right wall surface of the heating chamber 113 is to supply part of the cooling air RF6 to the vicinity of the inner side of the door 114 to suppress fogging of the viewing window 192W of the door 114. be.
Cooling air RF6 after cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is guided to the introduction port 201 by the gap GP5R.

The temperature sensor 160 is located upstream of the inlet 201 in the flow of the cooling air RF6, and part of the cooling air RF6 is blown into the heating chamber 113 at the temperature sensor 160. The amount of cooling air RF6 reaching the inlet 201 is small. However, the purpose of introducing air from the introduction port 201 is to "prevent fogging" of the seal plate 196 inside the door 114, and there is no problem with a small amount of air. It should be noted that the supply of air from the narrow gap around the temperature sensor 160 may not be adopted.

(Control means of lower unit 200)
Next, details of various control means in the lower unit 200 will be described with reference to the block diagram shown in FIG. 21 again.
The microwave heating control unit 130 controls the power supplied to the inverter circuit 121A of the inverter circuit board 121, the magnetron 122, the antenna drive motor 126, and the two cooling fans 128 and 129, and starts their operation. , stop, operating conditions, and the like.

The power supply circuit of the microwave heating control unit 130 is prepared separately from the power supply circuit 91 mounted on the power supply circuit board 55 and is a dedicated circuit for the microwave heating device 120 . Note that power may be supplied from the power supply circuit 91 .
The power supply circuit of the microwave heating control section 130 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 (see FIG. 8). Various electrical components (diodes, etc.) for converting AC power to DC are mounted on the power circuit board 127 and housed in a case C154 in a sealed state.

When receiving the command signal from the power control unit 72, the microwave heating control unit 130 operates to reduce the total power consumption of the microwave heating device 120 according to the command signal, and the output of the magnetron 122 has a function of transmitting a command signal to lower the voltage to the inverter circuit 121A.

The microwave heating control section 130 includes a temperature sensor TS1 for detecting the temperature of the heat radiation section 122H of the magnetron 122. As shown in FIG. If the temperature of the heat radiating part 122H of the magnetron 122 is higher than the specified value even after the microwave cooking is finished, a command signal for continuing the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 is sent to the fourth cooling fan 129 until the temperature drops. Send to fan 129 .

139 is a closing detector for the door 114 . The closing detection unit 139 electrically detects the open/close state of one or more of the latch switch 132A, the second door switch 132B, and the monitor switch 133 by current flowing through each circuit or an open/close signal. That is, it is a detection unit corresponding to the operation of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 described above.

Since the circuit board that constitutes the closing detector 139 is attached to the support plate 137, the support plate 137 may be removed for inspection, or the circuit board may be measured with the support plate 137 installed to check whether the circuit board operates normally. can be inspected (see Fig. 8).

Reference numeral 158 denotes a non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113. The temperature sensor 160 and the measurement signal from this temperature sensor are and a circuit (not shown) that analyzes and converts to temperature information.

The heating chamber control unit 159 controls the power supplied to the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, and controls the start/stop of their operation, operating conditions (thermal power, ie, heat generation amount), and the like. A control circuit of the heating chamber control section 159 is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 (see FIG. 9).

When receiving a command signal from the power control unit 72, the heating chamber control unit 159 operates according to the command signal to reduce the total power consumption of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. and a command signal to lower the output of the lower heater 163 . In order to lower the output of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163, the energization rate per unit time is also changed to change the substantial heating power.

(Drive circuit for induction heating source 9)
Next, a configuration example of a drive circuit for the IH coils 17L and 17R of the heating cooker 1 will be described. In order to simplify the description, FIG. 24 will be described with an example of a circuit showing only one IH coil 17R.

In the heating cooker 1, induction heating is performed by supplying high-frequency power to the IH coils 17L and 17R from the drive circuit 74. As shown in FIG.
The drive circuit 74 is provided for each IH coil. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the drive circuit 74 for the right IH coil 17R. The drive circuit for the left IH coil 17L may be the same or may be different.

As shown in FIG. 24, the drive circuit 74 includes a DC power supply circuit 75, an inverter circuit 81R, a resonance capacitor 76, an input current detector 77a and an output current detector 77b.
The current detection data of the input current detection section 77 a and the output current detection section 77 b are sent to the IH control section 90 .

The input current detection unit 77a detects the current input from the AC power supply 99 to the DC power supply circuit 22, that is, the current input to the drive circuit 74, and outputs a voltage signal indicating the detected value, that is, the input current value to the IH control unit 90. Output to 99 is a commercial AC power supply.

The DC power supply circuit 75 includes a diode bridge 78a, a reactor 78b, and a smoothing capacitor 78c, converts an AC voltage input from the AC power supply 99 into a DC voltage, and outputs the DC voltage to the inverter circuit 81R.

The inverter circuit 81R is a so-called half-bridge inverter in which the IGBTs 79a and 79b as the switching elements 83 are connected in series to the output of the DC power supply circuit 75. FIG. In the inverter circuit 81R, diodes 79c and 79d as flywheel diodes are connected in parallel with the IGBTs 79a and 79b, respectively.
The inverter 81R converts the DC power output from the DC power supply circuit 75 into high-frequency AC power of about 20 kHz to 80 kHz, so-called high-frequency power, and supplies the high-frequency power to the resonance circuit composed of the IH coil 17R and the resonance capacitor 76.

A resonance circuit including the resonance capacitor 76 has a resonance frequency corresponding to the inductance of the IH coil 17R, the capacitance of the resonance capacitor 76, and the like.

With this configuration, a high-frequency current of about several tens of amperes flows through the IH coil 17R, and a high-frequency magnetic flux generated by the flowing high-frequency current induces the heated object N on the top plate 15 directly above the IH coil 17R. heated.

The IGBTs 79a and 79b are composed of, for example, a silicon-based semiconductor, but may be composed of a wide bandgap semiconductor such as silicon carbide or gallium nitride-based materials.

The power control switching element 83 described in FIG. 8 is the IGBTs 79a and 79b referred to in FIG.
By using a wide bandgap semiconductor for this IGBT, it is possible to reduce conduction loss as a switching element. Also, even if the switching frequency, that is, the driving frequency, is set to a high frequency, that is, even if the switching is performed at a high speed, heat dissipation is improved. For this reason, the radiation fins of the heat sink 82 to which the switching elements (IGBTs) 79a and 79b are attached can be made smaller, and the size and cost of the drive section can be reduced.

The output current detector 77b is connected to a resonance circuit composed of the IH coil 17R and the resonance capacitor . The output current detector 77b detects, for example, the current flowing through the IH coil 17R, that is, the current output from the drive circuit 74, and outputs a voltage signal corresponding to the detected value to the IH controller 90. Although a half-bridge inverter has been described in this configuration, the circuit that drives the IH coil 17R may be a full-bridge inverter. Further, although the circuit described with reference to FIG. 24 is of the current resonance type, it may be of the voltage resonance type.

As described in FIG. 15, the wireless communication unit 49 performs wireless communication with a home control device (not shown) that comprehensively manages the power consumption, operation information, etc. of household electrical appliances. is a wireless communication means for transmitting and receiving wireless signals.

The home control device can be connected to a high-performance portable information terminal called a smart phone, a tablet terminal device, or the like via a public wireless communication network such as the Internet. An example of home control equipment is a power management device called a HEMS controller. In this first embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, the input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M is pressed to switch the integrated control device MC to the "function mode", and the "HEMS registration setting" is displayed on the integrated display screen. 30 can be executed.

The wireless communication unit 49 is connected to the integrated control unit MC by communication wiring. However, the longer the wiring, the more susceptible it is to noise. It is desirable to shorten the wiring that connects the communication unit 49 and the integrated control device MC.

Considering the influence of the noise mentioned above, the wireless communication section 49 is installed at the right end of the input operation section 40 in the first embodiment. Specifically, the wireless communication section 49 is installed at the right end of the operation board 41 . In addition, the integrated control device MC is installed in the left-right central portion of the input operation unit 40 (see FIG. 15).

The wireless communication unit 49 has an antenna unit for transmitting, receiving, or transmitting/receiving wireless signals inside. It is desirable to arrange it so that

(cooling air passage)
Next, the configuration of the cooling air passage will be described.
In the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, the inside of the main body case HC installed in the kitchen furniture 2 is formed by the bottom surface 16S of the metal upper case 16 to form an upper space 300A and below the partition wall. and a lower space 300B. That is, the bottom surface functions as a "partition wall" 16S, dividing the interior of the main body case HC into upper and lower spaces (see FIG. 8).

The IH coils 17L and 17R housed in the upper space 300A and the upper air passage AH that guides cooling air to the inverter circuit board 80 for the IH coils pass through the ventilation hole 64 penetrating the partition wall 16S. Outside air is introduced from the outside of the lower case 101 through the lower case 101 .

On the other hand, a lower air passage UH for guiding cooling air for the microwave heating device 120 is formed in the lower space 300B. A heat radiation part 122H of the microwave heating device 120 is arranged in the lower air passage UH. The heat radiating portion 122H is cooled by the air introduced from the second intake port 152B formed at the right end portion of the bottom surface of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG. Also, the inverter circuit board 121 of the microwave heating device 120 is cooled by the air introduced from the second intake port 152F formed at the right end of the bottom surface of the lower case 101 .

The cooling air that has flowed through the upper air passage AH and the cooling air that has flowed through the lower air passage UH do not join in the middle. The cooling air inside the upper unit 100 is discharged into the gap GP1 behind the partition plate 52 and discharged to the outside of the heating cooker 1 through the exhaust port 20 .

On the other hand, the cooling air from the lower unit 200 passes through the exhaust duct 102 extending vertically in the same gap GP1, and is finally discharged to the outside of the heating cooker 1 from the exhaust port 20.

Next, the entire cooling air path will be described with reference to FIG.
As is clear from FIG. 23, the air (outside air) in the external space of the cooking device 1 passes through the inside of the main body case HC of the cooking device 1 through two routes.

A first route: from the ventilation hole 164 formed on the left side of the lower case 101, via the ventilation hole 64 on the bottom surface of the upper case 16, from the first cooling fan 60 to the inverter circuit board 80 and the IH coils 17L and 17R. A path for cooling and leading to the exhaust port 20 . In FIG. 23, this is described as "upper air passage" AH.
Second path: outside air is sucked through two air intake ports 152F and 152B formed at the right end of the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101; One of the outside air cools the inverter circuit board 121 via the third cooling fan 128 . The other outside air passes through the fourth cooling fan 129 and cools the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 . Thus, although there are two secondary routes, they eventually enter a common exhaust duct 102 and reach the exhaust port 20 . In FIG. 23, this is described as "lower air passage" UH.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the interior of the main body case HC is divided into two parts: an upper space 300A formed by the bottom surface 16S of the metal upper case 16 and a lower space 300B formed below the partition wall. The structure is divided into two spaces, each of which is provided with mutually independent air passages (upper air passage AH and lower air passage UH), and dedicated cooling fans 60, 128, and 129 are provided for each of these air passages. is.
The upper unit 100 also has a second cooling fan 61 that cooperates with the first cooling fan 60 to cool the inside of the upper unit 100 .

(Control menu of the central control panel)
Next, a control menu that can be displayed and selected on the integrated display section 30 by the central operation section 40M will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, the "control menu" that can be selected by the left operation unit 40L and the right operation unit 40R using the induction heating source 9 includes, for example, boiling, boiling, frying (automatic cooking), as shown in FIG. etc.
However, as shown in FIG. 25, there are 11 types of control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M. These 11 types of control menus may be collectively referred to as a "control menu group" of the central operation unit 40M. A "control menu program" is a command for executing these control menu groups, and is stored in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC.

Control menus selectable by central control 40M use microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188, or both. For this reason, it is fundamentally different from the induction heating control menu in which the ingredients are indirectly heated via the object to be heated N such as a pot.

(control menu)
The "control menu" that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M is different from the name of the final cooking and the name of the ingredients obtained by heating with the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188. FIG. For example, "hamburger" and "tempura" are the names of cooked foods, not "control menus" as used herein.
The "control menu" can be said to be broadly categorized in consideration of the type, method, and conditions of heating until cooking is completed. It is conceptual and comprehensive, such as

Control menus selected by the central operation unit 40M include cooking menus called "microwave grill control menu" or "RG control menu" using the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. FIG. Further, the control menu selected by the central operation unit 40M includes a "cooking menu" to be described later.

The RG control menu and the linked cooking menu, which will be described later, are different. Also, the RG control menu and the composite cooking menu, which will be described later, are different. These will be explained in detail later.

Control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M will be described in detail below with reference to FIG.
The “left display area” in FIG. 25 means the first area (display area) 30L of the integrated display section 30 . The "central display area" also means the second area 30M, and the "right display area" means the third area 30R.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation section 40M is operated, the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 always displays the control menu "warm" in the left display area of FIG. This is because the RG control menu "warm up" is set by default.

As is clear from the "left display area" in FIG. 25, in addition to "heating", there are a total of 11 RGs such as "microwave manual", "boil under leafy vegetables", "RG cooking", "grill", and "oven". There is a control menu. However, the "central heater" described at the bottom of the "left display area" in FIG. 25 is not actually displayed because it is not supported by the upper unit 100 described above. Further, this "central heater" corresponds to the case where another induction heating section (central induction heating section) is added between the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL in the upper unit 100. So, strictly speaking, it's neither a range nor a grill. "RG" is an abbreviation for range grill.

In the first area of FIG. 25, a total of 11 types such as "warm" and "grill" are displayed, all of which are "RG control menus". However, "combined cooking" using two or more heating sources includes "RG cooking", "RG manual", and the like. "Warm up" uses only the microwave heating source 9, so it is not a compound cooking menu. Also, it does not correspond to the menu of cooperative cooking.

The contents described in the "central display area" of FIG. 25 indicate the contents displayed in the second area (display area) 30M of the integrated display section 30. The contents of the default settings for "Central Display Area" are listed in the column to the right of "Central Display Area".

The contents described in the "right display area" in FIG. 25 indicate the contents displayed in the third area (display area) 30R of the integrated display section 30. The contents of the default settings for the "Right Display Area" are listed in the column to the right of the "Right Display Area". A blank portion means that nothing is displayed.

A database of RG control menus is created according to the above rules.
For this reason,
(1) When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the integrated display unit 30 displays a first specific screen 30SP, which will be described later. 30P is displayed.
(2) When the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated, a composite cooking menu (RG control menu group) is selected, and in the first area 30L, one of the cooking menus "warm" and the first cooking menu are displayed as a default display. The second area 30M displays "80° C." indicating the temperature condition, and the third area 30R displays no control condition. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the guidance information 30P that serves as a reference for heat cooking is displayed in the third area 30R. These will be described later with reference to FIG. 39 and the like.

As for the RG control menu, when the user operates the input key 43M1 to display one RG control menu in the center of the first area, one RG control menu is selected from the 11 types of menus shown in FIG. "Control conditions" (temperature, heating power, time, etc.) corresponding to are simultaneously displayed in the second area 30M and the third area 30R.

If the selected RG control menu belongs to the "compound cooking menu" such as "RG cooking", then the user operates the input key 43MS for commanding the start of the heating operation. , the mode shifts to a "combined cooking mode" by both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and the heating operation is started.
The cooperative cooking mode will be explained later.

The specific contents of the RG control menu group shown in FIG. 25, control conditions, detailed data such as additional information, display programs, and the like are stored in the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC.
An outline of the main RG control menu will be described below.

(1) Warming: This is a type of “single (heating) cooking menu” in which the microwave heating source 189 is used to heat food. This "warming up" is also suitable for reheating food. Since the default setting is "80°C", the microwave irradiation stops automatically when the food reaches 80°C. Note that "80°C" is the target temperature, and this temperature can be adjusted by the user before starting heating. As shown in FIG. 25, the temperature can be set in increments of 5°C within the range of 0°C to 90°C. For heating frozen products, the temperature can be set in increments of 2°C within the range of -10°C to 0°C. The microwave heating power is fixed at 500W.

(2) Microwave manual operation: Refers to heating the food using the microwave heating source 189, but this is done by setting the heating time. Also, the microwave heating output can be selected from three levels of 500W, 200W, and 100W. The heating time also has a default value of 1 minute, but can be set from 10 seconds to 15 minutes at 500 W output.
This "microwave manual" is also one type of "single (heating) cooking menu". In other words, the RG control menu shown in FIG. 25 also includes the single cooking menu for the microwave heating source 189 as described above.

(3) Boil under leafy vegetables: This is suitable for boiling foods, especially vegetables whose leaves are edible, such as spinach and Chinese cabbage, using the microwave heating source 189 . The microwave heating power value is not displayed, and the second area displays "standard" as the default display. A non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 measures the temperature rise and automatically stops heating. This "boiled under leafy vegetables" is also one of the "single (heated) cooking menus".

(4) Boil under root vegetables: This is suitable for boiling foods, especially root vegetables such as potatoes whose roots and rhizomes are eaten, using the microwave heating source 189 . The microwave heating power value is not displayed, and the second area displays "standard" as the default display. In addition, since the heating power value is determined in advance on the heating cooker 1 side, when adjusting the heating power, the default display "standard" in the second area is changed to "weak", "strong", etc. ( select).
This “boiled under leafy vegetables” is also one of the “single (heated) cooking menus”.

(5) Meat thawing: RG control menu suitable for thawing various frozen meats.
Since the microwave heating source 189 is used to heat the food, it is one of the “single (heating) cooking menus”.
(6) RG cooking: Suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is cooked by combining microwave heating and oven heating. In other words, it is a kind of pure "compound cooking" menu.
A pattern in which microwave heating is performed first and the food is heated to a certain extent and then heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, a pattern in which the food is heated in the reverse order, and a pattern in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed at the same time. There are 3 types. The heating power value (watt) during microwave heating is not displayed, and the user can select the heating intensity by selecting one of "weak", "strong", etc. by looking at the display in the second area 30M. .

(7) RG recooking: suitable for reheating food that has already been cooked using the heating chamber 113; This is also a kind of pure "compound cooking" menu.
(8) RG manual operation: suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and for cooking with a combination of microwave heating and oven heating. In addition, a pattern in which microwave heating is performed first and the food is heated to some extent and then heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, a pattern in which the food is heated in the reverse order, and microwave heating and heater heating are performed at the same time. There are three types of patterns. This is also a kind of pure "compound cooking" menu.

(9) Grill: Food is heated using the heating chamber 113, and one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are used as the heating source. As described above, the temperature control of the heating chamber 113 is not performed, and the control of detecting the temperature rise of the food and stopping the heating operation is not performed. The heating power of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is determined in advance by the heating chamber control section 159 on the heating cooker 1 side. Grilled fish is a typical applicable cooking. Incidentally, the rated thermal power of the upper heater 163A is 1000W, and the rated thermal power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000W. This is one type of "single (heating) cooking menu".

(10) Oven: Food is heated using the heating chamber 113, and one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are used as the heating source. The temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured by the temperature measurement unit 158, and the heating chamber control unit 159 controls power supply so as to reach a set target temperature. As shown in FIG. 25, the default temperature is 180° C., so the user can change this target temperature if desired. Incidentally, as explained in the "grill" section, the rated thermal power of the upper heater 163A is 1000W, and the rated thermal power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000W. The heating chamber control unit 159 controls the energization rate of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, thereby controlling the amount of heat generated by the two heaters 163A and 163B. This is one type of "single (heating) cooking menu".

FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC and the central operation unit 40M. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram 2 similarly showing the relationship between the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC and the central operation unit 40M.

Data indicating individual menu names (e.g., "heating", "manual range", etc.) among a total of ten "compound cooking menus (RG control menus)" that can be displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 are stored in the first layer of the memory device MM.

Data indicating "control conditions" (for example, "microwave output value", "energization time", etc.) that can be displayed in the second area 30M of the integrated display unit 30 are stored in the second layer of the storage device MM. There is.

Data indicating "control conditions" (for example, "heating time for grill cooking" etc.) that can be displayed in the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 and reference information 30P are stored in the third layer of the storage device MM. I let you.

(Coordinated cooking menu)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, one of the features of the present invention, ie, the "cooperation cooking menu" will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, inside the storage device MM, there are data of the first specific screen 30SP displayed when the input key 43MC is operated, and data read when the input key 43M1 is subsequently operated. Control data and operation programs for the "cooperation cooking menu" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "cooperation program") are stored in a storage area separate from the RG control menu.

Here, the data of the "linkage cooking menu" and the "linkage operation program" are information specifying a plurality of heat sources used to execute each item to be cooked (for example, hamburger), various control conditions ( heating power, standard heating temperature, etc.), control parameters, cooking process information, etc. In other words, it is necessary to cause the microcomputer to execute the control procedure of the internal processing circuits and processors that realize each function of the integrated control device MC.

Identifying one of the coordinated cooking menus automatically determines the available heat source(s) and the order in which they operate. For example, for "hamburger" which is one of the cooperative cooking menus, it is not necessary to first select either one of the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL. First, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the display means 30, and when the user sees the display and selects, for example, the right heating section 17HR, the cooperative cooking mode can be entered.
For example, when the right heating unit 17HR is used in the cooking process 1, and in the subsequent cooking process 2, the heating chamber 113 is heated by the oven heat source 188, the information of the series of cooking processes is stored in the storage device MM. There is.

In addition, additional information 331 that serves as a reference for transitioning to the linked cooking mode includes, for example, information on the cooking process described later, information on the heating source to be used, control conditions (preheating completion temperature, etc.), and proceeding to the next cooking process. For this reason, guidance information, instruction information, and the like for prompting user's input operations are stored in association with each linked cooking menu.

In the following explanation, when preheating is required, it is referred to as the "preheating process" up to the set (target) temperature. 1” or “cooking step 2”.

(Operation of heating cooker)
Next, the outline of the operation of the heating cooker 1 configured as described above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 28 to 35. FIG.

FIG. 28 is a flow chart for explaining the overall control operation of the heating cooker 1 before starting cooking. FIG. 29 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation during induction heating cooking in the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 30 is a flow chart for explaining the control operation in the case of performing microwave heating during induction heating cooking in the heating cooker 1 . FIG. 31 is a flow chart for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker 1 of FIG. FIG. 32 is a flow chart for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker 1. FIG. FIG. 34 is a list showing the correspondence relationship between the cooling fan of the heat cooker 1 and the type of heat cooking.

FIG. 28 will be described.
A basic operation program from power-on to start of preparation for cooking is stored in the storage device MM inside the integrated control device MC.
In the built-in cooker 1, the power plug 106A (not shown) is always connected to the commercial (AC) power supply 99 from the time the kitchen furniture 2 is installed. (See FIGS. 16 and 21) to turn on the power (step ST1 in FIG. 28).

A predetermined low power supply voltage is supplied to the integrated control device MC via the DC power conversion unit 92 in the power circuit board 55, and the integrated control device MC is activated. The control program of the integrated control device MC itself starts diagnosing whether or not there is an abnormality in itself.

Then, the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the microwave heating control unit 130, which centrally control the induction heating source 9, are checked for abnormality.

The temperature detection circuit 93 of the upper unit 100 has a total of seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 in order to detect the temperature of the top plate 15, the temperature of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R, the temperature near the integrated display section 30, and the like. Since they are connected, the temperatures detected by these temperature sensors are transmitted to the temperature detection circuit 93 . Thereby, the IH control section 90 can determine whether or not there is an abnormality (ST2).

Also, in the heating chamber controller 159 and the microwave heating controller 130, it is possible to acquire the detected temperatures from the temperature sensors TS1 and TS2 and determine whether there is an abnormality.

In step ST2, there is "transmission of activation information to the outside", but this is from the wireless communication unit 49 to a "integrated information management device" or "integrated power control device" (HEMS controller) in a living space such as a kitchen. It means to give an advance notice of the operation start of the heating cooker 1 to a domestic control device (not shown). This will be explained later.

Since the IH control unit 90 collects temperature information of the main components built in the upper unit 100, the IH control unit 90 performs abnormal heating determination processing as abnormality monitoring control before starting cooking. For example, when the temperature detected by the temperature sensor TS7 is higher than the heat resistance temperature (for example, 70° C.) of electronic elements such as the liquid crystal display screen 30D in the integrated display section 30, the IH control section 90 determines that the temperature is abnormally high. Then, it notifies the integrated control device MC of the abnormality, and executes processing such as displaying or notifying that the operation cannot be started. Note that this process may be executed by the integrated control device MC.

If no abnormality is found, the IH control unit 90 sends a signal to the integrated control device MC. Then, the integrated display unit 30 is activated and displays a message that "there is no abnormality, so cooking can be started" (ST3). The display screen at this initial time will be described later with reference to FIG.
At the same time, the voice synthesizing device 95 notifies the same content as the content displayed on the integrated display section 30 by voice (ST3).

In step ST3, the wireless communication unit 49 accesses the "domestic control device" and acquires information such as cooking menus and recipe information useful for health management within the range previously set by the user. For example, the information that the user of this heating cooker 1 has sent in advance to the "domestic control device" via the Internet line using a portable information terminal device or the like can be obtained when the integrated display unit 30 is activated. When some information is acquired, a dedicated caution information lamp (not shown) provided near the input operation section 40 of the upper unit 100 is turned on to notify the user.

Next, after completion of the abnormality determination as described above, the integrated control device MC uses the integrated display section 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 to provide notification and voice guidance for prompting the user to select the heating means (ST4).

Then, it is determined whether or not the individual heating cooking is selected by the left operating section 40L or the right operating section 40R, which are the individual operating sections, without the input key 43M1 being operated (STC).

If neither the input key 43M1 nor the input key 43MC is selected within a certain grace period (for example, 30 seconds), it is determined that neither the cooperative cooking menu nor the complex cooking has been selected. Immediately after step ST4 or within the grace period, when the user operates at least one of the left operation unit 40L and the right operation unit 40R, the heating source of the upper unit 100, that is, the IH coils 17L and 17R is selected ("Yes" in step ST6).

On the other hand, in step STC, if the input key 43MC is operated, the processing proceeds to step STR1 of the cooperative cooking menu. The processing step STR1 of the cooperative cooking menu will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50 and the like.

When step ST6 is "Yes" as described above, the process proceeds to the next step ST10. Subsequent induction heating control steps will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the heating source of the lower unit 200 is selected in step ST5, the integrated control device MC proceeds to menu selection step ST8 of the two heating sources provided in the lower unit 200. FIG. Note that this step ST5 is performed when the central operation unit 40M (input key 43M1) is operated.

At step ST8, as shown in FIG. 28, three types of menus (ST9A to ST9D) are displayed on the integrated display section 30 in list form. Or they are displayed sequentially in a certain order. These three types of menus are a total of ten control menus (see FIG. 25) displayed in the first area 30L.

The menu displayed at the stage of step ST8 in FIG. 28 is based on the premise that the heating source of the lower unit 200 is used, and the following three types of control menus are displayed.
(1) Cooking menu using at least one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B (ST9A). "Grill" and "Oven" in the control menu shown in FIG. 25 correspond.
(2) In addition to the above (1), a cooking menu using the microwave heating device 120 (ST9B). This corresponds to "RG cooking" in the control menu shown in FIG.
(3) A cooking menu using only the microwave heating device 120 (ST9C). This corresponds to the control menu shown in FIG. 25, such as "microwave manual" and "boil under leafy vegetables".
Note that the "cooking menu" is not displayed here.

If it is found that the cooperative cooking menu is better halfway through, the user can proceed to step STR1 in FIG. 52 by operating the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M. That is, it is possible to proceed to the cooperative cooking menu.

FIG. 29 shows the operation steps of the integrated controller MC after the step (ST11) of selecting the induction heating menu.

Next, the control operation during induction heating will be described with reference to FIG.
An example using the right heating unit 17HR will be described below.
When the input key 43R1 on the right side is touched, the IH control section 90 determines that the user has commanded the heating preparation operation.

It is estimated whether or not an object to be heated (metal pot, frying pan, etc.) (not shown) N is placed above the IH coil 17R, or whether or not the bottom area of the object to be heated is larger than a predetermined value. This estimation result is transmitted to the IH control unit 90, and it is determined whether the heat treatment should be suitable for a standard-diameter pan or a large-diameter pan (step MS1).
If the pot is compatible but has a large diameter, or if the pot is unsuitable for heating, it will be processed differently from the standard pot.

Upon receiving the command from the IH control unit 90, the integrated control device MC displays on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 prompting the user to select the desired cooking "IH control menu" (MS2).

When the user selects and inputs the cooking "IH control menu", heating power, cooking time, etc. using the right operation unit 40R (MS3), the induction heating operation is started in earnest in the right heating unit 17HR (MS4).
The "IH control menu" displayed on the integrated display unit 30 includes seven items of "rapid heating", "fried food", "boiling", "preheating", "cooking rice", "boiling", and "boiling + keeping warm". be. However, in order to simplify the operability, the aforementioned "function setting" may be set so that selection of some or all of the seven IH control menus is disabled.

When the user selects one of these seven IH control menus, the control conditions corresponding to these IH control menus are automatically selected by the built-in program of the IH control unit 90, and the amount of energization of the IH coil 17R is (thermal power), energization time, etc. are set. Depending on the IH control menu, a display prompting the user to set arbitrary heating power, power supply time, etc. is displayed on the display unit (MS5). Note that the operation program of the control conditions corresponding to the IH control menu may be stored in the integrated control device MC instead of the IH control section 90 .

Unless the user operates the input key 43R1 again to stop using the input key 43R1 within a certain period of time (for example, 15 seconds or 30 seconds) after the display as described above is performed, the IH control unit 90 will be guided. The inverter circuit 81R of the heating circuit 94R is driven to start induction heating (MS6). The input function of the input key 43R1 changes every time it is touched, and it is possible to command the start and stop of the heating operation.

In the case of the "large-diameter pan", steps MS1 to MS7 are basically the same, but some of the seven IH control menus shown in step MS3 of FIG. 29 cannot be selected as the IH control menu. The "high-speed heating menu" can only be heated using the IH coil 17L on the left side only for the "normal pan" or "large-diameter pan". In the first embodiment, a small pan means a pan with a bottom diameter of less than 10 cm, which is detected as unsuitable for induction heating and cannot be induction heated.

Next, the integrated power control operation when two or more different types of heating sources such as induction heating and microwave heating are used at the same time will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 31. FIG. Note that the examples described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31 are not the case of the above-described “cooperation cooking menu”.

The example shown in FIG. 30 is a case where the user attempts microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 while induction cooking is being performed in the upper unit 100 . Note that even when oven cooking, grill cooking, or the like is performed using either one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B during the induction heating cooking period, as described with reference to FIG. Basic total power control (in the entire heating cooker 1) is performed by the integrated control device MC and the power control unit 72. FIG.
Also, in this case, it is necessary to select the composite cooking mode with the central operation unit 40M.

When the user uses the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 to perform microwave heating, first the main power switch 97 is turned ON, and the central operation section 40M of the input operation section 40 selects the heating source of the lower unit 200. There is a need to.
However, an easy way to do this is to simply open the door 114 . That is, in Embodiment 1, when the upper unit 100 is in operation (when the main power switch 97 is in the ON state), the lower unit 200 can start cooking. Therefore. The operation of turning on the main power switch 97 like the upper unit 100 is not required.

When the door 114 is opened, there are the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B which are opened and closed according to the opening and closing of the door 114 as described in the main part of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131, so the main power switch 97 is turned on. Therefore, the integrated control device MC can detect the opening of both or one of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B (by the function of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131).

In FIG. 30, when receiving a signal indicating that the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 has been opened as described above (step S1), the integrated controller MC provides voice guidance to the user (step S2). The content of the voice guidance is, for example, "To start heating, select microwave heating and press the start button."

The default setting for microwave heating is a target temperature of 80°C, so even if the door 114 is closed and heating is started, the heating is automatically stopped when the temperature of the food to be cooked reaches 80°C. To change 80° C. (for example, 75° C.), change the temperature condition and then press the input key 43MS (see FIG. 17).

When the user selects, for example, "range manual" from the compound cooking menu with the input key 43M1, and then instructs "heating start" with the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, the magnetron 122 decides. In step S3, the integrated control device MC uses the power consumption value that is known in advance by reflecting the power consumption of the third cooling fan 128, the fourth cooling fan 129, etc. in the rated power consumption value Determine whether the value is exceeded.

For example, the power consumption of the first cooling fan 60 and the power consumption of the second cooling fan 61 are stored as data in the integrated control device MC, so the power consumption of the upper unit 100 is and the total power consumption of the microwave heating device 120 can be calculated. Note that the integrated control device MC may predict the maximum power consumption using the power consumption data of the inverter circuit 81 or the like when the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated.

If step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to either lower the output of the operating IH coil 17R or lower the heating power of the microwave heating. In step S3, the current cooking priority for induction heating is determined from the induction heating control menu and the cooking process. For example, when the upper unit 100 is cooking rice (in particular, the “boiling process”), the rice cooking (boiling process) is given priority and the heating power of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

In addition, when "frying" is performed in the upper unit 100, the frying is controlled so that the heating power is automatically increased so that the temperature of the cooking oil does not drop excessively according to the introduction of the ingredients. Therefore, even in such a case, the thermal power of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

In step S5, if it is determined that induction heating has priority, in order to reduce the power consumption of microwave heating, if the microwave rated output is 500 W (power consumption is 900 W), the power consumption is temporarily reduced. and set the output to 300 W, for example. Then, the user is notified that such a restriction will be applied. The notification is performed by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 (S6).

Then, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the microwave heating control unit 130 to start microwave heating with low thermal power (S7).
Since the heating chamber 113 has a non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113, it is possible to determine whether the food has been heated and reached the target temperature. is monitored by the microwave heating control unit 130 (S8).

If the target temperature is not reached, it is determined whether or not the induction heating operation of the upper unit 100 has ended (S9). As long as the induction heating operation is not completed, the steps S8 and S9 are repeated until the target temperature is reached.

When the target temperature is reached, the microwave heating controller 130 outputs a signal to the integrated controller MC. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S12 to inform that the microwave heating has ended.

On the other hand, when the induction heating of the upper unit 100 is completed, the process proceeds to step S10, where a command is issued to the microwave heating control unit 130 to restore the heating power initially intended by the user and continue microwave heating. Then, the monitoring of the temperature of the food to be cooked is continued (S11).

Then, when the target temperature is reached, the integrated controller MC receives a signal from the microwave heating controller 130, proceeds to step S12, and notifies that the microwave heating has ended.

In the example shown in FIG. 30, the power priority between microwave heating cooking and induction heating cooking depends on the control menu (for example, "fried food") and the cooking process (for example, , "Boiling process" of rice cooking), it was premised that the priority of induction heating was determined at that time.

Therefore, when the power priority between microwave heating cooking and induction heating cooking is always set to the induction heating side, an instruction to start microwave heating is given by the input key of the central operation unit 40M. 43MS, for example, a warning message is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and a warning message is output from the speech synthesizer 95 as well. Further, even if microwave heating is started after that, there may be a case where the thermal power value is forcibly lowered as in the above example.

The power priority of the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189 in the entire heating cooker 1 can be set in the "function setting" described above, and once Once set, even if the main power switch 97 is turned off, the set conditions are stored in the integrated control device MC and are inherited after the next cooking.

In the example shown in FIG. 30, the temperature of the object to be heated is monitored, and the microwave heating is terminated when the target temperature is reached. However, there is also a control method for measuring the irradiation time of microwaves and ending cooking when a set time elapses, so FIG. 31 will be described next.

FIG. 31 shows an example in which a control method is adopted in which the cooking is finished within the microwave irradiation time.
Since steps up to step S6 are the same as those in FIG. 30, description thereof will be omitted.

When starting microwave heating in step 7, the microwave heating control unit 130 calculates the correction (extension) of the heating time when the output of the magnetron 122 is lowered to a certain value. Then, in step S8, the time after the extension is determined as "set time 1" (S8), and steps 9 and 8 are repeated.

In the process, when the induction heating of the upper unit 100 is completed, the required operation time (set time 2) is recalculated in consideration of the elapsed time from the start of heating (step S7).

Then, when the set time 2 has passed, the microwave heating is terminated and this is reported (S12). Note that temperature monitoring by the non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 may be used together until the set time 2 elapses.

(Integrated control device and total power consumption control)
Next, FIGS. 32 and 33 will be described.
32 and 33 are flow charts for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker 1. FIG. In the example shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the user attempts to perform microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 while induction cooking is being performed in the upper unit 100. is. Even in this case, the basic total power amount control (over the cooking device 1 as a whole) as described with reference to FIG.

In FIGS. 32 and 33, unlike FIGS. 30 and 31, the induction heating device consisting of the integrated control device MC, the microwave heating device 120, the IH coils 17L and 17R, the inverter circuit 81, etc. It also shows the sending and receiving of signals.

In FIGS. 32 and 33, L1 to L10 indicate the generation timing of each operation signal, command signal, and the like. When the main power switch 97 is turned on in the upper unit 100, a start signal is sent to the integrated control device MC (L1).

After that, when the heating power of the IH coils 17L and 17R, the control menu, etc. (see steps MS2 and MS3 in FIG. 29) are determined in the input operation unit 40, information indicating the content is transmitted via the integrated control device MC (L2). . That is, the IH control unit 90 receives information indicating conditions such as the maximum heating power and operating time during induction heating from the integrated control device MC. When there is an induction heating start command from the input operation unit 40, the IH control unit 90 causes the induction heating circuits 94L and 94R to start heating operations.

A case in which induction heating cooking is started in this manner and microwave heating is also started will be described. It is assumed that the induction heating is started with the maximum heating power of 3200 W of the left IH coil 17L.

When the user opens the door 114, both or one of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B are opened as described with reference to FIG. , a signal indicating the opening of the door 114 is sent to the integrated controller MC (L3).

When the user inputs thermal power through the central operation unit 40M, the integrated controller MC issues a command signal to start operation to the microwave heating control unit 130. FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S3.
Alternatively, when the user simply gives an instruction to “start heating” from the central operation unit 40M, the integrated controller MC issues a command signal to start operation to the microwave heating control unit 130 .

If there is no abnormality on the microwave heating control unit 130 side, the microwave heating control unit 130 transmits a "notice signal" to start cooking to the integrated control device MC (L4). For example, in the case of a microwave output of 500 W, if the rated power consumption of the entire microwave heating device is 1000 W, the "notice signal" including the information that 1000 W is to be used, as shown in FIG.

Next, upon receiving information from the integrated control device MC, the power control unit 72 reflects the power consumption of the third cooling fan 128, the fourth cooling fan 129, etc. to the rated power consumption value determined by the magnetron 122, and Using the known power consumption value, determine the total power consumption when microwave heating and induction heating are performed at the same time, and determine whether this total value exceeds the total power consumption regulation value. (same as step S3 in FIGS. 30 and 31). Then, the result is transmitted to the integrated control device MC.

As another method, the upper limit of the total power amount of the lower unit 200 (the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188) is determined (for example, 2000 W), and the lower unit 200 and the upper unit 100 (the induction heating source 9 ) are used at the same time, it may be determined whether or not the total electric energy regulation value is exceeded.

If step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to either lower the output of the operating IH coil 17R or lower the heating power of the microwave heating. In the next step S4, the integrated controller MC determines the priority of induction heating cooking at that time from the induction heating control menu and the heating process.

In the example of FIG. 32, the heating power of microwave heating is not reduced because it is set to give priority to microwave heating.

In step S5, if it is determined that microwave heating has priority, in order to reduce the power consumption of induction heating, the IH control unit 90 is commanded to lower the target thermal power of the IH coil 17R, and the power consumption is temporarily reduced. lower it. Notify users of any such restrictions. The notification operation is performed by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 .

Then, the IH control unit 90 instructs the inverter circuit 81R to change the induction heating to a low heating power (L5).

When the power reduction process on the inverter circuit 81R side ends, the IH control section 90 determines that the power has been reduced from the current values of the input current detection section 77a and the output current detection section 77b. Then, a message to the effect that the power reduction has been completed is transmitted to the integrated control device MC (L6). Upon receiving this transmission, the integrated controller MC transmits a permitting signal for starting the heating operation to the microwave heating device 120 (L7).

The inverter circuit 121A includes a current detection section (not shown) such as the input current detection section 77a and the output current detection section 77b used in the inverter circuit 81R of the upper unit 100. FIG.

Therefore, when microwave heating ends, the microwave heating control unit 130 determines from the current detection value of the inverter circuit 121A that the heating operation has ended, and notifies the integrated control device MC of the heating operation with a specific signal ( L8). Also, microwave heating may be performed for a certain period of time depending on the timer setting. In this case, the microwave heating control unit 130 detects the elapsed time and notifies that the heating operation has ended (L8).

After completing the microwave heating, the integrated controller MC issues a command signal to the microwave heating controller 130 so as to restore the set thermal power initially desired by the user (L9). Then, increase the heating power to the initial target level and continue the induction heating (S10).

Then, when the set cooking time and target temperature are reached, the microwave heating control section 130 terminates the induction heating. Then, the integrated control unit MC is notified that the operation has ended (L10).

(Basic operation and cooling operation of induction heating cooking)
Next, in the heating cooker 1 according to Embodiment 1, the basic operation of each part when induction heating is performed will be described.

When a command to start induction heating cooking is given in the input operation unit 40, the IH control unit 90 issues a drive command to the induction heating circuits 94L and 94R corresponding to the designated heating unit, and the IH coils 17L and 17R. drive the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.

An operation command signal is issued from the IH control unit 90 to the cooling fan drive circuit 62 .
Simultaneously with the start of driving the inverter circuits 81L and 81R or at a slightly delayed timing, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are started to operate.

The blowing capacities of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 may not be fixed. For example, depending on the temperatures of the temperature sensor TS8 of the heat sink 82 and the temperature sensor TS that detects the temperature in the vicinity of the integrated display section 30, the blowing capacity may be automatically changed between weak operation and strong operation.

In general, when the cooling fan is changed from weak operation to strong operation, there is a concern that the wind noise of the fan will become louder, resulting in noise. Therefore, the temperature detected by the two temperature sensors TS7 and TS8 and the operating strength of the cooling fans 60 and 61 are determined in advance as a correspondence table (data table) from data such as air blowing tests in advance. It is stored in the storage device 90R of the IH control section 90. FIG. The IH control unit 90 may change the operating conditions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 as needed according to the data table.

Note that the correspondence table (data table) for determining the operating intensity of the cooling fans 60 and 61 may be stored in the integrated control device MC instead of the storage device 90R of the IH control section 90. FIG.

When the first cooling fan 60 is operated, air is sucked from the ventilation holes 64 positioned directly below the first cooling fan 60 . Cooling air RF1 is pushed into the first air passage F1 from the air outlet 60A as indicated by an arrow in FIG.

When the second cooling fan 61 is operated, air is sucked from the ventilation holes 64 located directly below the second cooling fan 61 . Cooling air RF2 is pushed into the second air passage F2 from the outlet 61A as indicated by an arrow in FIG.

The ventilation holes 64 directly below the first cooling fan 60 and the ventilation holes 64 directly below the second cooling fan 60 are provided adjacently on the bottom surface of the upper case 16, but there are many of them. may be provided and the group of small holes may be shared.

A diode 79c (see FIG. 24) and other electrical components are mounted on the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80, and are cooled by the cooling air RF1.

Two IGBTs 79a and 79b (power control switching elements 83) are used for one IH coil 17L. Similarly, the power control switching element 83 is used for the other IH coil 17L.

These two power control switching elements 83 generate heat during the induction heating operation, but are continuously cooled by the cooling air RF1.

The cooling air RF3 travels rightward while cooling parts such as various switches arranged in the input operation unit 40 that receive input operations, the liquid crystal display screen, the display unit drive circuit 63, and the like.

As indicated by the arrow in FIG. 20, the cooling airflow RF1 changes its direction upward when it leaves the outlet FO of the cover 70, but the cooling airflow RF2 joining from the front side also has momentum, so cooling There are two main types of airflow: one that travels leftward over the cover 70 like the air RF3, and one that travels in the direction of the filter circuit board 54, as shown in the cooling air RF4.

The cooling air RF3 flows below the right IH coil 17R and then directly below the left IH coil 17L. In this process, the two IH coils 17R, 17L are cooled. Generally, the temperature of this type of IH coil rises to around 250° C. to 300° C. during induction heating. Therefore, as described above, cooling is performed with cooling airflows RF3 and RF4, which are a combination of the two cooling airflows RF1 and RF2.

As described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 20, the exhaust window 52A is present in the left-hand range from the left-right center line CL1 over a length indicated by LF. Therefore, after passing through the filter circuit board 54, the cooling air RF4 travels leftward, passes through the through hole 53A, and is discharged from the exhaust window 52A.

The cooling air RF3 that has cooled the IH coils 17L and 17R also changes its direction to advance toward the exhaust window 52A, which is the final exhaust port, passes through the through hole 53A, and is discharged from the exhaust window 52A.
As a result, the cooling airflows RF3 and RF4 flowing inside the upper case 16 reach the exhaust port 20. As shown in FIG. Then, it is discharged from the exhaust cover 19 into the room.

As described above, the group of parts such as the IH coils 17L and 17R and the inverter circuit board 80 is a group of parts to be cooled inside the upper unit 100 . A space for cooling these component groups is positioned in front of the exhaust window 52A. In other words, there is a gap GP1 that communicates with the exhaust port 20 downstream of the exhaust window 52A. It does not serve as a cooling space.

Since the exhaust window 52A is installed only at a position away from the filter circuit board 54, cooking liquid or water overflowing from a pan or the like (hereinafter referred to as "foreign matter") may be left on the exhaust cover 19 during operation. ) flows, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from passing through the exhaust port 20 and reaching the filter circuit board 54 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent electric leakage and malfunction. As described above, the filter circuit board 54 and the gap GP1 are separated by the partition plate 52 except for the exhaust window 52A. The term "separation" as used herein does not mean separation that can completely block the flow of air, but means separation that can prevent foreign substances dripping or flowing down from above from entering.

(Basic operation during microwave cooking)
Next, in the heating cooker 1 according to Embodiment 1, the basic operation of each part when microwave heating is performed will be described.

When the main power switch 97 is turned on, microwave cooking can be started without actually performing induction heating cooking in the upper unit 100 . However, once the main power switch 97 is turned off, the main power switch 97 must first be turned on in order to start microwave cooking.

For safety reasons, the main power switch 97 is automatically reset after a certain period of time (eg, 30 minutes) from the last time any of microwave heating, oven (heating chamber 113) heating, and induction heating is finished. is released. Alternatively, the main power switch 97 is automatically opened when the temperatures of the top plate 15, the heating chamber 113, and the like all fall below a specified value. We have adopted these safety measures.

Next, after opening the door 114 and putting food or other cooking material into the heating chamber 113 and occupying the door 114, the input key 43MS (see FIG. 16) is operated on the central operation unit 40M of the input operation unit 40 to When a command to start microwave heating cooking is issued, the integrated controller MC issues a drive command to the microwave heating control unit 130 to start the operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 .

The microwave heating control unit 130 drives the inverter circuit 121A of the magnetron 122 to radiate microwaves from the oscillation unit 122A. Note that the microwave here means a radio wave of 2450 MHz±50 MHz.

The generated microwaves are guided into the antenna case 124 from the waveguide 123 . Since the driving motor 126 of the antenna 125 starts operating at the timing when the microwave is oscillated, the microwave introduced into the antenna case 124 is caused by the action of the rotating antenna 125 and the rotating shaft 126A. It can be propagated evenly inside the heating chamber 113 . The operation of this type of antenna and the rotating shaft 126A is described in detail in, for example, Japanese Patent No. 4836965 and Japanese Patent No. 5674914, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, air is sucked into the case A150 from the air intake F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 and becomes cooling air RF5. The cooling air RF5 first cools the inverter circuit board 121 and cools various electric components mounted on the circuit board.

The cooling air RF5 then passes through communication openings B138B and A138A provided at two upper and lower portions of the case A150.

The temperature sensor 160 is installed in the mounting hole of the right partition plate 166A. A minute gap of several millimeters or less exists between the outer shell case of the temperature sensor 160 and the rim of the mounting hole. The cooling air RF5 passes through this gap and is blown out from the detection window 161 of the temperature sensor 160 into the heating chamber 113 .

On the other hand, most of the cooling air RF5 that has cooled the inverter circuit board 121 is guided to the passage 172 from the communication port A138A. In other words, it is guided to the passage 172 formed between the upper case 169 covering the upper part of the heating chamber 113 and the partition plate 171 . This passage has the effect of preventing the high heat from being transmitted to the upper unit 100 side even if the upper heater 163A above the heating chamber 113 reaches a high temperature exceeding 300.degree.

When the position of the communication port 173 is viewed from the communication port A138A in plan view, the communication port 173 is located diagonally across the passage 172 rearward. That is, the communicating port is located at the furthest position.
Therefore, the entire air in the passage 172 is guided to the communication port 173 and introduced into the exhaust duct 102 extending horizontally rearward through the communication port 173 (see FIG. 11).

After exiting the exhaust duct 102, the cooling air RF5 merges with the cooling air RF6 rising from below and is discharged from the air outlet 20 into the room.

Next, the flow of the cooling air RF6 by the fourth cooling fan 129 will be described.
When the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, air is sucked into the case A151 from the air intake B152B formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 and becomes cooling air RF6. The cooling air RF6 first cools the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 and reaches the duct 153 through the heat radiating portion 122H.

The cooling air RF6 then enters the gap GP5R adjacent to the right side of the heating chamber 113 from the duct 153 and advances forward. Then, as shown in FIG. 13, it is introduced into the heating chamber 113 through the introduction port 201 .

Since the inlet 201 is located near the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113, part of the cooling air RF6 also reaches the inside of the door 114, eliminating fogging of the sealing plate 196 on the heating chamber 113 side. .

The cooling air RF6 introduced into the heating chamber 113 has the purpose of expelling steam, smoke, etc., generated from objects to be heated such as food inside the heating chamber 113 . Specifically, the cooling air RF6 moves rearward from the front portion of the heating chamber 113 as shown in FIG. 11, and finally reaches the communication port 174 formed in the rear ceiling portion.

The cooling air RF6 is introduced from the communication port 174 into the exhaust duct 102 extending horizontally rearward. After exiting the exhaust duct 102, the cooling air RF6 joins so as to be attracted by the ascending current of the cooling air RF5, and is discharged into the room from the exhaust port 20. - 特許庁

Even if the cooling airflow RF5 and the cooling airflow RF6 had the same initial airflow volume, the cooling airflow RF5 had a higher air velocity when discharged from the duct 102 due to the difference in paths as in the first embodiment. . Therefore, it has the effect of inducing the cooling air RF5 emitted from below.

An exhaust fan may be provided in the middle of the exhaust duct 102 in order to forcibly discharge the cooling airflows RF5 and RF6 from the exhaust duct 102 . In the first embodiment, since such an exhaust fan is omitted, it can be realized at a low cost and is advantageous in considering the arrangement of parts inside the upper unit 100. FIG.

(Basic operation during oven cooking)
Next, in the heating cooker 1 according to Embodiment 1, the basic operation of the oven heating device 140 will be described.

When the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC presumes that some cooking will start and preliminarily starts. Therefore, even if induction heating cooking or microwave heating cooking is not actually performed in the upper unit 100, oven heating cooking can be started as it is. However, once the main power switch 97 is turned off, the main power switch 97 must first be turned on to start oven cooking.

Next, the door 114 is opened and the object to be cooked such as food is put into the heating chamber 113, and then the control menu for cooking using the heating chamber 113 is selected in the central operation section 40M of the input operation section 40. For example, in the case of grilling fish or meat, the heating time and heat power are set. However, if the automatic baking control menu is selected, the heating power is automatically set by the heating chamber control unit 159 . Selection of this control menu will be explained later with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43. FIG.

The heating chamber control unit 159 receives a command signal from the integrated controller MC, and controls the presence or absence of energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, the energization time period, the energization pattern (intermittent heating), thermal power, and the like.

The temperature sensor TS2 detects the temperature in the heating chamber 113 with an infrared signal and transmits the detected temperature data to the heating chamber controller 159. FIG. The heating chamber control unit 159 checks the difference between the target temperature and the detected temperature and controls the energization of both or one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B (feedback control). Temperature sensor TS2 may be referred to as a "second temperature sensor".

Also, when the control method for timer cooking is input from the central operation unit 40M, both or one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is energized for the set time. That is, the heating chamber control unit 159 does not limit the energization time according to the temperature data detected by the temperature sensor TS2.

After closing the door 114, when the central operation unit 40M (input key 43MS) of the input operation unit 40 is instructed to start cooking by heating in the oven (heating chamber 113), the integrated controller MC performs microwave heating control. A drive command is issued to the unit 130 to start the operation of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 . Alternatively, the heating chamber controller 159 may directly output a drive command signal to the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 .

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, air is sucked into the case A150 from the air intake F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. As shown in FIG. However, unlike microwave cooking, the inverter circuit board 121 does not generate heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF5 enters the communication port B138B and the communication port A138A without cooling the inverter circuit 121 substrate.

Then, the cooling air RF5 that has passed through the communication port A138A is blown into the heating chamber 113 through the gap between the outer shell case of the temperature sensor 160 and the rim of the mounting hole through the detection window 161 .

The cooling air RF5 that has passed through the communication port A138A is guided to the passage 172. As shown in FIG. Then, while cooling the upper case 169, it reaches the communication port 173 and is then introduced into the exhaust duct 102 (see FIG. 11).

On the other hand, the cooling air RF6 from the fourth cooling fan 129 passes through the heat radiation portion 122H of the magnetron 122 and reaches the inside of the duct 153 . However, since magnetron 122 is not driven, it does not generate heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 enters the gap GP5R with almost no temperature rise.

The cooling air RF6 is introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the inlet 201 as shown in FIG. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 reaches the inner portion of the door 114 .

Cooking objects such as food placed in the heating chamber 113 may generate steam, oily smoke, etc. due to radiant heat from the upper heater 163A or the lower heater 163B. Such water vapor, soot, and the like are carried to the communication port 174 by the cooling air RF6 moving rearward from the front portion of the heating chamber 113 as shown in FIG.

After that, the cooling air RF6 is introduced from the communication port 174 into the exhaust duct 102 extending horizontally rearward. After exiting the exhaust duct 102, the cooling air RF6 passes through the air outlet 20 and is discharged into the room while being attracted by the cooling air RF5 rising upward.

In the first embodiment described above, after the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC controls the overall condition of the heating cooker 1 up to a certain stage. When the section 40R is operated, the subsequent induction heating control is entrusted to the IH control section 90. FIG. However, the range controlled by the integrated control device MC may be changed with the IH control unit 90 .

Similarly, the range controlled by the integrated controller MC may be changed between the heating chamber controller 159 and the microwave heating controller 130 .

For example, after the selection of any cooking menu from induction heating, microwave heating, or oven (heating chamber) heating, the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, or the microwave heating control unit 130 Fundamentally, a control operation related to heating may be performed.

In that case, when a new input is performed by the input operation unit 40 (including heating stop), control is performed by the integrated control device MC once, but when the input is not performed, IH control is performed as it is. Cooking may be performed by any one of the unit 90 , the heating chamber control unit 159 , or the microwave heating control unit 130 .

(fried food cooking with induction heating source)
A specific example will be described below with reference to FIG.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart for explaining the operation of the IH control unit 90 when fried food cooking (automatic), which is a type of single heating cooking using the induction heating source 9, is performed in the heating cooker 1.

When the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R is operated to select “fried food (automatic cooking)” in the induction heating cooking menu, the temperature of the cooking oil put in the pan is detected by the temperature detection circuit 93. and automatically controls the heating power of the IH coils 17L and 17R.

When the user selects the fried food cooking (automatic) control menu, the IH control unit 90 sequentially executes a preheating process, a fried food cooking process, and a heating power increasing process, as shown in FIG. Further, on the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30, information showing necessary information and reference information (for example, estimated time required for preheating, etc.) appears in the form of characters, graphics, or the like. Also displayed is the fact that the priority cooking is for which the power is not restricted (suppressed) by the power control unit 72 .

Therefore, the user can recognize that electric power is preferentially secured during cooking of the fried food even if microwave heating or oven heating is used.

In the preheating process, if the target oil temperature set by the user is 180°C, the inverter circuit 81R (or 81L) starts driving at a predetermined thermal power value (maximum 1500W) in the preheating process, and the oil temperature rises rapidly. The temperature rises from the room temperature (for example, 20°C) to the target temperature T1 of 180°C.

Since this temperature rise is monitored in real time by the temperature detection circuit 93, when the temperature detection circuit 93 detects that the target temperature T1 (first temperature) has reached 180° C., the IH control unit 90 adjusts the amount of induction heating, that is, the inverter output, and tries to maintain the target temperature as it is (based on such temperature detection information, the control operation that automatically adjusts the high-frequency thermal power to approach the target temperature is hereinafter referred to as "temperature feedback control").

After that, a display request command is issued to the integrated control unit MC, and a voice guidance is given to the user via the voice synthesizer 95, such as "The temperature of the oil has reached a suitable temperature. Please add ingredients."

When a user puts an ingredient, for example a frozen croquette, into the oil, the oil is rapidly cooled by the cold ingredient from the time of its introduction, resulting in a sudden drop in temperature as shown in FIG. However, since the temperature detection circuit 93 monitors the movement of such a temperature drop, the heating power of the inverter circuit 81R (81L) is immediately increased to the predetermined heating power of 1500 W or 1800 W, and the oil temperature rises again. (temperature feedback control). In this way, when the target temperature T1 is reached again (or after a predetermined time has elapsed), the frying process is immediately shifted to the heating power increasing process.

In the thermal power-up process, control is performed so that the oil temperature is maintained between a second temperature T2 higher than the target temperature T1, which is 225°C, and an even higher upper limit temperature (third temperature) T3, which is 230°C. Device 90 controls inverter circuit 81R (81L).

As shown in FIG. 35, the thermal power value is intermittently driven at about 900W.
The process after reaching the first temperature T1 is called the "fried food finishing process", and is an important process for finishing the fried food crispy. If a sufficient amount of heat is not applied in the heat-increasing process, the fried food cannot be fried well. Note that the frying process is not limited to a predetermined time, so if the user presses the input key 44R (or the input key 45L), the frying process is completed.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the (automatic) fried food cooking control menu, the period from the fried food cooking process to the heating power-up process is defined as an "execution time zone of the priority cooking menu". Power reduction is prevented by starting the heating source or changing operating conditions. In other words, the induction heating IH control unit 90 always grasps whether or not the cooking menu being executed is in the "execution time period of the priority cooking menu", and if it is in the execution time period, It has a function to notify the effect to the outside.

As is clear from the above description, when a specific heating process is entered, the integrated control device MC does not issue a control signal to the IH control unit 90 each time, and the progress of the heating process is completely monitored by that IH control unit. It is entrusted to the control of the control unit 90 .

(Display of Integrated Display Unit 30)
Next, the relationship between the integrated display section 30 and various input keys of the central operating section 40M, the right operating section 40R and the left operating section 40L will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 42. FIG.

36A and 36B are explanatory diagrams showing changes in the display contents of the integrated display section 30. FIG. 37A and 37B are plan views of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L before and after induction cooking is started. FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in the display contents of the integrated display section 30 and the left display section 31L in the composite cooking mode. FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing changes in the display contents of the integrated display section 30 in the composite cooking mode. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing changes in the display contents of the integrated display section 30 in the composite cooking mode. FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing changes in display contents of the integrated display section 30 in the composite cooking mode. FIG. 42 is explanatory drawing 4 which shows the change of the display content of the integrated display part 30 in compound cooking mode.

FIG. 36 will be described. When the main power switch 97 is turned off, the integrated display section 30 is not activated, so no information is displayed.
With the main power switch 97 turned on, the integrated control device MC displays the display screen 1 of FIG.

In the display screen 1 of FIG. 36, 30A is a display text notifying that the power is on. 30B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for guiding to a dedicated recipe posting site via the Internet. 30C is a sentence explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code. The two-dimensional information 30C and the display text 30A are one type of "standby common information" 30N.

After display screen 1 of FIG. 36 is displayed, display screen 2A or 2B may be displayed automatically. In the display screen 2A, "caution against bumping" is one of warning displays. This "bumping" is, for example, when heating a viscous food (liquid) such as curry or stew, the inside of the food is overheated above the boiling point and suddenly A phenomenon that causes violent boiling. Hot liquid droplets can be hazardous as they erupt from the hot liquid. It is said that the timing and cause of the occurrence of bumping are contamination or impact from outside. Therefore, as shown on the display screen 2, when a metal pan or the like containing the food to be cooked is placed on the top plate 15 and induction-heated, attention is drawn to stirring the food to be cooked. ing. The information displayed in this alert is one type of "standby common information" 30N.

The three display screens of display screen 1, display screen 2, and display screen 3 shown in FIG. 36 may be called a common screen 30Z. Forms other than these three may be included in the common screen 30Z.

In the display screen 2B, 30E is a caution display warning that the inside of the heating chamber 113 is at a high temperature and that the inside of the heating chamber 113 should not be touched carelessly. When the integrated controller MC detects that the heating chamber 113 is not sufficiently cooled after the oven cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113, the state is automatically switched to the display screen 2.例文帳に追加Although the display screens 2A and 2B cannot be displayed at the same time, they may be displayed alternately at intervals of several seconds to call attention to both the bumping and the high temperature display. Note that the voice synthesizing device 95 may be used to call attention to the display screens 2A and 2B in parallel by voice.

As is clear from display screens 1 to 2A and 2B in FIG. 36, these displays are performed using the entire display screen 30D. In other words, instead of partially displaying in any one of the first area 30L to the third area 30R described above, in order to secure a display area as large as possible, the first area 30L to the third area 30R cannot be identified. , so that it appears to the user that the entirety of the integrated display section 30 is being displayed.

The display screen 1 to the display screens 2A and 2B correspond to ST3 in the operation steps of FIG.
After a certain period of time, for example 10 seconds, has passed since the display screens 1 to 2A and 2B were displayed, the display content changes to prompt the user to select a heating source (heating means) (corresponding to operation step ST4 in FIG. 28). .

Therefore, next, the case of performing induction heating in the upper unit 100 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a plan view of the left display section 31L and the left operation section 40L for the left heating source 17HL. The state shown in FIG. 37(A) is before the input key 43L1 for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL is pressed.

When the input key 43L1 is pressed, the integrated control device MC detects that the user has selected the left heating source 17HL, and as shown in FIG. show that it has been accepted.

Since the input key 43L4 for selecting timer cooking is also waiting for an input, the individual light emitting section 27L1 is flashed. In addition, since the selection of the control menu is also waiting for input, the individual light emitting section 27L2 immediately behind the input key 44L is blinked. In FIG. 37B, the asterisk figure indicates that the light-emitting display section 27 is turned on or blinking.

If the default heating power of the heating power display section 67L, which indicates the heating power stage during induction heating cooking, is set to "3", the light emitting section of the heating power display section 67L is continuously illuminated from the left side until the heating power of 3 is displayed (or change blue to red) and show the user the magnitude of the firepower.

When the user wants to change to a thermal power that is not the default setting thermal power, if the input key 43L2 or 43L3 is pressed, the thermal power decreases or increases by one step each time the key is pressed. or red light emitting part) expands from the left to the right or shrinks from the left to display the thermal power adjustment status to the user.

Next, FIG. 38 will be described.
38A and 38B are diagrams for explaining the operation of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L of the heating cooker 1. FIG.
In FIG. 38, the diagrams (A) to (C) drawn on the left side are schematic diagrams of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L, and the state before the start of operation is shown in FIG. is.

As described with reference to FIG. 37, when the input key 43L1 is operated, the light emitting display section 27L3 emits light as shown in FIG. 38(B).
In the state of FIG. 38(B), the light-emitting display section 27L4 is also lit, and it can be seen that the input functions of both the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are valid. Therefore, if the left input key 43L2 is pressed twice, the heating power is lowered. It should be noted that the increase or decrease in thermal power can be seen from the luminous state of the thermal power display section 67L immediately behind.

A case where the "single (heating) cooking mode" using the induction heating source 9 is performed will be described.
When the input key 43L2 of the left operation unit 40L is pressed once, it means that the heating power level below 1 is specified, and the integrated control unit MC determines that the control mode of "warming" has been specified, and the integrated display unit 30 A "third specific screen" 30ST for keeping warm is displayed on the display screen 30D.

Further, when the input key 44L is pressed once while the third specific screen 30ST is displayed, "fried food" is selected as one control menu from the control menu group, and the "third specific screen" corresponding to fried food is selected. screen" 30ST is displayed.
Since the default temperature is set to 180° C. on the “third specific screen 30 ST” for fried food, the characters “fried food 180° C.” may be displayed as the additional information 331 .

When the input key 44L is pressed once again, the "third specific screen 30ST" for preheating is displayed.
Information such as how to use the preheating menu and the recommended control mode for fried eggs may be displayed as the additional information 331 .

As can be seen from the display screen 3A of FIG. 38, a "schematic diagram of a container such as a pot" 280 is displayed in the first area 30L, and the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined to form a wide horizontal display area. It's becoming In addition, in the space where the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined, the letters "Heat retention (left IH)" are displayed, indicating that the temperature of the heat retention is approximately 80°C. An explanation 30F indicates that the control menu is recommended for soup or the like. At the stage of this display screen 3A, nothing is displayed on the left side display portion 31L.

Next, in the state of FIG. 38(B), when the input key 44L is pressed, one control menu is selected from the "IH control menu group" each time it is pressed, and is displayed as in the display screen 3B. . The example of the display screen 3B indicates that "fried food" has been selected. After a certain period of time has elapsed in the state of FIG. 38(B), the control menu for the left heating unit 17HL is determined to be "fried food", and the IH coil 17L is started to drive.

In the case of the display screen 3B, since the default temperature is set to 180° C., the characters “fried food 180° C.” are displayed on the left side display section 31L as shown in FIG.
This temperature of "180°C" means that the cooking oil is heated by the IH coil 17L and maintained at around 180°C. In addition to this, the integrated display unit 30 displays "that the preheating temperature has been reached", and is expected to have the effect of prompting the user to put in the ingredients.

If it is desired to change the preheating (target) temperature of the fried food, the input key 43L2 can be used to lower the temperature, and the input key 43L3 can be used to raise the temperature.

As can be seen from the display screen 3B, the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the display screen 30D are combined to form a horizontally long wide display area. A warning 30G indicating the start of preheating and not leaving the cooker 1 during the preheating operation is displayed in the space provided.

Next, when the input key 44L is pressed in the state of FIG. 38(B) to select "appropriate temperature" as another control menu, a display screen 3C is displayed. As shown in this display screen 3C, the control menu "appropriate temperature" is a control mode recommended for warming the pan or the like to the set temperature (default temperature is 180° C.) and for cooking eggs. The recommendation sentence 30H is displayed so that such a meaning can be understood. At the stage of the display screen 3C, the text information "preheating 180° C." is displayed on the left side display portion 31L.

The "third specific screen" 30ST is displayed in the individual display sections (left display section 31L, right display section 31R) adjacent to the dedicated operation sections (right operation section 40R, left operation section 40L). Also good.

Next, FIG. 39 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display section 30 when the central operation section 40M of the heating cooker 1 is operated. It shows a scene in which the "composite cooking menu" is executed.
Since the display screen 4ST is the default display screen determined by the integrated control device MC, "warm up" is displayed in the front-rear center of the first area 30L.

As described with reference to FIG. 17, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the display screen 4ST of FIG.
As is clear from the display screen 4ST, a specific sentence 30J indicating the name of the control menu, "warm", is displayed in a large size in the center of the first area 30L in the front-rear direction.

Behind the specific sentence 30J of "heat up" displayed in the center of the first area 30L, the characters "oven" are displayed in a slightly smaller size, and conversely, the characters "manual range" are displayed in front.
Then, when the user selects the control menu, the next candidates are found to be "Oven" and "Manual Range". If, at this stage, the (left) input key 43M1 located at the position corresponding to the first area 31L is pressed once, the character "warm" (specific sentence 30J) changes to "manual range".
Further, when the (right) input key 43M1 located at the position corresponding to the first area 31L is pressed once, the characters "warm" are changed to "oven".

In FIG. 39, the display screen 4ST, which is the default display screen, displays the target temperature information 30T of "80° C." in the second area 30M. When microwave heating is performed at this target temperature, if the temperature of the food is 80°C, the microwave heating is automatically stopped when the temperature sensor TS1 detects 80°C.

In order to increase the target temperature (80° C.) of the second area 30M to 85° C., the right input key 43M2 located just before the second area 30M is operated once. Conversely, if it is desired to lower the temperature to 75° C., the left input key 43M2 should be operated once.

A mountain-shaped symbol 30UP is displayed above the number of the target temperature (80° C.) of the second area 30M. Similarly, below the number of 80° C., a downward pointed (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed.

Since the shape of the symbol 30UP and the (right) input key 43M2 of the central operation unit 40M are similar, the user is instructed to operate the right input key 43M2 in order to increase the temperature, heating power, etc. is easy to understand.

Conversely, since the shape of the (left) input key 43M2 of the central operation unit 40M is similar to that of the 30DN, the user is told that the left input key 43M2 should be operated to lower the temperature, heating power, etc. is easy to understand. This correspondence rule is also applied to the relationship between the display of the third area 30R and the pair of left and right input keys 43M3. In this way, a device is employed to avoid operation errors (wrong input keys) during user input operations.

In FIG. 39, 30K is a heating source display section that displays in characters that the heating source is the microwave heating source 189 . As described above, 30P is reference information indicating that the control menu is recommended for warming side dishes. The contents of this reference information may be separate additional information 30Q, and two or more types of information may be alternately displayed on the display screen 30D for several seconds.

Next, FIG. 40 will be described.
FIG. 40 is another schematic diagram for explaining the display operation of the integrated display section 30 when the central operation section 40M of the heating cooker 1 is operated to execute the composite cooking menu.

The display screens 5ST, 50UPN, 50DN1, etc. shown in FIG. 40 are all one type of the second specific screen 30SC.
When the control menu is set to "manual range", the display screen 5ST is the default display screen determined by the integrated control device MC.
That is, on the second specific screen 30SC of the linked cooking menu, one cooking menu (in this case, "range manual" and the default value of the control condition (in this case, microwave output 500 W, heating for 1 minute) are set. displayed.

As described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 39, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the display screen 4ST of FIG. 39 is displayed on the integrated display section 30 as one of the second specific screens 30SC. Next, when the input key 43M1 on the left side of the central operation unit 40M is operated several times, the specific sentence 30J changes to "range manual" and the display screen 5ST of FIG. 40 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. .

As can be seen from the display screen 5ST, the specific text 30J of the RG control menu "Range Manual" is displayed in a large size in the front-rear center of the first area 30L.

In the display screen 5ST, the microwave output value (watt value) information 30X of "500 W" is displayed in the second area 30M. Also, in the adjacent third area 30R, microwave heating time information 30MY of "1 minute 00 seconds" is displayed. As can be seen from this display screen 5ST, it is included in the composite cooking menu, but since it is known from the beginning that only the microwave heating source 189 is used in this "range manual", it is shown in FIG. Such a heating source display section 30K (indicating that it is the microwave heating source 189 by characters) may not be displayed.

If the microwave output value (watt value) of 500 W in the second area 30M of the display screen 5ST is to be lowered by one step to 200 W, the left input key 43M2 is operated once.

Similarly, in order to lengthen the heating time of the second area 30R to 1 minute and 10 seconds, the right input key 43M3 located just before the third area 30M is operated once. Conversely, if it is desired to shorten the heating time by one step to 50 seconds, the left input key 43M3 should be operated once.

In the display screen 5ST of FIG. 40, the mountain-shaped symbol 30UP is not displayed above the number of the output (500W) in the second area 30M. Similarly, below the number of 500W, a downward pointed (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed.

The display screen 5DNN in FIG. 40 indicates the minimum heating power (100 W) and the shortest time (10 seconds), and the display contents of the first area 30L are omitted.
The symbol 30UP is displayed only above the minimum firepower (100W) on the display screen 5DNN, indicating that only firepower greater than this firepower can be selected. Similarly, the symbol 30UP is displayed only above the number of the shortest time (10 seconds), and the symbol 30DN is not displayed. That is, here again, the symbol 30UP indicates that a shorter time cannot be selected.

Next, FIG. 41 will be described.
FIG. 41 is still another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display section 30 when cooking in the composite cooking mode is performed. In other words, the display content of the second specific screen 30SC shows a situation in which it changes at any time according to the user's input operation.

In the state of the display screen shown in FIG. 40, when the left input key 43M1 corresponding to the first area 30L is operated once, as shown in FIG. You can change it to boiled vegetables.

The display screen 6ST in FIG. 41 is the default display screen. In the first area 30L, the specific sentence (name) 30J of the control menu, "boiled under leafy vegetables", is displayed in a large size.
Information 30V indicating the microwave output level is displayed as "standard" in the second area 30M, and if the cooking is started as it is, the food will be heated at 500W. The microwave output value in the case of "standard" may be 500 W, but may be other than this. In other words, the "standard" heating power level when using the microwave heating source 9 differs depending on the individual compound cooking menu, and is not always the same output (eg, 500 W).

In the first area 30L of FIG. 41, a heating source display section 30K is displayed that indicates in characters that the heating source is the microwave heating source 189, as described with reference to FIG. As described above, 30P is a recommendation (reference information) indicating that the control mode is recommended for warming side dishes. The contents of this recommendation sentence may be other additional information 30Q, and two or more types of information may be alternately displayed on the display screen 30D for several seconds.

Next, FIG. 42 will be described.
FIG. 42 is still another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display section 30 when cooking in the composite cooking mode is performed. The display content of the second specific screen 30SC shows a situation in which it changes at any time according to the user's input operation.
FIG. 42 shows a scene in which an RG control menu called "RG cooking" is selected.

As described above, the “RG cooking” is “range and grill cooking” in which the heating chamber 113 is used to heat and cook by combining microwave heating and oven heating. A pattern in which microwave heating is performed first and the food is heated to a certain extent and then heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, a pattern in which the food is heated in the reverse order, and a pattern in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed at the same time. There are 3 types. The term "simultaneously" as used herein does not mean that the timings of both the heating start and the end are completely the same, and includes the case where the heating operations overlap with each other.

In the display screen 7ST1 shown in FIG. 42, the heating control is such that first, both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are simultaneously driven to heat for 1 minute, and then heating is performed only by the oven heating source 188 for 5 minutes ( time control) pattern.
The reason why the abbreviation "RG" is used instead of the term "range &grill" is to minimize the number of characters that can be displayed in the first display area 30L. This is because if more characters are to be displayed, the exclusive area of the first area 30L will increase.

In the display example shown in FIG. 42, the heating time information 30S is displayed in minutes in the second area 30M, and the subsequent grill cooking heating time information 30GY is also displayed in minutes (however, it is shorter). When the time is up, it is displayed in units of 10 seconds).
The heating time information 30S shown in the first area 30L and the heating time information 30GY in the third area 30R can be appropriately changed by the input keys 43M2 and 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M.

In FIG. 42, the display screen 7ST2 shows a heating control (time control) pattern in which first the microwave heating source 189 alone heats for 1 minute (microwave output 500 W), and then the oven heating source 188 alone heats for 5 minutes. is the case. This display screen 7ST2 is a default display screen.

Next, FIG. 43 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a schematic plan view for explaining the display contents of the display screen 6ST shown in FIG. 41 and the operation of the central operation unit 40M.

As shown in FIG. 43, the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 are arranged in the central operation unit 40M. 27M4 emits light with a unified emission color.

After that, when the input key 43M1 for selecting the composite cooking mode is operated, the display screen 6ST shown in FIG. 41 is displayed in the first area 30L by default.
At this display stage, all four input keys 43M1 to 43M2 corresponding to the first area 30L and the second area 30M can accept input. Therefore, the two individual light emitting units 27M3 and 27M4 corresponding to those four input keys 43M1 to 43M2 continue to emit light.

On the other hand, after the display screen 6ST, the display screens 6UP1, 6DN1, etc. are displayed as shown in FIG. It changes to blinking, as indicated by the circle. Then, the presence of the input key 43MS is emphasized with light. When the user touches this input key 43MS, the mode shifts to the composite cooking mode. In the case of heating means other than the induction heating source 9, the heating operation is started immediately. However, in the case of the induction heating source 9, it is necessary to press the input key 43R1 or 43L1 once after shifting to the composite cooking mode. It should be noted that even in the cooperative cooking mode, after shifting to the cooking process using the induction heating source 9, the same is true.

Thus, in the first embodiment, when the input functions of the input key 43M1 serving as the menu selection section and the input key 43MS serving as the start selection section are enabled, the first light emission mode (continuous light emission) is applied. is provided with light emitting means (display section driving circuit 63) for causing the individual light emitting sections 27M1 to 27M6 to emit light.
When the reference information 30P is displayed, the integrated control unit MC causes only the light emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the start selection unit (input key 43MS) to emit light in the second light emission mode (blinking). be.

With the above configuration, the user can easily identify the state of waiting for a command to start the heating operation (of compound cooking) by blinking of the light emitting portion 27M6. In addition, since the light emitting part 27M6 is also compatible with the touch input key 43MT capable of stopping the microwave heating and oven heating operations, the light emitting part 27M6 emits light even after the heating operation has started. In this case, the input function of the input key 43MT is valid, and a command to stop heating can be issued by touch operation.

At the stage when the main power switch 97 is turned on, the display section driving circuit 63 may cause only the light emitting section 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS serving as the start selection section to blink from the beginning. Further, the other light emitting units 27M1 to 27M4 may continuously emit light in a form different from that of the input key 43MS of the start selection unit.

(Basic operation during heat cooking in the linked cooking menu)
Next, the basics of the cooperative cooking menu of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 51. FIG.
FIG. 44 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display section and the central operation section during cooperative cooking. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing the respective input operations and processes when implementing the cooperative cooking menu and when implementing the independent cooking menu. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking menu and the independent cooking menu. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking menu and the independent cooking menu.

As shown in FIG. 44, when the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP as shown in FIG. 44 is displayed.
Next, when the input key 43M1 is touched, the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 (first specific screen 30SP) displays further additional items for specifying cooking items to be cooked in a plurality of cooperative cooking menus. Identification information (including graphic marks and names of cooking items) 330 is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 44, the number of cooperative cooking menus displayed on the integrated display section 30 is three. That is, they are hamburger, gratin, and roast beef, and the number of items to be cooked in this way is called the "number of cooperative cooking menus."

In this Embodiment 1, the number of cooperative cooking menus is eight. Details will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG.

In FIG. 44, 330 is identification information, which in the first embodiment is information indicating the name of the food to be cooked (eg, hamburger). 331 is additional information presented to the user regarding cooking the food (for example, hamburger).

In FIG. 44, the additional information 331 is displayed as "When the start button is pressed, heating of the left IH starts". This means that the induction heating can be started in the left heating section 17HL by pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation section 40M.

As shown in FIG. 44, identification information 330A indicating the name of another cooking item (for example, gratin) is displayed above the identification information 330 displayed on the first specific screen 30SP.
Under the identification information 330, identification information 330B indicating the name of another cooking item (for example, roast beef) is displayed. In the following description, reference numeral 330 is used when identification information is collectively referred to.

Similar to switching the display of the "composite cooking menu" explained in FIGS. 39 to 43, by operating the two input keys 43M1 described above, the name of the food to be cooked (for example, hamburger) that can be cooked in the linked cooking menu The display of the identification information 330 indicating is changed by moving upward or downward sequentially.

In this Embodiment 1, there are eight types of food to be cooked in total. Therefore, for example, if the left input key 43M1 is operated eight times, the identification information 330 of all the food to be cooked is cycled. Conversely, if the right input key 43M1 is operated eight times, the identification information 330 of all the cooking items is cycled. This will be explained in detail in FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG.

The default display is, as shown in FIG. 44, a display screen in which identification information 330 indicating the name of the food to be cooked, "hamburger", is displayed in the center of the front-rear direction (of the first area 30L). By operating the input key 43M1 in this state, the identification information of another cooking object can be displayed in the center (corresponding to step STR4 in FIG. 53).

The "first specific screen" 30SP referred to in Embodiment 1 refers to the display screen of the integrated display section 30 shown in FIG. The display contents of the first specific screen SP are not always the same because they change from time to time depending on the user's input to the central operation unit 40M and the operation state of the heating cooker 1 .

Main information displayed on the first specific screen 30SP is as shown in FIG.
(1) Identification information 330 is displayed in the first area 30L. In principle, this identification information 330 is always displayed even if the heating process in the cooperative cooking mode progresses. However, as shown in FIG. 67, there are some exceptions.
(2) A pair of heating section specifying sections 333R and 333L corresponding to the heating sections of the induction heating source 9 used are displayed in the first half of the oblong area obtained by combining the second area 30M and the third area 30R. be. Either one of the heating portion specifying portions 333R and 333L can be selected by operating the input key 43M2. The selected heating portion identifying portions 333R and 333L change in color and brightness like outline characters as shown in FIG. 44, for example, to indicate the selected heating portion.
(3) In the rear half of the horizontally long area obtained by combining the second area 30M and the third area 30R, a horizontally long strip-shaped process display section 332 is displayed. This process display section 332 is continuously displayed during a period from before transition to the cooperative cooking mode until all cooking processes in the cooperative mode are completed. In addition, according to the progress of the cooking process, the contents are updated as needed by a method such as reversing black and white or changing the color so that the current cooking process can be understood. More on this later.
(4) Additional information 331 that serves as a reference for cooking is displayed on the right side of the heating section specifying sections 333R and 333L, but is exceptionally displayed in a wide range covering the entire integrated display section 30. (See FIG. 67).

When the input key 43MS is pressed in a state where the identification information 330 of the target cooking item (for example, hamburger) is displayed in the center of the first area 30L, the linked cooking menu for cooking the cooking item is displayed. has been issued to the integrated control device MC (corresponding to step STR7 in FIG. 53).

In cooking (for example, hamburger) using the induction heating source 9 in the cooking process 1, either one of the left heating section 17HL and the right heating section 17HR may be recommended according to the cooperative cooking menu. For example, in order to recommend the use of the left heating unit 17HL, the default display screen of the first specific screen 30SP for hamburger is as shown in FIG. 44, and the left heating unit 17HL is recommended.

The additional information 331 changes according to the progress of the cooking process and also changes depending on the food to be cooked. The example shown in FIG. 44 explains that it is necessary to operate the input key 43MS in order to start induction cooking.

Next, FIG. 45 will be described.
FIG. 45 shows the operation after step ST4 in the flowchart for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker shown in FIG.
After the step (ST4) of displaying/informing to prompt the selection of the heating means, the right heating unit 17HR can be used to select cooking by heating with the right operation unit 40R (SP1). Also, the left heating unit 17HL can be used to select cooking by heating with the left operating unit 40L (SP2).

Further, after step (ST4), the central operation unit 40M can select cooking by the microwave heating source 189 (SS1). In addition, the central operation unit 40M allows selection of heat cooking using the heating chamber 113 with the oven heating source 188 (SS2).

In FIG. 45, composite cooking can also be selected by the central operation unit 40M, but the illustration is omitted to simplify the explanation.

From step (ST4) onwards, cooperative cooking can be selected by operating the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M (SR1).
As described above, "coordinated cooking" means that a single cooking object (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.; hereinafter the same) is heated in different places and independently under heating operation conditions (hereinafter, "control conditions"). ) refers to cooking using two types of heat sources that can be set.

In the “co-cooking” of the first embodiment, the heating locations for one cooking object are above the top plate 15 and inside the heating chamber 113 . The two types of heating sources whose heating operation conditions can be set independently are the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 . Note that the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 perform heating operations in the same time zone or with a time difference.

"Cooperative cooking" in the first embodiment is composed of "first cooperative cooking" and "second cooperative cooking".
The “first cooperative cooking” means first cooking in the left heating section 17HL by the induction heating source 9 and then cooking in the heating chamber 113 using microwaves. The "first cooperative cooking menu" (SR2A) defines the cooking process of this "first cooperative cooking", that is, the cooking sequence.

On the other hand, the “second cooperative cooking” means first (collaborative) cooking by microwave heating or the oven heating source 188 inside the heating chamber 113, or by these two heating sources, and then induction cooking. Heat cooking is performed in the left heating section 17HL by the heating source 9. FIG. The "second cooperative cooking menu" (SR2B) defines the cooking process of this "second cooperative cooking", that is, the cooking sequence. In the case of this "second cooperative cooking menu", normally (default setting conditions), either one or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, which are the heating sources used first, , the integrated control device MC performs processing for restricting operations corresponding to menus other than the linked cooking menu.

The selection of the "first cooperative cooking menu" and the "second cooperative cooking menu" (SR2A, SR2B) is not performed by the user on a case-by-case basis. For example, the name of cooking "hamburger") is selected, the integrated control device MC automatically selects (determines).

In this Embodiment 1, the heating units of the induction heating source 9 that are used when executing the "cooking" menu are both the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL. Therefore, when, for example, only the left heating unit 17HL is used during the execution of the cooperative cooking menu, the right heating unit 17HR can be freely used during execution of the cooperative cooking menu regardless of the cooperative cooking. . However, if the power control unit 72 finds that the total value of the power consumption during cooperative cooking and the power consumption of the right heating unit 17HR used individually exceeds the limit value, the right heating unit 17HR is used. or forcibly lowering the thermal power is issued by the integrated controller MC.

As shown in FIG. 45, at the stage (SR5) when the induction heating cooking is started, the user operates the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operating section 40L to specify the heating power (power consumption) in the left heating section 17HL. (SR6). Also, the heating operation can be stopped at an arbitrary timing by operating the input key 43L1 (SR7).

In the cooperative cooking menu, basically the cooking time of the left heating unit 17HL is not set in advance, so the user can cook for a desired time.

In addition, at the stage (SR5) when induction heating cooking is started using the right heating unit 17HR, the user operates the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R to increase the thermal power (power consumption) in the right heating unit 17HR. can be specified (SR6).

Furthermore, when the right heating section 17HR is being driven, the heating operation can be stopped at any timing by operating the input key 43R1 (SR7).
Furthermore, when the left heating unit 17HL is being driven, the heating operation can be stopped at any timing by operating the input key 43L1 (SR7).

When the heat cooking process by the left heating unit 17HL is ended by the input key 43L1, the cooking process of the cooperative cooking menu proceeds to the next process (described in detail in FIG. 46).
When the induction heating process is finished in the cooking process of the first cooperative cooking, it is necessary to operate the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M again (SR8). When this cooperative cooking restart command is issued (SR9), the microwave output value during microwave heating may be increased or decreased by operating the input key 43M2 or 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M (SR10). However, there are cooking menus in which the microwave output is fixed at, for example, 500 W and the cooking process proceeds.

When the microwave heating cooking is ended by the input key 43MT, all the cooking steps of the linked cooking menu are ended (SR11). Although it is not the cooking process of the linked cooking menu, after this, the user may operate the central operation unit 40M to further perform microwave heating cooking (using the linked cooking menu or single heating cooking menu).

Next, FIG. 45 will be described.
SS1 to SS11 in FIG. 45 show operation steps when microwave heating cooking and oven heating cooking are performed by the central operation unit 40M.
As described above, when the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the single cooking menu (see FIG. 25) for microwave heating and oven heating is displayed on the integrated display unit 30. FIG. Therefore, by pressing the input key 43M1, one compound cooking menu can be selected (SS3).

Next, when the input key 43MS is pressed, execution of one compound cooking menu is commanded (SS4), and cooking in the "single cooking mode" can be started (SS5). In the explanation of FIG. 25, the compound cooking menu was explained, but the menus such as "microwave manual" are only for microwave heating, and actually include single heating cooking.

In other words, the "single cooking mode" in FIG. 45 is a term for distinguishing from the above-described "cooperative cooking mode", and does not mean that the heat source to be used is always single or single (in the case of single there is also).
For example, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the RG control menu "RG cooking" can be displayed on the integrated display unit. Cooked food can be heated by microwave and radiant heat at the same time). This "RG cooking" is classified in the compound cooking menu in the first embodiment.

After starting microwave heating or oven heating, the heating conditions (for example, heating time) may be changed (SS6).
When the input key 43MT is pressed, the execution of one control menu is commanded to stop (SS7), and the microwave heating or oven heating operation is stopped (SS8).

Next, FIG. 45 will be described.
SP1 to SP8 in FIG. 45 show operation steps when performing induction heating cooking with the right operation section 40R and the left operation section 40R.
For example, by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L, it is possible to select cooking by the right heating unit 17HL (SP2). Then, even if the input key 43L2 or 43L3 is not operated, the induction heating control menu is automatically determined after a certain period of time (SP3). The "induction heating control menu" referred to here is the IH control menu.
In other words, the induction heating control menu is completely different from the "linkage cooking menu" displayed on the integrated display section 30 by the first specific screen 30SP by operating the input key 43MC.

Execution of one control menu is commanded (SP4) and cooking in the "single cooking mode" can be started (SP5).
"Single cooking" in step SP5 means that the induction heating source 9 alone is used as the heating source.
If the user operates the input key 43R2 or 43R3 to issue a command to change the thermal power of the induction heating after induction heating has started, the integrated controller MC changes the thermal power, which is one of the control conditions. (SP6). In this first embodiment, there is no dedicated switch button or input key for the user to instruct the start of induction heating, but a dedicated switch or input key for giving a command to start heating may be provided.

When the input key 43R1 is pressed, an instruction to stop execution of one induction heating control menu is issued (SP7), and the induction heating operation is stopped (SS8). The input key 43R1 is used both for selecting a heating source and starting the operation and for finishing cooking, as described above.

Next, FIG. 46 will be described. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing the priority relationship between the cooperative cooking menu and the independent cooking menu using the induction heating source. Moreover, it is a schematic diagram which shows that the heat source used receives the restriction|limiting of operation|movement in the case of cooperative cooking.
The cooperative cooking menu shown in FIG. 46 is the "first cooperative cooking menu" described in FIG.

In the "first cooperative cooking menu" of this example, the induction heating source 9 is first operated as the first heating means, and after the heating operation is completed, the microwave heating source 189 is operated as the second heating means. Also, there is a case where the oven heat source 188 is operated as a third heating means simultaneously with the second heating means.

As shown in FIG. 46, one cooperative cooking menu consists of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is the period from when the input key 43MC is operated to execute the cooperative cooking menu to when the input key 43MS is pressed.

P2 is the heat cooking period (cooking step 1). Note that this cooking process 1 may include a "preheating process" (see FIGS. 61 to 64), which will be described later, although the food to be cooked is not actually heated.
P3 is a pause period from when the operation of the first heating means is temporarily stopped to when the cooking by the second heating means is started, since the cooking by the first heating means is switched to the cooking by the second heating means. is. The length of this pause period depends on the user's operation timing. In other words, the earlier the user gives the command to start the second cooking process 2, the shorter this pause time will be.
P4 is a heat cooking period (cooking step 2) by the second heating means (or the third heating means in addition to this).

As is clear from FIG. 46, at the stage of selecting the linked cooking menu, that is, the identification information 330 indicating the cooking name of the linked cooking menu is displayed on the integrated display section 30 (on the displayed first specific screen 30SP). ) is displayed, the left operation unit 40L of the left heating source 17HL cannot be used.

Specifically, at least the input key 43L1 among the various input keys of the left operation unit 40L is disabled by the integrated control device MC. This "invalidation" means that the input key 43L1 does not transmit a valid command signal to the integrated control device MC, and even if a valid command signal is transmitted, the integrated control device MC does not accept the command signal. It has both the meaning of not treating it as a valid command signal. In any case, the left heating unit 17HL cannot be selected.

At the same time, when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, that is, when the identification information 330 is displayed, the right operation section 40R of the right heating section 17HR becomes unusable. However, if the right heating unit 17HR has already been used for another cooking menu (heating operation continues), it is determined that the right heating unit 17HR cannot be used in the cooperative cooking mode (integrated control device MC), the above-mentioned "use prohibited" processing is not performed.

Therefore, the left heating unit 17HL is "occupied" by the selection of the linked cooking menu. Also, from the perspective of the entire induction heating source 9, the use of only a portion (left side) of the two heating portions is "restricted". When the right heating unit 17HL is not being used for other cooking, the right heating unit 17HR is also occupied.

As shown in FIG. 46, in the cooking step 1 (P2), after the induction heating is started, the user operates the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L to increase or decrease the heating power. can do. In the cooking process 1, it is first necessary to press the input key 43L1 (see FIG. 19) of the left operating unit 40L, and at this point, the left operating unit 40L sends an induction heating start command to the integrated controller MC. In addition, the operation of the left operation unit 40L is omitted, and the induction heating cooking is started at a certain thermal power (weak or standard thermal power) after a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) from the point of input by the input key 43MS. Also good.

Further, in the cooking step 1 (P2), the user can immediately stop the induction heating operation by touching the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L.
When this operation for stopping the heating operation is performed, the cooking process 1 ends immediately. However, the cooperative cooking mode itself is not canceled.

Therefore, the heating operation (linked cooking mode) by the left heating unit 17HL can be started. However, the operation for resuming the heating operation is the same as in the case of the single heating mode as described with reference to FIGS. There is Therefore, when the user designates the heating power, by pressing the input key 43L2 or 43L3, the heating power is decreased or increased by one step each time the key is pressed, and the desired heating power can be set.

As shown in FIG. 46, after the cooking step 1 (P2), the induction-heated food is moved to the heating chamber 113. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that the metal dish used for induction heating can be housed in the heating chamber 113 as it is and subjected to microwave heating. Since the food inside cannot be heated by microwaves, it is necessary to transfer it to a lidless metal container, heat-resistant glass, or porcelain container.

During the heating pause period (P3), when the door 114 is closed and the input key 43MS is pressed, the microwave generated by the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating source 189 is guided into the heating chamber 113, and the heating and cooking period (P3) begins. Cooking step 2) (P4) begins.

After starting with the input key 43MS, the control conditions for microwave heating can be arbitrarily set by the user by operating various input keys 43M2 and 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M (default values can be changed). ). However, depending on the individual cooking items targeted by the cooperative cooking menu, the change of the control conditions may be partially restricted. For example, since the output of microwave heating is basically 500 W, the control program is designed so that it cannot be increased or decreased during the cooking process.

As shown in FIG. 46, after the cooking step 2 (P4), even if the microwave heating control conditions (for example, heating time) are not set, a predetermined time (default time) specified in the control program is set. There are two types: one is to automatically end the cooking process when the process has passed, and the other is to end the cooking process at an arbitrary stage by the user operating the input key 43MT of the central operation unit 40M.

Also, once the cooking process 2 is stopped, it is treated as having finished all the cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode. Therefore, since the linked cooking mode is canceled, the input key 43M1 is operated again to set the control menu such as "manual range", and additional cooking is performed in the same manner as when the combined cooking menu is executed. can also

As shown in FIG. 46, in this cooperative cooking mode, only the left heating section 17HL of the first heating means 9 is used, so during the preparation period (P1) to the cooking process 2 (P4), the right heating section 17HR use is not subject to any restrictions. Therefore, during the period of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, another heat cooking can be performed simultaneously in the right heating section 17HR. For example, the right heating unit 17HR may be used to select, for example, "water boiling" in the IH control menu using the right operation unit (first operation unit on the right) 40R.

Next, FIG. 47 will be described. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing the priority relationship between the cooperative cooking menu and the independent cooking menu (IH control menu) using the induction heating source, and is an example of slightly changing the configuration of FIG.
As shown in FIG. 47, during cooperative cooking, the start timing at which the operation of the heating source used (in this case, the induction heating source 9) is restricted may be changed.

In the example shown in FIG. 47, at the stage of selecting the linked cooking menu, that is, at the time when the identification information 330 indicating the cooking name of the linked cooking menu is displayed on the integrated display section 30 (first specific screen 30SP), , has not yet occupied the left heating source 17HL. Therefore, the left operation unit 40L of the left heating source 17HL can be operated for input, and can be used in the independent cooking menu (IH control menu).

That is, during the preparation period P1, a new input operation (single cooking mode) can be performed by the left operation unit 40L.

When the input key 43MS is used to command the start of cooking of the linked cooking menu, at least the input key 43L1 among the various input keys of the left operation unit 40L is disabled by the integrated controller MC. This point is different from that of FIG. The meaning of "invalidation" in FIG. 47 is the same as that explained in FIG.

Next, basic operations of the cooperative cooking menu and the composite cooking menu of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 51. FIG.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the input operation and the display until transition to the combined cooking mode by the combined cooking menu and the cooperative cooking mode by the cooperative cooking menu. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between various processes and operations of cooking (cooperative cooking mode) by the cooperative cooking menu. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between various processes and operations of cooking (cooperation cooking mode) according to the cooperation cooking menu. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between various processes and operations of cooking (cooperative cooking mode) by the cooperative cooking menu.

FIG. 48 will be described.
The operating procedure up to the transition to the composite cooking mode requires four inputs as shown in FIG. That is, the first to fourth inputs are performed using the input keys 43M1, 43M2, 43M3 and 43MS. When the mode is shifted to the composite cooking mode, it is necessary to operate an input key 44R or 44L, which is called a menu key, in order to actually heat the induction heating source 9. FIG.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48, four times of input are required for the operation procedure up to transition to the cooperative cooking mode. That is, the first to fourth inputs are performed using the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2 and 43MS.

When the cooperative cooking mode is entered as described above, the user operates the input key 44R on the right operating section 40R after operating the input key 43M2 on the central operating section 40M.
When the user selects the left heating section 17HL, the user operates the input key 43L1 on the left operating section 40L. In this way, after shifting to the linked cooking mode, the operation unit corresponding to the heat source can command the start of the heating operation. In addition, the heating stop operation can also be performed from the same operation unit, so that the user does not get lost in the positions of the operation unit and input keys when starting and ending heating.

Next, FIG. 49 will be described. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram in which the horizontal axis shows various processes of cooking (cooperative cooking mode) according to the cooperative cooking menu, and the vertical axis shows the operations of the main components such as the user's operation and the display section. .

FIG. 49 shows the process until cooperative cooking is started.
In item A on the left side of FIG. 49, "user operation" indicates various input operations on the central operation unit 40M and the right operation unit 40R. In this "user operation" step, five operations A1 to A5 are performed.

A1 "pressing the relay button" means operating the input key 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode. A2 "menu selection" is to select one desired menu in the cooperative cooking mode. This selection is made with the input key 43M1.

A3 "Heat source selection" is an operation to select either one of the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9, and is performed with the input key 43M2. This example shows a case where the right heating unit 17HR is selected.
"Pressing the start button" in A4 means operating the input key 43MS.
"Pressing the right IH menu button" in A5 means operating the input key 44R of the right operation unit 40R.

In item B on the left side of FIG. 49, "cooking process" indicates the type of process up to execution of the cooperative cooking mode. The process referred to here is different from the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 .
B1 "Selecting a linked cooking menu" indicates a step of selecting an item to be cooked and selecting an operation program for the linked cooking menu corresponding to the item to be cooked.
"Grill heat source standby" in B2 indicates the period during which the oven heat source 188 is on standby. "During heating" in B3 indicates the induction heating period by the right heating unit 17HR.

In item C on the left side of FIG. 49, "left IH display section" refers to the left display section 31L.
"Lights out (no operation is accepted)" in C1 means that no information is displayed on the left side display section 31L. As described above, until the time of the input commanding the start of transition to the cooperative cooking mode (operation A4 in FIG. 49), the user is performing the input operation while looking at the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode. be. Therefore, since the user may use the left heating unit 17HL in the cooperative cooking mode, the display screen of the left display unit 31 is not activated as part of making the left heating unit 17HL "occupied". At the same time, the input function of the left operation unit 40L is not accepted.

C2 "turn off (accept normal operation)" means that no information is displayed on the left side display section 31L. However, at the stage where the input commanding the start of transition to the cooperative cooking mode (operation A4 in FIG. 49) has passed, the input operation on the first specific screen 30SP has been completed. Therefore, it has been decided that the user will use the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode, and the possibility of using the left heating unit 17HL has disappeared. Therefore, there is no need to put the left heating unit 17HL in the "occupied state". For this reason, at this stage, the input function of the left operation unit 40L can be accepted. When the input key 43L1 of the left operating section 40L is actually pressed, single heating cooking using the left heating section 17HL can be selected.

In item D on the left side of FIG. 49, "right IH display section" refers to the display content of the right display section 31R.
"Lights out (no operation is accepted)" of D1 means that no information is displayed on the right display section 31R.
As described above, until the time of the input commanding the start of transition to the cooperative cooking mode (operation A4 in FIG. 49), the user is performing the input operation while looking at the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode. be. Therefore, since there is a possibility that the user uses the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode, the display screen of the right display unit 31 is not activated when the right heating unit 17HR is set to the "occupied state". At the same time, the input function of the right operation unit 40R is not accepted.

After that, when the time point of the input commanding the start of transition to the cooperative cooking mode (operation A4 in FIG. 49) has passed, the input operation of the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode has been completed.
The "heating standby state)" of D2 refers to a state of waiting for the user's operation A5 after the user has decided to use the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode. In other words, it is at the stage of waiting for a command to start the cooking process 1 by the right heating unit 17HR.

The "preheating display" of D3 means displaying information on the preheating state on the right display section 31R. For example, to display information on the actual temperature rise until the preheat (target) temperature (e.g. 180°C) is reached.

In item E on the left side of FIG.
The "initial screen of cooperative cooking" of E1 indicates that the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display section 30 (see FIG. 71).
"Menu change" in E2 means operating the input key 43M1 to select one target cooking item from among the linked cooking menus, and selecting the corresponding linked cooking menu (Fig. 72). reference).

E3 "Change selected heating source (select right IH)" refers to selecting the right heating unit 17HR while looking at the first specific screen 30SP. This selection is performed with the input key 43M2 (see FIG. 72). ).
E4 "right IH menu button pressing guidance display" is called a menu key, which is arranged on the right operation unit 40R in order to start cooperative cooking on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30. This means that it is necessary to operate the input key 44R that is present. In other words, the user is recommended to press the input key 44R in order to start the cooking process 1 of cooperative cooking (see FIG. 73).

The "IH preheating display" of E5 indicates that the right heating unit 17HR has started the preheating operation. As described above, the right display section 31R displays information about the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature of 180° C. is reached, for example. On the other hand, in the integrated display section (central display section) 30, information (additional information 331) such as "IH preheating" or "preheating completed" is displayed in the first specific screen 30SP ( See Figure 73).

In item F on the left side of FIG.
As indicated by F1 to F5, when "hamburger" is selected as the cooperative cooking menu and cooked, a total of five voice notifications are made.
The notification content of F1 is, for example, "This is a hamburger steak. It will be cooked on the IH and then finished on the range grill." In other words, although the first specific screen 30SP also displays the food to be cooked and the cooking process, the user is notified of the same information by voice.

The notification content of F2 is, for example, "This is deep-fried chicken. Cook it on the range grill and then finish it on the IH." That is, in response to the user's menu selection operation A2, the result of the linked cooking menu selection and the explanation of the cooking process are displayed in real time.

The notification content of F3 is, for example, "Right IH". That is, since the user has performed the right IH (right heating unit) 17HR in operation A3, the result of the selection of the heating source is immediately notified.

The notification content of F4 is, for example, "heating will start when the right IH menu button is pressed". In other words, the user is requested to perform an operation A4 of the start button (input key 43MS) following the menu selection operation A3. When this operation A4 is performed, an operation of the "menu button" on the right operation unit 40L is requested. The menu button here is the input key 44R.

The notification content of F5 is, for example, "Start preheating the pot at 180°C".
After the cooperative cooking is started in the right heating unit 17HR, the heating operation of the right heating unit 17HR is started, and the temperature of the heated object N (not shown) such as a pan placed on the top plate 15 reaches the target temperature 180. °C, and this fact is notified.

In item G on the left side of FIG. 49, "left IH driving section" refers to the operation of the inverter circuit 81L.
In item H on the left side of FIG. 49, "right IH driving section" refers to the operation of the inverter circuit 81R.
The "preheating process" of H1 indicates that the inverter circuit 81R is driven and the preheating process is being performed.
In item J on the left side of FIG. 49 , the “range grill drive unit” refers to the operation of the heating chamber control unit 159 that controls the energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B that constitute the oven heating source 188, and the operation of the microwave heating source. 189 refers to the operation of the microwave heating control unit 130 . In other words, it generally shows the operation of the driving unit for carrying out the above-described "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).

Next, FIG. 50 will be described. This FIG. 50 shows a case of cooking "hamburger" in the cooperative cooking menu. Similar to FIG. 49, the horizontal axis indicates various processes in the cooperative cooking mode, and the vertical axis indicates the user's operation and the operation contents of the main components such as the display section.

The meanings of items A to J on the left side of FIG. 50 are the same as those explained in FIG.
In FIG. 50, the content of the operation in A11 is to cook a hamburger steak by first selecting the right heating section 17HR as the cooking step 1 (corresponding to the cooking step B11 in FIG. 50) and pressing the input key 44R called a menu button. is to press

A12 "IH off/on button depression" means that the user first selects the right heating unit 17HR as an input switch and presses the input key 43R1 in order to end the hamburger cooking step 1.

A13 “open the grill door” is an operation for the user to open the door 114 .
A14 "pressing the start button" means pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
A15 "pressing the time button" means pressing the input key 43M2 of the central operation unit 40M.

A16 "pressing the start button" means pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
A17 “pressing the cancel button (cancelling during grill heating)” means pressing the oven heating source 188 .
A18 "pressing the cancel button" means pressing the input key 43MT of the central operation unit 40M. By operating the input key 43MT, all the series of heating operations in the cooperative cooking mode are completed (cancellation of the cooperative cooking mode).

In item B (cooking process) in FIG. 50, B11 "IH heating process" indicates an induction heating process in the right heating unit 17HR selected by the user.
The "grill heating standby step" of B12 indicates the period during which the oven heating source 188 waits until the user's operation A14 is performed.
B13 “grill heating step” indicates a heating step using the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 .
B14 "grill heating extension waiting step" indicates a waiting period during which the user waits for a judgment as to whether or not to issue an extension step after the grill heating step of B13 is temporarily completed.
The "extended heating step" in B15 means that the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven (energized) again because the user performed operation A16 (pressing the start button) during the grill heating extension waiting step in B14. start). The extended heating process is started by pressing the enter key 43MS.

As shown in FIG. 50, the "extended heating step" B15 can be performed not only once but many times if the user performs operation A16 (pressing the start button). However, if A18 "Press cancel button" is performed once, the linked cooking mode will be canceled at the time the input key 43MT is operated. and microwave heating source 189 must be operated in the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).

In item C (left IH display section) in FIG. 50, C11 "preheating display" is to display the target preheating temperature in the preheating step in the right display section 31R or the left display section 31L (FIG. 76, FIG. 79). For example, a preheating target temperature (for example, 180° C.) is displayed.

C11a-C11d indicate progress displays 1-4. For example, progress display 1 is a display of "preheating", and "progress display 4" is a display of "appropriate temperature". This "appropriate temperature" indicates that the object to be heated (pot, etc.) N is heated to the preheating target temperature (for example, 180°C). During the period of the preheating display (C11), progress displays 1 to 4 (C11a to C11d) are performed according to the progress of preheating (temperature rise). In FIG. 50, the preheating state display C11 by the left heating section 17HL is performed on the left display section 31L.

The “cooking step” of C12 indicates that the object to be heated N is being cooked after the left heating unit 17HR reaches the preheating target temperature (for example, 180° C.). That is, it is displayed that the cooking process 1 has started.

Item E (central display section) in FIG. 50 indicates the display contents of the integrated display section 30 .
The "IH preheating display" of E11 indicates that preheating has been started by the left heating section 17HL on the first specific screen 30SP displayed on the integrated display section 30 (see FIG. 74).

The "IH heating display" of E12 indicates that the left heating unit 17HL is ready for heating because preheating is completed (see FIG. 74). It indicates that it is the stage to proceed to the process.

E13 "grill door open/close operation guidance display" is to prompt the user to move the food to be cooked to the heating chamber 113 (where the cooking process 2 is performed) since the induction heating (cooking process 1) has been completed (Fig. 75). reference).

E14 "Alternate display of heating power change display and start induction display" indicates that the heating power in range grill cooking (combined heating) in the heating chamber 113 can be changed, and furthermore, grill heating cooking in such a heating chamber is displayed. , start button (input key 43MS) (see FIG. 76).

The "grill heating display" of E15 indicates that the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 is being heated by either or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 (cooking step 2). (See FIG. 77). In the first embodiment, both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are simultaneously driven to simultaneously heat the food from the inside and outside by the synergistic effect of microwaves and radiant heat.

E16 "alternate display of extension operation guide display and end operation display" indicates that the grill heating step B13 has been completed, so that the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) and the grill can be heated again. be. Also, if the user does not desire extended heating, pressing the cancel button (input key 43MT) displays that the linked cooking mode can be terminated without extended heating (see FIG. 78). These two types of information are alternately displayed, for example, at intervals of several seconds in the first specific screen 30SP.

The "time setting display" of E17 displays the result of setting the extended time when the heating cooking time is extended by the input key 43M2 and the grill is heated again (see FIG. 79). After this time setting display, the "grill heating display" E15 and the "alternate display of extension operation guide display and end operation display" E16 are performed.

In item F (notification means) of FIG. 50, F11 "Start preheating the pot at 180° C." is to notify by voice that the right heating unit 17HR has started the preheating process in the IH heating process B11. be.
F12 "The right IH has reached the set temperature, please start cooking" indicates that the preheating by the right heating unit 17HR has reached the target temperature (for example, 180° C.), and the right operation unit 40R is operated to start heating. It encourages

F13 "The pan is hot. Please be careful not to burn yourself and put the food into the chamber." It should be moved to the heating chamber 113 immediately, and the top plate 15 and the like are hot.

F14 "Press the start button to start cooking on the range grill" informs that the input key 43MS can be operated to start cooking on the range grill.
F15 "Begin cooking range grill finish standard" informs that the cooking process 2 of the range grill is started and cooking (for example, hamburger) is completed. It should be noted that "start standard" means that the heating power for microwave grill cooking is "standard".

The notification of F16 is to notify that the cooking on the range grill is finished and that the cooking time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2). In addition, if the cancel button (input key 43MT) is operated, it is also notified that the series of linked cooking modes will end without extended heating. Furthermore, since the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is high, the user is reminded to clean the inside of the refrigerator after it cools down.

The notification of F17 is to notify that after the cooking step (B13) of the range grill is finished, the user will operate the extended heating to start further heating for 2 minutes and 20 seconds. After the notification of F17, the notification of F16 is performed again. If the user further instructs extended heating, such notifications F16 and F17 are repeated.

In item G (right IH driving section) in FIG. 50, G11 indicates the induction heating operation for the preheating step (B11).
G12 shows the induction heating operation for the cooking step 1 that follows the preheating step.

In item J (microwave grill driving unit) in FIG. 50, J11 indicates the period during which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven, and the cooking process 2 is executed during this period.
J12 indicates the period during which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven for the extended heating step.

Next, FIG. 51 will be described. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between various processes and operations when "fried chicken", which is one of the cooperative cooking menus, is performed in the cooperative cooking mode.
As in FIGS. 49 and 50, the horizontal axis indicates various processes in the cooperative cooking mode, and the vertical axis indicates the user's operation and the operation contents of the main components such as the display section.

In FIG. 51, the operation content of A21 of item A (user's operation) is to first select the left heating unit 17HL as the cooking process 1 (cooking process B11 in FIG. 50 corresponds to the cooking process B11) in order to cook fried chicken. , pressing an input key 44R called a menu button.

The operation of A22 indicates the operation of opening the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 . At this stage, induction heating (preheating) has already started in the left heating section 17HL.
The operation of A23 is called "depressing the start button" and is to press the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
By this operation of A23, the "range grill drive unit" is driven, and the grill heating step B23 is performed. In addition, the “range grill drive unit” refers to the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 .

Before the IH preheating step G21 by the left heating portion 17HL ends, the grill heating step B23 of the “range grill driving portion” in the heating chamber 113 is started.
Since the temperature of the heating chamber 113 cannot be raised immediately by energizing the oven heating source 188 in this manner, the time required to start energizing the oven heating source 188 is have decided.

The operation of A24 indicates the operation of opening the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 after the grill heating step B23 by the "microwave grill driving unit" is completed. Thereby, the object to be cooked (food) can be taken out from the heating chamber 113 .

On the other hand, before the door 114 is opened and the object to be cooked (food) is taken out from the heating chamber 113, the cooking utensil for fried chicken (such as a special pot) is heated in the left heating unit 17HL (cooking step G22), and the cooking oil is added. heating up.

The operation of A25 is to operate the input key 43M2 called a time button in order to repeat the grill heating step B23 by the "range grill drive unit".
The operation of A26 is to press the input key 43MS to restart the grill heating step B23.
The operation of A27 is to press the input key 43MT in order to terminate the grill heating step B23 at an arbitrary point in the middle. This cancels the cooperative cooking mode.
The operation of A28 is to press the input key 43L1 to end the heating operation by the left heating unit 17HL.

Next, in FIG. 51, item B (cooking process) will be described.
B21 is an IH preheating step, which is a step of preheating in the left heating section 17HL selected by the user.
B22 is a grill heating standby step, in which the user opens the door 114 and waits for the heating start operation A23.
B23 is a grill heating step.
B24 is an IH heating step, which is a step of heating in the left heating section 17HL selected by the user.

Next, in FIG. 51, item C (left IH display section) will be described.
The display of C21 indicates that the left heating unit 17HL is preheating.
The displays C21a to C21d are sequentially displayed during the period of the display C21. C21a is progress display 1, C21b is progress display 2, C21c is progress display 3, and C21d is progress display 4.
The display of C22 is the completion (cooking process) display of the preheating operation by the left heating unit 17HL.

Item E (center display portion) in FIG. 51 will be described.
The display of E21 is an IH preheating display, and it can be seen that the left heating unit 17HL is preheating (see FIG. 80).
E22 is a grill door opening/closing operation guidance display, which prompts the door 114 to be opened and the object to be cooked (food) to be put into the heating chamber 113 in order to perform the grill heating step B23 (see FIG. 80). .

E23 is an alternate display of a heating power change display and a start guidance display, and when cooking fried chicken by driving the "range grill drive unit", it is possible to adjust the heating power and to start cooking by pressing the input key 43MS. It displays what you can do (see Fig. 81).

E24 is a range heating display, which indicates that the heating power for cooking can be changed when the "range grill drive unit" is driven, and displays the remaining time until the end of cooking after it has started (Fig. 82). reference).
E25 is an alternate display of the extension operation guidance display and the IH preheating completion display.
After the cooking process B24, which is performed by driving the "range grill drive unit", is completed, the time is extended by the time button (input key 43M2) to display that the heat cooking time can be extended.
On the other hand, these two kinds of information indicating that the preheating by the left heating unit 17HL is completed are alternately displayed in the first specific screen 30SP, for example, at intervals of several seconds. (See Figure 83).

E26 is a time setting display. This is the content indicating that the cooking process B24, which is being performed by driving the "microwave grill drive unit", will be performed for, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds (see FIG. 84).
.

In FIG. 51, item F (informing means) will be described.
The notification of F21 is a voice notification that the preheating process has started by the preheating target temperature and the left heating unit 17HL, such as "Preheating of the pot will start at 180°C."
The notification of F22 is "Soon the left IH will reach the set temperature. Please put the food in the refrigerator". It notifies that the preheating by the left heating unit 17HL has reached the target temperature (for example, 180° C.), and prompts the user to put food or the like in the heating chamber 113 so that the range grill cooking in the heating chamber 113 can be started. be.

The notification of F23 has the content of "The heating of the range is started with the start button." In other words, it is notified that the input key 43MS is pressed to start range grill cooking.
The notification of F24 is, for example, "range, start finish standard". In this case, "finishing standard" means that the thermal power is at a standard level.

The notification of F25 relates to the user's operation when cooking on the range grill is finished. For example, the content is "The cooking of the range grill is finished. You can extend the cooking by pressing the time button. Please take out the food from the inside and start cooking with the IH."

The notification of F26 is for notifying that the cooking on the range grill is to be performed again after the cooking on the range grill is finished. For example, a notification saying "Microwave grill, starting 2 minutes" is made. This means that since the extension time is set to 2 minutes, cooking on the range grill will start for 2 minutes.

In item G (left IH driving unit), G21 indicates the heating operation (driving of inverter circuit 81L) for the preheating step by left heating unit 17HL.
G22 similarly indicates the heating operation (driving of the inverter circuit 81L) for the cooking process by the left heating unit 17HL.

In item J (microwave grill driving unit), J21 indicates the driving of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 . In addition, since the linked cooking mode described in FIG. 51 is for cooking fried chicken, it is sufficient to actually drive only the microwave heating source 189 .

Next, FIGS. 52 to 54 will be described.
FIG. 52 is a flow chart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device before transitioning to the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 53 is a flow chart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device until it shifts to the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode and determination results.

FIG. 52 will be described. Since steps ST2 to ST4 have been explained in the explanation of FIG. 28, they will be explained briefly.
Step ST2 is a step in which the IH control unit 90 determines whether or not there is an abnormality. The presence or absence of an abnormality in the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 is also diagnosed by the integrated control device MC.

At the stage of step ST3, the integrated display unit 30 is activated to display a message that "there is no abnormality and cooking can be started". At this stage, the integrated control device MC also confirms whether or not it has received a setting command from the input operation unit 40 for the upper limit value of the total power consumption.

In step ST4, the integrated control device MC uses the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 to provide notification and voice guidance for prompting selection of the heating means.
In this step ST4, the initial screen (display screen 1 to display screen 3) is displayed on the integrated display section 30, and caution information is also displayed (see FIG. 36).

Then, it is determined whether or not an input key (for example, 43M1) other than the input key 43MC has been operated (STC). If the input key 43MC has been operated, step STC becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step STR1. At step STR1, it is checked whether or not the "permission condition" is satisfied. For example, the usage status of the heat source used in the cooperative cooking menu is checked.
This permission condition and determination result will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

At step STC, the first input operation is checked. For example, before the input key 43MC is pressed, it is determined whether or not the individual heating cooking is selected by the left operating section 40L or the right operating section 40R, which are individual operating sections, and the compound cooking menu is selected by the central operating section 40M. determine if it has been

When the input key 43MC is operated for the first time within a certain grace period (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the "cooperation cooking menu" is started as described above.
On the other hand, if the input key 43MC has not been operated and the input key 43M1 has been touch-operated, the determination in step STC is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step ST5 (see FIG. 28).

In FIG. 52, steps STR1 and STR2 are steps for determining "permission conditions" for determining whether or not cooking according to the linked cooking menu is permitted.
Step STR1 is a step of judging "permission condition 1".
Here, "permission condition 1" is
(1) the peak cut value setting is 5000 W or more;
(2) When there is a power reduction command signal received from an external "integrated information management device" or "integrated power control device" (HEMS controller), etc., the peak cut value of the reduction command is 5000 W or more,
If these two conditions are satisfied, the determination at step STR1 is "Yes".

The "permission condition 2" in the next step STR2 is the following three.
(1) If the induction heating source 9 is provided with a central heating section, the central heating section is not in heating operation.
(2) one or both of the oven heating means 188 or the microwave heating means 189 are not in heating operation;
(3) Neither the right heating section nor the left heating section of the induction heating source 9 is in heating operation (or only one is in heating operation).

If the above three conditions are satisfied, step STR2 will result in a "Yes" determination. Then, it proceeds to STR3 (see FIG. 53).
If the determination is "No" in steps STR1 and STR2, the process proceeds to step STR12, and the integrated display unit 30 and voice synthesizer 95 notify the user that the cooperative cooking menu cannot be selected.

Here, the meaning of "5000 W or more" in the "permission condition 1" will be explained. To simplify the explanation, the following explanation does not particularly refer to the power consumption of electrical components other than the heat source, such as the upper cooling fan 60 and the like.

The reason why the required demand (preliminary securing of power demand) when implementing the cooperative cooking menu is 5000 W or more is as follows: It's for.
(1) Range operation (microwave heating source 189): 1000 W
(2) Oven operation: 2000 W (upper heater: 1000 W, lower heater: 100
0W)
(3) Range grill operation: 1500 W (microwave heating source 189: 500 W, upper heater: 1000 W)

On the other hand, the maximum electric power of the automatic cooking menu (fried food and appropriate temperature) of the cooperative cooking menu is 1500W.
Therefore, in the cooperative cooking mode, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 189, and the induction heating source 9 may operate simultaneously.
That is, the total power of the microwave heating source 189 "1000 W", the oven heating source 188 "1000 W (2000 W is alternately energized at 1000 W)", and the induction heating source 9 "1500 W" is the maximum power. is 3500W.

When the demand (prior securing of power demand) is 5000W:
When the right heating unit 17HR is heating at 3000 W (normal heating), the remaining demand is 2000 W.
When the cooperative cooking menu is executed from this state, since the remaining demand is 1500 W short of the electric power 3500 W required for cooperative cooking, the thermal power of the right heating unit 17HR can be reduced to 1500 W and cooperative cooking can be started.

If the demand (prior securing of power demand) is 4000W:
When the right heating unit 17HR is frying (maximum 1500W required), the remaining demand is 2500W.
If cooperative cooking is to be performed from this state, the remaining demand is 1000 W short of the electric power of 3500 W required for cooperative cooking, so the heating power of the right heating unit 17HR must be reduced. However, if the heating power is lowered while the automatic cooking menu is being executed, the cooking will not go well, so the heating power of the automatic cooking menu cannot be lowered.
Ultimately, 4000 W cannot ensure the necessary thermal power for the automatic cooking menu (fried food and two types of appropriate temperature).

As is clear from the above description, before starting the cooperative cooking mode, the electric power (3500 W) necessary for cooperative cooking and the electric power (1500 W) necessary for the automatic cooking menu of the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL It is necessary to determine (confirm) whether or not there is a demand of 5000 W, which is the total value (prior security of power demand).

Next, FIG. 53 will be described.
In the cooperative cooking menu of Embodiment 1, the induction heating source 9 is driven first, and then the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven (first cooperative cooking menu) (see FIG. 45). ).
There is also a second cooperative cooking menu in the reverse order.

The steps in FIG. 53 are common to both the first linked cooking menu and the second linked cooking menu.
At step STR3, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display section 30 to display the information of the cooperative cooking menu. As shown in FIG. 44, a "name of cooking item" (for example, "hamburger") 330 is displayed as one type of identification information for each linked cooking menu.

At the next step STR4, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M1 has been operated. As described with reference to FIG. 44, by operating the two input keys 43M1, the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food (for example, hamburger) that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking menu is displayed upward or downward. The display changes as you move. In this first embodiment, there are eight types of food to be cooked in total. Therefore, if the left input key 43M1 is operated once in the state of FIG. switch to

If the input key 43M1 is not operated (within a certain period of time), it is determined as "Yes" in step STR5, and the process proceeds to the next step STR5.
Step STR5 is a step of selecting one of the two heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L displayed on the first specifying screen. By operating a pair of input keys 43M1 on the left and right, the user can select either one of the heating section specifying sections 333R and 333L.

It should be noted that the right heating section 17HR may be set as a default, the heating section specifying section 333R may be displayed first on the first specifying screen 30SP, and the process may proceed to step STR7. In the example described with reference to FIG. 44, the left heating unit 17HL is set by default when performing hamburger steak by cooperative cooking. was displayed.

In the next step STR6, it is determined whether or not an input operation for canceling the selection of the linked cooking menu has been performed. If the input key 43MT is operated, the determination is "No" and the process returns to step ST4 (see FIG. 52).

On the other hand, if the input key 43MT has not been operated, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step STR7.
If the input key 43MS is operated, the operation program proceeds to step STR8.
In step STR8, control conditions such as the finally selected heating section (for example, the right heating section 17HR) and the output value during microwave heating being 500 W are displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, Proceeding to the next step STR9, the cooperative cooking mode is entered from this stage.

The display contents of the first specific screen 30SP in step STR8 include process information such as that the right heating unit 17HR is used in the first cooking process 1, and the microwave heating source 189 is used in the next cooking process 2. is displayed on the process display section 332 . The contents and changes of these display screens will be described later in detail.

When the cooperative cooking mode is entered, induction heating cooking is started at the time when the input key 44R of the right operation unit 40R is pressed. As described with reference to FIG. 29, the induction heating is not started immediately. Note that step MS4 shown in FIG. 29 follows from step STR9.

If the input key 43MS is not operated in step STR7, the determination is "No" and the process returns to step STR3. If, for example, 30 minutes have passed since the operation of the input key 43MC and the state is still circulating between steps STR3 to STR7, the main power is automatically turned off, or the step You may make it return to ST4 (refer FIG. 54).

Next, FIG. 54 will be described.
This FIG. 54 shows the judgment processing of steps STR1 and STR2 of FIG.
Step STX1 is the step of operating the input key 43MC.
The next step STX2 is a step in which the integrated control unit MC investigates the latest state of the heating cooker with respect to the permission conditions 1 and 2 described above.

The next step STX3 is a stage of determination processing corresponding to steps STR1 and STR2 in FIG. In this step STX3, the integrated control unit MC compares with the latest state of the heating cooker with respect to the permission conditions 1 and 2, and determines whether or not the permission conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied. .

In step STX3 of FIG. 54, notification 1 to notification 4 indicate the contents notified to the user by the speech synthesizer 95. FIG.
In addition, display 1 to display 4 indicate the contents displayed in the integrated display section 30. FIG. Note that these displays 1 to 4 are not displayed on the first specific screen 30SP displayed from the time of step STR3 in FIG. 53, but are displayed on the integrated display section 30 where the first specific screen 30SP is not displayed. It is. That is, the first specific screen 30SP is not displayed unless permission conditions 1 and 2, which are prerequisites for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode, are satisfied.

Next, FIG. 55 will be described.
The control mode of FIG. 55 is for a (second) linked cooking menu different from the (first) linked cooking menu of FIG. There are two heating sources used in this cooperative cooking menu of FIG. It is part 17HL. 55 differs greatly from that of FIG. 53 in step STR11.

In the above-mentioned "heat up" (range automatic) of the range grill cooking (compound cooking) menu, the non-contact (infrared) temperature measurement unit 158 detects the temperature of the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113. , the microwave oscillation is automatically stopped when the "target temperature" is reached. Therefore, when the heat from the previous cooking remains inside the heating chamber 113 and the temperature is high from the beginning, the integrated controller MC prohibits automatic microwave heating. The default value of the "target temperature" here is 80° C., but this can be set to a higher temperature side or a lower temperature side by the central operation unit 40M.

In step STR11, when the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is higher than the reference temperature (for example, 70° C.), the temperature measurement unit 158 detects the high temperature early and microwaves the microwave in an incomplete state of cooking. There is a concern that the heating will stop.

Therefore, in the control shown in FIG. 55, when the temperature of the heating chamber 113 exceeds the reference temperature, the right side display section 31R and the left side display section 31L display that the cooperative cooking cannot be executed at that time. (STR12). Furthermore, it may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as well. Further, it is more certain if the voice synthesizer 95 notifies by voice. The left and right display portions 31L and 31R are displayed because the user has not selected any of the left and right heating portions 17HL and 17HR at this stage.

In addition, since the first specific screen 30SP displayed when the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2 are satisfied is not displayed at this stage, it is displayed on the right side display portion 31R and the left side display portion 31L. Alternatively, it may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (STR12).
In other words, in FIGS. 52 and 54, the first condition (permission condition 1) and the second condition (permission condition 2) determine whether or not to shift to the cooperative cooking mode. It can be said that STR11 corresponds to the third condition (permission condition 3).

In this way, it is possible to inform the user that the heating source to be used first (in this case, the microwave heating source 189) cannot be used at the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking menu.

At the stage of step STR12, when displaying or notifying that the temperature in the heating chamber 113 is too high to start cooking, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 can be quickly lowered by opening the door 114. Information may be transmitted together.

FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated controller MC when the left heating section 17HL is used during execution of the cooperative cooking menu regardless of cooperative cooking.
In Embodiment 1 of FIG. 56, the heating source used in the cooperative cooking menu is first the right heating section 17HR of the induction heating source 9 as described in FIG. The heating sources are microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188 .

When the cooking process of the linked cooking menu has already progressed to the heating stage of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, the user wants to use the left heating section 17HL to perform another cooking. When the left operation unit 40L is operated, the integrated control device MC receives the operation signal (step SH1).

In the next step SH2, the user's input operation result is analyzed and it is determined whether or not the content corresponds to a predetermined prohibited control menu (hereinafter referred to as "prohibited control menu").

The "prohibition control menu" is determined in advance in consideration of the amount of power to be used (required for cooking). It is
Both (automatic) frying and rice cooking adopt a control method that is assumed to use a large amount of power in the cooking process. There is concern that power supply to the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188) may be disrupted.

For the above reasons, at step SH2, it is determined whether or not the "prohibition control menu" is applicable. In other words, a check is made as to whether it is a permitted control menu (eg "water boiler").

If the judgment of "No" is received in step SH2, the process proceeds to step SH8, and disallowing processing of the left heating unit 17HL is performed. Specifically, the fact that it cannot be used is displayed on the left side display section 31L, and the speech synthesizer 95 notifies it by voice.

On the other hand, if the determination of "Yes" is received in step SH2, the process proceeds to step SH3, where the maximum power consumption when using the left heating unit 17HL and the heat sources during cooperative cooking (microwave heat source 189 and oven heat source 188 ) is determined by the power control unit 72, and if the allowable maximum power value is exceeded, at this stage, the maximum power value is restricted and the use of the left heating unit 17HL is prohibited. To give permission.

It should be noted that even if the electric power used by the left heating unit 17HL (thermal power for induction heating) is reduced from the state of the heat source in which the cooking of the cooperative cooking menu is being executed, if the total electric energy allowed is exceeded, , the process proceeds to step SH8 described above, and the disallowing process of the left heating unit 17HL is performed. Specifically, the fact that it cannot be used is displayed on the left side display section 31L, and the speech synthesizer 95 notifies it by voice. The reason why it cannot be used is also notified by the voice synthesizer 95 .

If the judgment of "Yes" is received in step SH3, the process proceeds to step SH4, the drive mode of the IH coil 17L of the left heating unit 17HL is automatically determined, and the thermal power value set by the user or the thermal power selected by the IH control unit 90 values are determined.

Next, the driving of the inverter circuit 81L is started, and induction heating cooking is started (SH5). After that, it is monitored whether or not the stop command from the user is the input key 43L1 (SH6), and when the stop command is received, the induction heating operation is stopped immediately. Then, the end of cooking is displayed on the left display portion 31L. In addition, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the completion of cooking by voice (SH7).

FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when additional heating is performed after finishing the heating of the heat source used first in the cooking process of one linked cooking menu.

The control shown in FIG. 57 is for cooking in which the microwave heating source 189, which is used second, is driven for a period of time set by the user (for example, 5 minutes) in the cooperative cooking menu. For convenience of explanation, the operation of the oven heating source 188 is omitted.

In Embodiment 1 of FIG. 57, the heating source used in the cooperative cooking menu is, as described with reference to FIG. The heating sources are microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188 .

A scene in which the user uses the microwave heating source 189 for cooking according to one linked cooking menu described in FIG. 53 will be described.
After finishing the cooking process 1 in the right heating unit 17HR, when the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is operated next, the integrated controller MC receives the operation signal (step SJ1).

In the next step SH2, driving of the inverter circuit 121A is started (SJ2), and measurement of the set time for timer cooking (in this case, 5 minutes) is started (SJ3).
The output value of microwave heating is the default value (500 W), but the user can change the heating power by operating the central operation unit 40M (SJ4, SJ5).

On the other hand, the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, which constitute the oven heating source 188, are started to be energized by the heating chamber controller 159. FIG.
In the first embodiment, the energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is started at the same time as the oscillation operation of the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating source 189 is started.

The upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are energized while the magnetron 122 is oscillating. In other words, the food to be cooked is simultaneously heated by microwaves and electric radiation heat (cooking step 2).

As described above, the energization period of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is the same as the microwave heating period. The explanation of time is omitted.

In step SJ6, when the input key 43MT for instructing the stop of microwave heating is operated (SJ6), the driving of the inverter circuit 121A is stopped and the time measurement is also reset (SJ7).
When the input key 43MT for instructing the stop of heating is not operated, steps SJ4 to SJ6 and SJ10 are repeated within the set time of timer cooking. When the set time for timer cooking has passed, the process proceeds to step SJ7.

In step SJ8, a display is made for the user to decide whether or not the once-stopped microwave cooking is to be continued for a predetermined period of time or a period of time specified by the user. Specifically, on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, for example, "Would you like to extend the heating time? If you want to extend the heating time, please press the time key."

The reason why such an extension is allowed is that if the user judges that the heating is still insufficient as a result of looking at the heating state of the food to be cooked, it can be quickly heated (in this case, microwave heating and electric radiation heating) is resumed, and the food to be cooked is finished in a better state.

When the user presses the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, it is determined in step SJ9 that the operation signal has been received, and if the operation signal has been received, "Yes" is determined.
Then, the process returns to step SJ3. If the input key 43M3 is operated once before the input key 43MS is pressed, the cooking time is set to be extended by a fixed time (for example, 3 minutes), or if the input key 43M3 is pressed once, the cooking time is extended by 3 minutes. You may set the program, such as 5 minutes for 2 consecutive presses. Also, even if the cooking is started again, the heating operation can be immediately stopped by pressing the input key 43MT.

On the other hand, if the user does not press the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M (for example, if the user does not press it within "retention time: 15 seconds"), the process proceeds to step SJ11 to end the operation of the final cooking process of the linked cooking menu. . Then, the fact is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and the voice synthesizing device 95 also performs a notification operation (SJ11). If the door 114 is not opened even once from step SJ8 and the holding time has elapsed, the voice synthesizer 95 may issue an alarm to alert the user.

When the cooking process of the linked cooking menu is completed, the integrated control device MC automatically stores the control conditions for operating the microwave heating source 9, the micro heating source, and the oven heating source 188 in time series in the storage device MM. (At the time of this storage, the end date and time of the cooking process are recorded at the same time). Thereafter, when a predetermined command signal is received from the central operation unit 40M, the immediately preceding linked cooking menu and the control conditions stored are called from the storage device and displayed on the integrated display unit 30 to display the next linked cooking menu. It has a reproduction function that is used to implement the It should be noted that not only the previous linked cooking menu but also all cooking histories (including cooking execution date and time information) in the past several times or for a certain period of time (for example, one month) are called, and desired A configuration in which the user selects the item may be used. By pressing the input key 43KP to switch to the "function mode", the user can set the reproducibility of the cooking history.

As described above, since the oven heating source 189 also starts to be energized at the start of the RG cooking process, the integrated display section 30 displays whether or not to extend the heating time of the oven heating source 189 alone. do not display information about However, if the sequence is to first operate the microwave heating source 189 and then operate the oven heating source 188, or if they are operated in reverse order, the time extension of the microwave heating and the oven heating source The 188 time extensions may be separately configurable.

(Display and input operation part during linked cooking)
Next, FIGS. 58 to 81 will be described.
These drawings show the control operation of the input operation unit 40 and the display unit (the integrated display unit 30 and the left display unit 31L) when the cooperative cooking menu is selected.

FIG. 58 is a plan view showing the control operation of the input operation section 40 and the display section (integrated display section 30/left display section 31L) when the cooperative cooking menu is selected.
In the figure, the reference FG is the user's fingertip.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as shown in FIG. Three pieces of identification information 330, 330A, and 330B of names of cooking items, ie, "hamburger", "gratin", and "roast beef", are displayed at the same time.

In FIG. 58 and the following FIG. 59, illustration of the process display section 332 is omitted in the first specific screen 30SP.
Additional information 331 is displayed to the right of the identification information 330 . In the examples of FIGS. 58 and 59, the additional information 331 indicates that "induction heating can be started in the left heating section 17HL".

The individual light-emitting portion 27M6 adjacent to the input key 43MS blinks as indicated by the dashed circle in FIG. 56, guiding the user to operate this input key 43MS.
On the other hand, when the heating source first used in the cooperative cooking menu is the induction heating source 9 and its left heating section 17HL, the light emitting display sections 27L2 and 27L3 emit light as shown in FIG. .

Then, when the input key 43MS is operated, the cooperative cooking mode is entered. At this time, since the input function of the input key 43L1 is valid, when the input key 43L1 is pressed, the left heating section 17HL performs cooking.

At the same time, the heating power display section 67L indicating the heating power stage during induction cooking in the left heating section 17HL lights up (the number of lighting heating power display sections is determined by the default value).
Even if an operation to use the left heating unit 17HL individually is performed while the cooperative cooking menu is being executed, if the operation of the left heating unit 17HL is prohibited by the integrated control device MC as described above, There is no light emission from the light emitting display section 27L3 as shown in FIG. Also, the heating power display section 67L is not lit.

Furthermore, as described above, even if there is an operation to temporarily use the left heating unit 17HL for cooking unrelated to the cooperative cooking menu during the cooperative cooking mode, the left heating unit 17HL cannot be used. , is displayed in the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30 as reference information. For example, a display such as "The left IH cannot be used because cooperative cooking is in progress" or "The left IH and heating chamber cannot be used at present because cooperative cooking is in progress" is displayed.

As is clear from the above description, the operation unit (input key 43MS) for starting the execution of the cooperative cooking menu is located in the left and right central portions on the upper surface of the top plate 15, so that the user's eyes naturally gather at the center. . Selection of the linked cooking menu and guidance display up to the start of cooking are also centrally performed on the integrated display section 30 in the central portion.

Furthermore, at the stage where the cooking process 1 of the left heating unit 17HL, which is the first heat source, is finished, an input key 43MS for proceeding to the next heat source is also provided on the central operation unit 40M.
In other words, the main input operations such as selection of the linked cooking menu, start of the first cooking process 1, and start of the next cooking process 2 are all concentrated in the front left and right central portions (central operation portion 40M) of the heating cooker 1. can be done.

Next, FIG. 59 will be described.
FIG. 59 is a plan view showing the operation of the central operation unit 40M and the left operation unit 40L and the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP when the cooperative cooking menu of the heating cooker 1 is selected.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the integrated display unit 30 displays " "Hamburger", "gratin", and "roast beef" are displayed at the same time (display screen 8A).

Additional information 331 is displayed to the right of the identification information 330, 330A, and 330B. In the example of FIG. 59, the additional information 331 indicates that "induction heating can be started in the left heating section 17HL".

When the left input key 43M1 is pressed once again, the name of the food to be cooked (hamburger) displayed in the center of the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 moves forward, and is instead displayed forward. The identification information of "roast beef" is displayed in the center (display screen 8B).

Each time the left input key 43M1 is pressed once as described above, the identification information 330 (indicating the name of the food to be cooked) displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 is displayed one by one in a certain order. is updated with

When the right input key 43M1 is pressed, the display screen 8D in FIG. 59B is switched to the display screen 8C every time the input key 43M1 is pressed.
Although only four cooperative cooking menus are shown in FIG. 59, there are a total of eight cooperative cooking menus as described above. These display screens 8A to 8D are all the first specific screen 30SP.

Next, FIG. 60 will be described.
FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing types of cooperative cooking menus when the cooperative cooking menu of the heating cooker is selected.
As is clear from FIG. 60, the eight cooperative cooking menus are displayed in sequence on the first specific screen 30SP by operating the input key 43M1.

Next, FIG. 61 will be described.
FIG. 61 is a list showing the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP in the integrated display section when the cooperative cooking menu is selected.
As shown in FIG. 61, there are several types of process display portions 332 at the stage immediately before starting the cooking process, corresponding to eight types from hamburg steak to gratin.

As for the additional information 331, as shown in the additional information A and the additional information B, the entire cooperative cooking menu is unified. Note that the additional information A and the additional information B are alternately displayed at regular intervals (for example, every 5 seconds).
Furthermore, in the additional information B, the reason why the heating part of the induction heating source 9 to be used is displayed as "changeable" is that there are two heating parts, the left heating part 17HL and the right heating part 17HR.

FIG. 62 is a plan view showing control operations and display contents of the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30, and the left display unit 31L when the cooperative cooking menu of the heating cooker 1 is selected.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the integrated display unit 30 displays the first specific screen 30SP as shown in FIGS.
Identification information 330 of three linked cooking menus is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP. That is, as shown in FIG. 62, the identification information 300 of "hamburger" is displayed in the center of the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 in the front-rear direction. At the same time, the additional information 331 and the cooking process display section (cooking process information section) 332 are displayed in list form on the first specific screen 30SP.

When the identification information 330 of the linked cooking menu is displayed on the integrated display section 30, that is, at the initial stage when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, either the right heating section selection mark 334R or the left heating section selection mark 334L is displayed. Allows the user to select one of

The example of FIG. 62 is a case where the default setting is made to recommend the left heating unit 17HL. As shown in FIG. 62, the left heating section selection mark 334L displayed with "LEFT" in white characters is always displayed in the initial first specific screen 30SP.

Either one of the right heating section selection mark 334R and the left heating section selection mark 334L can be selected by the pair of left and right input keys 43M2. For example, if the left input key 43M2 is pressed, the left heating section selection mark 334L can be selected, and as shown in FIG.
Conversely, if the right input key 43M2 is pressed in the state of FIG. 62, the right heat section selection mark 334L can be selected.

When the identification information 330 of the linked cooking menu is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (see FIG. 46) or when the input key 43MS is pressed (see FIG. 47), the left heating unit 17HL, the right heating unit 17HR, and the right heating unit 17HL are displayed. The unit 17HR is occupied for execution of the cooperative cooking menu. Therefore, the left heating unit 17HL (integrated control unit MC) does not accept settings for other cooking menus.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62, the input key 43L1 for selecting the left heating section 17HL is already pressed, and the left display section 31L displays the temperature "suitable temperature 180°C". .
Therefore, the user places the object to be heated N such as a frying pan above the left heating unit 17HL and presses the input key 43L1. Then induction heating starts automatically. Alternatively, the operation of pressing the input key 44L may be omitted, and the induction heating may be automatically started after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) from the time when the input key 43MS is pressed.
When the heating operation in the left heating section 17HL is started as described above, the occupied state of the right heating section 17HR is released. Therefore, the input of the single cooking mode can be immediately started with the right operation unit 40R.

There is also a method of canceling the occupied state of the right heating section 17HR when the left heating section selection mark 334L is selected by the pair of left and right input keys 43M2. Since it can be changed, the occupied state of the right heating section 17HR is not released at the time of selecting the left heating section selection mark 334L as described above.

The above-mentioned "appropriate temperature of 180°C" means that the temperature for preheating the object to be heated N (not shown) such as a metal pot, frying pan, etc., which is a container for the "hamburger", which is the object to be cooked in this case, is 180°C. is. That is, the IH control unit 90 automatically controls the heating power level so that the temperature of the bottom surface of the object to be heated N (not shown) becomes 180° C. by the functions of the inverter circuit 81L, the temperature detection circuit 93, and the like.

As the preheating temperature rises, the heating power display section 67L for indicating the heating power level during induction heating cooking does not display the heating power level, but indicates the degree of increase of the preheating temperature and the degree of reaching (approaching) the target preheating temperature. degree).
In FIG. 62, the dashed circle in the thermal power display section 67L indicates the current temperature range, and as the temperature rises, the dashed circle gradually moves to the right. . That is, the state of temperature rise can be known from the light emission state of the thermal power display section 67L. Details will be described with reference to FIG.

In the additional information 331, as shown in FIG. 62, "Notify when the set temperature is reached" is displayed.
On the other hand, the cooking process display section (cooking process information section) 332 is displayed in a belt-like character so as to cross the second area and the third area of the integrated display section 30 horizontally.

As can be seen from the cooking process display section 332 in FIG. 62, when hamburgers are to be cooked together, the preheating process is performed by the induction heating source 9, then the cooking process 1, and finally the range grill heating (RG heating). It is the cooking process 2 to perform.

As shown in FIG. 62, the user's fingertips FG and line of sight are placed in front of the right front of the integrated display section 30, in other words, the central operation section 40M, in order to operate the input keys 43MS until the moment the cooperative cooking menu is started. It is in.
After that, the user's line of sight moves toward the left heating unit 17HL as indicated by the arrow. That is, when the object to be heated N (not shown) containing the object to be heated is placed above the left heating unit 17HL, it moves leftward.

After starting the cooperative cooking menu, the user's eyes and body move from the central part to the left, as indicated by the large horizontal arrow in FIG. 62 . However, this movement to the left is not large and does not impose a burden on the user himself.

Next, FIG. 63 will be described.
FIG. 63 is a plan view showing the control operations of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L when the cooperative cooking menu is selected, showing changes in preheating temperature in chronological order.

(A) of FIG. 63 shows the portion of the thermal power display section 67L on the left side. The dashed circle in FIG. 63 indicates the current temperature range. For example, when the target preheating temperature is 180° C., the four heating power indicators 67L emit light from the beginning of the induction heating cooking process, as shown in FIG. The leftmost light emitter is blinking as indicated by the dashed circle. This flashing state indicates the current temperature level.

As the preheating temperature rises, the current temperature rises, so the position of the above-described "blinking portion" moves to the right in sequence. And when the preheat temperature is reached, the blinking part disappears.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 63B, at the beginning of the induction heating cooking process, if one of the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L is operated, the target value of the preheating temperature is set. can be changed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 63B, the preheating temperature can be lowered by one step each time the left input key 43L2 is pressed. Conversely, each time the right input key 43L3 is pressed, the preheating temperature can be increased by one step. In this way, the process of changing the preheating temperature is displayed on the left display section 31L each time as shown in FIG. 63(C), so that the user can easily confirm the displayed contents.

Next, FIG. 64 will be described.
FIG. 64 is a plan view showing the control operations of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L when the cooperative cooking menu is selected.

When the object to be heated N (not shown) placed on the left heating section 17L reaches the set preheating temperature, the heating power display section 67L stops blinking as shown in FIG.
When heated to the preheating temperature in this way, the integrated display unit 30 displays "preheating completed" by the additional information 331 as shown in FIG.

In addition, the display contents of the cooking process display section (cooking process information section) 332 change. Specifically, from the display of IH preheating, the stage of "IH heating" in the next cooking process is displayed in white letters.
From this information, users can easily understand that the stage has come to implement induction heating in earnest. In other words, it can be seen that the object to be heated, such as a frying pan placed on the left heating unit 17HL, has reached a temperature suitable for heating the object to be cooked.

A pair of input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operating section 40L has a function of designating thermal power (power consumption) in the left heating section 17HL. Therefore, when the preheating process is shifted to the full-scale heating process (cooking process 1), each time the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are touched, the heat power value data table is increased by one step. You can select a specific firepower that is one step down. As a result, the user can freely raise or lower the temperature of the object to be heated during induction heating.

Next, FIG. 65 will be described.
FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing changes in the display contents of the integrated display section 30 (first specific screen 30SP) when the cooperative cooking menu is selected.
As shown in FIG. 65(A), when the preheating process is completed, the integrated display unit 30 displays to the user that the cooking process 1 (full-scale induction heating) can be started. Further, the cooking process 1 can be stopped at any time by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation section 40L.

The switching of the display between (A) and (B) in FIG. 65 is automatically repeated at intervals of, for example, 5 seconds. Then, after the full-scale induction heating cooking process 1 is started, only the display of FIG. 57(C) is displayed. Firepower at this point is shown to be "slightly weak". Furthermore, it is indicated that this heating power level can be adjusted by the user (30V information indicating microwave power level).

FIG. 66 is a plan view showing the display contents of the integrated display section 30 when the cooperative cooking menu is selected. The content displayed in FIG. 65 is slightly changed, and the additional information 331 includes a preheating temperature value (for example, 180° C.). The display contents shown in FIG. 65(B) may be changed as shown in FIG.

FIG. 66 shows the stage at which the induction heating cooking process 1 has not yet started when the cooperative cooking menu is selected.
Therefore, in order to prompt the user to operate the input key 43MS, the individual light emitting section 27M6 is in a blinking state as indicated by the dashed circle.

In the state of FIGS. 65 and 66, even if the input key 43M1 is operated, the integrated display section 30 cannot display the control menu of the composite cooking mode including "manual range" and "automatic range". To cancel the cooperative cooking menu at this stage, it is necessary to press the input key 43MT. In other words, even if the input key 43L1 of the left operating section 40L is pressed, the cooking process 1 of the left heating section 17HL to be used first can only be completed, and it does not mean that all the settings of the linked cooking menu have been canceled (cancelled).

Next, FIG. 67 will be described.
FIG. 67 shows a scene in which the user ends the induction heating cooking process 1 by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L. Since the heating operation has already been completed, the thermal power indicator 67L does not emit any light.

On the other hand, in the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30, the cooking process information (cooking process information section) 332 indicates that the cooking process 2, that is, the stage of "microwave & grill cooking" (RG cooking) has progressed. display. Specifically, from the white display of IH heating, white letters indicate that the stage of RG cooking, which is the final cooking process 2, has progressed.
From this information, the user can easily understand that the cooking step 2 in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are combined is now being performed.

The instruction to start the cooking process 2 of the linked cooking menu also needs to be given by the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 67, the individual light emitting section 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS is in a flashing state, as indicated by the dashed circle, prompting the user to operate the input key 43MS. .

On the other hand, since the stage of FIG. 67 is after the user himself/herself has finished the induction heating cooking process 1 with the input key 43L1 of the left operating section 40L, the occupancy of the left heating section 17HL is released. Therefore, by operating the input key 43L1 of the left operating section 40L, the left heating section 17HL can be started to be used for implementing a cooking menu different from the linked cooking menu. In other words, at this stage, the single cooking can be started by inputting the single cooking mode by the IH control menu through the left operation section 17HL.

Next, FIG. 68 will be described.
FIG. 68 shows that when the cooperative cooking menu is selected, the output level of microwave heating can be adjusted when proceeding to the stage of "microwave & grill cooking" (RG cooking).

Specifically, the output level of microwave heating is displayed in the second area 30M of the integrated display section 30 in five stages such as "slightly weak" and "weak". This display information is the same as "information 30V indicating microwave output level" described in FIG. Therefore, the user can select the output level of microwave heating by operating the pair of input keys 43M2.

Next, FIG. 69 will be described.
FIG. 69 shows that, similar to FIG. 68, when the cooperative cooking menu is selected, the output level of microwave heating can be adjusted when proceeding to the cooking process 2 stage.

As shown in (B) of FIG. 69, the output level of microwave heating is displayed in a total of five stages from "strong" to "weak" in the second area 30M. Such a microwave output level can be selected by the user by operating the input key 43M2.
Therefore, in the final step (cooking step 2), the user can adjust the heating intensity of the microwave according to the finished state of the food to be cooked.

In the final cooking process 2 described with reference to FIG. 69, the user's operations and line of sight are concentrated on the range of the integrated display section 30 and the central operation section 40M. Therefore, the user can concentrate on completing the cooking process 2 while standing in the front center of the cooking device 1 .

In the middle of the cooking process 2, when the user wants to take out the food to be cooked from the heating chamber 113 and directly check it, the user can open the door 114 at any timing. When the door 114 is opened, the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 instantly stops the transmission of microwaves, and the energization of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is also stopped.

When the door 114 is closed again and the input key 43MS is pressed again, microwave heating is instantaneously started again. When the door 114 is opened during the cooking process 2 as described above, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 continue to operate.

Next, FIG. 70 will be described.
FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation in the final stage after the cooking process 2 in FIG. 69 and the display contents of the integrated display section 30 (first specific screen 30SP).

When the user arbitrarily terminates the final cooking process (cooking process 2), the user operates the input key 43MT. Pressing this cancels the series of control sequences of the cooperative cooking menu. Therefore, in order to perform microwave heating or oven heating again after stopping the heating, it is necessary to select the heating source on the central operation unit 40M and press the input key 43MS again.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the RG cooking is completed, if the input key 43MS is pressed again within a certain period of time, the microwave heating is instantaneously resumed so that additional heating can be easily performed. to start.

As shown in FIG. 70(B), the first specific screen 30SP displays After the screen 10A, the contents displayed on the display screen 10B are changed. Then, it is configured to display that the cooking process 2 will soon end.

On this display screen 10B, the temperature detection circuit 93 detects the transition of the temperature rise inside the heating chamber 113, the load of the food to be cooked is determined, and the integrated control unit MC determines the arrival time until the completion of cooking. Perform a process to predict and display the result.

Instead of detecting the temperature rise of the food to be cooked or the heating chamber 113 to predict when the cooking will be finished, the user may set a timer in advance so that the cooking process 2 is finished by time control. In this case, the load determination as described above is unnecessary.

The display screen 10C in (B) of FIG. 70 indicates that heating can be started again within a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds. However, if the door 114 is opened, 15 seconds) immediately after finishing the cooking process 2. An example is shown.
The "time button" referred to in this display screen 10C is the input key 43M3. Since the heating chamber 113 has reached a high temperature due to the cooking up to just before this, additional information 331 such as "Beware of grill high temperature" is displayed to enhance the user's safety.

(Transition of the first specific screen)
Next, details of changes in the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30 during the period until the transition to the cooperative cooking mode described with reference to FIG. 49 is started will be described in detail.
71 to 73 will be described.

71 to 73 show the relationship between various processes and operations of cooking (coordinated cooking mode) according to the coordinated cooking menu explained in FIG. 49. In FIG. It shows the correspondence between the content of E5 and the input operation section.

The state of FIG. 71 shows the stage of "E1: initial screen of cooperative cooking", and the initial screen when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 and the central operation unit 40M. shows the relationship between
FIG. 72A shows the relationship between the screen at the stage of "E2: change menu" and the central operation unit 40M. This is the step of operating the input key 43M1 to select one target cooking item from the cooperative cooking menu, and selecting the corresponding cooperative cooking menu.

FIG. 72B shows the stage of "E3: Change selected heat source (select right IH)". It shows a step in which the user selects the right heating unit 17HR while looking at the first specific screen 30SP. This selection is made with the input key 43M2.

Next, FIG. 73A shows the stage of "E4: right IH menu button pressing guidance display". This is the stage where the first specific screen 30SP displays that it is necessary to operate the input key 44R, which is called the menu key, arranged on the right operation unit 40R in order to start cooperative cooking. In other words, the user is recommended to press the input key 44R in order to start the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking.

FIG. 73B shows the stage of "E5: IH preheat display". At this stage, the first specific screen 30SP indicates that the right heating unit 17HR has started the preheating operation. As described above, the right display section 31R displays information about the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature of 180° C. is reached, for example. On the other hand, in the first specific screen 30SP, information (additional information 331) such as "In IH preheating", "Preheating completed", and "Notice that the set temperature is reached" is displayed.

Next, FIGS. 74 to 79 show the relationship between various processes and operations in the cooking of "hamburger" (cooperative cooking mode) by the cooperative cooking menu explained in FIG. 2 shows the correspondence between the contents of the displays E11 to E17 described in 1 and the input operation section.

FIG. 74A shows the stage of "E11: IH preheat display" described in item E (central display portion) of FIG. On the first specific screen 30SP, it is displayed that the right heating unit 17HR has started preheating, so that the set temperature will be reached (additional information 331).

FIG. 74B shows the stage of "E12: IH heating display". At this stage, since the preheating is completed, the additional information 331 indicates that the right heating unit 17HR is ready for heating. In other words, it indicates that the process is proceeding to induction heating (IH heating).

Next, FIG. 75 shows the stage of "E13: grill door open/close operation guidance display". At this stage, the induction heating (cooking step 1) is finished, so the additional information 331 prompts to move the food to be cooked to the heating chamber 113 (where the cooking step 2 is performed).

Next, FIGS. 76A to 76C show the stage of "E14: alternate display of thermal power change display and start guidance display". At this stage, it is displayed that the heating power in the range grill cooking (compound cooking) in the heating chamber 113 can be changed, and furthermore, it is displayed that the grill heating cooking in such a heating chamber can be started by pressing the start button (input key 43MS). are doing. In FIG. 76(C), the input key 43MS is in a flashing state as indicated by a dashed circle, indicating that it is waiting for user's operation. Note that the displays of FIGS. 76A and 76B are alternately performed, for example, every 5 seconds.

Next, FIGS. 77A to 77C show the stage of "E15: grill heating display". Here, the object to be cooked is heated in the heating chamber 113 by either or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 (cooking step 2).
FIG. 77(A) shows that the heating power can be adjusted, and FIG. 77(B) shows that the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are simultaneously driven to perform combined heating. FIG. 77(C) shows that this RG cooking process (cooking process 2) will end in 2 minutes and 30 seconds.

Next, FIGS. 78A and 78B show the stage of "E16: alternate display of extension operation guide display and end operation display". Here, since the RG heating process has ended, it is displayed that the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) and the grill can be heated again.
Further, it is displayed that if the user does not desire the extended heating, the cooperative cooking mode can be terminated without extending the heating by pressing the cancel button (input key 43MT). The first specific screens 30SP having the contents of FIGS. 78A and 78B are alternately displayed, for example, at intervals of several seconds.

The next FIG. 79 is the stage of "E17: display of time setting". Here, when the input key 43M2 is used to extend the cooking time and cooking is performed again inside the heating chamber 113, the result of setting the extended time is displayed. After this time setting display, "E15: Grill heating display" and "E16: Alternate display of extension operation guide display and end operation display" are performed.

Next, FIGS. 80 to 84 will be described.
FIGS. 80 to 84 show the relationship between various processes and operations in the cooking of fried chicken (cooperative cooking mode) by the cooperative cooking menu explained in FIG. 51. In FIG. It shows the contents of displays E21 to E26 and the state of the input operation section.

FIG. 80(A) shows the stage of "E21: IH preheat display". Here, it can be seen that the left heating unit 17HL is performing the preheating operation.
FIG. 80(B) shows the stage of "E22: grill door opening/closing operation guidance display". Here, the door 114 is opened and the object to be cooked (food) is urged to be put into the heating chamber 113 in order to perform the grill heating step B23 (see FIG. 51).

FIGS. 81A to 81C show the stage of "E23: alternate display of thermal power change display and start guidance display". Here, when cooking fried chicken by driving the "microwave grill driving section", it is displayed that the heating power can be adjusted and that cooking can be started by pressing the input key 43MS.

The displays of FIGS. 81A and 81B are alternately performed, for example, every 5 seconds.
If the door 114 remains open, the display of FIG. 81(C) is performed.

Next, FIG. 82 shows the stage of "E24: Microwave heating display". It indicates that the heating power for cooking can be changed when the "range grill drive unit" is driven, and the remaining time until the end of cooking is displayed.

FIGS. 83A to 83C show the stage of "E25: alternate display of extension operation guide display and IH preheating completion display". Here, after the cooking step B24 (see FIG. 51), which is performed by driving the "range grill drive unit", is completed, the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) to extend the heat cooking time. ,it's shown.
The display screen of FIG. 83(A) and the display screen of FIG. 83(B) are alternately displayed as the first specific screen 30SP at, for example, intervals of several seconds.

FIG. 84 shows the stage of "E26: display of time setting". Here, it is displayed that the cooking step B24 is further extended to, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds.

Summary of Embodiment 1.
As is clear from the above description, the built-in composite heating cooker of Embodiment 1 implements the first invention in the following form. i.e.
Inside the main body 110, there are a heating chamber 113, an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be heated, and a microwave heating source ( a second heating means) 189; an oven heating source (third heating means) 188 that heats the heating chamber 113 by a heating principle different from that of the microwave heating source 189; An integrated control device (control unit) MC that controls the heating means,
The integrated control device MC includes a cooperative cooking mode in which a group consisting of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are started with a time lag, A combined cooking mode in which the wave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are started at the same time or with a time difference, or are automatically switched and driven,
When the integrated control device MC receives the input for selecting the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, the display operation corresponding to the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, that is, as an example, the first specific screen 30SP and the second specific screen 30SC, the user can easily identify the cooking mode.

With this configuration, it is possible to use two heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189, and to provide a heating cooker that can easily switch between the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode. can.

Furthermore, in addition to the above configuration, the display operation corresponding to the linked cooking mode or the combined cooking mode includes a first specific screen 30SP that displays the linked cooking menu and the cooking process of the linked cooking mode, and the combined cooking of the combined cooking mode. It was configured to display the second specific screen 30SC that displays the menu and the control conditions.
Therefore, it is possible to check the linked cooking menu and the cooking process, as well as the composite cooking menu and the control conditions, respectively, on the display screen. This makes it easier for users to use.

Furthermore, an input operation unit 40 for inputting selection of one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, and an integrated display that selectively displays the first specific screen 30SP and the second specific screen 30SC It was the structure provided with the part 30. FIG.
Therefore, one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can be selected while checking the integrated display section 30, which is convenient.

Further, the input operation unit 40 is common to the first, second, and third heating means, and is an operation unit 98 of a main power switch 97 that supplies power to the integrated control device MC. The cooking mode and the input key 43MS (cooking start input means) for instructing the start of individual cooking in the combined cooking mode were provided.
For this reason, the input operation unit 40 can be used to issue a command from turning on the main electric power to starting the heating, and the operability is excellent.

Further, the input operation unit 40 has an input key 43MC serving as first selection means for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, and an input key 43M1 serving as second selection means for selecting the combined cooking mode. It was a configuration that
Therefore, two cooking modes can be easily selected by operating the input key 43MC and the input key 43M1, and the operability is good.

Further, the input operation unit 40 has an input key 43MT serving as cooking mode canceling means for determining the end of each cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode.
Therefore, the operation of both the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can be canceled with the input key 43MT, and the operability is good.

Furthermore, a top plate 15 covering the upper surface of the main body 110 is provided,
The induction heating source 9 heats the object to be heated placed above the top plate 15,
The heating chamber 113 has a front-opening door 114 that is arranged in the left-right central part of the main body 110 and covers the front opening so that it can be opened and closed,
The door 114 is installed inside the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2, and the door 114 opens to the front side of the kitchen furniture 2 to open the front opening of the heating chamber 113,
The main body 110 is installed in such a manner that the top plate 15 is exposed on the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2, and in this installation state, the input keys 43MC and 43M1, which are the cooking mode selecting means, and the cooking mode canceling means. The other input key 43MT was configured to be operable from above the kitchen furniture 2 .
Therefore, the user can open and close the door 114, operate the input operation unit 40, and the like at a position facing the front side of the left-right central portion of the main body 110 in a comfortable posture. There is no concern that the operability of the

Furthermore, the induction heating source 9 has at least two heating portions, a left heating portion 17HL and a right heating portion 17HR, which are separated in the horizontal direction of the top plate 15,
The configuration further includes a left operating section 40L corresponding to the left heating section 17HL and a right operating section 40R corresponding to the right heating section 17HR.
As a result, cooking can be performed at two locations on the top plate 15 at the same time.

As is clear from the above description, the built-in composite heating cooker of Embodiment 1 implements the second invention in the following form. i.e.
a heating chamber 113 inside the body 110;
an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be heated in the upper part of the main body 110;
a microwave heating source (second heating means) 189 for heating the heating chamber 113;
an oven heating source (third heating means) 188 that heats the heating chamber 113 by a heating principle different from that of the second heating means;
an input operation unit 40;
an integrated display unit (display means) 30;
An integrated control device (control unit) MC that controls the first, second, and third heating sources 9, 189, and 188, respectively;
The integrated control device MC includes a group consisting of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, a cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 is driven with a time difference, and a microwave heating mode. A combined cooking mode in which the heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven simultaneously or with a time difference, or are automatically switched and driven, and the first, second, and third heating means are driven independently. It has a function to perform a single cooking mode and a
The integrated control device MC accepts any one of the combined cooking mode, the linked cooking mode, and the single cooking mode at the input operation unit 40, and selects a specific screen (first specific screen 30SP) corresponding to the cooking mode. , the second specific screen 30SC and the third specific screen ST) are displayed on the integrated display unit 30;
It is a configuration characterized by

With this configuration, two heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the cooperative cooking mode, the combined cooking mode, and the single cooking mode can be effectively used. I can provide equipment.

Further, after the input operation unit 40 turns on the main power supply, the integrated control device MC causes the integrated display unit 30 to display the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z). The specific screen is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 in response to an input from.
Therefore, the cooperative cooking mode, the combined cooking mode, and the single cooking mode can be effectively used.

The specific screens are a first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode and a second specific screen 30SC for the combined cooking mode,
The first specific screen and the second specific screen are alternatively displayed on the display means.
For this reason, there is no fear of causing misunderstanding between the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, which is convenient for the user.

When the input operation unit 40 receives an input for selecting the combined cooking mode or the cooperative cooking mode, the integrated control device MC determines whether the permission conditions are satisfied, and if the permission conditions are satisfied was configured to display the first specific screen 30SP and the second specific screen 30SC.
Therefore, it is possible to proceed with a stable heat cooking operation without fear of unexpectedly restricting the operation in the cooking process of the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, or causing problems such as stopping the cooking process. can.

The integrated control device MC is configured not to accept selection of a new cooking menu by the input operation unit 40 before execution of the cooking menu on the first, second and third specific screens is confirmed.
Therefore, when the user selects the cooperative cooking mode, the combined cooking mode, and the single cooking mode, it is possible to prevent wrong input (selection of another cooking menu), and there is no concern of impairing usability.

When the input operation unit 40 receives an input for selecting the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, the integrated control device MC selects the same heating means as the heating means used in the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode. It was a configuration that did not accept the choice of other cooking to be used.
Therefore, when the user selects either one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, it is possible to prevent wrong input (selection of another cooking menu), and there is no fear of impairing usability.

Further, the integrated control device MC uses the same heating means as the heating means used in the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode until the cooking process of the cooking menu performed in the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode is completed. It was a configuration that does not accept other cooking options that use
Therefore, when the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode are being performed, it is possible to prevent the cooking process being executed from being adversely affected by the input of other cooking or to be stopped, thereby improving usability. can.

Furthermore, the first specific screen and the second specific screen are configured to have the same shape and area.
Therefore, even if the number of specific screens is two, one display screen can be shared, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost. Furthermore, since the shape and area of the third specific screen are the same, it is more advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

Further, the input operation unit 40 has dedicated operation units 40L and 40R for the induction heating source 9 and common operation units for the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. ,
The shared operation unit includes a first selection means 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode and a second selection means 43M1 for selecting the combined cooking mode,
When the input operation of the first selection means is started before the second selection means after power is supplied to the control unit by the main power switch, the first specific screen is displayed,
When the input operation of the second selection means 43M1 is started before the first selection means 43MC after power is supplied to the integrated control device MC by the main power switch 97, the second specific screen is displayed. 30SC was displayed.
For this reason, after the main power is supplied, the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode are selected according to the selection means (input keys 43MC, 43M1) that are operated the earliest. Therefore, it is convenient for the user.

Furthermore, the operation key 98 of the main power switch 97 is arranged in the input operation unit 40,
The input operation unit 40 has dedicated operation units 40L and 40R for the induction heating source 9 and a common operation unit 40M for the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189,
The shared operation unit 40M includes first selection means (input key) 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, second selection means (input key) 43M1 for selecting the combined cooking mode, and start of heat cooking. and input means (input keys) 43MS for
While the first specific screen or the second specific screen is displayed, the control unit performs an input waiting operation for waiting for an input of the start input means 43MS, and during the period of the input waiting operation, the start After the input function of the input means 43MS for start is enabled and the input means 43MS for start is operated, the cooperative cooking mode or the combined cooking mode is activated while the first specific screen or the second specific screen is displayed. It was a configuration that proceeded to the mode cooking process.
Therefore, after the user confirms the display of the first specific screen or the second specific screen, the transition to the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode is performed. Therefore, it is convenient for the user.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 40 has a stop input means 43MT for stopping the heating operation of the cooperative cooking mode or the combined cooking mode, and after the start input means 43MS is operated, the start input means 43MT The input function of the input means 43MS was disabled.
For this reason, once the stop input means 43MT is operated, the setting of the cooperative cooking mode or the like is canceled, and even if the start input means 43MS is carelessly operated, the heating operation cannot be started, so safety and operability are good.

Furthermore, the integrated control device MC has a single cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 is driven alone,
After power is supplied to the integrated control device MC by the main power switch 97, the dedicated operation unit is operated prior to the first selection means (input key) 43MC and the second selection means (input key) 43M1. When the input operation of 40L and 40R is started, the third specific screen 30ST of the single cooking mode using the induction heating source is displayed on the integrated display section 30 or the individual display sections (left display section 31L, right display section 31R). was the configuration shown in
For this reason, if the input operation of the dedicated operation units 40L and 40R is first started, the mode of induction heating cooking can be directly proceeded, and even a composite cooker having three types of heating means is easy to use. .

Furthermore, the input operation of the single cooking mode using the induction heating source 9 (heating power setting, etc.) is performed in the dedicated operation units 40L and 40R while the third specific screen 30ST is displayed,
The integrated control device MC displays the third specific screen 30ST and displays the first specific screen 30SP even if the common operation unit 40M is operated during the period in which the dedicated operation units 40L and 40R are used for input operations. Alternatively, the second specific screen 30SC is not displayed.
For this reason, only the third specific screen is displayed when the input operation of the dedicated operation units 40L and 40R is started, which does not cause confusion in the user's input operation, and has three types of heating means. Even if it is a compound type cooker, it is easy to use.

The integrated control device MC is configured to display the information of the control conditions of the first cooking process on the first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC after the start input means 43MS is operated. .
Therefore, control conditions important for cooking can be confirmed at the start of cooking, which is convenient.

Further, the integrated control device MC performs an input waiting operation for waiting for an input from the start input means 43MS while displaying the first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC. The operation is restricted within a certain period of time from the time the first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC is displayed.
Therefore, the input waiting operation is not left for a long time for some reason, and the safety is high.

Furthermore, after power is supplied by the main power switch 97, the integrated control device MC causes the integrated display unit 30 to display an initial standby screen (common screen) 30Z,
If the start input means 43MS is not operated within the predetermined period of time, the integrated control device MC stops displaying the first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC and displays the standby initial screen. It is configured to automatically switch to the display of 30Z.
Therefore, if the input waiting operation continues for a long time for some reason, it is possible to restore the display of the standby initial screen (common screen) 30Z and inform the user of common information. As a result, it is possible to notify the user of the need to pay attention or to prompt an operation, and the safety is high.

Further, the second selection means 43M1 for selecting the composite cooking mode is configured to also serve as an input means for selecting the heating section or control conditions in the cooperative cooking mode.
Therefore, even when the installation space (area) of the input operation unit 40 is restricted, the input means can be installed without impairing the operability. Also, the reduction in the number of parts is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 40 has input means 43MT for stopping heat cooking in the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode. In addition, the setting of the cooperative cooking mode or the combined cooking mode is canceled.
Therefore, when the stop input means 43MT is operated, the setting of the cooperative cooking mode or the like is canceled, and even if the start input means 43MS is carelessly operated, the heating operation cannot be started, which improves safety and operability.

Further, the input operation unit 40 includes dedicated operation units 40L and 40R for the induction heating source 9 and a common operation unit 40M for the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. and
The shared operation unit 40M is arranged in the left-right central portion of the upper surface of the main body 110,
An integrated display unit 30 for displaying the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188 is provided at the center of the upper surface of the main body 110,
The integrated control device MC is configured to display the standby initial screen (common screen) 30 Z on the integrated display section 30 .
Therefore, the user can check various information before the start of cooking on the integrated display section 30 located in the left-right central portion of the upper surface of the main body 110, which is convenient.

Further, the integrated display section 30 is arranged behind and adjacent to the first selection means 43MC, the second selection means 43M1, and the start input means 43MS.
Therefore, when selecting the cooperative cooking mode or the combined cooking mode, various types of input information can be checked on the integrated display section 30, which is convenient.

Further, the second selection means 43M1 also serves as an input means for selecting a single cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are used alone, and furthermore, selects a cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode. The configuration was such that the input means for selection was also used.
Therefore, even when the installation space (area) of the input operation unit 40 is restricted, the input means can be installed without impairing the operability. Also, the reduction in the number of parts is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs.

Further, the identification information 330 indicating the linked cooking menu and the information of the cooking process by the process display section 332 are simultaneously displayed on the first specific screen 30SP.
Therefore, the user can confirm the cooking process together with the identification information (for example, corresponding to the linked cooking menu "hamburger"), which is convenient.

Furthermore, the information on the cooking process includes the number of cooking processes and information indicating the degree of progress.
Therefore, the user can know the overall image of the cooking process and also the degree of progress, which is convenient.

The cooking process information displayed on the first specific screen 30SP includes at least one of information indicating the number of cooking processes, information indicating the degree of progress of the cooking process, and information regarding user input operations. It was a configuration.
Therefore, the user can know the overall image of the cooking process and also the degree of progress, which is convenient.

The second identification screen 30SC includes information that can identify the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, information on the order of using these heating sources, and information on control conditions applicable to these heating sources, At least any two of them were configured to be displayed at the same time.
Therefore, when the combined cooking mode is performed, the user can know information necessary for cooking through the second specific screen 30SC, which is convenient.

Further, the second specific screen 30SC is configured to display one compound cooking menu and reference information related to a combination of control conditions applied to the compound cooking menu.
Therefore, when performing the compound cooking mode, the user can know the information of the control conditions required for cooking for each compound cooking menu through the second specific screen 30SC, which is convenient.

Furthermore, in the third specific screen 30ST, information indicating the control pattern (for example, "preheating" or "warming") of the induction heating source 9 and the control pattern It was configured to display the control conditions (for example, “heat insulation 80° C.”) applied to the temperature.
Therefore, when the single cooking mode is performed, the user can know information about the control pattern and control conditions through the third specific screen 30ST, which is convenient.

Furthermore, in order to show the contents of one single cooking menu, the object to be heated or the object to be cooked is displayed in the form of a schematic image diagram on the third specific screen 30ST. For example, it was a configuration displayed in a schematic diagram 280 of a container such as a pan.
Therefore, when the single cooking mode is performed, it is easy to intuitively understand the content of the cooking menu, which is convenient.

Furthermore, the single cooking mode includes a preheating process, and the information of the preheating process is displayed on the third specific screen 30ST (see FIG. 38).
The integrated control device MC is configured to control the induction heating source 9 so that the temperature of the object to be heated reaches the target temperature designated by the input operation unit 40 .
Therefore, when performing the "preheating process" in the single cooking mode, the content of the preheating process can be known, which is convenient.

Further, the integrated control device MC controls the induction heating source 9 so that the temperature of the object to be heated reaches a target temperature (for example, 80° C.) set by the input operation unit 40 such as the left operation unit 40L. was configured to control
Therefore, when performing the "preheating process" in the single cooking mode, the food is automatically heated to the set temperature, which is convenient.

The display means includes an individual display section (left display section 31L, right display section 31R) dedicated to the induction heating source 9, and information on the preheating process is displayed on the third specific screen 30ST,
Information on the target temperature in the preheating step is displayed on the individual display portions 31L and 31R.
Therefore, when performing the "preheating step" in the single cooking mode, the preheating temperature can be known, which is convenient.

Further, a light emitting unit that emits light so as to distinguish between invalid and valid input functions of the first selection means 43MC, the second selection means 43M1 and the start input means 43MS. (Individual light emitting units) 27M1 to 27M6 and 270 to 278.
Therefore, the user can easily know whether the input function of the selection means is valid or invalid, which is convenient.

Furthermore, after power is supplied by operating the operation key 98 of the main power switch 97, the integrated control device MC displays the standby initial screen 30Z on the display means,
The integrated control device MC enables the input functions of the first selection means 43MC and the second selection means 43M1 while the standby initial screen 30Z is displayed, and furthermore, the first specific screen 30SP and the second 2, while the specific screen 30SC is displayed, the input function of the start input means 43MS is enabled and the light emitting units (individual light emitting units) 27M1 to 27M6 and 270 to 278 are caused to emit light.
Therefore, while presenting information to the user on the standby initial screen 30Z, the input function of the input means 43MS is enabled, and the user can easily know that the user is waiting for an input, which is convenient. .

Furthermore, it further has a linked cooking display section (individual light emitting section) 27M2 (see FIG. 44) that emits light to indicate that the heating operation is being performed in the linked cooking mode,
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking process 1 and a cooking process 2,
The cooperative cooking display unit 27M2 is configured to continue the light-emitting operation at least during the period of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2. As shown in FIG.
Therefore, the user can easily know that the cooperative cooking mode is being executed, which is convenient.

Furthermore, it has a first selection means 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode and a stop input means 43MT for stopping the heating operation in the cooperative cooking mode,
The first selection means 43MC is illuminated by light from the linked cooking display section (individual light emitting section) 27M2 before the start input means 43MS is operated,
After the stop input means 43MT is operated, the illumination of the light from the cooperative cooking display section is stopped.
Therefore, the user can easily know that the cooperative cooking mode has stopped, which is convenient.

The standby initial screen 30Z is configured to display at least one of caution information regarding the presence of cooking utensils or high-temperature portions used in the heating chamber 113, or information regarding unusable cooking menus (FIG. 36). reference).
Therefore, the user can easily know the existence of the high-temperature part after finishing the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode or the like, and the safety and usability are high.

Furthermore, at least one of the first specific screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC, and the third specific screen 30ST includes a first area 30L and a second area 30M,
In the first area 30L, identification information 330 indicating the food to be cooked for the cooperative cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode is displayed.
In the second area 30M, at least one of the heating means to be used (see FIG. 39), the cooking process, or reference information for the user is displayed in the composite cooking mode.
For example, a display 30K that can identify the microwave heating source 189 and both or either of heating intensity information or target temperature information 30T (eg, 180° C.) applied to the control menu (eg, “warm”). It was a configuration in which information indicating a combination (one or more "control conditions") was displayed in correspondence (for example, display screen 4ST in FIG. 39).
Therefore, in both the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, the user can easily know various information necessary for cooking, which is convenient.

Furthermore, in the first area 30L, information indicating the control pattern of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 or the heating means to be used in the case of the combined cooking mode is displayed (see FIG. 39),
The second area 30M is configured to display information indicating the control conditions to be applied in the compound cooking mode.

That is, as described with reference to FIG. 39, when the RG control menu (for example, "warm") is displayed on the display screen 30D, the display 30K capable of identifying the microwave heating source 189 and the control menu (for example, Information indicating a combination (one or more “control conditions”) of heating intensity information applied to “warming”) or target temperature information 30T (for example, 180° C.) or either one is displayed in correspondence. (For example, display screen 4ST in FIG. 39).

Further, microwave output value (watt value) information 30X of "500 W" is displayed in the second area 30M, and microwave heating time information 30MY of "1 minute 00 seconds" is displayed in the adjacent third area 30R. It was configured to

Therefore, in both the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, the user can specifically know various information necessary for cooking through the display in the first area 30L and the second area 30M, which is convenient. .

Furthermore, the first specific screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC and the third specific screen 30ST are installed facing upward of the main body 110,
When viewed from above the main body 110, the first area 30L and the second area 30M are arranged horizontally in a straight line.
Therefore, when the user stands on the front side of the heating cooker 1 and faces cooking, the content displayed on any of the first specific screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC and the third specific screen 30ST can be easily understood. Visible and easy to use.

Further, the operation part of the second selection means 43M1 is arranged corresponding to the first area 30L.
Specifically, the touch-type input keys constituting the second selection means 43M1 are arranged immediately in front of the first area 30L.
Therefore, when the user operates the second selection means 43M1, the user can easily visually recognize the contents of the first area 30L, which is convenient.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 40 is arranged on the upper surface of the main body 110,
The input operation section 40 includes an operation key 98 of the main power switch 97, an operation section of first selection means (input key) 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, and a second selection means (input key) 43MC for selecting the combined cooking mode. and an operation part of the selection means (input key) 43M1 and an operation part of the input means (input key) 43MS for starting cooking.
For this reason, when the user stands on the front side of the heating cooker 1 and faces cooking, a series of operations from turning on the main power supply to executing the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode are performed on the input operation unit 40 on the upper surface of the main body 110. It is easy to operate and convenient to use.

Furthermore, a temperature measurement unit 158 of the heating chamber 113 is provided,
When the temperature measurement unit 158 detects that the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is higher than the reference value at a stage before the start of cooking by the microwave heating source 189, the integrated control device MC The microwave heating source 189 was used, and the configuration did not perform automatic cooking (the cooking menu is "automatic range") in which the temperature of the food to be cooked is detected.

That is, when the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is high due to the residual heat of the previous cooking or the like, the integrated control unit MC prohibits automatic microwave heating.
Therefore, microwave heating cooking does not stop unexpectedly, and stable heating cooking can be realized. In addition, the user's anxiety and misunderstanding due to an unintended stoppage or the like will not be caused.

Further, as a cooking menu (combined cooking, single cooking) using the microwave heating source, an automatic heating menu that stops heating by the microwave heating source 189 when it detects that the temperature is higher than a reference value. , a manual heating menu that performs microwave heating for a set time determined by the user;
In the automatic heating menu in the compound cooking mode, the temperature indicating the reference value for stopping microwave heating is displayed on the second specific screen 30SC.
Therefore, the user can easily confirm the temperature at which the operation of microwave heating is automatically stopped on the second specific screen 30SC, which is convenient.

The built-in composite heating cooker of Embodiment 1 implements the third invention in the following form. i.e.
a heating chamber 113 inside the body 110;
an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be heated in the upper part of the main body 110;
a microwave heating source (second heating means) 189 for heating the object to be cooked contained in the heating chamber;
an oven heating source (third heating means) 188 that heats the heating chamber by a heating principle different from that of the second heating means;
an input operation unit 40;
an integrated display unit 30;
An integrated control device (control unit) MC that controls the first, second, and third heating means,
The integrated control device MC includes a group consisting of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, a cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 is driven with a time difference, and a microwave heating mode. A combined cooking mode in which the heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven at the same time or with a time difference, or are automatically switched and driven, and the first, second, and third heating means are each independently operated. It has a function to perform a single cooking mode to drive,
The integrated control device MC, in the input operation unit 40,
(1) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30;
(2) when the combined cooking mode is selected, the second specific screen 30SC is displayed on the integrated display unit 30;
(3) when the single cooking mode using the induction heating source 9 is selected, the third specific screen 30ST is displayed on the integrated display section 30;
With the second specific screen 30SC displayed, either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 is operated by the input means (input key) 43M1 for the composite cooking mode on the input operation unit 40. It was a configuration that allows you to select a single cooking mode that uses
Therefore, in the combined cooking device having three heating sources, the cooking can be changed from the combined cooking mode to the single heating mode, and the operability is good.

Further, when the cooperative cooking mode is selected and when the combined cooking mode is selected, the integrated control device MC determines whether or not permission conditions are satisfied, and if the permission conditions are satisfied, the first 1 specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC.
Therefore, there is an effect that the cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode are continuously performed as expected by the user.

Furthermore, the permission conditions when the linked cooking mode is selected are that the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 are not in use, and that the set maximum power consumption upper limit regulation value is equal to or greater than the threshold. was stipulated.
For this reason, after the cooperative cooking mode is set, there is no possibility that the previously used heating source prevents the cooperative cooking mode from occurring. , it is possible to avoid a situation in which the control conditions are forcibly changed.

Further, the permission condition for selecting the combined cooking mode stipulates that the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is equal to or lower than a threshold.
For this reason, after the cooperative cooking mode is set, the situation in which the cooperative cooking mode cannot be started due to the heating chamber having a high temperature due to the residual heat of the previously used heating source does not occur.

Furthermore, a closing detection unit 139 of the door 114 for freely opening and closing the opening of the heating chamber 113 is further provided,
When the closing detection unit 139 confirms that the door 114 is closed in a state where the second specific screen 30SC is displayed, the integrated control device MC controls the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source. 188 can be used to initiate the single cooking mode.
Therefore, the microwave irradiation can be performed while the heating chamber 113 is closed, and the safety is high.

Further, the integrated control device MC performs cooking using the induction heating source 9 regardless of whether the closing detection unit 139 confirms that the door 114 is closed in the state where the first specific screen 30SP is displayed. When step 1 can be started and the cooking step 1 is finished, the closing detection unit 139 confirms that the door 114 is open, and then when it is confirmed that the door 114 is closed, the cooking step 2 can be started. .
Therefore, the cooking process 1 is not affected by the opening and closing of the door 114 . In addition, in the cooking process 2, microwave irradiation and the like can be performed while the heating chamber 113 is closed, so safety is high.

With the second specific screen 30SC displayed on the input operation unit 40, an input for selecting a single cooking mode using either one of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 is performed. It is a configuration provided with means 43M1.
Therefore, it is possible to shift to the single cooking mode using either one of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 from the intermediate stage of the input operation of the combined cooking mode, which is convenient.

Further, on the second specific screen 30SC, a compound cooking menu performed in the compound cooking mode and a single cooking menu performed in the single cooking mode are displayed so as to be selectable by the input means (input key) 43M1.
For example, as described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42, the cooking menus such as "range manual" and "RG" can be easily selected with one input key, which is convenient.

Further, the cooperative cooking menus (for example, "hamburger" and "paella") performed in the cooperative mode are displayed in a certain order on the first specific screen 30SP.
Each time the input operation unit 40 is operated, the items are sequentially displayed so as to be selectable.
For example, as described with reference to FIG. 60, three cooking menus are displayed in each of the first specific screens 30SP, and the identification information 330 of the cooking menu displayed in the center changes in order.
Therefore, the user can easily select the cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode without worrying about causing confusion.

The composite cooking menu is classified by patterns (for example, "range", "warm", etc.) for driving the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188,
The second specific screen 30SC is configured to display a name identifying the pattern (for example, "range automatic", "heat up").
Therefore, the user can easily select the compound cooking mode suitable for the food to be cooked by selecting the drive pattern, which is convenient.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 40 is arranged on the upper surface of the main body 110 and includes individual operation units 40L and 40R for the induction heating source 9 and a cooperative operation unit 40MC,
The cooperative operation unit 40MC includes first input means (input key) 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, second input means (input key) 43M1 for selecting the composite cooking mode, and start of heat cooking. and input means (input keys) 43MS for
A single cooking mode using the induction heating source 9 can be selected by the individual operation unit,
By selecting a specific cooking menu (for example, "warm") with the input means 43M1 of the microwave heating source 189, a single cooking mode using the microwave heating source 9 can be selected. Also, by selecting a specific cooking menu (for example, "oven") with the input means 43M1, a single cooking mode using the oven heat source 188 can be selected.
Therefore, the single cooking mode using the microwave heat source 9 and the single cooking mode using the oven heat source 188 can be selected by the second input means 43M1 for selecting the combined cooking mode. This makes it easy to use.

In addition, a single cooking mode using the induction heating source 9 can be selected by the individual operation units 40L and 40R,
According to the programs of the individual compound cooking menus stored in the storage unit of the integrated control device MC, the compound cooking menu is configured such that the heating means to be driven and the driving order are the second heating means and the third heating means. It is predetermined from among the means,
A single cooking mode using either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 is selected by selecting the specific composite cooking menu (for example, "warm") by the second input means 43M1. It is a configuration that can be used.
Therefore, the single cooking mode using the microwave heat source 9 and the single cooking mode using the oven heat source 188 can be selected by the second input means 43M1 for selecting the composite cooking mode. This makes it easy to use.

The built-in composite heating cooker of Embodiment 1 implements the fourth invention in the following form. i.e.
a heating chamber 113 inside the body 110;
an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be heated in the upper part of the main body 110;
a microwave heating source (second heating means) 189 for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
an oven heating source (third heating means) 188 that heats the heating chamber 113 by a heating principle different from that of the microwave heating source 189;
an input operation unit 40;
Display means (integrated display unit) 30, left display unit 31L, right display unit 31R,
An integrated control device (control unit) MC that controls the first, second, and third heating means,
The integrated control device MC includes a group consisting of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, a cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 is driven with a time difference, and a microwave heating mode. A combined cooking mode in which the heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven at the same time or with a time difference, or are automatically switched and driven, and the first, second, and third heating means are each independently operated. It has a function to perform a single cooking mode to drive,
The integrated control device MC, in the input operation unit 40,
(1) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected, displaying the first specific screen 30SP on the display means;
(2) when the combined cooking mode is selected, displaying the second specific screen 30SC on the display means;
(3) when the single cooking mode using the induction heating source 9 is selected, the third specific screen 30ST is displayed on the display means;
The input operation unit 40 is arranged on the upper surface of the main body 110 and includes individual operation units 40L and 40R for the first heating means 9 and a cooperative operation unit 40MC,
The cooperative operation unit 40MC includes first input means 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, second input means 43M1 for selecting the combined cooking mode, and input means 43MS for starting heat cooking. place and
A single cooking mode using the induction heating source 9 can be selected by the individual operation units 40L and 40R,
A plurality of compound cooking menus that can be executed in the compound cooking mode by the programs of the individual compound cooking menus stored in the control unit MC are selected according to the heating means to be driven and the order of driving the second heating means 189. predetermined from among said third heating means 188,
While the second specific screen 30SC is displayed, the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 is turned on by selecting the specific compound cooking menu with the second input means (input key) 43M1. It is the structure which can select the independent cooking mode to use.

Because of this configuration, by selecting the specific compound cooking menu (for example, "warm", "manual range") with the second input means (input key) 43M1 in the input operation stage of the cooperative cooking mode, A single cooking mode using the microwave heating source 189 can be selected. A single cooking mode using the oven heating source 188 can also be selected by selecting a specific cooking menu in the composite cooking menu. These are easy to use. That is, a highly convenient heating cooker can be provided.

Furthermore, as the display means, an integrated display unit 30 shared by the first, second and third heating means is used,
The first specific screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC and the third specific screen 30ST are alternatively displayed in the integrated display section 30. FIG.
Therefore, even when any one of the first, second, and third heat sources 9, 189, and 188 is used, only one of the specific screens is displayed on the integrated display section 30, so that related information can be displayed. can be easily confirmed, and safety and usability are improved.

Furthermore, the third specific screen 30ST includes information indicating a plurality of types of control patterns for the heating source (for example, information indicating "preheating" and control conditions applied to one of the control patterns (for example, "target temperature of 180°C"). , is displayed.
Therefore, it is easy to check the control pattern and the control conditions when cooking in the single heating cooking mode, which is convenient.

The second specific screen for the combined cooking mode displays a standard control condition (default condition, for example, "microwave output value 500 W") selected from the control conditions,
According to the input from the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC is configured to change the standard control conditions.
Therefore, the user can easily select and check the control conditions, which is convenient.

The built-in composite heating cooker of Embodiment 1 implements the fifth invention in the following form. i.e.
an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be heated from below in the upper part of the main body 110;
a microwave heating source (second heating means) 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113 arranged inside the main body 110;
an oven heating source (third heating means) 188 that heats the heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40;
display means 30, 31L, 31R;
and an integrated control device MC that controls the first, second, and third heating means,
The integrated control device MC has a function of performing a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 are driven with a time difference,
The integrated control device MC further has a function of performing a combined cooking mode that drives or automatically switches the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 simultaneously or with a time difference,
The input operation unit 40 includes third selection means (for example, input keys of the left operation unit 40L) 43L1 for selecting the induction heating source 9, and first selection means (input keys) for selecting the cooperative cooking mode. 43MC and a second selection means (input key) 43M1 for selecting a compound cooking menu,
After power is supplied by the main power switch 97, the integrated control device MC displays the standby initial screen 30Z at a stage when none of the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188 are operated. is displayed on the display means,
After the standby initial screen 30Z is displayed, when the input operation of the first selection means 43MC is started before the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, the input operation of the cooperative cooking mode is performed. The first specific screen 30SP of is displayed,
When the integrated control device MC starts the input operation of the microwave heating source 189 before the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 after the main power is supplied, the combined cooking mode The second specific screen 30SC for inputting is displayed.

For this reason, after the main power supply is supplied, the cooperative cooking mode and the composite cooking mode are selected according to the selection means (input keys 43MC, 43M1, etc.) that are operated the earliest. Therefore, it is convenient for the user.

The built-in composite heating cooker of Embodiment 1 implements the sixth invention in the following form. i.e.
an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be heated in the upper part of the main body 110;
a microwave heating source (second heating means) 189 for heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 arranged inside the main body 110;
an oven heating source (third heating means) 188 that heats the heating chamber 113 by a heating principle different from that of the microwave heating source 189;
an input operation unit 40;
display means 30, 31L, 31R;
The induction heating source 9, and an integrated control device MC that controls the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 respectively,
The integrated control device MC includes a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are driven with a time difference, and a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189 and the A combined cooking mode in which the oven heating source 188 is driven simultaneously or with a time difference, or is automatically switched and driven, and a single cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 is driven alone,
The integrated control device MC displays a first specific screen 30SP for executing the cooperative cooking mode, a second specific screen 30SC for executing the combined cooking mode, and a third specific screen 30ST for executing the single cooking mode, alternatively displayed on the display means,
In a state where any one of the first specific screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC, and the third specific screen 30ST is displayed, the integrated control device MC issues a cooking start command from the input operation unit 40. The configuration is characterized in that, when the food is received, the process proceeds to the cooking process.
With this configuration, the first specific screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC, and the third specific screen 30ST are displayed regardless of whether the user executes cooking in the cooperative cooking mode, the combined cooking mode, or the single cooking mode. It is convenient to use because there is no input mistake because it goes through the input in the state where it is.

The built-in composite heating cooker of Embodiment 1 implements the sixth invention in the following form. i.e.
an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be heated from below in the upper part of the main body 110;
a microwave heating source (second heating means) 189 for heating the heating chamber 113 arranged inside the main body 110;
an oven heating source (third heating means) 188 that heats the heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40;
An integrated control device (control unit) MC that controls the first, second, and third heating sources, respectively;
The input operation unit 40 has a dedicated operation unit (right operation unit 40R, left operation unit 40L) for the induction heating source 9 and a common operation unit 40M for the first, second and third heat sources. ,
The integrated control device MC has a function of performing a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are driven with a time difference,
The integrated control device MC further has a function of performing a combined cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven simultaneously, driven with a time difference, or automatically switched,
The shared operation unit 40M includes first selection means (input key 43MC) for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, and second selection means (input key 43M1) for selecting a composite cooking menu,
After the main power supply is supplied to the integrated control device MC, when the input operation of the first selection means 43MC is started before the second selection means 43M1, the first selection means 43MC for inputting the cooperative cooking mode is selected. 1 Specific screen 30SP is displayed,
After the main power is supplied, when the input operation of the second selection means 43M1 is started before the first selection means 43MC, the second specific screen 30SC for inputting the composite cooking mode is displayed. It was the configuration shown.

For this reason, after the main power is supplied, the cooperative cooking mode and the composite cooking mode are selected according to the selection means (input keys 43MC, 43M1, etc.) that are operated the earliest. Therefore, it is convenient for the user.

Furthermore, when using either the first heat source 9 or the second heat source 189, the first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode and the second specific screen for the combined cooking mode are displayed first. Therefore, confirmation of the cooking mode can be performed at an early stage, and usability is improved.

Furthermore, on the upper surface of the main body 110, an integrated display unit 30 is further provided adjacent to the shared operation unit 40M,
The shared operation unit 40M has the second selection means 3M1 arranged next to the first selection means 43MC,
A third selection means (input key 43M2) is provided on the opposite side of the first selection means 43MC across the second selection means 43M1,
In the cooperative cooking mode, a plurality of cooperative cooking menus are displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by the first selection means 43MC, one cooperative cooking menu is selected by the second selection means 43M1, and the third cooperative cooking menu is selected. The selection means 43M2 has an input step of selecting the control condition of the cooperative cooking mode or the heating part of the first heat source,
The composite cooking mode has an input step of displaying a composite cooking menu on the integrated display unit 30 with the second selection means 43M1 and selecting control conditions for the composite cooking mode with the third selection means 43M2. was the configuration.

Therefore, by operating the first to third input means 43MC, 43M1, 43M2 while confirming the display information of the integrated display section 30 adjacent to the shared operation section 40M, a necessary cooking menu can be displayed. can be selected and control conditions can be input. Therefore, user operability is good.

Furthermore, the integrated control device MC further has a function of performing an independent cooking mode in which the first, second, and third heating units 9, 189, and 188 are independently driven,
After the main power supply is supplied to the integrated control device MC, the dedicated operation units (right operation unit 40R, left operation unit 40L) are operated prior to the first selection means 43MC and the second selection means 43M1. is started, the third specific screen 30ST for inputting the single cooking mode is displayed.

Therefore, if the dedicated operation section (the right operation section 40R, the left operation section 40L) is operated first, the single cooking mode can be easily entered through the display of the third specific screen 30ST of the single cooking mode. be able to.

The integrated display unit 30 has a display screen 30D displayed upward from the main body 110,
disposing the shared operation unit 40M in front of the display screen 30D and on the upper surface of the main body 110;
In the display screen 30D, a first area 30L and a second area 30M are arranged in the horizontal direction,
Identification information of the linked cooking menu is displayed in the first area 30L,
Information indicating the control conditions of the cooperative cooking mode or the heating units 17HL and 17HR of the first heating source 9 is displayed in the second area 30M,
The composite cooking menu is displayed in the first area 30L, and the information indicating the control conditions of the composite cooking mode is displayed in the second area 30M.

Therefore, in the display screen 30D, information such as the control conditions for the cooperative cooking mode and information indicating the control conditions for the composite cooking menu are displayed in the same second area 30M. Thereby, the user can confirm the necessary control conditions from the same second area 30M regardless of the change of the cooking mode, which is convenient.

Further, an individual display unit (left display unit 31L, right display unit 31R) is further provided adjacent to the dedicated operation unit (right operation unit 40R, left operation unit 40L),
The third specific screen 30ST is configured to be displayed on the individual display sections (the left display section 31L and the right display section 31R).
According to this, in the left display section 31L and the right display section 31R adjacent to the right operation section 40R and the left operation section 40L, respectively, the content of the third specific screen 30ST is confirmed, and the operation to the single heating mode is performed. can be easily advanced.

Furthermore, at a position in front of the display screen 30D, the second selection means (input key 43M1) is arranged corresponding to the first area 30L,
In the configuration, the third selection means (input key) 43M2 is arranged corresponding to the second area 30M.
Therefore, these input keys can be operated while looking at the display screen 30D, which is convenient.

Furthermore, the integrated control device MC displays the , the standby common information of the first, second and third heating sources is displayed on the common screen 30Z.
Therefore, irrespective of the type of heat source, the standby time common information is input before any one of the first, second and third heat sources 9, 189 and 188 is selected by the shared operation unit 40M. can be easily verified. Therefore, there is no fear of inducing an erroneous operation.

The built-in composite heating cooker of Embodiment 1 implements the seventh invention in the following form. i.e.
an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be heated from below in the upper part of the main body 110;
a microwave heating source (second heating means) 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113 arranged inside the main body 110;
an oven heating source (third heating means) 188 that heats the heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40;
an integrated display unit 30;
An integrated control device (control unit) MC that controls the first, second, and third heating means,
The integrated control device MC has a function of performing a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are driven with a time difference depending on the user's operation. had
That is, in the cooperative cooking mode, the length of time between the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 is determined by the user's operation.
Furthermore, the integrated control device MC further has a function of performing a combined cooking mode that drives or automatically switches the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 simultaneously or with a time difference,
The input operation unit 40 includes an input key 43MC as first selection means for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, and an input key 43M1 as second selection means for selecting a composite cooking menu,
After power is supplied to the integrated control device MC by closing the main power switch 97, the input key 43MC (first selection means) is operated prior to the input key 43M1 (second selection means). When the input operation of is started, the first specific screen 30SP for inputting the cooperative cooking mode is displayed,
Further, when the input operation of the input key 43M1 is started before the input key 43MC after power is supplied to the integrated control device MC, the second specific screen for inputting the composite cooking mode is displayed. 30SC was displayed.

With this configuration, two heating sources, the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189, can be used. Since the cooking mode is selected, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that has good operability and can be used for a wide range of cooking.

The built-in composite heating cooker of Embodiment 1 implements the eighth invention in the following form. i.e.
a main body 110 having a top plate 15 and containing a heating chamber 113;
an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be heated placed on the top plate 15;
a microwave heating source (second heating means) 189 for heating the food placed inside the heating chamber 113;
an integrated display unit 30;
Dedicated display portions 31L and 31R of the induction heating source 9;
a general control device MC that controls the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the integrated display section 30, and the dedicated display sections 31L and 31R;
a central operation unit 40M for giving a command from a user to the integrated control device MC;
Dedicated operation units 40L and 40R for the induction heating source 9,
The central operation unit 40M has an input key 43M1 for selecting a linked cooking menu and an input key 43MS for starting a heating operation according to the linked cooking menu,
The dedicated operation units 40L and 40R are operation units dedicated to the induction heating source 9,
The central operation unit 40M has an operation unit 40M2 for the microwave heating source 189 and a cooperative operation unit 40MC for the cooperative cooking menu,
The cooperative operation unit 40MC has a function of displaying the cooperative cooking menu on the integrated display unit 30, a function of causing the integrated control device MC to select one of the displayed cooperative cooking menus, and the cooperative cooking menu. a function to start cooking a menu, and
After the main power is turned on, the integrated controller MC determines whether or not the linked cooking menu can be executed, and displays the first specific screen 30SP on at least one of the integrated display section and the dedicated display section. display and
The integrated control device MC selectably displays at least one of the linked cooking menus on the first specific screen 30SP, and a command to start cooking of one of the linked cooking menus is sent to the linked operation unit 40MC. Alternatively, it is configured to have a function of waiting for an operation from the dedicated operation units 40L and 40R.

With this configuration, it is possible to use two heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189, and to provide a heating cooker that can effectively use the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode.

Further, the first specific screen is displayed according to the input from the cooperative operation section 40MC.
For this reason, it is expected that the input operation can be easily performed before switching to the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode.

The kitchen furniture according to the first embodiment implements the tenth invention in the following form. i.e.
A composite having an installation opening 2A on the upper surface and carrying out any one of the first invention, the second invention, the third invention, the fourth invention, or the fifth invention in the installation opening 2A It is a configuration in which a mold heating cooker is installed.

According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the kitchen furniture 2 having a highly convenient composite cooking device that can be used for a wide variety of cooking by linking a plurality of heating means.

The control program for the combined heating cooker of the first embodiment implements the eleventh invention in the following form. i.e.
a main body 110 having a top plate 15 and containing a heating chamber 113;
an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 having a first heating portion 17HR and a second heating portion 17HL for heating the object to be heated placed on the top plate 15;
A microwave heating source (second heating means) 189 that heats and cooks using the heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40 that receives user operations;
an integrated display unit 30 for displaying information about the operation of the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189;
It is executed by a computer incorporated in the integrated controller MC of a composite heating cooker comprising the induction heating source 9 and the integrated controller MC that controls the microwave heating source 189,
step 1 of activating the display means when the main power is turned on;
a step 2 of displaying standby common information on the display means;
Step 3 of determining one cooking mode selected earliest from a single cooking mode, a combined cooking mode and a linked cooking mode using the first heating means;
In step 3, when it is determined that the cooperative cooking mode is selected first, the first specific screen is displayed, and when it is determined that the combined cooking mode is selected first, the second specific screen is displayed. is displayed, and if it is determined that the single cooking mode has been selected first, a step 4 of displaying a third specific screen;
(1) when the first specific screen is displayed and a cooking start command signal is received, the cooperative cooking mode is started;
(2) when receiving a cooking start command signal while the second specific screen is displayed, starting the combined cooking mode;
(3) when the third specific screen is displayed, if a cooking start command signal is received, the single cooking mode is started;
It is a configuration characterized by

According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient control program for a combined heating cooker that can coordinate a plurality of heating means and can widely handle various cooking modes.

The integrated control unit MC is configured to determine whether or not the permission condition is satisfied before starting the heating operation in the cooking process 1 .
Therefore, the required heat source can be reliably secured before the cooking process 1 is executed.

It further has an oven heating means 188 as a third heating means for heating the heating chamber 113,
The oven heating means 188 has a heating principle different from that of the microwave heating means 189 .
For this reason, it is possible to efficiently heat various types of food to be cooked, and the range of cooking is greatly expanded.

Further, in the cooperative cooking mode, when the microwave heating means 189 performs a heating operation in the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2, the oven heating means 188 cooperates with the microwave heating means 189 to cook the food to be cooked. It was configured to heat things.
For this reason, it is possible to efficiently heat various types of food to be cooked, and the range of cooking is greatly expanded.

When the integrated control device MC receives a command to execute the cooperative cooking menu from the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC determines whether or not the permission conditions are satisfied. It was a configuration to shift to cooking mode.
Because of this configuration, when executing a cooperative cooking menu that can handle a wide range of various types of heat cooking, the suitability of the heat source that can be used can be determined in advance before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode, resulting in user operability. A highly convenient composite heating cooker can be realized without impairing the

Further, the input operation unit 40 includes a first input key 43MC for giving a command to select the cooperative cooking mode to the integrated control device MC, a second input key 43MT for canceling execution of the cooperative cooking mode, It is a configuration with
With this configuration, it is possible to easily instruct selection of the linked cooking mode and stop of the heating operation of the cooking mode by operating the first input key 43MC and the second input key 43MT, thereby impairing the user's operability. Therefore, a highly convenient composite heating cooker can be realized.

Further, in the cooperative cooking mode, the integrated control device MC selects a selection step 1 for specifying the food to be cooked that can be executed in the cooperative cooking menu according to the signal from the input operation unit 40, and selects the heating means to be used. It was a configuration provided with a selection step 2 to select and a cooperative cooking program that performs.
Therefore, through the input operation unit 40, it is possible to easily specify the food to be cooked that can be executed in the cooperative cooking menu and select the heating means to be used. It is possible to realize a composite heating cooker with a high

Furthermore, the cooperative cooking mode is further provided with a start step for starting the heating operation of the cooperative cooking mode in response to a signal from the input operation unit 40 .
Therefore, through the input operation unit 40, it is possible to easily perform the three steps of specifying the food to be cooked that can be executed in the cooperative cooking menu, selecting the heating means to be used, and starting cooking, thereby improving the operability of the user. A highly convenient composite heating cooker can be realized without damage.

Further, in the linked cooking mode, the integrated control device MC starts the cooking process 1, and then starts the cooking process 2 after or before the end of the cooking process 1. rice field.
With this configuration, the flow from the cooking process 1 to the cooking process 2 is unified, there is no fear of unnecessary confusion for the user, and an effect that the overall cooking time can be shortened can be expected.

The integrated control device MC displays the information of the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188 used in the cooperative cooking mode on the display means 30, 31L, and 31R in the cooperative cooking mode. It was a configuration to display in.
Because of this configuration, the user can easily know various information (for example, heating power, heating time, etc.) of the three heating sources, and the user's operability is not impaired. You can realize the vessel.

The induction heating source 9 has a first heating section (right heating section) 17HR and a second heating section (left heating section) 17HL arranged at different positions,
The integrated control device MC has a function of individually controlling the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL,
The integrated control device MC is configured to be able to select either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL in the process of selecting the cooperative cooking menu.
With this configuration, cooking can be performed using two heating units, and the heating unit can be selected before the start of the cooperative cooking mode, so that the user can cook with the desired heating unit. A highly convenient composite heating cooker can be realized without impairing the user's operability.

The input operation unit 40 includes an individual operation unit 1 (right operation unit 40R) capable of setting control conditions for the first heating unit (right heating unit) 17HR, and a control unit for controlling the second heating unit (left heating unit) 17HL. further comprising an individual operation unit 2 (left operation unit 40L) capable of setting conditions,
After shifting to the cooperative cooking mode, the control conditions for the right heating section and the left heating section can be individually set by the right operating section 40R and the left operating section 40L.
Therefore, cooking can be performed using two heating units, and control conditions can be set for each of the two heating units, so that cooking can be performed according to the user's desired conditions, improving operability for the user. A highly convenient composite heating cooker can be realized without damage.

In the cooperative cooking mode, the process information indicating the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 is displayed as the process display section 332 on the integrated display section 30 .
With this configuration, the user's understanding of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 is deepened, and there is no concern of causing unnecessary confusion. Therefore, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite heating cooker without impairing the operability for the user.

Further, the process information is updated and displayed as the cooking progresses.
For this reason, the progress of the cooking process can be known realistically, and a highly convenient composite heating cooker can be realized.

Furthermore, the end of the cooking process 1 and the start of the cooking process 2 are executed by commands from the central operation unit 40M.
With this configuration, regardless of the heating means to be used, the command from the central operation unit 40M can finish the cooking process 1 and can command the subsequent start of the cooking process 2, so that the user's operability is not impaired. , a highly convenient composite heating cooker can be realized.

When the cooking step 2 is performed by the first heating unit (right heating unit) 17HR and the second heating unit (left heating unit) 17HL, the cooking step 2 is performed by the right operation unit 40R or the left heating unit 40R. It is configured such that it can be terminated by a command from the operation unit 40L.
Therefore, even in the cooperative cooking mode, the cooking process can be finished with the right operating section 40R or the left operating section 40L, as in the case of ordinary single heating cooking, so that there is no fear of causing confusion for the user, and operability is improved. is a good configuration.

When the cooking process 1 ends, an extension process can be added by a command from the input operation unit 40 .
For this reason, even when the user wants to perform additional heating after seeing the result of the cooking step 1, additional heating can be easily performed, which is convenient.

When the cooking process 2 ends, an extension process can be added by a command from the input operation unit 40 .
Therefore, for the user who wants to finish the cooking by the cooking step 2, additional heating can further improve the finish. Therefore, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite heating cooker without impairing the user's operability.

At the selection step of specifying the cooking items that can be executed in the cooperative cooking menu, at least two pieces of the identification information 330 for specifying each of the plurality of cooking items are simultaneously displayed on the display means.
With this configuration, even if the number of linked cooking menus is large, the user can easily extract the desired identification information 330, and the configuration is excellent in operability.

The integrated control device MC displays the identification information 330 in a predetermined order on the display means ( It was configured to be displayed on the first specific screen 30SP) of the integrated display unit 30. FIG.
With this configuration, there is no fear of causing confusion when the user searches for the desired identification information 330, and the configuration has good operability.

The display means (30, 31L, 31R) displays at least one control of the identification information 330 and the driven induction heating source 9 and microwave heating source 189 during execution of the cooperative cooking mode. At least one of the conditions and time information regarding the heating operation is displayed.
Therefore, even in the cooperative cooking mode, the user can easily set the operating conditions and situations of the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 as in the case of normal independent cooking. As a result, there is no concern that the user will be confused or misoperated, and the operability is excellent.

Furthermore, when the cooking process 1 ends, the display means (integrated display unit 30) displays a notice of the end of the cooking process 1 before the end of the cooking process 1 or a transition to the cooking process 2.
Therefore, the user can start preparing for the cooking process 2 in advance, and the overall cooking time can be shortened and the efficiency can be improved.

The integrated control device MC further has a composite cooking program for a plurality of composite cooking menus for executing a composite cooking mode using both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188,
When displaying the composite cooking menu on the integrated display unit 30, the integrated control device MC controls the control conditions ( For example, microwave output value, heating intensity, heating time, etc.)
Therefore, even in the composite cooking mode, the user can easily set control conditions applicable to the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 . As a result, there is no concern that the user will be confused or misoperated, and the operability is excellent.

The integrated control device MC further has a composite cooking program for a plurality of composite cooking menus for executing a composite cooking mode using both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188,
The input operation unit 40 further includes input means (first input key 43MC, input key 43M1) for selecting either one of the linked cooking menu and the composite cooking menu.
With this configuration, it is possible to easily select between the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode by operating the first input key 43MC and the input key 43M1, which is highly convenient without impairing the operability of the user. A composite heating cooker can be realized.

The integrated control device MC includes one or more microcomputers,
The cooperative cooking program and the composite cooking program are configured to be executed by the microcomputer.
Therefore, centralized and reliable control can be expected by the microcomputer of the integrated control device MC.

Every time the input operation unit 40 is operated, the integrated control device MC displays the names of the individual compound cooking menus (for example, "warm", "manual range", etc.) in a certain order on the integrated display unit 30. It was a configuration to display on.
With this configuration, there is no fear of causing confusion when the user searches for the desired compound cooking menu, and the configuration is excellent in operability.

The first heating means is an induction heating source 9 that heats the object to be heated placed on the top plate 15 from below the top plate 15,
The second heating means is a microwave heating source 189,
The integrated control device MC controls at least heating intensity or thermal power value, calorific value, thermal power level, power consumption, microwave output value, heating target temperature, and heating time in the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189. The configuration was to control any one of them.
With this configuration, the two types of heat sources can be driven under appropriate control conditions.

The first heating means is an induction heating source 9 that heats the object to be heated placed on the top plate 15 from below the top plate 15,
The second heating means is a microwave heating source 189,
The third heating means is an oven heating source 188 that utilizes radiant heat,
The integrated control device MC controls at least one of heating intensity or heating power value, calorific value, heating power level, power consumption, microwave output value, heating target temperature, and heating time in the three heating means. was the configuration.
With this configuration, the three heat sources with different heating principles can be driven under appropriate control conditions.

When executing the cooperative cooking menu, if there is a heating means that cannot be used, the integrated control device MC displays information that can identify the heating means at the stage of selecting the heating means to be used, on the integrated display unit 30 of the first specific screen 30SP.
With this arrangement, the user does not have to worry about unnecessary confusion or misunderstanding when choosing a heating means. As a result, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite heating cooker without impairing the operability for the user.

The “permission condition” for executing the cooperative cooking menu is whether or not the integrated control device MC is subject to regulation of an upper limit value (for example, 5000 W) for total power consumption from the input operation unit 40 or the outside. is determined by
According to this configuration, it is possible to avoid troubles such as interrupting heating due to power shortage after starting the cooking process of the cooperative cooking menu, or lowering the heating power partway through. In other words, the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode, which takes a longer cooking process than the single heating, can be executed as expected.

Furthermore, when the third heating means is used, the permission condition includes the determination condition that the third heating means is not in use. Switch to cooking mode. As a result, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite heating cooker without impairing the operability for the user.

first temperature sensors TS3 to TS6 for measuring the temperature of the object to be heated by the induction heating source 9;
a second temperature sensor TS2 for measuring the temperature of the heating chamber 113;
A third temperature sensor 160 that measures the temperature of the food contained in the heating chamber 113,
The integrated control device MC determines the degree of progress of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 based on the temperature measurement information from the first to third temperature sensors in the cooperation mode, and displays it on the integrated display unit 30. Met.
With this configuration, the user can easily know the degree of progress of cooking from the temperature state of the cooking process, and a highly convenient composite heating cooker can be realized without impairing the user's operability.

Further, the integrated control device MC is configured to display the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display section 30 when shifting to the cooperative cooking mode.
In the linked cooking mode, the temperature measurement results from the first temperature sensors TS3 to TS6 and the second temperature sensor TS2 are displayed on the first specific screen 30SP.
With this configuration, the user can easily know the temperature measurement result of the cooking process shown on the first specific screen 30SP, and the user's operability is not impaired, resulting in a highly convenient composite heating cooker. realizable.

Furthermore, before the cooperative cooking mode is selected by the input operation unit 40, the standby common information is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30,
The integrated control device MC ends the display of the first specific screen 30SP after finishing all the cooking processes in the linked cooking mode, and displays the integrated display during the period before the start of the next heat cooking. In the configuration, the unit 30 displays the standby common information 30N.
Therefore, when the cooperative cooking mode is not executed, the user can grasp the preparations for the next cooking, precautions, and the like from the standby time common information 30N. A highly convenient composite heating cooker can be realized.

Furthermore, a first temperature sensor A (TS3 to TS6) for measuring the temperature of the object to be heated by the induction heating source 9;
a first temperature sensor B (TS8, TS9) for measuring the temperature of the electrical components of the induction heating source 9;
a second temperature sensor TS2 for measuring the temperature of the heating chamber 113;
A third temperature sensor 160 that measures the temperature of the food contained in the heating chamber 113,
The integrated control device MC detects an abnormality from at least one of the first temperature sensors A and B, the second temperature sensor TS2 and the third temperature sensor 160 before shifting to the linked cooking mode. When the temperature measurement information shown is received, it is configured not to shift to the linked cooking mode.
Therefore, when an abnormal temperature is detected before transitioning to cooperative cooking, cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is not executed, and a highly safe and convenient composite heating cooker can be realized.

In addition, the integrated control device MC detects from at least one of the first temperature sensors A and B, the second temperature sensor TS2, and the third temperature sensor 160 during execution of the cooperative cooking mode. , when temperature measurement information indicating an abnormality is received, the operation of the cooperative cooking mode is stopped in the middle of the cooperative cooking mode, and the occurrence of the abnormality is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP or the integrated display unit 30. be.
For this reason, if an abnormal temperature is detected even after shifting to cooperative cooking, the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is stopped, and the occurrence of the abnormality is displayed to inform the user of the abnormality. As a result, it is possible to realize a composite heating cooker that is highly safe and highly convenient.

The input operation unit 40 is installed in the front part of the upper surface of the main body 110 so as to extend in the left-right direction,
The induction heating source 9 has a left heating section 17HL on the left side of the top plate 15 and a right heating section 17HR on the right side of the top plate 15,
In the input operation unit 40, a central operation unit 40M for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 is arranged at the center,
A left operation unit (left first operation unit) 40L for the left heating unit 17HL is arranged on the left side of the central operation unit 40M,
A right operation unit (right first operation unit) 40R for the right heating unit 17HR is arranged on the right side of the central operation unit 40M,
A first input key 43MC for giving a command to select the cooperative cooking mode to the integrated control device MC is arranged on the central operation unit 40M,
When power is supplied, the integrated control device MC displays standby common information on the integrated display section 30 and enters an input standby state waiting for a command from the selection input key 43MC.
Therefore, it is possible to expect the effect of informing the user of precautions regarding safety and the like before the user starts cooking, thereby encouraging safe use. A highly convenient composite heating cooker can be realized without impairing the user's operability.

The input operation unit 40 has a first input key 43MC for giving a command to select the cooperative cooking mode to the integrated control device MC, and a second input key 43MT for canceling execution of the cooperative cooking mode. death,
The first input key 43MC is configured to emit light to indicate that cooking of the cooperative cooking menu is being performed during the period of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2. FIG.
With this configuration, the user can easily confirm that the cooperative cooking mode has been entered by the light emitting state of the first input key. A heating cooker can be realized.

The input operation unit 40 has a second input key 43MT for canceling execution of the cooperative cooking mode in addition to the first input key 43MC,
When the second input key 43MT is operated, the light emitting operation (indicating the cooperative cooking mode) by the first input key is stopped.
With this configuration, the user can easily confirm that the cooperative cooking mode has been entered and that the cooperative cooking mode has been canceled by the light emitting state of the first input key, thereby impairing the user's operability. Therefore, a highly convenient composite heating cooker can be realized.

Other features of the first embodiment.
(1) Part 1:
The "specific period" for restricting the operation so that the induction heating source 9 or the microwave heating source 189 to be used first does not operate corresponding to menus other than the linked cooking menu is one of the linked cooking menus. is selected or when execution of the associated cooking menu is instructed.
Therefore, it is possible to reliably secure a necessary heat source along with execution of the cooperative cooking menu.

(2) Part 2:
The "specific period" is a period that ends when the heating means that has started the cooking operation first among the induction heating source 9 or the microwave heating source 189 stops the cooking operation. rice field. For example, when the left heating unit 17HR is used in the cooking process 1, the occupied state of the right heating unit 17HR is released at the end of the cooking process 1.
For this reason, the heating means that has started the cooking operation first is automatically released from the restriction on the operation of the heating source at the timing when the cooking operation is stopped/finished.

(3) Part 3:
Furthermore, when executing a menu other than the cooperative cooking menu, the integrated control device MC executes a control menu for each heating means before cooking with the induction heating source 9 or the microwave heating source 189 is started. in the first area 30L to the third area 30R of the integrated display section.
For this reason, before the induction heating source 9 or the microwave heating source 189 starts cooking, the user can set the control conditions applicable to the control menu of each heating means on the second specific screen of the integrated display section 30. It can be confirmed by 30SC, and it can be expected that the user's operability will be improved.

(4) Part 4:
Furthermore, an input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the integrated control device MC, and a non-volatile storage device MM storing an operation program of the integrated control device MC,
The storage device MM stores a cooperative operation program for the cooperative cooking menu.
Therefore, the cooperative cooking menu can be executed by utilizing the cooperative operation program stored in the storage device MM.

(5) Part 5:
26, the storage device MM stores a plurality of data for use in controlling the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 (both the single cooking mode and the combined cooking mode). Data of different types of control menus (see FIG. 25) are further stored,
The control menu is displayed on the integrated display section 30 by operating the input operation section 40 .
Therefore, by operating the input operation unit 40, the control menu can be checked at any time, and it can be expected that the selection error of the control menu using a plurality of heating sources can be eliminated.

(6) Part 6:
Further, when the cooking process of the linked cooking menu or other menu is completed, the integrated control device MC sets the control conditions input by the user to the cooking by the induction heating source 9 or the microwave heating source 18. It has a function of automatically storing (storing) in the storage device MM, and then reproducing the previously stored control conditions (for example, thermal power value and heating time) when starting cooking again. Configuration.
Therefore, before starting cooking by the induction heating source 9 or the microwave heating source 18, the control conditions stored in the storage device MM can be called up and used for cooking, which is convenient.

(7) Part 7:
Further, the integrated display section 30 displays a second specific screen 30SC common to the two modes for the single heating mode of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the combined cooking mode.
In the second specific screen 30SC (display screen 30D), the menu of the single cooking mode, the name specifying the menu of the combined cooking mode (for example, "range automatic", "warm", etc.), and the control mode In this configuration, applicable individual control conditions (for example, "cooking time", "thermal power value", etc.) are displayed side by side.
Therefore, the user can easily compare and confirm the control mode and the individual control conditions by looking at the display screen 30D.

(8) Part 8:
Further, the integrated control device MC causes one display screen 30D displaying the name of the control menu of the composite cooking mode to be displayed in a certain order each time the first input key 43M1 is operated once. It is configured to switch to another display screen 30D and display on the integrated display section 30 (second display screen 30SC).
Therefore, every time the input key 43M1 is operated once, the control menu can be displayed one after another, improving operability.

(9) Part 9:
The first heating means (induction heating source 9) and the second heating means (microwave heating source 189) are installed inside a body 110 having a top plate 15,
The induction heating source 9 includes a right heating portion 17HR on the right side of the center portion of the top plate 15 and a left heating portion 17HL on the left side,
The main body 110 includes a right operation portion 40R of the right heating portion 17HR and a left operation portion 40L of the left heating portion 17HL,
An input operation section 40M of the microwave heating source 189 is arranged between the right operation section 40R and the left operation section 40L.
Therefore, the induction heating source 9 used for the cooperative cooking menu can be used for heat cooking at two locations, the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL, which is highly convenient.
In addition, a right operation unit 40R and a left operation unit 40L are arranged corresponding to the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL, respectively, and an input operation unit 40M of the microwave heating source 9 is arranged between them. Therefore, accurate input operation can be expected from the input operation part corresponding to each heating source and each heating part.

(10) Part 10:
A top plate 15 exposed to the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2 is provided on the upper part of the main body case HC,
Inside the body case HC, there are a heating chamber 113 whose front opening is closed by a door 114, a microwave heating device 120 for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 113, and a microwave heating device 120 above the top plate 15. and an induction heating source 9 that heats the object to be heated placed in the
A first intake port 164 for introducing outside air for cooling the induction heating source 9 into the inside of the main body case HC, and a second intake port 164 for introducing outside air for cooling the microwave heating source 189 into the inside of the main body case HC. 2 air intake ports 152 (153F, 152B) are arranged on opposite sides of each other with the heating chamber 113 interposed therebetween.

According to this configuration, one heating cooker can perform both microwave heating and induction heating, making it a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

In addition, since the positions for introducing the cooling outside air for the microwave heating device 120 and the induction heating source 9 are separated from each other, it is possible to avoid adversely affecting or interfering with each other's introduction of outside air.

(11) Part 11:
An upper unit 100 containing the induction heating source 9 and a lower unit 200 containing the microwave heating device 120 are partitioned vertically by a partition wall (bottom surface 16S of the upper case 16). If the upper and lower parts are partitioned by the structure in this way, it is possible to avoid part of the cooling air from flowing in an unintended direction between the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200, thereby reducing the cooling effect of the target portion. do not have.

(12) Part 12:
When the central operation section 40M and the integrated control device MC are arranged in the upper unit 100, it is more preferable to form the partition wall 16S with a metal material. That is, due to the presence of the metal partition wall 16S, there is no concern that unwanted noise or radio waves will adversely affect the other between the microwave heating device 120 and the induction heating source 9 . Therefore, for example, even if microwaves leak from the vicinity of the microwave oscillator 122, the electronic components on the upper unit 100 side can be prevented from being adversely affected by the microwaves. For this reason, for example, the microcomputer constituting the integrated control device MC, which is an important control means on the upper unit 100 side, the touch switch detection circuit constituting the input operation unit 40, etc. may malfunction or malfunction due to the leaked microwave. It is possible to avoid detection failure and unstable operation.

(13) Part 13:
The main body case HC is partitioned into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B by a partition wall 16S.
The upper space 300A further includes an input operation unit 40 that selects a heating source, and an integrated control device MC that receives an input signal from this input operation unit,
The input operation unit 40 includes a right operation unit 40R that specifies the operating conditions of the right heating unit 17HR, a left operation unit 40L that specifies the operating conditions of the left heating unit 17HL, the oven heating source 188 and the microwave oven. a central operating unit 40M that specifies the operating conditions of both heating sources 189;
Outside air introduced from the first intake port 164 by the second cooling fan 61 passes below the input operation unit 40 .

According to this configuration, both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 use the central operation unit 40M, so even if the installation space is narrow, the operation area for the input keys and the like in the central operation unit 40M is secured. can.
Furthermore, since the outside air passes below the input operation section 40, overheating of the electric parts constituting the input operation section 40 and failure or damage resulting therefrom can be prevented.
In addition, since the partition wall 16S is made of metal in the first embodiment, even if microwave leakage or electromagnetic noise occurs in the lower space, propagation to the lower space 300B side can be suppressed and the upper space 300A can be suppressed. control part, for example, the integrated control device MC can be prevented from being adversely affected.

(14) Part 14:
A top plate 15 exposed to the upper surface of the kitchen furniture 2 is provided on the upper part of the main body case HC,
Inside the body case HC, there are a heating chamber 113 whose front opening is closed by a door 114, a microwave heating device 120 for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 113, and a microwave heating device 120 above the top plate 15. and an induction heating source 9 that heats the object to be heated placed in the
The inside of the main body case HC is divided into upper and lower parts by a bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. As shown in FIG. That is, the bottom surface 16S (as a partition wall) of the metal upper case 16 partitioned the upper space 300A and the lower space 300B.
Furthermore, the upper space 300A accommodates the IH coils 17L and 17R of the induction heating source 9 and an inverter circuit board 80 on which an inverter circuit 81 for the IH coils 17L and 17R is mounted,
The lower space 300B accommodates the microwave heating device 120,
The upper air passage AH, which guides the cooling air for the induction heating source 9, penetrates the bottom surface 16S serving as the partition wall (via the ventilation hole 64) and introduces the outside air for cooling,
A lower air passage UH for guiding cooling air for the microwave heating source 189 is formed in the lower space 300B,
The radiator 122H of the microwave heating source 189 is arranged in the lower air passage UH.

According to this configuration, one heating cooker can perform both microwave heating and induction heating, making it a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

(15) Part 15:
The interior of the main body case HC is partitioned into two spaces, an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B formed below the partition wall 16S, by a metal partition wall (the bottom surface 16S of the upper case 16),
The upper space 300A accommodates the heating coils 17L and 17R of the induction heating source 9 and an inverter circuit board 80 on which an inverter circuit for the heating coils is mounted,
The lower space 300B accommodates the microwave heating source 120,
The upper air passage AH, which guides the cooling air to the upper space 300A, penetrates the partition wall (vent hole 64) and introduces outside air from the outside of the lower space,
A lower air passage UH for guiding cooling air to the lower space 300B is formed in the lower space 300B and introduces outside air from a position different from the upper air passage AH,
In the lower air passage UH, the heat radiating portion 122H of the microwave heating source 120 is arranged downstream of the outside air inlet (second air intake ports 152F, 152B), and the cooling after cooling the heat radiating portion 122H is performed. The air is discharged to the outside through an exhaust duct 102 isolated from the upper air passage AH.

According to this configuration, one heating cooker can perform both microwave heating and induction heating, making it a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

In addition, since the microwave heating device 120 and the induction heating source 9 are vertically partitioned by the metal partition wall (the bottom surface 16S of the upper case 16), it is not necessary to provide a dedicated partition plate. Due to the presence of the partition wall, there is no concern that unwanted noise or radio waves will adversely affect the other between the microwave heating device 120 and the induction heating source 9 . Furthermore, the microwave heating device 120 and the induction heating source 9 are prevented from adversely affecting or interfering with each other.

Furthermore, since the upper air passage AH and the lower air passage UH are individually secured in both the upper space 300A and the lower space 300B, electric circuit components, heat generating parts, etc., of both the microwave heating device 120 and the induction heating source 9 are provided. can be prevented from overheating, and a longer life can be expected.

(16) Part 16:
The interior of the main body case HC is partitioned into two spaces, an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B, by a metal partition wall 16S.
The upper space 300A accommodates the IH coils 17L and 17R and the inverter circuit board 80 for the IH coil,
The lower space 300B accommodates the microwave heating device 120,
The upper space 300A has an upper first cooling fan 60 that introduces outside air for cooling the induction heating source 9 from the outside of the lower space 300B,
The lower space 300B has lower cooling fans 128 and 129 for introducing outside air for cooling the microwave heating device 120,
The operation of the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 is performed independently of the heating operation of the induction heating device 120 .

According to this configuration, one heating cooker can perform both microwave heating and induction heating, making it a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking. Moreover, since the upper first cooling fan 60 is not operated unnecessarily, there is also an energy saving effect.

An oven heating source 188 for heating the heating chamber 113 is further provided inside the main body case HC. It was configured to drive
As a result, oven cooking can be performed, and the cooling structure of the lower unit 200 can be shared, so that a highly convenient composite heating cooker can be provided even with the kitchen furniture 2 having a limited installation space.

(17) Part 17:
a heating chamber 113;
a microwave heating source 189;
an oven heating source 188 that heats the inside of the heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40;
an integrated display unit 30 shared by the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and having a display screen 30D;
A control unit (integrated control device MC, heating chamber control unit 159 and microwave heating control unit 130) that controls the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188 and the integrated display unit 30,
The input operation unit 40 has a first (specific) RG control menu (for example, "warm") using a microwave heating source from among the compound cooking menu group, and a second menu using an oven heating source. having menu selection means (input key 43MC) for selecting a (specific) RG control menu (e.g. "oven");
When the display screen 30D displays the first RG control menu (for example, “warm”) on the display screen 30D, the control unit provides a display 30K capable of identifying the microwave heating source 189, information indicating both or a combination (one or more "control conditions") of heating intensity information and target temperature information 30T (e.g., 180°C) applied to the control menu (e.g., "warm up"); , are displayed in association with each other (for example, display screen 4ST in FIG. 39).

According to this configuration, one heating cooker can perform two types of heating, that is, microwave heating and oven heating, making it a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.
Moreover, in the integrated display unit shared by two types of heating sources, one control menu (for example, "warm") from the composite cooking menu group is displayed on the display screen 30D. In this case, information indicating a combination of a display 30K that can identify the microwave heating source 189 and target temperature information 30T (for example, 80° C.) applied to the control menu (for example, “warm”) is displayed. The control conditions such as the heating source and the target temperature related to the control menu can be checked before starting the operation of the source, and the user's input operation burden can be reduced. For this reason, even if it is a compound-type heating cooker, it can be made into a convenient heating cooker.

(18) Part 18:
an upper unit 100 having an induction heating source 9 for heating an object to be heated and supported by the kitchen furniture 2;
A lower unit 200 attached to the upper unit 100 and containing a heating chamber 113,
The lower unit 200 is provided with a microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113 and an oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113,
The upper unit 100 is equipped with an integrated controller MC that centrally controls the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188,
In the upper unit 100, induction heating circuits 94L and 94R controlled by the integrated controller MC, a power supply circuit board 55 for receiving power from a commercial power supply 99, and an inverter equipped with a (first) inverter circuit 81 are mounted. a circuit board 80;
The lower unit 200 is provided with a microwave heating control section 130 of the microwave heating source 189, a heating chamber control section 159 of the oven heating source 188, and a (second) inverter circuit board 121,
The power supply circuit board 55 is arranged downstream of the cooling air passage (first air passage F1) of the cooling fan 60 that cools the (first) inverter circuit 81,
The control unit 130 of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are supplied from a power supply circuit board 55 provided downstream (non-commercial power supply side) of the filter circuit board 54 of the upper unit 100. is a configuration for supplying low-voltage power.

According to this configuration, the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 are provided with three types of heat sources, so that a wider range of combined cooking can be performed than before.
In addition, centralized control by the general control device MC allows the inverter circuit boards 80 and 121 respectively arranged in the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 to be linked.
Further, the power supply circuit board 55 is configured to distribute the prescribed low voltage power to the IH control unit 90, the control unit 130, and the control unit 159, and the cooling air passage of the first cooling fan 60 (first air passage) Since the power supply circuit board 55 is arranged on the downstream side of F1), overheating of the power supply circuit board 55 can be prevented, and stable power can be supplied to the control device 90 and the like.

(19) Part 19:
Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 1, the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30
Information is displayed toward the top of the main body 110,
The input operation unit 40 is arranged in front of the display screen 30D and on the upper surface of the main body 110,
In the display screen 30D, a first area 30L displaying the compound cooking menu, a second area 30M displaying information indicating the control conditions, and a third area 30R displaying the reference information 30P are aligned. in line.

Furthermore, in the input operation unit 40, an input key 43M1 serving as a selection unit for the composite cooking menu is arranged in correspondence with the first area 30L at a position in front of the display screen 30D,
Input keys 43M2 for designating the control conditions are further arranged in front of the display screen 30D in correspondence with the second area 30M (see FIGS. 17 and 42).
In the example shown in FIG. 42, the heating time information 30S (see FIG. 42) is displayed in minutes in the second area 30M, and the subsequent grill cooking heating time information 30GY is also displayed in minutes. .
Furthermore, the heating time information 30S shown in the first area 30L and the heating time information 30GY in the third area 30R can be changed as appropriate using the input keys 43M2 and 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M.

Further, when the integrated control device MC determines that the input key 43M1 has been pressed, one composite cooking menu (for example, "warm") and one or more "control condition" information (heat power , heating intensity information, target temperature information 30T, etc.) is displayed on the display screen 30D (first area 30L, second area 30M).
Then, the integrated control device MC displays the reference information 30P (recommended text) of heat cooking corresponding to the composite cooking menu and the control conditions, and when the start input 43MS key is pressed in this state, the composite cooking menu is displayed. This is a configuration for starting execution of a cooking menu (for example, "warm up").

According to this Embodiment 1, in the integrated display unit 30 shared by three types of heat sources, one menu (for example, "warm") from the compound cooking menu group is displayed on the display screen 30D. When displayed on the display screen 30D, information indicating a combination of a display 30K capable of identifying the microwave heating source 189 and target temperature information 30T (for example, 80° C.) applied to the menu (for example, “warm”) is displayed. Let

As described above, according to the first embodiment, the user can check the control conditions such as the target temperature and the heat source related to the composite cooking menu before the user starts the operation of the heat source. can be reduced. For this reason, even if it is a compound-type heating cooker, it can be made into a convenient heating cooker.
Input keys 43M1 to 43M3 for selecting control conditions and composite cooking menus are arranged in front and close positions corresponding to the first area 30L to third area 30R of the display screen 30D. Since there is a one-to-one correspondence between the parts and the positions of the input keys, there is no concern that the user will get confused during operation.

For the above reasons, the control conditions such as the heating source and the target temperature related to the composite cooking menu can be confirmed, and the user's input operation burden can be reduced. For this reason, although the combined heating cooker of Embodiment 1 is provided with three heating means, the configuration of the input operation section 40 and the integrated display section 30 is devised to improve usability.

Embodiment 2.
85 to 95 show a cooking device according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention.
FIG. 85 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door is closed in the built-in combined cooking device according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention. 86 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door of the heating cooker of FIG. 85 is opened. FIG. 87 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the heating cooker of FIG. 85 with the top plate removed. FIG. 88 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the heating cooker of FIG. 85 with the top plate and the IH coil removed. FIG. 89 is a perspective view of the upper unit of the cooker shown in FIG. 85 with the top plate, IH coil and cover removed. FIG. 90 is a reference perspective view showing the flow of cooling air in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 89. FIG. 91 is a bottom (lower) view of the upper unit of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 85. FIG. 92 is a block diagram illustrating the overall control functions of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 85. FIG. 93 is an enlarged plan view showing the input operation section and integrated display section of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 85. FIG. FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking process of the cooperative cooking menu and the independent cooking menu. FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the display contents of the integrated display section and the input operation section in the cooperative cooking mode. Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configuration of the first embodiment described in FIGS. 1 to 84 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The second embodiment differs greatly from the first embodiment in that the outside air intake port of the heating cooker 1 is added (changed), and the control-related configuration is also changed.

Also, the configuration of the input operation unit 40 is significantly different from that of the first embodiment. Furthermore, when implementing the cooperative cooking menu, the content of limiting the operation of the heat source used is different.

A description will be given with reference to the drawings, focusing on points that are particularly different from the first embodiment. First, FIG. 85 will be described.
In FIG. 85, reference numeral 118 denotes a connecting member for integrating the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200, which is also called a "reinforcing member" because it also has the purpose of reinforcement.

The connecting member 118 has a shape that continuously covers the right side of the lower unit 200 , the lower side, and the left side of the lower unit 200 .
Although not shown, the connecting member 118 includes a left vertical portion 118L that is fixed to the left side of the front portion of the lower unit 200 in close contact with the left vertical portion 118R, and the right vertical portion 118R and the left vertical portion 118L. It also has a central flat portion 118M that is flattened. The central flat portion 118M is fixed to the lower surface of the bottom plate 101U in the front portion of the lower case 101 so as to overlap in close contact therewith.

As shown in FIG. 86, the mounting portion of the hinge portion 176, which will be described later, has a robust structure that does not cause deformation such as bending even if it receives a load or the like when the door 114 is opened or closed. As a result, the door 114 can be reliably supported when it is opened and closed.
Therefore, the door 114 is brought into close contact with the front peripheral portion of the opening 114A of the heating chamber 114 even when used for a long period of time, so that the opening 114A can be reliably closed, thereby providing a highly safe heating cooker without radio wave leakage. Realized.

The connecting member 118 is formed by pressing a thin metal plate (for example, a plate thickness of 1 mm) to form the right vertical portion 118R (not shown), the central flat portion 118M (not shown), and the right vertical portion 118L. are integrally formed.

85 and 86, 101RP is a protrusion formed integrally with the side vertical wall 101R of the lower case 101. In FIG. The convex portion is formed by pressing the side vertical wall 101R from the inside to the outside of the lower case 101, and is intended to increase the mechanical strength of the side vertical wall 101R. Similarly, the side vertical wall 101L on the left side of the lower case 101 also protrudes outward over a certain area to form a protrusion 101LP (not shown).

A metal arm 116 supports the door 114 in a horizontal state and pulls the door 114 in the door closing direction when the door 114 is closed. The arm 116 is guided by a through hole (guide hole) 117 formed in the front plate 101F of the lower case 101 and moves in the through hole 117 in the front-rear direction. The door structure of the high-frequency heating device using the arm 116 is introduced in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2002-39541, 2010-181106, and 2007-218544, etc., so a detailed description will be given. are omitted.

86, reference numeral 176 denotes a pair of left and right hinges which are fixed to both the door 114 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. FIG. Thereby, the door 114 is rotatably supported by the lower case 101 . The hinge 176 is sandwiched between the connecting member (reinforcing member) 118 and the bottom plate 101U and is fixed by fixing tools (bolt and nut combinations, screws, etc.) at a plurality of locations.

With the above structure, the door 114 opens and closes with the hinge 176 as a fulcrum. The pair of left and right arms 116 are supported from below by a roller (not shown) or a sliding member (not shown) provided rotatably on the back side of the through hole 117 so that the door 114 can be opened and closed. At times, the arm 116 moves back and forth while contacting the upper surface of the roller or slide member.

Front covers 112 are provided on the left and right sides of the front surface of the lower unit 200 and are made of plastic or metal.
The front cover 112 has a bilaterally symmetrical shape and is fixed to the lower case 101 so as to extend laterally beyond the width of the lower case 101 . When the heating cooker 1 is installed on the kitchen furniture 2, the front cover 112 covers as much as possible the front of the gaps (the right side gap 301R and the left side gap 301L) between the cooking apparatus 1 and the kitchen furniture 2. This serves to make the gaps 301R and 301L inconspicuous when visually observed.

Reference numeral 198 denotes a metal support bracket, which has a length covering the entire lateral width of the lower case 101 . The support fitting 198 is fixed to the front horizontal wall 101T of the lower case 101 with screws 186. As shown in FIG.

A reference numeral 146 denotes a box-shaped front operating portion fixed to the front (surface) side of the right front cover 112 . This front operation unit 146 is used for microwave heating and oven heating using the heating chamber 113 .
The input operation unit 40 is composed of four parts, the front operation unit 146, a central operation unit 40M, a right operation unit 40R and a left operation unit 40L.

A display unit 147 having a liquid crystal screen is arranged on the ceiling surface of the front operation unit 146 so that the user can visually check the display contents from above when cooking. The front operation unit 146 is not rotated and stored inside the heating cooker 1 like the operation unit of the conventionally known "kangaroo pocket mechanism", but is always in front of the front cover 112. Exposed.

A plurality of touch-type or push-button input keys (not shown) are arranged near the display unit 147 on the upper surface of the front operation unit 146 . By operating these input keys, it is possible to input control conditions during microwave heating and oven heating, and to command the start and stop of the heating operation.

In FIG. 86, reference numeral 145 denotes a dedicated saucer used inside the heating chamber 113, which is made of highly heat-resistant plastic, porcelain, glass, or the like. The receiving tray 145 has external dimensions such that it can be inserted into and removed from the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113. As shown in FIG.

A tableware usually made of porcelain or a highly heat-resistant material is placed on the saucer 145, and the ingredients placed in the tableware are cooked by microwaves. However, if microwave heating is not used, the tableware may be made of metal. For example, a magnetic metal cooking utensil such as a frying pan (not shown) is placed on the top plate 15, food (eg, hamburger) is induction-heated to some extent on this cooking utensil, and then the cooking utensil is removed. It may be moved into the heating chamber 113 and further heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B to complete cooking (this cooking method is one type of cooperative cooking menu).

85 and 86, reference numerals 152S1 and 152S2 denote auxiliary air intakes composed of a large number of small holes, which are provided at the lower end of the lateral vertical wall 101R forming the right side surface of the lower case 101. In FIGS. .

The auxiliary intake port 152S1 is an auxiliary intake port for the intake port (second intake port) 152F for cooling the inverter circuit board 121 with outside air.
Likewise, the auxiliary intake port 152S2 is an auxiliary intake port for the intake port (second intake port) 152B for cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 with outside air. The maximum diameter of these auxiliary intake ports 152S1 and 152S2 is about 3 mm in consideration of the effect of preventing leakage of microwaves.

Although not shown, the suction port of the third cooling fan (cooling fan A) 128 for cooling the inverter circuit board 121 of the microwave heating source 189 with outside air is located near the auxiliary suction port 152S1. Similarly, the intake port of the fourth cooling fan (cooling fan B) 129 for cooling the heat radiation portion 122H of the magnetron 122 with outside air is also arranged near the auxiliary intake port 152S2.

Next, FIG. 87 will be described. FIG. 87 shows the state in which the top plate 15 is removed. 87, 30W is a display window, which is formed in the holder 50 with a size corresponding to the external shape of the integrated display section 30. As shown in FIG.

31LW and 31RW are display windows. The display windows are formed on the holder 50 at positions respectively corresponding to the left display portion 31L and the right display portion 31R.

A choke coil 56 is one of the important electrical components in the filter circuit board 54 . 17C is a coil base (coil support frame) on which two IH coils 17L and 17R are mounted.

The left IH coil 17L has a maximum outer dimension (diameter) of 236 mm. This makes it possible to handle objects to be heated such as large pots and frying pans. Therefore, when implementing the cooperative cooking menu, when a large metal container or cooking utensil used in the heating chamber 113 (both of which have no lid) is moved to the left heating unit 17HL and heated, the left heating unit 17HL is heated. Heating can be efficiently performed by the heating unit 17HL.

Alternatively, when implementing the cooperative cooking menu, after heating a large area or a large number of objects to be cooked in the heating chamber 113, the objects to be cooked are transferred to a large metal container or cooking utensil, and the left heating unit 17HL Even when the heating is performed on the top, the heating can be efficiently performed by the left heating section 17HL. For this reason, in the second embodiment, there is a reason for wanting to occupy the left heating section 17HL for the cooperative cooking menu. The right IH coil 17R is the same as that of the first embodiment and has a diameter of 168 mm.

The coil base 17C is integrally formed of a highly heat-resistant plastic material. The coil base 17C has a circular shape as a whole, matching the shape of the IH coils 17L and 17R, and has a plurality of arms 17CH radially extending from the center. In this Embodiment 2, there are eight arms 17CH. A gap serving as a large ventilation space is formed between each arm 17CH.

17F is a ferrite plate placed between two adjacent arms 17CH. In the left IH coil 17L, TS3 is a contact temperature sensor such as a thermistor.
One temperature sensor TS3 is installed at the center of the IH coil 17L. The other two temperature sensors TS3 are installed at positions outside the IH coil 17L, slightly away from the center.

TS5 is a non-contact temperature sensor, such as an infrared sensor. In the right IH coil 17R, TS4 is a contact temperature sensor such as a thermistor. One temperature sensor TS4 is installed at the center of the IH coil 17R. The other two temperature sensors TS4 are installed at positions outside the center of the IH coil 17R, slightly away from the center.

TS6 is a non-contact temperature sensor such as an infrared sensor. Measurement data from these temperature sensors TS3 to TS6 are input to a temperature detection circuit (temperature detection processing section) 93. FIG. These temperature sensors TS3 to TS6 may be called "first temperature sensors".

In FIG. 87, 66 is a magnetic shielding ring made of metal such as aluminum, which is fixed to the coil base 17C so as to surround the coil base (coil support frame) 17C.
41R is a right touch key board corresponding to the operation board 41 of the first embodiment. 41L is a left touch key board corresponding to the operation board 41 as well. These two touch key substrates 41L and 41R are also supported on the upper surface of the holder 50. As shown in FIG.

Next, FIG. 88 will be described. In FIG. 88, 57 is a transformer, which is one of the important electric parts in the power supply circuit board 55. FIG. In FIG. 88, the left end portion of the cover 70 is notched in the width dimension W11. A temperature sensor TS5 supported by the coil base 17C on the IH coil 17L side is arranged in this notched portion. That is, the notch is provided so that the temperature sensor TS5 and the cover 70 do not come into contact with each other.

Next, FIG. 89 will be described. A capacitor 58 is one of the important electrical components in the inverter circuit board 80 .
As is clear from FIG. 89, there are two heat sinks 82 made of aluminum on the left and right (in two rows) and two on the front and back, so there are four in total. The four heat sinks 82 are installed such that two heat sinks 82 face each other close to each other. 59 is a diode bridge circuit (diode module) attached to one heat sink 82 . The diode bridge circuit (diode module) 59 dissipates the heat generated during operation by the heat sink 82 and does not overheat.

As is clear from FIG. 89, the outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the heat sink 82 are separated by a distance LD of about 50 to 100 mm.
FIG. 90 shows the flow of cooling air in the configuration shown in FIG. Cooling air is indicated by thick arrows.

Next, FIG. 91 is a bottom (lower) view of the upper unit 100. As shown in FIG. D5 is the maximum front-rear width dimension of the upper unit 100 and is 432 mm. W4 is the left-right maximum width dimension of the upper unit 100, which is 544 mm.

The vertical and horizontal dimensions of the upper opening of the lower case 101 (inner maximum vertical and horizontal dimensions) are determined in consideration of the front-back direction maximum width dimension D5 and the left-right direction maximum width dimension W4 of the upper case 16. It is sized to fit.

Structurally, it is configured as described above. Therefore, when induction cooking is performed in the upper unit 100, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 60 are operated as indicated by thick arrows in FIG. The inverter circuit board 80, the input operation section 40, the power circuit board 55, and the filter circuit board 54 are cooled by the cooling airflows RF1, RF2, RF3, and RF4 blown from the fan 61, respectively.

Next, FIG. 92 will be described.
92 is a block diagram illustrating the overall control functions of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 85. FIG. In FIG. 92, arrows indicated by dashed lines indicate command signals for control.
In the heating cooker 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention, there are a total of six controllers mainly composed of microcomputers. This point is a major difference from the first embodiment.

Among the six control devices described above, the integrated control device MC controls the entire heating cooker 1 . It is the IH control section 90 that receives commands from the integrated control device MC and controls the induction heating cooking. Controller 105 controls both microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188 . The control device 105 is a combination of the heating chamber control section 159 and the microwave heating control section 130 described in the first embodiment.

The two control devices 90 and 105 described above are sometimes called slave (SLAVE) microcomputers because they perform specified control according to commands from the integrated control device MC and return processing results to the integrated control device MC. In this case, the integrated control device MC is called a master microcomputer.

The remaining three of the six controllers described above will be described below.
First, in the input operation unit 40, the right input control device 23 processes the input of the right touch key group arranged on the right operation unit 40R and the display on the display unit 31R. The right input control device 23 further processes the input of the touch key group of the central operation unit 40M.

The second is a left input control device 24 arranged in the left operation unit 40L, which processes the input of the left touch key group and the display of the display unit 31L.
The third is the power switch controller 28 .
The power switch control device 28 detects the operation of the operation button (operation unit) 98 of the main power switch 97 arranged in the input operation unit 40 and determines ON/OFF of the power supply.

92, 106A is a plug connected to a commercial (AC) power supply 99. In FIG. Power with a voltage of 200 V and a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz is conducted through the power cord 106 to the filter circuit board 54 . Note that the filter circuit board 54 is built in the upper unit 100 .

The filter circuit board 54 has a main relay 107 for turning ON/OFF the main power of the heating cooker 1 and a sub-relay (not shown). FIG. 92 schematically shows only the main relay.

The main relay 107 is opened and closed upon receiving a predetermined relay control signal from the integrated control device MC that controls the entire heating cooker 1 . As will be described later, the sub-relay receives a relay control signal from the power switch control device 28 and performs an opening/closing operation. The power switch control device 28 has a function of detecting the operation of the operation button 98 of the main power switch 97 and determining ON/OFF of the power. A main power switch 97 is composed of the main relay 107 and the sub-relay.

The integrated control device MC constantly acquires operation information from the IH control unit 90, the control device 105, the right input control device 23, the left input control device 24, and the power switch control device 28, and integrates and processes them. determine and control.

The integrated controller MC controls the central operation unit 40M, the display operation of the integrated display unit 30, the voice synthesizer 95, and the wireless communication unit 49. FIG. The integrated control device MC, the right input control device 23 and the power switch control device 28 are attached to the central operation board 32 that constitutes the input operation section 40 .

A right operation board 32R (not shown) and a left operation board 32L (not shown) are attached to the lower surface side of the holder 50. As shown in FIG. Therefore, they are not shown in FIGS. 87 to 90. FIG.
The central operating board 32 is composed of a right operating board 32R and a left operating board 32L. The right operating board 32R is mounted with the integrated control device MC, the right input control device 23, and the right display section 31R. The two operation boards 32L, 32L are made of a plastic material with high electrical insulation. The left input control device 24 and the left display section 31L are mounted on the left operation board 32L (see FIG. 92).

Above the central operation board 32 and in front of the holder 50, a pair of left and right touch key boards (operation boards) 41L and 41R on which various touch input keys are mounted are installed.

Reference numeral 55 denotes a power circuit board to which commercial power is supplied from the filter circuit 54. As shown in FIG. and a power supply circuit B36 through which power is applied. By these two power supply circuits A34 and B36, the power of voltage 200V is converted into low voltage direct current such as 24V, 18V, 6V and 5V.

The 5V electric power is supplied as a power source for the integrated control device MC, the IH control unit 90, the control device 105, the right input control device 23, the left input control device 24, and the power switch control device 28.
Also, the 6V power is used as a power supply (including a backlight power supply) for the integrated display section 30, the right display section 31R, and the left display section 31R.

The power supply circuit board 55 is installed in the upper unit 100, and as described above, the power generated by the power supply circuit A34 and the power supply circuit B36 is used as the power supply for the control and various display parts in the upper unit 100. It is used.

80 is an inverter circuit board of the induction heating source 9 installed inside the upper unit 100 .
The inverter circuit board 80 includes a right inverter circuit 81R having a DC power supply section 75R and a left inverter circuit 81L having another DC power supply section 75L.

AC power with a voltage of 200 V is applied to the inverter circuit board 80 from the filter circuit 54 . Reference numeral 90 denotes an IH control unit that controls induction heating in general, and is mainly composed of a microcomputer.

The IH control section 90 transmits drive signals to drive circuits 37L and 37R that drive the IGBTs 79a and 79b in the inverter circuits 81L and 81R. The two drive circuits 37L and 37R operate with 18V power supplied from the power supply circuit A34 and the power supply circuit B36, and control the IGBTs 79a and 79, respectively. This controls the driving frequencies of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.

For example, the drive circuit A37R detects the conduction time of the power switching element 83 (semiconductor switching element) (IGBT79a, 79b) and switches the conduction time to lower the drive frequency of the inverter circuit 81R and reduce the thermal power. Or conversely, control is performed to raise the drive frequency and raise the thermal power. These driving frequency commands are issued from the IH control section 90 .

77a is an input current detector installed on the commercial power supply side of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R, and 77b is an output current detector that detects power on the output side of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.
The detected values of the input current detector 77a and the output current detector 77b are input to the IH controller 90. FIG.

In the initial stage of induction cooking, the IH control unit 90 determines the material of the object to be heated.
For example, when the driving frequency is changed from one driving frequency to another, the change in the input current value is observed to determine whether the material of the object to be heated such as a pot is magnetic metal, non-magnetic stainless steel, aluminum, etc. Then, the driving frequency of the switching elements (IGBT) 79a, 79b is automatically adjusted to an appropriate value. When the object to be heated is determined to be non-magnetic stainless steel, it is driven at a driving frequency (eg, 31 kHz) higher than the driving frequency (eg, 23 kHz) when the object is determined to be iron.

TS5 and TS6 are non-contact temperature sensors installed in the gaps of the IH coils 17L and 17R, and TS3 and TS4 are contact temperature sensors installed in the center of the IH coils 17L and 17R. TS8 and TS9 are contact temperature sensors installed on the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80 . Temperature detection data from each of these temperature sensors is input to the integrated controller MC.

Although the temperature detection circuit 93 is provided in the first embodiment, the temperature detection circuit 93 in the form of hardware is not provided in the second embodiment. Processing such as temperature detection, temperature comparison, and whether or not there is an abnormality is executed by software (temperature detection processing unit) in the integrated control device MC.

131 is a door opening/closing detection mechanism. The door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 includes one switch that is opened and closed according to the opening/closing operation of the door 114, and a monitor switch that detects whether the switch is properly opened/closed. This point is the same as that described in the first embodiment.

Reference numeral 120P denotes a power supply circuit unit of the microwave heating device 120, which generates AC power as a low voltage (for example, 24V and 5V) power supply from the commercial voltage (200V) power supplied from the filter circuit 54.

Electric power with a voltage of 5 V is supplied as a power supply for the control device 105, and electric power with a voltage of 24 V is supplied to the driving circuits 177 of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129, respectively. Although not shown in FIG. 92, power of 200 V is supplied to the driving power source of the antenna driving motor 126. As shown in FIG.

The upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B for heating the heating chamber 113 are controlled by the controller 105 by opening and closing the relays 178A and 178B. The relays 178A and 178B may use semiconductor switching elements capable of finely controlling the energization rate, but in the second embodiment, only ON-OFF control is performed, so relays are used. The upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are applied with a voltage of 200 V, which is the same as the commercial power supply, and operate.

A door open detection switch 132M constitutes a part of the door open/close detection mechanism 131 . This switch itself is installed inside the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131, but is drawn at a different position in FIG.

160 is an infrared sensor (third temperature sensor) that measures the temperature of the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113, and TS1 is a contact sensor that measures the temperature of the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating device 120. . Temperature detection data from these sensors 160 and TS1 are all input to the control device 105 .

121A is an inverter circuit that supplies high-frequency power to the magnetron 122, and its oscillation is controlled by a relay 182 inserted in the power supply side circuit. Opening and closing of the relay 182 is performed by the control device 105 .

Drive circuits 60P and 61P drive the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, respectively. The drive circuits 60P and 61P operate in response to instructions from the IH control section 90. FIG.

Although FIG. 92 does not show a temperature sensor for monitoring the temperature of the integrated display unit 30 and the input operation unit 40, in practice such a temperature sensor is installed so that during cooking, the 2) The temperature measurement data is acquired by the integrated controller MC and monitored so that the temperature does not become abnormal.

Since the heat cooker 1 of the second embodiment is configured as described above, when starting cooking, first, to turn on the main power switch 97, the operation key 98 of the input operation unit 40 is pressed. For example, if the switch is held down for several seconds, this operation is detected by the power switch controller 28 and the main relay 107 in the filter circuit board 54 is closed.

Therefore, commercial power is supplied from the filter circuit board 54 to the power circuit board 55 . A power supply with a predetermined voltage is generated by the power supply circuit A34 and the power supply circuit B36 of the power supply circuit board 55 and applied to the integrated control device MC.

When the integrated controller MC is activated, it first performs an initial self-diagnosis before starting the heating operation to confirm that no abnormality has occurred. Also, the integrated display unit 30 is activated to display the initial information.

In this state, when the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 to use the microwave heating device 120 , the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 transmits a signal indicating that the door 114 is open to the control device 105 . Therefore, the control device 105 transmits a signal indicating opening of the door 114 to the integrated control device MC. The integrated controller MC presumes that the user will perform microwave heating cooking, displays necessary information for starting microwave heating on the integrated display unit 30, and prompts an input for starting heating.

When the user puts the food to be cooked into the heating chamber 113 and closes the door 114, the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 again transmits a detection signal indicating that the door 114 is closed to the integrated control device MC via the control device 105. do. Therefore, when a command to start heating is issued from the input operation unit 40 in this state, the right input control device 23 detects whether there is a touch input on the input key for microwave heating. Therefore, a signal indicating a heating start command is transmitted from the right input control device 23 to the integrated control device MC.

Also in this second embodiment, in the combined cooking mode, microwave heating is performed first, and after heating the food to some extent, the pattern is heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, and the pattern is heated in the reverse order. , and a pattern in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously.

In addition, individual heating menus for microwave heating and oven heating performed by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B can also be executed.
Furthermore, as will be described later, a linked cooking menu can also be executed.

In general, microwave heating is often performed by putting the food to be cooked in a heat-resistant plastic container or tableware. There is a risk that containers, tableware, etc.

In the composite cooking menu, the integrated display section 30 displays a warning message warning against heating a plastic container inside the heating chamber 113 . In other words, when executing the control menu "microwave grill", this caution display sentence is one type of "standby time common information" 30N described in the first embodiment.

In the control menu of "warm up" (automatic range), the non-contact (infrared) temperature measurement unit 158 detects the temperature of the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113, and when the target temperature is reached, Automatically stop microwave oscillation. Therefore, when the heat from the previous cooking remains and the temperature is high from the beginning, the integrated controller MC prohibits automatic microwave heating.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, the user is notified to select the control menu (single heating cooking) of "range manual". Since the "microwave manual" is performed by setting the microwave heating time, even if the temperature of the food in the heating chamber 113 and the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 are high, the cooking can be performed without any trouble. The display text displayed on such an integrated display unit 30 is also one type of the "standby common information" 30N described in the first embodiment.

When the user issues a heating start command through the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC transmits a drive command to the control device 105 that controls the microwave heating operation, closes the relay 182, and drives the inverter circuit 121A. Start microwave heating. At the same time, an operation command signal is issued to the driving circuits 177A and 177B of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129, and the two cooling fans 128 and 129 start operating. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 92, the antenna drive motor 126 is driven to rotate the antenna 125 . As a result, microwaves are introduced into the heating chamber 113 to heat and cook the food.

As is clear from the above description, during the period of microwave cooking, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 of the upper unit 100 are not operated at all unless it is "in an emergency". . Therefore, the power consumption of the entire heating cooker 1 can be kept low.

As is clear from the above description, the heating cooker 1 of the second embodiment includes an IH control section 90 that controls the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and an oven. A control device 105 that controls both the heating source 188 and an integrated control device MC (master microcomputer) MC that integrally controls these two control devices (slave microcomputers) 90 and 105,
The upper unit 100 includes a filter circuit board 54 that receives power from a commercial power supply 99, and a power supply circuit (34, 36) that converts the power from the filter circuit board 54 into a specified power supply voltage,
The control device 105, the control device 90, and the integrated control device MC are supplied with low-voltage power generated by the power supply circuits 34 and 36 as power sources,
The inverter circuit 81 of the induction heating source 17, the microwave generation source 122 of the microwave heating device 120, the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B of the oven heating device 140 are connected to the filter circuit 54, the power supply circuit 34, 36 is applied with power (200V power source).

This configuration simplifies the power supply configuration of the heating cooker 1 as a whole, and suppresses unnecessary noise propagation, etc., so that reliable operation can be expected.

In addition, according to this configuration, three types of heating, induction heating, microwave heating, and oven heating, can be performed in one cooking device, and the cooking device is highly convenient and can be used for a wide range of cooking.

93 is an enlarged plan view showing the input operation section 40 and integrated display section 30 of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 85. FIG. In the second embodiment, the central operation unit 40M includes various input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2, 43MS and 43MT for the linked cooking menu. Each of these input keys is an input key that can be input using a change in capacitance when the user touches it lightly with a finger or the like. An input key corresponding to the input key 43M3 described in the first embodiment is not provided.

In the second embodiment, the input operating section 40 includes four of a right operating section 40R, a central operating section 40M, a left operating section 40L, and the front operating section 146. FIG. Although not shown, the operation keys (touch input type) 98 of the main power switch 97 are located on the upper surface of the main body 110 and located on the top plate 15 as in the case of the central operation unit 40M, as in the first embodiment. , and near the right end of the top plate 15 .

The right operation section 40R is an individual operation section, since it is for performing input operations only for the induction heating source. Similarly, the left operating section 40 is also an individual operating section.
On the other hand, a part of the central operation unit 40M is commonly used when the "cooking menu" using either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 is performed. 40MC.

In the first embodiment, the input operations of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are performed in the central operation unit 40M, but in the second embodiment, the front operation unit 146 possesses these functions. are doing.

In FIG. 93, 43MS is a touch-type input key that can command the start of the heating operation by the linked cooking menu when the linked cooking menu using the heating chamber 113 is selected. This input type key 43MS is slightly different from the function of the input type key 43MS of the first embodiment, and has two functions of starting and stopping heat cooking.

When the input key 43MS is pressed once by the user, it transmits a command signal to start the heating operation to the integrated control device MC, and when it is pressed again after that, it transmits a command signal to stop the heating operation. Depending on the number of times you operate in this order, different signals will be sent. This point is different from the input key 43MS of the first embodiment.

The screen configuration of the integrated display section 30 is also slightly different from that of the first embodiment, and is composed of two areas, a first area (left area) 30L and a second area (central area) 30M.

The reason why the two areas 30L and 30M are limited in this manner is that the integrated display unit 30 displays the identification information 330 of the linked cooking menu in the first area 30L, and displays the additional information 331 and additional information 331 in the second area 30M. This is because the cooking process information (cooking process information section) 332 is displayed.

43MC is not an input key to select using a combined cooking mode using oven heat source 188 and microwave heat source 189. This input key 43MC is an input key for commanding only display of the linked cooking menu.

Next, FIG. 93 will be described.
93 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 44 of Embodiment 1. FIG.
An input key 43M1 is arranged at the left end of a cooperative operating section 40MC dedicated to the cooperative cooking mode provided in the central operating section 40M.
This input key 43M1 is touched when selecting a cooperative cooking menu. Note that a push-button type switch may be used instead of the touch type key.

The input key 43M1 is illuminated by a light source (not shown) such as a light emitting diode installed below, and appears to be illuminated during the period of transition to the cooperative cooking mode.
Since the input key 43M1 itself lights up, the individual light-emitting portion 27M2 provided in the first embodiment is omitted in the second embodiment.

The pair of input keys 43M1 selects the target identification information 330, in other words, the food to be cooked from among the plurality of pieces of identification information 330 displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 when the cooperative cooking menu is executed. The input key to select. There is a pair of left and right touch keys.
Every time the left input key 43M1 is pressed, the display contents can be switched in a certain order. Each time the right input key 43M1 is pressed, the display screen can be switched in reverse order.

Next, FIG. 94 will be described.
FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooperative cooking menu and the independent cooking menu using the induction heating source. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing that the operation of a heat source used is restricted during cooperative cooking;
The cooperative cooking menu shown in FIG. 94 is the "second cooperative cooking menu" described in FIG. 45 of the first embodiment.

In the "second cooperative cooking menu" of this example, the microwave heating source 189 (second heating means 189) is operated first, and after the heating operation is completed, the induction heating source 9 is operated as the first heating means. Let Note that the oven heating source 188 may be operated as a third heating means at the same time as the second heating means.

As shown in FIG. 94, the second cooperative cooking menu consists of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is the period from when the input key 43MC is operated to execute the cooperative cooking menu until the heat cooking is started by the input key 43MS.

P2 is a heat cooking period (cooking step 1) by the second heating means (microwave heating source 189).
At P3, since the cooking by the second heating means is switched to the cooking by the first heating means (in this case, the induction heating source 9), the operation of the microwave heating means 189 is temporarily stopped, and the cooking by the induction heating means 9 is started. is a rest period until the start of
P4 is a heating cooking period (cooking step 2) by the induction heating source 9 .

As is clear from FIG. 94, it is not at the step of selecting the linked cooking menu, that is, at the time when the identification information 330 indicating the name of the cooking of the linked cooking menu is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, but the input key 43MS is used for cooking. From the time when the start is decided, the left operation part 40L of the left heating source 17HL cannot be used. Also, the input operation of the front operation unit 146 is restricted.

Specifically, the integrated control device MC performs the following function restriction processing.
(1) Among the input signals from the front operation unit 147, a signal for selecting a control menu such as "warm up" is invalidated. As a result, even in the heat cooking period (cooking step 1), the front operation unit 146 can be used, but only two inputs of "stop" and "heating start" can be performed. Then, using the heating chamber 113, the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 cannot perform cooking substantially unrelated to the cooperative cooking menu. Note that the heating power (power consumption) during oven heating may be changed so that it can be performed by input keys (not shown) on the front operation unit 146 .
(2) Perform processing not to recognize the input signal from the left operation unit 40L as a valid signal. As a result, when the cooking period (cooking step 1) begins, the left operation unit 40L cannot be used. Then, the left heating unit 17HL cannot perform induction heating cooking. It should be noted that the right heating unit 17HR can be used.

Thus, when the cooking period (cooking step 1) is entered, the integrated controller MC disables the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 for free use.

Therefore, the left heating unit 17HL is "occupied" by the selection of the linked cooking menu. Also, from the perspective of the entire induction heating source 9, the use of only a portion (left side) of the two heating portions is "restricted".

Further, the function of the front operation unit 147 is "restricted" by selecting the cooperative cooking menu. Therefore, when the "cooking step 1" of the cooperative cooking menu is started, the front operation unit 146 is used to execute both the single cooking menu and the compound cooking (in the RG control menu) using individual heat sources. become unable to do so.

As shown in FIG. 94, when the heat cooking period (cooking step 1) ends, the restricted state is released, so that the front operation unit 147 can be operated to execute the single cooking menu. However, after the heat cooking period (cooking step 1) is over, the operation of the front operation unit 146 to start the single cooking menu is restricted. The reason is that the food heated by the cooperative cooking menu exists in the heating chamber 113 .

Therefore, only when the integrated controller MC detects that the door 114 has been opened after the heating cooking period (cooking process 1) is over, the integrated controller MC controls the microwave heating or Upon receiving an oven cooking start command, the cooking is started.

Even if the integrated control device MC detects that the door 114 is opened after the cooking period (cooking step 1) is over, if the temperature in the heating chamber 113 is higher than the reference value , there is a concern that the integrated control device MC and the non-contact (infrared) temperature measurement unit 158 may erroneously recognize an abnormally high temperature as the completion of cooking even before the single cooking menu is executed.
For this reason, even after the heating cooking period (cooking step 1) is over, the microwave heating (in particular, the control menu of "range automatic") cannot be performed immediately.

Next, FIG. 95 will be described.
FIG. 95 shows the display contents of the cooperative operation section 40MC dedicated to cooperative cooking provided in the central operation section 40M and the integrated display section 30. As shown in FIG.
The integrated display section 30 shows three types of display screens 11A to 11C.

The cooperative cooking menu implemented in FIG. 95 corresponds to both the "first cooperative cooking menu" and the "second cooperative cooking menu" described in FIG. 45 of the first embodiment.
For convenience of explanation, the case of the "first cooperative cooking menu" will be explained below. In other words, this is the case where the induction heating source 9 is used for the first cooking step.

When the input key 43M1 of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is pressed, the right input control device 23 that processes the input of the touch key group of the central operation unit 40M notifies the integrated control device MC of the input result.
The integrated control device MC grasps the use state of the left heating unit 17HL and the right heating unit 17HR from the information of the IH control unit 90, and sets "permission condition 1" and "permission condition" 2 as described in the first embodiment. First determine if it is satisfied.

When neither the left heating section 17HL nor the right heating section 17HR is used, the integrated control device MC confirms that the "permission condition 1" and the "permission condition" 2 are satisfied.
Then, the integrated control device MC displays the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display section 30SP.

The display screen 11C of FIG. 95 is the first screen displayed through the above process.
That is, the name "hamburger" is displayed as the identification information 330 in the first area 30L.
When the identification information 330 of the linked cooking menu is displayed on the integrated display section 30 of the first specific screen 30SP, that is, at the initial stage when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, the right heating section selection mark 334R and the left heating section Both selection marks 334L are displayed. This is because both the left heating section 17HL and the right heating section 17HR can be used as described above.

As shown in FIG. 95, the default setting gives priority to the left heating unit 17HL. This is because the left heating section 17HL uses the IH coil 17 having a larger diameter than the right heating section 17HL. In other words, it is possible to handle an object to be heated on the bottom of the pot that is larger than the right heating unit 17HR.

For this reason, the left heating section selection mark 334L displayed with "left" in white characters is selected.
If the state of the left heating unit 17HL can be changed to the cooperative cooking mode, the input key 43MS surrounded by a dotted line circle can be pressed to prompt an input operation. A dotted circle indicates that the individual light emitting unit 27M6 is blinking.

On the first specific screen 30SP, as shown in FIG. 95, additional information 331 is provided to the user regarding starting cooperative cooking of the food to be cooked (eg, hamburger). In the example of FIG. 95, it is recommended to select either the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL.

When the user wants to confirm the cooperative cooking mode using the right heating unit 17HR instead of the left heating unit 17HL, the user can touch the input key 43M2 corresponding to the second area 30M. Specifically, when the right input key 43M2 of the two left and right key operation units is touched, the first specific screen 30SP is switched from the display screens 11C to 11B.

On the display screen 11B, the left heating section selection mark 334L disappears, and only the right heating section selection mark 334R is displayed, for example, in white letters such as "RIGHT". Even at this time, the input key 43MS is waiting for an input from the user, so the individual light emitting section 27M6 is blinking.

As the additional information 331, for example, "Press the start button to confirm" is displayed. This means that the cooperative cooking mode is determined by the input key 43MS. That is, the heating source to be used first can be determined as the right heating unit 17HR.

When the user wants to confirm the cooperative cooking mode using the left heating unit 17HL instead of the right heating unit 17HR, the user can touch the input key 43M2 corresponding to the second area 30M. Specifically, when the right input key 43M2 of the two left and right input keys 43M2 is touched, the first specific screen 30SP is switched from the display screen 11B to 11A.

On the display screen 11A, the right heating section selection mark 334R disappears, and only the left heating section selection mark 334L is displayed as, for example, "LEFT" in white. Even at this time, the input key 43MS is waiting for an input from the user, so the individual light emitting section 27M6 is blinking. As the additional information 331, for example, "Press the start button to decide" is displayed.

Summary of Embodiment 2.
As is clear from the above description, the built-in composite heating cooker of Embodiment 2 implements the second invention in the following form. i.e.
a heating chamber 113 inside the body 110;
an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be heated in the upper part of the main body 110;
a microwave heating source (second heating means) 189 for heating the heating chamber 113;
an oven heating source (third heating means) 188 that heats the heating chamber 113 by a heating principle different from that of the second heating means;
an input operation unit 40;
an integrated display unit (display means) 30;
An integrated control device (control unit) MC that controls the first, second, and third heating sources 9, 189, and 188, respectively;
The integrated control device MC includes a group consisting of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, a cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 is driven with a time difference, and a microwave heating mode. A combined cooking mode in which the heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven simultaneously, driven with a time difference, or automatically switched and driven, and the first, second, and third heating means are independently operated. a single cooking mode that is driven, and
The integrated control device MC accepts any one of the combined cooking mode, the linked cooking mode, and the single cooking mode at the input operation unit 40, and selects a specific screen (first specific screen 30SP) corresponding to the cooking mode. , the second specific screen 30SC and the third specific screen ST) are displayed on the integrated display unit 30;
It is a configuration characterized by

With this configuration, two heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used, and the cooperative cooking mode, the combined cooking mode, and the single cooking mode can be effectively used. I can provide equipment.

Further, after the input operation unit 40 turns on the main power supply, the integrated control device MC causes the integrated display unit 30 to display the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z). The specific screen is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 in response to an input from.
Therefore, the cooperative cooking mode, the combined cooking mode, and the single cooking mode can be effectively used.

The specific screens are a first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode, a second specific screen 30SC for the combined cooking mode, and a third specific screen 30ST for the single cooking mode,
These three types of specific screens are configured to have the same shape and area.
Therefore, one display screen can be shared even if the number of specific screens is three, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

The composite heating cooker of Embodiment 2 implements the third invention in the following form. i.e.
a main body 110 having a top plate 15 and containing a heating chamber 113;
a first heating means (induction heating source 9) for heating the object to be heated placed on the top plate 15;
a second heating means (microwave heating source 189) that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113;
an integrated controller MC that controls the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189;
an input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the integrated control device MC;
a door 114 for freely opening and closing the front opening of the heating chamber 113;
A door opening/closing detection unit (door closing detection unit) 139 that detects opening of the door 114,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing a cooking process 1 using the induction heating source 9 and a cooperative cooking mode for performing a cooking process 2 using the microwave heating source 189 after the cooking process 1. has
When the input operation unit 40 issues a command to start the cooperative cooking menu, the integrated control device MC executes the cooking process 1 in the cooperative cooking mode by the induction heating source 9 regardless of whether the door 114 is opened or closed. ,
When the cooking process 1 is completed, the door 114 is closed, and the cooperative cooking mode start command is issued from the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC starting the cooking step 2;
When receiving a command to execute the cooperative cooking mode, the integrated control device MC can execute the cooperative cooking mode when the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 satisfy permission conditions. It is a configuration.
Therefore, the cooking process 1 in the cooperative cooking mode can be executed by opening and closing the door 114, and the cooperative cooking mode is executed when a predetermined permission condition is satisfied, so the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode is disabled. It is possible to avoid stopping prematurely and interfering with other cooking. In other words, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite heating cooker without impairing user operability.

The composite heating cooker of Embodiment 2 implements the fourth invention in the following form. i.e.
an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be heated in the upper part of the main body 110;
a microwave heating source (second heating means) 189 for heating the heating chamber 113 arranged inside the main body 110;
an oven heating source (third heating means) 188 that heats the heating chamber 113 by a heating principle different from that of the microwave heating source 189;
an input operation unit 40;
an integrated display unit (display means) 30;
and an integrated control device MC that controls the first, second, and third heating means,
The integrated control device MC includes a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the second heating means, the third heating means, and the first heating means are driven with a time difference, and the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven simultaneously, driven with a time difference, or automatically switched and driven, and the first, second, and third heating means are driven independently. It has a single cooking mode and a function to
The integrated control device MC displays a first specific screen 30SP for executing the cooperative cooking mode, a second specific screen 30SC for executing the combined cooking mode, and a third specific screen 30ST for executing the single cooking mode, alternatively displayed on the integrated display unit 30,
When the integrated control device MC receives a cooking start command from the input operation unit 40 while the first specific screen 30SP, the second specific screen 30SC, and the third specific screen 30ST are displayed, proceed to the cooking process
It is a configuration characterized by

Therefore, three heating sources, ie, the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188 can be used, and specific screens for each of the linked cooking mode, combined cooking mode, and single cooking mode are displayed. These three cooking modes can be easily selected and can be used for a wide range of cooking. That is, a highly convenient heating cooker can be provided.

As described with reference to FIG. 86, the input operation unit 40 of the second embodiment is arranged on the upper surface of the main body 110 and on the front side of the main body.
In other words, the input operation section 40 is composed of four parts: the front operation section 146, the central operation section 40M, the right operation section 40R, and the left operation section 40L.

A central operation unit 40M arranged on the upper surface of the main body 110 includes a first selection means 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, a second selection means 43M1 for selecting the composite cooking mode, and the cooperative cooking mode. Input means 43MS for starting heat cooking in the combined cooking mode are arranged respectively.
That is, the front operation unit 146 fixed to the right front side of the main body 110 is used for microwave heating and oven heating using the heating chamber 113 .
Therefore, the number of input keys on the central operation unit 40M is reduced, and the user's operability can be further improved.

In this Embodiment 2, others (Invention 1, etc.) are also implemented, but detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Furthermore, since the effects described in Embodiment 1 can be expected for other portions that employ the same configuration as in Embodiment 1, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Embodiment 3.
96 and 97 show a cooking device according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention.
FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC and the central operation unit 40M of the cooker 1 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the cooperative cooking menu of the heating cooker 1 of FIG. 96 is selected. Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configuration of the first embodiment described in FIGS. 1 to 84 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

FIG. 96 corresponds to FIGS. 26 and 27 of the first embodiment.
In the third embodiment, the input keys 43MC arranged on the central operation unit 40M are configured to transmit the display command signal 1 for displaying the composite cooking menu and the display command signal 2 for displaying the linked cooking menu. One of the characteristics is that there is As in the first embodiment, the composite cooking menu includes both the single cooking menu of microwave heating source 189 and the composite cooking menu. Moreover, the command signal 1 and the start command signal do not necessarily have different electrical conditions such as signal waveforms and lengths. This is the same, although not explicitly stated in the following description of the invention.

In this Embodiment 3, as shown in FIG. 96, a "compound cooking menu" that can be called by the display command signal 1 when the input key 43MC is operated is stored inside the storage device MM of the integrated control device MC. ' (including an operation program) and the storage data (including an associated operation program) of the 'linkage cooking menu' that can be called by the display command signal 2 when the input key 43MC is operated. stored in the storage area.

When the input key 43MC is operated once (for example, touch operation), the display command signal 1 is transmitted, and when the input key 43MC is operated once (for example, touch operation), the display command signal 2 is transmitted this time, When another operation (for example, touch operation) is performed, the display command signal 1 is transmitted. In other words, two types of display command signals 1 and 2 are repeatedly transmitted in order according to the number of times of operation.

In other words, the input means 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode and the input means 43MC for selecting the combined cooking mode are input keys having a common operating portion directly touched by the user, and the integrated control device is controlled according to the number of times of operation. The content of the selection command is determined by the MC. Therefore, two display command functions can be exhibited without installing two input keys 43MC. As a result, even if the installation space of the input keys is restricted, the input function can be exhibited, and the manufacturing cost is also advantageous.

When the display command signal 1 is received, the integrated control device MC displays the second specific screen 30SC on the integrated display section 30 .
When the display command signal 2 is received, the integrated control device MC displays the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display section 30 .

The input key 43MC of Embodiment 3 can call up the composite cooking menu with the display command signal 1 and can call up the cooperative cooking menu with the display command signal 2, so it is called a "comprehensive display input key" 43MC. Sometimes.

Data indicating the names of a total of 11 composite cooking menus (for example, "warm", "microwave manual", etc.) that can be displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 are stored in the first layer of the storage device MM. I have memorized it.

Data indicating "control conditions" (for example, "microwave output value", "energization time", etc.) that can be displayed in the second area 30M of the integrated display unit 30 are stored in the second layer of the storage device MM. There is. Further, data indicating “control conditions” (for example, “heating time for grill cooking”, etc.) that can be displayed in the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 and reference information 30P are stored in the third layer of the storage device MM. is stored in These are the same as the configurations described in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, as "additional information" of the data of the "cooking menu", information on the cooking process, information on the heating source to be used, control conditions (preheating completion temperature, etc.), user input operation to proceed to the next cooking process Guidance information, instruction information, and the like for prompting the cooking are stored so as to correspond to each linked cooking menu. These points are also the same as the configuration described in the first embodiment.

FIG. 97 corresponds to FIG. 56 of the first embodiment.
FIG. 97 shows the operation in the second cooperative cooking menu (SR2B) (see FIG. 45). Since the identification information differs depending on the food to be cooked, when the name of certain identification information (food to be cooked) is selected, the integrated controller MC automatically selects the second linked cooking menu (SR2B) (see FIG. 45). .

In the basic operation program of the second cooperative cooking menu shown in FIG. A sequence is defined to be performed in the heating unit 17HL.

In the case of FIG. 97, the left operation unit 40L is operated for “single heating cooking” of the left heating unit 17HL during the execution of the cooking process 1 by the microwave heating source 189 in the linked cooking menu. is the case.

When the cooking process of the cooperative cooking menu has already progressed to the heating stage (cooking process 1) of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, the user wants to use the left heating unit 17HL to perform another cooking. When the user operates the left operation unit 40L, the integrated control unit MC receives the operation signal (step SK1).

In the next step SK2, the user's input operation result is analyzed and it is determined whether or not the content corresponds to a predetermined prohibited control condition. In this case, among the control conditions, the length of the cooking time is determined. In other words, it is determined whether or not the "maximum cooking time limit" applies.

For example, if it is found from the information such as timer cooking settings that the left heating unit 17HL will be used for cooking for a period of time exceeding 30 minutes, the determination at step SK2 becomes "No", and the reason for disapproval at step SK8. Go to notifications.

The "maximum cooking time limit" in step SK2 is determined in advance in consideration of the possibility that the time during which the left heating source 17HL is used may impede execution of cooperative cooking. For example, if cooking in the heating chamber 113 is set to require 30 minutes or more, cooking (according to the non-cooking menu) in the left heating unit 17HL (up to 30 minutes ) has ended. Therefore, use of the left heating unit 17HL for a period of time shorter than 30 minutes does not interfere with execution of the second cooperative cooking menu.

If it is unclear how long each cooking in the heating chamber 113 will take, a certain reference time is set based on the cooking time settings and control conditions related to all the linked cooking menus, and the reference time is determined. The time may be used as the maximum time of the "maximum cooking time limit".

For the reasons described above, if the "maximum cooking time limit" is met in step SH2, the process proceeds to step SK8, and the left heating unit 17HL is disallowed. Specifically, the fact that it cannot be used is displayed on the left side display section 31L, and the speech synthesizer 95 notifies it by voice.

On the other hand, if the determination of "Yes" is received in step SH2, the process proceeds to step SK3, where the maximum power consumption when using the left heating unit 17HL and the heat sources during cooperative cooking (microwave heat source 189 and oven heat source 188 ) is determined by the power control unit 72, and if the allowable maximum power consumption value is exceeded, the maximum power consumption value is limited at this stage and the power consumption of the left heating unit 17HL is controlled. Allow use. Therefore, a processing route passing through steps SK8 and SK9 is provided.

In step SK9, after the notification of disapproval of the left heating unit 17HL, the user who knows the notification may shorten the maximum induction heating time.
Alternatively, if it is notified at step SK8 that the electric power will run out, if the thermal power set value or thermal power level is lowered, determination will be made again at step SK2.

If the judgment of "Yes" is received in step SK3, the process proceeds to step SK4, the driving mode of the IH coil 17L of the left heating unit 17HL is automatically determined, and the thermal power value set by the user or the thermal power selected by the IH control unit 90 values are determined. Also, the permitted heating time is determined as a control condition (SK4).

Next, the driving of the inverter circuit 81L is started, and induction heating cooking is started (SK5). After that, it is monitored whether or not a user's stop command is given by the input key 43L1 (SK6), and when the stop command is received, the induction heating operation is immediately stopped. Then, the end of cooking is displayed on the left display portion 31L. In addition, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the completion of cooking by voice (SK7). Timer cooking may be set to limit cooking in the left heating unit 17HL within a set time (for example, 25 minutes).

Summary of Embodiment 3.
As is clear from the above description, the built-in composite heating cooker according to the third embodiment implements the fifth invention in the following form. i.e.
an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be heated from below in the upper part of the main body 110;
a microwave heating source (second heating means) 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113 arranged inside the main body 110;
an oven heating source (third heating means) 188 that heats the heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first, second, and third heating sources 9, 189, and 188, respectively;
The integrated control device MC has a function of performing a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the microwave heating source 9 and the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are driven with a time difference,
The integrated control device MC further has a function of performing a combined cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 9 and the oven heating source 188 are driven simultaneously, driven with a time difference, or automatically switched,
The input operation unit 40 includes third selection means (input keys) 43L1 and 43R1 for selecting the induction heating source 9, first selection means (input keys) 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, A second selection means (input key) 43M1 for selecting a cooking menu,
After the main power is supplied, the integrated control device MC displays the standby initial screen (common screen) 30Z on the integrated display unit 30 at a stage where none of the first, second and third selection means can be selected. Or displayed on the individual display units 31L and 31R,
After the standby initial screen 30Z is displayed, when the input operation of the first selection means is started before the first selection means 43L1 and the third selection means 43L1 and 43R1, the cooperative cooking The first specific screen 30SP for inputting the mode is displayed,
When the integrated control device MC starts the input operation of the second selection means 43M1 before the third selection means 43L1 and the first selection means 43MC after the main power is supplied , the second specific screen 30SC for inputting the composite cooking mode is displayed.

Therefore, when the predetermined input key 43MC is operated, the first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode is displayed, so that the transition to the cooperative cooking mode can be easily proceeded with this display screen. can.
Moreover, similarly, if the predetermined input key 43M1 is operated, the second specific screen 30SC of the compound cooking mode is displayed, so there is no fear of misuse or misunderstanding by the user. In other words, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite heating cooker without impairing user operability.

Furthermore, in Embodiment 3,
The first heating means (induction heating source 9) and the second heating means (microwave heating source 189) are installed inside a body 110 having a top plate 15,
The induction heating source 9 includes a right heating portion 17HR on the right side of the center portion of the top plate 15 and a left heating portion 17HL on the left side,
When the second cooperative cooking menu is executed, the integrated control device MC uses the microwave heating source 189 in the cooking process 1, and in the cooking process 2, it has been set in advance as a preferential heating part. Since only the left heating unit 17HL is used, the configuration restricts the operation of the left heating unit 17HL.
Therefore, since the second cooperative cooking menu can be executed, various types of heat cooking can be widely handled, and the left heating section 17HL used for the cooperative cooking menu can be preferentially used, so that the user's operability is not impaired. It is possible to realize a highly convenient composite heating cooker.
In comparison between the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL, if the right heating unit 17HL has an advantageous condition such as being able to handle various types of cooking, the right heating unit 17HR is preferentially used. You may set as a heating part which carries out.

For other parts of the configuration that are the same as those of the first embodiment, the effects described in the first embodiment can be obtained.

Embodiment 4.
FIG. 98 is a plan view 1 of the front portion of the heating cooker according to Embodiment 4 of the present invention for explaining the arrangement of the input operation section and various display sections. 99 is a plan view 2 showing the relationship between the input operation section and the central operation section in FIG. 98. FIG. Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configuration of the first embodiment described in FIGS. 1 to 84 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the central operation unit 40M is divided into an operation unit (RG operation unit) 40MG for the range grill cooking menu and a cooperative operation unit 40MC.
The RG operation unit 40MG is a shared operation unit when the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are used. In other words, the RG operation unit 40MG is used when cooking with a compound cooking menu and a single cooking menu (single cooking mode).

On the other hand, the cooperative operation unit 40MC is a dedicated operation unit for executing the cooperative cooking menu. The cooperative operation unit 40MC has an input key 350 for giving a command to display the identification information 330 of the cooperative cooking menu to the integrated control device MC, and an input key 340 located near the right side of the input key 350 .

The input key 340 is for instructing the start and stop of cooperative cooking, and has a function of starting heat cooking with a first touch operation and stopping the heat cooking operation with a second touch operation.
Individual light-emitting portions 27M6 and 27M7 that are lit when these two types of input keys 340 and 350 are enabled are arranged, respectively.

The input keys 340 and 350 are surrounded by a rectangular frame on the surface of the input operation unit 40 so as to be clearly distinguished from the input keys 43MS and 43MC in the RG operation unit 40MG, and the characters "cooking" are displayed on the surface of the input operation unit 40. is being displayed.

43MC is an input key for transmitting a display command signal for displaying the "compound cooking menu" on the integrated display section 30 by the "second specific screen" 30SC.
43MS is an input key for outputting a command signal for starting and stopping the cooking process of the composite cooking menu according to the touch operation. These input keys 43MC and 43MS also serve as input keys for performing the "single cooking mode" of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. FIG.

The right operation section 40R is an individual operation section for performing input operations only for the induction heating source. Similarly, the left operating section 40L is also an individual operating section. In other words, the right operation section 40R and the left operation section 40L are for cooking according to the IH control menu (which is a single cooking menu for induction heating).

Various input keys 43R1, 43L1, 44R, 44L, etc. are arranged in the right operation section 40R and the left operation section 40L, which is exactly the same as in the first embodiment.
Furthermore, the right heating section 17HR has an input key 43RS for instructing the start of the heating operation. The left heating unit 17HL also has an input key 43LS for commanding the start of the heating operation.

Input keys 43M1, 43M2, and 43M3 are arranged on the RG operation unit 40MG.
The input keys 43M1, 43M2, and 43M3 function as input keys for the cooperative operation section 40MC from the time when the identification information 330 of the cooperative cooking menu is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP.
The first specific screen 30SP is displayed by the input key 350 on the cooperative operation section 40MC. By pressing this input key 350, the integrated control device MC displays the first specific screen 30SP.

When the input key 350 is pressed once, it functions as an input key that gives a command to display the identification information 330 of the linked cooking menu. The display of the identification information 330 of the linked cooking menu and the information 332 of the cooking process also disappears. In other words, the input key 350 also has a function corresponding to the input key 43MT of the first embodiment.
Note that when the execution of the cooperative cooking menu is canceled by a command from the input key 350, the first specific screen 30SP disappears, so the integrated display section 30 returns to the normal initial display screen 30D.

Light-emitting display portions 27R, 27L, and 27M are provided in the right operation portion 40R, the left operation portion 40L, and the center operation portion 40M, respectively. For example, in the central operation unit 40M, the individual light emitting units 27R1 to 27R7 are arranged immediately behind ten touch input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2, 43M3, 350, and 340. FIG. An input key having two left and right touch operation units, such as the input key 43M1, shares one individual light emitting unit 27M3.

The state shown in FIG. 98 is the stage immediately before the cooperative cooking menu is selected. Therefore, the individual light emitting portions 27R6 and 27M7 adjacent to the rear of the input keys 340 and 350 emit light.
Also, the input key 43M1 sequentially displays the identification information 330 corresponding to the food to be cooked in a one-to-one relationship at a predetermined position in the first area 30L (of the first specific screen 30SP) of the integrated display section 30. It has a function.
The individual light-emitting portion 27M3 behind the input key 43M1 emits light, indicating that the input operation for the input key 43M1 is possible.

At the stage shown in FIG. 98, an input operation of the input key 340 is awaited. Therefore, in order to prompt the user to operate, the individual light emitting portion 27M7 does not emit light continuously, but blinks as indicated by the dashed circle in FIG.

Next, FIG. 99 will be described.
The state shown in FIG. 99 is the stage immediately before selecting the oven heating cooking and the left heating section 17HL, which is unrelated to the implementation of the cooperative cooking menu. Therefore, the individual light-emitting portions 27M2 and 27L1 adjacent to and immediately behind the input keys 43MS and 43L4 emit light.

The stage shown in FIG. 99 is a state of waiting for the operation of the input key 43MS. Therefore, in order to prompt the user to operate, the light emission of the individual light emission section 27M2 is not continuous light emission but blinking as indicated by the dashed circle in FIG.

When the input key 43MC is operated to display the cooperative cooking menu on the integrated display unit 30 and the input key 43MC is operated again before the cooking process 1 is started, all previous input settings are canceled.

Summary of Embodiment 4.
As is clear from the above description, the built-in composite heating cooker of Embodiment 4 has the following configuration. i.e.
an induction heating source 9 as a first heating means;
a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188, which are second heating means separated from the induction heating source 9;
an integrated controller MC that controls the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189;
an integrated display unit 30 as display means;
An input operation unit 40 that provides an input signal to the integrated control device MC,
The integrated control device MC has a plurality of linked cooking menus for cooking one food using the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189,
The input operation unit has a cooperation operation unit 40MC for giving a command for the integrated control device MC to execute the cooperation cooking menu,
The cooperative operation unit 40MC includes an input key 350 for giving a command to display the identification information 330 and an input key 340 for issuing a command to start the cooking process in order to select the cooperative cooking menu,
When the integrated control device MC receives the selection command of the input key 350, it determines whether or not the permission condition is satisfied. death,
On the first specific screen 30SP, the cooperative cooking menu is displayed in a selectable manner,
When one cooperative cooking menu (second cooperative cooking menu) is selected on the first specific screen 30SP, the microwave heating source 189 to be used first is used for a specific period other than the cooperative cooking menu. It was a configuration that restricted the operation corresponding to the menu.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide a cooking device that can effectively use a plurality of heat sources such as the induction heat source 9 and the microwave heat source 189 .
In addition, since the linked cooking menu can be executed, it can handle a wide range of cooking with heat, and the heating source used in the linked cooking menu can be used preferentially, so the user's operability is not impaired and convenience is improved. A high composite heating cooker can be realized.

Furthermore, since the cooperative cooking operation unit 40MC is provided, it is easy to distinguish from the operation units of other heating sources, and cooperative cooking, which is more complicated than single heating cooking, can be carried out without causing confusion or error in the user. You can expect to be able to.

Furthermore, in Embodiment 4, the first heating means (induction heating source 9) and the second heating means (microwave heating source 189) are installed inside the main body 110 having the top plate 15,
The induction heating source 9 includes a right heating portion 17HR on the right side of the center portion of the top plate 15 and a left heating portion 17HL on the left side,
When the second cooperative cooking menu is executed, the integrated controller MC uses the microwave heating source 189 in the cooking process 1, and preferentially uses only the left heating unit 17HL in the cooking process 2. , the operation of the left heating unit 17HL is restricted (for the purpose of executing menus other than the linked cooking menu).
Therefore, since the second cooperative cooking menu can be executed, various types of heat cooking can be widely handled, and the left heating section 17HL used for the cooperative cooking menu can be preferentially used, so that the user's operability is not impaired. It is possible to realize a highly convenient composite heating cooker.
In comparison between the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL, if the right heating unit 17HL has an advantageous condition such as being able to handle various types of cooking, the right heating unit 17HR is preferentially used. You may set as a heating part which carries out.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the input operation unit 40 includes the cooperation operation unit 40MC for performing input for carrying out the cooperative cooking menu, and the cooperation operation unit 40MC can be easily identified from the input operation unit 40. It is partitioned by a partition line or the like (see FIG. 99). Therefore, there is no confusion about the position of the operation unit for cooperative cooking in the input operation unit 40 in which a large number of input keys are arranged. This can be expected to improve operability.

For other parts of the configuration that are the same as those of the first embodiment, the effects described in the first embodiment can be obtained.

As a modification of the fourth embodiment, an input key 350 for giving a command to display the identification information 330 and a command to start the cooking process for selecting the linked cooking menu provided in the linked operation section 40MC are provided. Both of the input keys 340 to be issued may be arranged on the left operating section 40L (or the right operating section 40R), which is an individual operating section.
According to this, it is possible to instruct the selection of the cooperative cooking mode and the start of the cooking process 1 in the left operating section 40L (or the right operating section 40R).

As yet another modified example, an input key 350 is arranged on the cooperative operation unit 40MC, and an input key 340 for issuing a command to start the cooking process is provided on the left operation unit 40L (or the right operation unit 40R), which is an individual operation unit. You can place it.
According to this, it is possible to instruct the start of the cooking process 1 in the cooperative cooking mode at the left operating section 40L (or the right operating section 40R).

Embodiment 5.
100 to 109 show a built-in composite heat cooker according to Embodiment 5 of the present invention, and FIG. 100 is a simplified plan view of the built-in composite heat cooker. FIG. 101 is a plan view 1 of the front portion of the heating cooker of FIG. 100 for explaining the arrangement of the central operation unit and various display units. 102 is a plan view 2 of the front portion for explaining the arrangement of the central operation unit and various display units in the heating cooker of FIG. 100. FIG. 103 is a plan view 3 of the front part for explaining the arrangement of the central operation unit and various display units in the heating cooker of FIG. 100. FIG. FIG. 104 shows a modification of the heating cooker of FIG. 100, and is a plan view of the front part for explaining the arrangement of the central operation unit and various display units. 105 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the central operation unit in the heating cooker of FIG. 100. FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit of the heating cooker of FIG. 100. FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit of the heating cooker of FIG. 100. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display section of the heating cooker of FIG. 100. FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification of the display operation of the integrated display unit of the heating cooker of FIG. 100. FIG. Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configuration of the first embodiment described in FIGS. 1 to 84 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. 100 emits all or part of the cooling air after cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 to the outside of the heating cooker 1 without passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113. This configuration is greatly different from the first embodiment.

Furthermore, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 5 is different from Embodiment 1 in that the induction heating section 17H includes a central heating section 17HM in addition to the left heating section 17HL and the right heating section 17HR. different. Since the central heating section 17HM is provided, the positions of the left heating section 17HL and the right heating section 17HR are moved forward a little more than in the case of the first embodiment.

TS10 is a thermistor as a contact-type temperature sensor, and is arranged in the central cavity of the central IH coil 17M. This temperature sensor TS10 is in direct contact with the bottom surface of the top plate 15, or is in contact with the bottom surface of the top plate 15 via a thermally conductive interposition, like the temperature sensor TS4 of the first embodiment. . Thereby, the temperature of the top plate 15 is measured. Then, a signal indicating the temperature measurement result is transmitted to the IH control section 90 .

17MS is a circular position mark displayed by printing or the like on the upper surface of the top plate 15 to indicate the desired position where the object to be heated N such as a metal pan is placed.
The central IH coil 17M that constitutes the central heating section 17HM is driven by the inverter circuit 81R of the right heating section 17HR. That is, the right IH coil 17R and the central IH coil 17M are selectively driven by a switching section (not shown) controlled by the IH control section 90. FIG. A dedicated inverter circuit for the central IH coil 17M may be provided. When a dedicated inverter circuit is provided, the simultaneous heating operation of the central heating section 17HM and the right heating section 17HR becomes possible.

The central operation unit 40M has an input key 43M1 (not shown) for selecting the central heating unit 17HM. By operating the input key 43M1, the heating operation of the "central heater (central heating unit)" 17HM can be designated as described in FIG. 25 of the first embodiment.

In the heating cooker 1 according to the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 100, "RG continuous cooking" is set in the compound cooking menu according to the first embodiment.
The "RG continuous cooking" is cooking by combining microwave heating and oven heating. There are two types:
(1) A pattern in which microwave heating is first performed for a certain period of time, and after that period of time has elapsed, heating is automatically performed by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B.
(2) Microwave heating is performed until it reaches 80 ° C or a temperature set by the user (however, any one temperature can be set from 80 ° C to 100 ° C or less), and then reserved for use A pattern in which heating is automatically switched to oven heating, and heating is performed for a period of time set by the upper heater 163A or lower heater 163B or until reaching a temperature set by the user.

As described above, in "RG continuous cooking", cooking proceeds even if the user does not give a command to start cooking again in the middle, and the user does not have to be near the heating cooker 1 all the time. It reduces the burden on users. It is also "compound cooking" because it uses two heating sources.

In the RG continuous cooking control menu, the user cannot select the heating power value (watt) during microwave heating, and can select one of "weak", "strong", etc. to select the heating intensity.

Such “RG continuous cooking” can be selected by the central operation unit 40M1 of the input operation unit 40. FIG.
Further, in this "RG continuous cooking", the central operation unit 40M is provided with an order selection key (not shown) so that the user can select which of microwave heating and oven heating should be performed first. ing.

As described in the first embodiment, also in the fifth embodiment, the central operation unit 40M is provided with the input key 43KP. Therefore, when the input key 43KP is pressed, the integrated control device MC is switched to the "function mode".

Next, the central operation section 40M and the integrated display section 30, which are one feature of the fifth embodiment, will be described.
As shown in FIG. 101, the display screen section 300 of the integrated display section 30 has a fourth area 303 in addition to the first area 30L to the third area 30R. The first area 30L to the third area 30R are the same as those described in the first embodiment, and are display areas whose substantial display area can be changed. However, the fourth area 303 has a fixed area and is elongated so as to lie behind the first to third areas 30L to 30R.

The surface of the integrated display unit 30 is covered with a glass plate, and substantially the entire area except for the peripheral portion is a capacitive touch panel that senses the touch of the user's finger. Therefore, the touch panel portion is hereinafter referred to as an “operation panel” 311 . When the integrated display section 30 is arranged below the top plate 15 , the glass plate is the top plate 15 .

The entire operation panel 311 is divided into a “touch restriction portion” corresponding to the fourth area 303 and a portion (touch recommended portion) functioning as the first area 30L to the third area 30R.
An electrode 310 is formed by vapor deposition, printing, or the like on the back side of the touch regulation portion. When the operation panel 311 is formed of a part of the top plate 15, the electrodes 310 are formed on the back side of the top plate 15 by means of vapor deposition, printing, or the like.

The electrode 310 transmits a contact detection signal to a contact detection unit (not shown). A touch is detected from a change in capacitance.

Even when a heated object N (not shown) such as a metal pan is projected to the position of the integrated display unit 30 (abnormal state), the excessive approach of the heated object N is detected by the electrode 310. can. Therefore, the integrated control unit MC can detect an abnormal placement such that the object N to be heated abnormally approaches or covers the integrated display unit 30 and issues an alarm. In particular, when cooking using edible oil such as tempura, the tempura pan (object to be heated) is at a high temperature. The unit 30 may overheat and cause failure. However, in this fifth embodiment, such a situation can also be detected by the electrodes 310, and an alarm can be issued to the user.

In addition, the electrode 310 and the contact detection unit (not shown) function as a safety device that prevents the user from touching the "touch restriction portion". In other words, the user's contact with the top plate 15, which becomes hot during induction heating, can be minimized.

68T is a display section that indicates a case where the central heating section 17HM is used for induction cooking, similar to the display sections 68L and 68R. Using the central heating part 17HM emits red light.

As is clear from FIG. 101, the various input keys 43M1 to 43M3 provided in the central operation unit 40M of the first embodiment are not required in the second embodiment, and are therefore deleted.
Instead, it comprises a touch panel input device 301, which will be described in FIG. 103 and subsequent figures, and a touch gesture determination device 302 that receives operation information on the touch panel.

Next, FIG. 102 will be described.
In the integrated display section 30, the second specific screen 30SC displayed during the combined cooking mode is larger in size than the integrated display section 30 of the first embodiment.
Also, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed in the cooperative cooking mode (see FIG. 104).

In general, when looking at the standard lineup of TFT liquid crystal modules that are used in this type of display unit, there are 3.5 inches, 3.97 inches, 4.3 inches, 4.6 inches, and 5.0 inches. are provided. If the screen size of the first embodiment is, for example, 3.5 inches or 3.97 inches, the screen size of the fifth embodiment can be one step or two steps larger than that. However, as shown in FIG. 103, the temperature of the top plate 15 tends to increase as it approaches the left heating section 17HL, the right heating section 17HR, and the central heating section 17HM. Therefore, the integrated display section 30 is arranged on the front FR side from the first embodiment so as not to approach the high temperature display section 69 (not shown).

The high temperature display section 69 (not shown) displays a heat source or a portion having a high temperature by emitting light from an LED. There are two heating sources or parts, the top plate 15 and the heating chamber 113.

In the fifth embodiment, since the various input keys 43M1 to 43M3 described in the first embodiment can be omitted, the integrated display section 30 can have a large display area. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 102, in the second area 30M and the third area 30R, more information such as the target temperature and heating time, which are one of the conditions in the control menu, can be displayed.

FIG. 102 shows a state in which the second specific screen is displayed.
In FIG. 102, 30Y is a display portion for "control conditions" such as target temperature and heating time. 30Y1 and 30Y2 are candidate display portions that can display the next candidate for the "control condition" such as target temperature and heating time.
In FIG. 102, in the candidate display section 30Y, heating time information 30T is displayed as one of the control conditions, and two selectable candidate heating time information 30T1 and 30T2 are also displayed at the same time (in FIG. 102, not shown).
In FIG. 102, 361 is a menu display portion for displaying the name and type of the menu. This is at the location of said fourth area 303 .

Next, FIG. 103 will be described.
FIG. 103 shows a state in which the second specific screen 30SC is displayed.
In FIG. 103, 362 is the display information of the cooperative cooking menu displayed on the menu display section 361 in characters. When the linked cooking menu is not implemented, the display automatically changes to "menu" as shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 103, when the target temperature information 30T displayed in the second area 30M is "180° C.", the candidate display section 30Y displays the target temperature information 30T1 of "185° C." 175° C.” is displayed as the target temperature information 30T2.

Further, in the third area 30R, when the displayed heating time information is "10 minutes", the candidate display portion 30Y displays the heating time information 30GY1 (during grill cooking) of "10 minutes and 30 seconds". , the heating time information 30GY2 of "9 minutes and 30 seconds" is displayed.

Shown in FIG. 103 is the case of implementing a combined cooking mode.
As shown in FIG. 103, the user touches the first area 30L to the third area 30R with the fingertip FG and moves the fingertip FG forward FR or backward BK to display a composite cooking menu (for example, "Oven") can be changed to the next candidate compound cooking menu.

In FIGS. 103 to 106, 27M7 is a light-emitting section forming part of the light-emitting display section 27M. In Embodiment 1, the light emitting portion 27M6 corresponding to the start selection portion (input key 43MS) is shared by the heating stop input key 43MT. A dedicated light emitting unit 27M7 is provided.

The light-emitting part 27M7 may perform normal continuous lighting before the start of heating, and change to flashing light after the start of the heating operation. Before starting the heating operation, the light emitting unit 27M7 does not need to input with the input key 43MT, so the input function is disabled. It is made to emit light so that the user can easily visually confirm it.

FIG. 104 shows a state in which the first specific screen 30SP is displayed. To display this first specific screen 30SP, it is necessary to press the input key 43MC.
In FIG. 104, 360 is an icon displayed so as to straddle the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display section 30 . The "icon" here is a figure displayed on the display screen, and by touching the portion, a command signal for displaying support information is issued to the integrated control device MC.

As shown in FIG. 104 , when the user touches the icon 360 with a fingertip, the cooking process in the linked cooking mode at the time of the touch, the cooking method according to the food to be cooked, precautions, etc. are displayed on the integrated display unit 30 . Characters and graphics are displayed in the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the (first specific screen 30SP). It should be noted that the voice synthesizing device 95 may be used to notify the user of the method of cooking, precautions, etc. by voice. Also, like the additional information 30Q, the method of cooking, precautions, etc. may be displayed in the framed range.

In FIG. 104, the user touches the first area 30L of the first specific screen 30SP with the fingertip FG and moves it forward FR or backward BK to change the identification information 330 such as "hamburger" to other identification information. be able to. That is, menu selection can be executed while touching the first specific screen 30SP.

In FIG. 104, 362 is linked cooking menu display information indicating that the linked cooking menu is being displayed, as described above. When the cooperative cooking menu is not executed, the display changes to that shown in FIG. 102 or 103. FIG.

Next, the touch panel input device 301 and the touch gesture determination device 302 will be described with reference to FIG.

A first area 30L to a third area 30R forming the operation panel 311 are touch gesture input means for receiving a touch gesture operation performed by the user. A touch gesture operation is an information input operation by a specific movement of the user's fingertip FG or the like.

The touch gesture operations include a tap that is an operation of tapping the surface of the operation panel 311 with a fingertip, a flick that is an operation of flicking the surface of the operation panel 311 with a finger, and an operation of tracing the surface of the operation panel 311 (a finger sliding operation). Can include certain swipes. However, in the fifth embodiment, it is determined that only two of the touch gesture operation of moving the user's fingertip FG in the front-rear direction and the touch gesture operation of moving the user's fingertip FG in the left-right direction are effective. More on this later.

Touch gesture operations include drag, which is an operation of dragging a fingertip FG, pinch-in, which is an operation of narrowing the distance between fingertips while pinching them with a plurality of fingertips on the surface of the operation panel 311, and narrowing the distance between a plurality of fingers on the surface of the operation panel 311. There are also operations such as pinch out, which are widening operations, but these are also identified by the operation determination unit 313 as invalid touch gesture operations.

The operation panel 311 receives a specific touch gesture operation performed by the user, and outputs input operation information (hereinafter referred to as “touch information”) IP1 corresponding to the touch gesture operation.

Directly below the operation panel unit 311, it is arranged overlapping with the operation panel unit 311, and various information (including control conditions such as temperature and heat power) related to each of the two menus, the compound cooking menu and the cooperative cooking menu, are displayed. A display screen for displaying the operation image shown is arranged. The display screen is, for example, a liquid crystal display. In other words, the display screen here means the first specific screen 30SP and the second specific screen 30SC.

As shown in FIG. 105 , the touch gesture determination device 302 has an operation determination section 313 and a notification section 318 .

Operation information input unit 312 receives touch information IP<b>1 output from operation panel unit 311 . The operation information input unit 312 outputs input information IP2 corresponding to the received touch information IP1 to the operation determination unit 313 . The input information IP2 is information corresponding to the touch information IP1, and may be the same information as the touch information IP1.

The operation determination unit 313 receives the touch information IP1 from the operation information input unit 312 and outputs the selection value signal IP3 as output information to the notification unit 318 . The selection value signal IP3 output from the operation determination unit 313 is a selection value signal determined by the operation determination unit 313 based on the touch information IP1. In this fifth embodiment, the selection value signal serves as information for determining the control menu and the cooperative cooking menu.

The operation determination unit 313 determines the type and content of the user's touch gesture operation from the received touch information IP1.
Operation determination section 313 includes gesture mode determination section 314 , gesture input information determination section 315 , and gesture area determination section 316 .

The reference parameter storage unit stores at least the parameters of the slider mode among the gestures of the user. An example of the parameter is a parameter determined based on one or a combination of two or more of the amount of movement of the touch gesture operation in a predetermined time, the speed of the touch gesture operation, and the touch time.

Gesture mode determination section 314 identifies the gesture mode of input information IP2 by referring to various parameters in the reference parameter storage section. Gesture input information determination section 315 determines selection value signal IP3 according to the value setting method in the gesture mode specified by gesture mode determination section 314 .

Gesture area determination unit 316 identifies in which area of first area 30L to third area 30R the user has performed the touch gesture operation.

The notification unit 318 receives the selection value signal IP3 from the operation determination unit 313 for each of the first area 30L to the third area 30R. Therefore, the notification unit 318 switches the display information for each of the first area 30L to the third area 30R, and outputs to the speech synthesizer 95 so as to notify such switching.

Display drive circuit 63 receives selection value signal IP4 from touch gesture determination device 302 . This selection value signal IP4 has the same contents as the selection value signal IP3.
The display unit drive circuit 63 switches the display content of the display panel unit 311 of the integrated display unit 30 according to the determination result of the touch gesture determination device 302 . That is, as shown in FIG. 105, the display section driving circuit 63 outputs to the display panel section 311 the image signal IP5 of the operation image to be displayed on the display panel section 311. FIG.

Note that in FIG. 105, the touch panel input device 301 and the touch gesture determination device 302 are illustrated in the form of hardware (H/W) configurations. However, the touch gesture determination device 302 shown in FIG. 105 is implemented by the right input control device 23 (see FIG. 92) described in the second embodiment. The software storage device of the right input control device 23 is provided with a storage unit for storing the touch gesture determination program, and the touch gesture determination program stored in the storage unit is executed by the microcomputer of the right input control device I am running it.

In FIG. 105, 319 is a reference information storage unit. The reference information storage unit 319 stores the reference information 30P and the additional information 30Q described in the first embodiment. The configuration of the control circuit (including the integrated control device MC), etc. of the fifth embodiment is the same as that of the second embodiment described with reference to FIG.

Since the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 5 is configured as described above, when starting cooking, first, to turn on the main power switch 97, the operation key 98 of the input operation unit 40 is pressed. For example, if the switch is held down for several seconds, this operation is detected by the power switch controller 28 and the main relay 107 in the filter circuit board 54 is closed.

Therefore, commercial power is supplied from the filter circuit board 54 to the power circuit board 55 . A power supply with a predetermined voltage is generated by the power supply circuit A34 and the power supply circuit B36 of the power supply circuit board 55 and applied to the integrated control device MC.

When the integrated controller MC is activated, it first performs an initial self-diagnosis before starting the heating operation to confirm that no abnormality has occurred. Also, the integrated display unit 30 is activated to display the initial information.

In this state, when the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 to use the microwave heating device 120 , the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 transmits a signal indicating that the door 114 is open to the control device 105 . Therefore, the control device 105 transmits a signal indicating opening of the door 114 to the integrated control device MC. The integrated controller MC presumes that the user will perform microwave heating cooking, displays necessary information for starting microwave heating on the integrated display unit 30, and prompts an input for starting heating.

When the user puts food to be cooked into the heating chamber 113 and closes the door 114, the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 again outputs a detection signal indicating that the door 114 is closed, via the control device 105 to the integrated control device. Send to MC. Therefore, when a command to start heating is issued from the input operation unit 40 in this state, the right input control device 23 detects whether there is a touch input on the input key for microwave heating. Therefore, a signal indicating a heating start command is transmitted from the right input control device 23 to the integrated control device MC.

The right input control device 23 also detects the input of the central operation unit 40M. Therefore, the selection value signal IP4 corresponding to the touch information on the operation panel 311 of the integrated display section 30 is transmitted to the display section drive circuit 63 .

Here, referring to FIG. 103 again, the user's operation for performing combined cooking using the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 will be described.
FIG. 103 shows the user using the oven heating source 188 to select the control menu "Oven".

In FIG. 103, three fingertips FG of the user are drawn at the same time, but it does not show that the three fingertips FG are performing touch gesture operations at the same time. It shows that the touch gesture operation is performed three times sequentially from the first area 30L on the left side to the right side.

When the user performs a touch gesture operation (hereinafter abbreviated as “touch operation”) on the first area 30L, the operation determination unit 313 of the touch gesture determination device 302 performs a first area that constitutes a part of the operation panel unit 311. It receives touch information IP1 from 30L and input information IP2 corresponding to this touch information.

While the control menu "oven" is displayed in the first area 30L, the user touches the first area 30L with the fingertip FG in the first area 30L and moves forward FR or backward BK (at a constant speed). range), the gesture mode determination unit 314 recognizes it as a regular (specific) touch gesture operation, and generates touch information.

Then, if the touch information indicates that the front FR has been operated, the operation determination unit 313 changes the display of the first area 30L via the display unit drive circuit 63 . Then, the next candidate "grill" or "warm" can be displayed in the first area 30L.

Similarly, the target temperature can also be selected in the second area 30M. In FIG. 103, "180° C." is displayed as the default value, but it can be changed to the target temperature information 30T1 of "185° C." displayed in the candidate display section 30Y2. Further, by performing a touch operation on the rear BK, the target temperature information 30T2 of "175° C." can be displayed in the central portion.

Similarly, in the third area 30R as well, touch information is generated each time a touch gesture operation that is recognized by the gesture mode determination unit 314 is performed, and the display information in the third area 30R can be changed.

In the fifth embodiment, the touch gesture operation recognized by the gesture mode determination unit 314 is set such that the movement direction after touching is either forward FR or backward BK. , The display cannot be switched by touch gesture operations such as "pinch in" and "pinch out" as described above.

A reference parameter storage unit 317, which will be described later, stores parameters limited to the slider mode among user gestures. Therefore, if the slider mode cannot be determined, the display cannot be switched. This is because, for example, the above-described "pinch-in" and "pinch-out" touch gesture operations do not match the parameters based on the combination of the amount of movement in a predetermined time, the speed of the touch gesture operation, or the touch time. .

FIG. 106 shows a modification of the fifth embodiment shown in FIGS. 100 to 105, and is a plan view of the front part for explaining the arrangement of the central operation unit 40M and various display units.

The reference parameter storage unit 317 in the modified example of FIG. 106 stores at least the parameters of the slider mode among the gestures of the user. The slider mode is specified in two directions: the front-rear direction and the direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (right direction RT and a range of ±30 degrees with respect to the right direction). That is, the slider mode is detected within an angle of 60 degrees. An example of the parameter is a parameter determined based on one or a combination of two or more of the amount of movement of the touch gesture operation in a predetermined time, the speed of the touch gesture operation, and the touch time.

When the name of the composite cooking menu "RG manual" shown in FIG. Display information in an area. For example, in the second area 30M or the third area 30R, an explanation of the touched composite cooking menu, reference information for determining the control conditions of each cooking menu, and cooking notes (cooking utensils such as pots) corresponding to the cooking menu including ), etc. may be displayed. In that case, the additional screen (or balloon) 30AD having a small area may be used to display characters, graphics, or the like. FIG. 106 shows an example in which additional information 30Q is displayed in characters for a container for storing food.

Further, the voice guide by the voice synthesizer 95 may be used to provide advice to supplement the user's operation. In order to make such a change, it is necessary to expand or change the gesture determination data in the gesture mode determination unit 314 (see FIG. 105) and the parameter information in the reference parameter storage unit 317. FIG.

FIG. 107 shows a diagram in which the fingertip FG is moved rightward while touching the first area 30L. It is determined to return to the previous display contents. Therefore, the additional screen 30AD shown in FIG. 106 is erased.

The gesture mode determination unit 314 and the reference parameter storage unit 317 do not detect touch gestures only in the exact right-left direction of the user and in the front-back direction that is perpendicular to the left-right direction. , an angle of 60 degrees) to detect the trajectory of the fingertip FG. Therefore, even if the fingertip is slightly obliquely moved, the gesture mode determination unit 314 can determine that it is a cancel command for the additional screen 30AD. In addition, instead of deleting the additional screen 30AD with the touch gesture of the right method, a method of automatically deleting the display after a certain period of time or a method of immediately deleting the additional screen 30D when the additional screen 30D is touched again is changed. You can

108 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 of the heating cooker of FIG. 100. FIG.
As is clear from FIG. 108, when the integrated controller MC is activated, it first performs an initial self-diagnosis before starting the heating operation to confirm that no abnormality has occurred. Also, the integrated display unit 30 is activated to display standby common information 30N as initial information.

Before either the microwave heating source 9 or the oven heating source 188 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC displays the microwave heating source 189 and the microwave heating source 189 on the display screen 30D. The standby time common information 30N of the oven heating source 188 is displayed. Then, after either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 is selected, it is divided into the first area 30L, the second area 30M and the third area 30R, Displays compound cooking menus and control conditions.

Further, when receiving a command to display the cooperative cooking menu, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, and information indicating the "cooperative cooking menu" is displayed on the first area 30L in the first specific screen 30SP. .

Hereinafter, operations of the input operation unit 40 and the integrated display unit 30 will be described with specific reference to FIG.
When the main power switch 97 is turned off, the integrated display section 30 is not activated, so no information is displayed.
With the main power switch 97 turned on, the integrated control device MC displays the display screen 1 of FIG.

Display screen 1 in FIG. 108 is the same as display screen 1 described in FIG. 36 of the first embodiment.
30B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for guiding to a dedicated recipe posting site via the Internet. 30C is a sentence explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code. The two-dimensional information 30C and the display text are one type of the standby common information 30N.

After display screen 1 is displayed, display screen 2A or 2B may be displayed automatically. Also, display screens 2C to 2E may be displayed. In the display screen 2A, "caution against bumping" is one of warning displays.

One of the features of the fifth embodiment is that three display screens 2C to 2E can be displayed in addition to the display screens 2A and 2B described in the first embodiment.

In this fifth embodiment as well, in the combined cooking (range grill cooking), microwave heating is first performed, and after heating the food to some extent, the pattern is heated by the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, and the reverse order. There are three types of patterns: a pattern in which heating is performed with a heater, and a pattern in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed at the same time.
Further, even in the cooperative cooking menu, a cooking process corresponding to "microwave grill cooking" may be performed.

In general, microwave heating is often performed by putting the food to be cooked in a heat-resistant plastic container or tableware. There is a risk that the container, etc., that has been exposed to heat will burn out due to high heat.

Therefore, in the display screen 2C, in the "microwave grill (RG)" of the compound cooking menu, a warning message 30E is displayed to warn against putting a plastic container inside the heating chamber 113 and heating it. In other words, when executing the control menu "microwave grill", this caution display sentence 30E is one type of "standby common information" 30N.
In addition, since the caution display sentence 30E is displayed in implementing the cooperative cooking menu, it is useful.

The display screen 2D relates to the case where microwaves are introduced into the heating chamber 113 to perform “warm” cooking. This is an example of notifying that selection is not possible. 30E is a caution display sentence 30E indicating that "range automatic" cannot be used.

In the RG control menu of "heat up" (range automatic), the non-contact (infrared) temperature measurement unit 158 detects the temperature of the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113, and the stage when the target temperature is reached to automatically stop the microwave oscillation. Therefore, when the heat from the previous cooking remains and the temperature is high from the beginning, the integrated controller MC prohibits automatic microwave heating.

Therefore, as shown in the display screen 2D of FIG. 108, the user is notified to select the "range manual" control menu. Since the "microwave manual" is performed by setting the microwave heating time, even if the temperature of the food in the heating chamber 113 and the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 are high, the cooking can be performed without any trouble. The display sentence 30E of this display screen 3D is also one type of the "standby common information" 30N.

In the display screen 2E, 30E is a caution display warning that the top plate 15 is at a high temperature and should not be touched carelessly. When an object to be heated N such as a metal pan or a metal plate is placed on the top plate 15 and induction-heated, the temperature of the object to be heated N (not shown) is received and the temperature of the top plate 15 is also increased. Therefore, the high temperature display section 69 is provided immediately behind the heat source display section 68 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. , this display screen 2E is used. In this display screen 2E, the display sentence 30E indicating that the top plate 15 is hot is also one type of the standby common information 30N.

The display screens 2C to 2E may not always be displayed when the main power switch 97 is turned ON.
For example, the following patterns are divided.
(1) When the temperature of the top plate 15 is high, the display screen 1 and the display screen 2E are alternately displayed at intervals of several seconds.
(2) When the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is high, the display screen 1 and the display screen 2D are alternately displayed at intervals of several seconds. Alternatively, the display screen 1 and the display screen 2B are alternately displayed at intervals of several seconds.
(3) When there is performance (history) data of cooking with the menu of "micro range grill" (a type of combined cooking menu) during the previous cooking or the past several times of cooking before turning on the main power switch 97 displays the display screen 1 and the display screen 2C alternately at intervals of several seconds. Also, if there is actual (history) data of cooking in the implementation of the cooperative cooking menu, it is displayed in the same way. The integrated control device MC automatically accumulates the number of executions of the "composite cooking menu" and the "linked cooking menu" during one heat cooking, and stores them in the storage unit MM as the past heat cooking history. . Therefore, after the main power switch 97 is turned on, the heating record of the heating chamber 113 (the number of times of heating, cumulative heating time, etc.) and the record of microwave grill cooking (cumulative microwave heating time, etc.) are checked by referring to the cooking history. ) can be grasped.

When the temperature of the top plate 15 is high and the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is also high, the display screen 1 is first displayed for several seconds, and then the display screens 2D and 2E are displayed at intervals of several seconds. It should be displayed alternately with . Note that the content of the common standby information 30N on each of the display screens 2A to 2E as described above may be announced by voice using the voice synthesizing device 95. FIG.

As is clear from display screens 1 to 2E in FIG. 108, these displays are performed using the entire display screen 30D. In other words, instead of partially displaying in any one of the first area 30L to the third area 30R described above, the three areas 30L to 30R cannot be identified in order to secure as wide a display area as possible. , so that it appears to the user that the entirety of the integrated display section 30 is being displayed.

The integrated controller MC issues a drive command to the controller 105 that controls the microwave heating operation, closes the relay 182, drives the inverter circuit 121A, and starts microwave heating. At the same time, an operation command signal is issued to the driving circuits 177A and 177B of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129, and the two cooling fans 128 and 129 start operating. Further, although not shown, the antenna driving motor 126 is driven to rotate the antenna 125 . As a result, microwaves are introduced into the heating chamber 113 to heat and cook the food.

As is clear from the above description, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 of the upper unit 100 are not operated at all during the microwave cooking. Therefore, the power consumption of the entire heating cooker 1 can be kept low.

Although not shown, it also includes a right operation section 40R and a left operation section 40L, which constitute a part of the input operation section 40. FIG.
The touch-type input key units in the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L are provided with electrodes for detecting changes in capacitance corresponding to individual touch key areas. A large number of components are required, such as LEDs (light emitting diodes) for illuminating the part. Therefore, although not shown, the parts constituting the touch-type input key section are mounted separately on the central operation board 32 and the left operation board 38 . The components of the input key 98 of the power switch 97 are also mounted on the central operation board 32 .

When the user touches the input key 43MS with the desired composite cooking menu displayed in the first area 30L to the third area 30R in the integrated display section 30 provided in the central operation section 40M, the first The conditions displayed in the area 30L to the third area 30R are recognized as fixed information (fixed control menu, fixed value) by the right input control device 23 and sent to the integrated control device MC. After that, control of the complex cooking menu is executed based on this determined information. As described above, the touch gesture determination device 302 (see FIG. 105) provided corresponding to the integrated display section 30 of the central operation section 40M is realized by the right input control device 23 (see FIG. 92).

When the user touches the input key 43MS in a state in which the desired cooperative cooking menu (identification information 330 thereof) is displayed in the first area 30L, the cooperative cooking menu displayed in the first area 30L is controlled. The conditions are recognized as fixed information (fixed control menu, fixed value) in the right input control device 23 and sent to the integrated control device MC. After that, control of the linked cooking menu is executed based on this confirmed information.

109 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification of the display operation of the integrated display unit of the heating cooker of FIG. 100. FIG.
In this modification, the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 is touch-operated to switch from a state in which the name of the compound cooking menu (the specific sentence 30J) is displayed to a state in which the identification information 330 of the linked cooking menu is displayed. It is made to be easy to do.
Conversely, switching from the linked cooking menu to the screen displaying the composite cooking menu can be easily performed.

In this modified example as well, only two touch gesture operations are determined to be effective: a touch gesture operation for moving the user's fingertip FG in the front-rear direction and a touch gesture operation for moving it in the left-right direction. .

By moving the fingertip FG indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 109 in the front-rear direction, the specific sentence 30J displayed in the first area 30L can be switched to a display screen in which the specific sentence 30J is moved forward FR or backward BK. This enables individual selection of desired composite cooking menus and control conditions. For example, in FIG. 109, the second area 30M displays a heating (target) temperature of 180° C. and a heating time of 10 minutes. can.

Further, when the fingertip FG is moved in the direction of the left side LE while touching the first area 30L with the fingertip FG, a cooperative cooking menu display screen 30D (first specific screen 30SP) as shown in the right half of FIG. ).
After that, by moving the fingertip FG to the front FR or the rear BK while touching the identification information 330, the identification information 330 of another cooking object can be displayed one after another on the display screen 30D.
Therefore, if the specific sentence 30J of the desired control menu and the identification information 330 of the linked cooking menu are displayed in the center of the first area 30L and the user gives a command to start cooking, the desired control menu or A cooking process can be executed using the linked cooking menu.

Summary of Embodiment 5.
As is clear from the above description, the built-in composite heating cooker of Embodiment 1 has the following configuration. i.e.
an induction heating source 9 as a first heating means;
a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188, which are second heating means separated from the induction heating source 9;
an integrated controller MC that controls the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189;
and an integrated display unit 30 as display means,
The integrated control device MC has a plurality of linked cooking menus for cooking one food using the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189,
The integrated control device MC determines the relationship between the induction heating source 9 and the "permission condition" such as "not being used before", determines whether or not the cooperative cooking menu can be executed, and performs the first identification. Display the screen 30SP,
On the first specific screen 30SP, at least one of the linked cooking menus is displayed in a selectable manner, and when one linked cooking menu is selected, the induction heating source 9 and the microwave For any one of the heating sources 189, the operation corresponding to the menu other than the linked cooking menu is restricted for a specific period.

Therefore, when the predetermined permission conditions are satisfied, the first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode is displayed, so that the shift to the cooperative cooking mode can be easily proceeded with this display screen. .
In addition, since the first specific screen 30SP itself is not displayed when the permission conditions are not satisfied, there is no fear of misuse or misunderstanding by the user. In other words, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite heating cooker without impairing user operability.

Furthermore, the linked cooking menu is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 so that the cooking items can be identified by different identification information (names of the cooking items) 330,
The integrated control device MC receives a standby stage in which one of the identification information is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 until it is selected by the user, and in this standby stage, receives a command to select one of the identification information, Alternatively, a reception step of receiving an instruction to start cooking in the linked cooking menu and a control step of operating either the induction heating source 9 or the microwave heating source 189 first to perform heat cooking are sequentially performed. Met.
For this reason, the user can select a desired linked cooking menu while the linked cooking menu for the target cooking item is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by the identification information 330, so that the user's operability and reliability are improved. can be expected to improve.

Furthermore, the linked cooking menu is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 so that the cooking items can be identified with different identification information (including the name of the cooking item) 330,
The input operation unit 40 displays the identification information (the name of the food to be cooked) of the cooperative cooking menu on the display screen 30D. It is a configuration in which the heating operation can be started by selecting the menu.
Therefore, it is possible to display and select the identification information 330 of the linked cooking menu centering on the input operation unit 40, so that the centralized input can be performed with one operation unit, and the operability is improved.

Furthermore, in the integrated display section 30, the name of the control mode specifying the compound cooking menu (specific sentence 30J) and the individual control conditions applicable to the control mode are displayed side by side. .
Therefore, the user can easily compare and confirm the control mode (for example, "oven") and the individual control condition (for example, 180°C) by looking at the display screen 30D.

Furthermore, the integrated control device MC sequentially displays the identification information 330 of the linked cooking menu, the name of the control menu in the complex cooking mode (specific sentence 30J), etc., each time the user's fingertip FG is operated in a certain direction. It is a configuration that allows
Therefore, the selection operation by the user can be easily performed, and intuitive switching of the display screen and selection of various menus can be performed by the operation of the fingertip FG, thereby improving the operability.

Furthermore, the third heating means (oven heating source 188) is configured to heat the food in cooperation with the second heating means (microwave heating source 189) when the cooperative cooking menu is executed. is.
Therefore, by using the first to third heating means, it is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wider range of cooking.

Also in this fifth embodiment, the same effects as those described in the first embodiment are obtained for the portions having the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

Embodiment 6.
110 to 114 show a built-in combined heating cooker according to Embodiment 6 of the present invention, and FIG. is a plan view showing the relationship between. 111 is a plan view showing another display operation example of the left operation unit and the left display unit when the cooperative cooking menu is selected in the heating cooker of FIG. 110. FIG. FIG. 112 is a plan view showing still another display operation example of the left operation unit and the left display unit when the cooperative cooking menu is selected. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit of the heating cooker and the display information of the integrated display unit and the left display unit. FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram of a modification showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit of the heating cooker and the display information of the integrated display unit and the left display unit. Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configuration of the first embodiment described in FIGS. 1 to 84 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The cooperative operation unit 40MC of the sixth embodiment has a dedicated cooperative operation unit 40MC for executing the cooperative cooking menu, as described with reference to FIG. 99 of the fourth embodiment.
The cooperative operation unit 40MC has an input key 350 for giving a command to display the identification information 330 in order to select a cooperative cooking menu for the integrated control device MC, and a cooking process icon located near the right side of the input key 350. and an input key 340 for issuing a start command.

FIG. 111 shows that when the cooperative cooking menu is selected, the thermal power level of induction heating can be adjusted when proceeding to the stage of induction heating.

The display screen of the left side display portion 31L of the sixth embodiment is divided into three areas, a first area 31L, a second area 31M, and a third area 31R, like the integrated display portion 30 of the first embodiment. It is divided and displayed.

In the third area 31R, the heating power level of induction heating is displayed in five levels such as "strong" and "slightly strong". This display information has the same character as "information 30 V indicating thermal power level of induction heating" described in FIG. Therefore, the user can select the thermal power level of the induction heating by operating the pair of input keys 43L2. In addition, the default value is set to "standard thermal power".

In the third area 31R, there is a display (331L) indicating that "the heating power can be adjusted with the heating power button", and this heating power button is the input key 43L2 in this scene.

Cooking process information 332L corresponding to the cooking process information (cooking process information section) 332 shown in Embodiment 1 (FIGS. 65 and 66) is displayed in the second area 31M.
43L3 is an input key for selecting the left heating unit 17HL and corresponds to the input key 43L1 of the first embodiment.

43MSL is an input key for starting heat cooking in the left heating unit 17HL, and also serves as an input key for stopping heat cooking. When pressed once, heating and cooking is started, and when pressed during the cooking process, a stop command is issued. In this way, stop and start can be commanded alternately according to the number of times the button is pressed. The input key 43MSL arranged on the left operation unit 40L is not the input key 43MS for starting the cooking process of the linked cooking menu. An input key 43MSR (not shown) is also provided on the right operation unit 40R.

When the input key 43M1 is operated in the cooperative operation unit 40MC arranged in the left-right central part of the main body 110, as shown in FIG. 330 is displayed. In FIG. 111, the identification information 330 is character information "hamburger" indicating the name of one food to be cooked.

The input key for cooking the hamburger steak according to the "linked cooking menu" is not 43MS but input key 340 (see FIG. 110).
The timing at which the individual light emitting portion 27L4 (see FIG. 111) emits light is after the input key 340 is once operated, or after the cooking process is started by the linked cooking menu or other menus.
In this Embodiment 6, the individual cooking light emitting portion 27L4 lights up when the input key 43MSL reaches the stage of accepting the operation input.

After the input key 340 is operated, the individual light emitting unit 27L2 is lit because the input key 43L2 for adjusting the heating power of the left heating unit 17HL can also be input. Note that the left heating unit 17HL is not selected by the input key 43L3 for selection, but is determined as the left heating unit 17HL in the case of "hamburger" cooking of the cooperative cooking menu. Therefore, the individual light-emitting portion 27L3 directly behind the input key 43L3 is not illuminated (because the input function of the input key 43L3 is disabled).

Then, the operation program of the linked cooking menu in this case first operates the induction heating source 9 (the left heating unit 17HL) to perform the cooking step 1, and when the cooking step 1 is completed, the microwave It prescribes that the cooking process 2 is performed with the heating source 189 .
Therefore, just before the cooking process 1 ends (about 30 seconds before), a guide message is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 so that the cooking process 2 can be confirmed in advance. After that, the display of the cooking information, the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 on the left display section 31L ends.

Next, FIG. 112 will be described.
When input key 350 is operated in cooperative operation unit 40MC shown in FIG. 110, integrated control device MC displays identification information 330 of one cooperative cooking menu on left display unit 31L as shown in FIG. indicate.
That is, in Embodiment 1, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display section 30 provided in the center of the main body 110, but in this Embodiment 6, the first specific screen having the same purpose and function as 30SPL is displayed on the left display portion 31L. This point is greatly different from the first to fifth embodiments. The identification information 330 is character information indicating the name or abbreviation of one cooking item.

In FIG. 112, the "target temperature" of the induction heating preheating step is displayed as "180° C." in the third area 31D3. The information of this preheating temperature value 331T is of the same kind as the additional information 331 displayed on the integrated display section 30 when the cooperative cooking menu is selected, as described with reference to FIG. Incidentally, the default value of the preheating temperature for this object to be cooked is set to 180°C.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the control information such as the target temperature and heat power for the specific food to be cooked is displayed in the display section (left display section) 31L dedicated to the induction heating source 9 used in the cooperative cooking menu. , preheating temperature value 331T and cooking process information (cooking process information section) 332L are displayed on the first specific screen 30SP (see FIG. 112).

If one displayed linked cooking menu is different from what the user desires, the next linked cooking menu is not displayed by pressing the pair of input keys 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L. As shown in FIG. 112, the individual light-emitting portion 27L1 is not lit (therefore, the input function of the input key 43L1 is disabled). Therefore, at this point, the input key 43L1 cannot be used for input.

To display another linked cooking menu, the input key 43M1 of the linked operation section 40MC shown in FIG. 110 is operated. Each time the button is pressed, combinations (sets) of information such as the identification information 330 of the linked cooking menu and the preheating temperature value 331T are displayed one after another at the same time. The same information is always displayed by simultaneously displaying the first specific screens 30SP and 30SPL on the integrated display section 30 and the left display section 31L, and by synchronizing the displayed contents (cooperation cooking menu, etc.). In other words, it is the cooperative operation section 40MC of the central operation section 40M that determines the cooperative cooking menu.

Next, FIG. 113 will be described.
FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit 40MC of the heating cooker 1 and the display information of the integrated display unit 30 and the left display unit 30L.

It operates in the order of steps SC1 to SC8. These steps SC1 to SC8 are determined by the control program of the integrated controller MC.
In the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 6, cooking courses are roughly divided into two courses, a course for selecting a "complex cooking menu" and a course for selecting a "cooperation cooking menu".

To select a course for cooking in the compound cooking menu, select the left heating section 17HL or the right heating section 17HR. There are courses of using either or both sources 188 .

A case of selecting and cooking a course of the cooperative cooking menu will be described below.
First, the input key 350 of the cooperative operation unit 40M is pressed to transmit a command signal for selecting a course of the cooperative cooking menu (SC1). Next, upon receiving this signal, the integrated controller MC displays the linked cooking menu on the integrated display section 30 (SC2).

At step SC2, the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30 simultaneously displays the following three pieces of information. You may display in a form like a list.
(1) Multiple linked cooking menus (identification information of multiple items to be cooked)
(2) Cooking process (3) Heat source and heating unit used (in the case of induction heating source 9)

The user operates the input key 43M1 of the cooperative operation unit 40M to select one cooperative cooking menu (SC3).
Next, the display unit of the heat source used for cooking the selected specific linked cooking menu is activated. In the sixth embodiment, the operation program of the cooperative cooking menu defines the following two types of sequences according to the food to be cooked, as in the first embodiment.
(1) A pattern in which the induction heating source 9 is first used and subsequent heating is performed by the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating means 188 .
(2) A pattern in which at least one or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating means 188 are used first, and subsequent heating is performed by the induction heating source 9 .

The example of FIG. 113 is a pattern (of the second cooperative cooking menu) in which the induction heating source 9 is used first.
When the input key 43M1 of the cooperative operation unit 40M is operated to select the cooperative cooking menu for one cooking item, the integrated control device MC activates the dedicated display unit 31L of the left heating unit 17HL (SC4). . If the left heating unit 17HL has already been used for another cooking, the user is notified of the reason why the cooperative cooking is not possible through the integrated display unit 30 in this selection step (SC3) (voice The synthesizing device 95 also gives a similar notification). When the right heating unit 17HR is not being used, it may be automatically switched to use the right heating unit 17HR and notified to the user, or only such a recommendation may be made.

At the stage of step SC3, the user knows that the left heating unit 17HL will perform the first cooking process. The user is guided by the display section 31L to place a cooking utensil such as a dedicated frying pan or pot on which the object to be heated N is placed.
Therefore, the user operates the input key 340 of the cooperative operation unit 40M after placing the food to be cooked on the left heating unit 17HL (SC5). This instructs the start of the cooking process of one linked cooking menu (SC5).

The integrated display section 30 displays that the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking menu has started. Further, after that, the left side display section 31L also displays necessary displays for the cooking process 1 (SC6).

The first specific display screen 30SP of the integrated display section 30 continues for a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds), and then returns to a predetermined initial screen. However, in the initial screen, a display such as "Currently cooking in cooperation" is added. For example, the display contents are such as display screen 1 and display screens 2A to 2D described in the fourth embodiment (FIG. 108).

On the other hand, the left display portion 31L displays that the cooking process 1 (first cooking process) of the linked cooking menu has started.
In addition, the cooking process 2 after the cooking process 1 is also displayed. At this time, the control conditions for the cooking process 1 are displayed. For example, the thermal power value of induction heating is displayed as "1500 W", or the thermal power level is displayed as "thermal power 7".

Furthermore, if there are control conditions that can be changed by the user, they are displayed. For example, a message such as "The heat power can be adjusted with the heat power key" is displayed (SC7).

Depending on the linked cooking menu, the end of the cooking process 1 depends on the user's arbitrary timing, the temperature rise of the object to be heated N (not shown), and the elapsed time from the start of the cooking process 1. , a pattern determined by the integrated controller MC.
In the latter case, at the stage of step SC7, an indication of the required time for the cooking process 1 or the remaining time until the end of the cooking process 1 may be displayed. At that time, a display prompting the user to prepare for the next cooking step 2 may be added.

As is clear from the above description, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 6 realizes the fifth aspect of the invention by the following configuration. i.e.
a main body 110 containing a top plate 15 and a heating chamber 113;
an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be heated placed on the top plate 15;
a microwave heating source (second heating means) 189 for heating the food placed inside the heating chamber 113;
an integrated display unit 30;
a left display portion 31L of the induction heating source 9;
a right display portion 31R of the induction heating source 9;
an integrated control device MC that controls the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the integrated display unit 30, and the left display unit 31L;
a central operation unit 40M for giving a command from a user to the integrated control device MC;
A left operation unit 40L and a right operation unit 40R,
The central operation unit 40M has an input key 350 for selecting a linked cooking menu and an input key 340 for starting a heating operation according to the linked cooking menu,
The left operation unit 40L is an operation unit dedicated to the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source (first heating means) 9,
The right operation unit 40R is an operation unit dedicated to the right heating unit 17HR of the induction heating source (first heating means) 9,
The central operation unit 40M has a second operation unit 40M2 for the microwave heating source and a cooperative operation unit 40MC for the cooperative cooking menu,
The cooperative operation unit 40MC has a function of displaying the cooperative cooking menu on the integrated display unit 30 (step SC1) and a function of causing the integrated control device MC to select one of the displayed cooperative cooking menus (step SC1). having step SC2) and a function (step SC3) for starting the linked cooking menu,
After the main power is turned on, the integrated control device MC determines the relationship with the "permission condition", determines whether or not the cooperative cooking menu can be executed, and displays the first specific screen 30SP,
On the first specific screen 30SP, at least one of the linked cooking menus is displayed in a selectable manner, one linked cooking menu is selected by the input key 350, and then cooking is started by the input key 340. is given, for either the induction heating source 9 or the microwave heating source 189 to be used first, the operation corresponding to the menu other than the linked cooking menu is restricted for a specific period. rice field.
Further, the integrated control device MC displays display information (first specified It was configured to have a function of displaying on the screen 30SP).

As a result, the role of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is clarified from the stage of determining the cooperative cooking menu to the stage of starting cooking. The left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 30L are caused to perform all related displays and the like.
For this reason, similarly to the first embodiment, the effect of being able to provide the heating cooker 1 that is easy to use can be obtained.

If the content and display form of the linked cooking menu displayed in the integrated display section 30 and the display section 31L dedicated to the left heating section 17HL are the same, there is no concern of misleading the user, but they do not necessarily have to be the same. . This is because there may be a case where the integrated display section 30 and the display section 31L have different display areas, different physical display principles, and the like.

Note that the function of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is changed to display the cooperative cooking menu on the integrated display unit 30 (step SC1), and one of the displayed cooperative cooking menus is displayed by the integrated control device. a function (step SC2) for MC to select,
After step SC2, the left operation unit 40L may have a function (step SC3) for starting the cooperative cooking menu. In other words, from the stage when the object to be heated N (not shown) is placed on the left heating unit 17HL, the user can decide to start cooking, monitor the progress of the cooking process, stop cooking, etc. at a position facing the left operation unit 40L. I can concentrate.

FIG. 114 specifically shows such a proposed change.
FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram of a modification showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit 40MC of the heating cooker 1 and the display information of the integrated display unit 30 and the left display unit 30L.

As shown in FIG. 91, the left operation unit 17HL may be put in charge from the step of starting the cooperative cooking menu (step SC5). Depending on the cooperative cooking menu, the right heating unit 17HR may be specified in the cooking process 1, but in that case, the right operation unit 40R is used to issue a command to start heating. Heating is started by an input key 43MSR provided on the right operation section 40L. In the case of the left operation unit 40L, as shown in FIG. 112, the input key 43MSL is used to issue a command to start the cooking process 1. FIG.

In this way, when the object to be heated N is placed on the left heating section 17HL, the user's body should be slightly left of the left and right center of the main body 110, that is, in front of the left operation section 40L. Therefore, the linked cooking menu can be started by operating the left operation unit 40L as it is, and there is an advantage that the user can operate from the position facing the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L from the start of the cooking process 1.

Summary of Embodiment 6.
As is clear from the above description, the heating cooker of Embodiment 6 has the following configuration. i.e.
an induction heating source 9 as a first heating means;
a microwave heating source 189 which is a second heating means located away from the induction heating source 9;
an integrated controller MC that controls the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189;
and a left display portion 31L as display means,
The integrated control device MC has as many (multiple) linked cooking menus as the number of multiple types of cooking items for cooking one cooking item using the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189,
The integrated control device MC displays one of the linked cooking menus on the left side display section 31L by a "first specific screen" 30SPL, and issues an instruction to start cooking on the displayed one linked cooking menu. When receiving (from the cooperative operation unit 40MC of the central operation unit 40M), for either the induction heating source 9 or the microwave heating source 189 to be used first, a menu other than the cooperative cooking menu is set for a specific period. It was a configuration that restricted the operation corresponding to

Because of this configuration, when the predetermined permission conditions are satisfied, the first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the right display portion 31R or the left display portion 31L of the induction heating source 9 to be used first. Since it is displayed, the transition to the cooperative cooking mode can be easily proceeded with this display screen.
Further, when the permission conditions are not satisfied, the first specific screen 30SP itself is not displayed on the right display section 31R or the left display section 31L, so there is no fear of misuse or misunderstanding by the user. In other words, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite heating cooker without impairing user operability.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, when cooperative cooking is selected in the cooperative operation unit 40MC located in the left-right center of the top plate 15, the heating source ( In the left heating unit 17HL) dedicated left display unit 31L and left operation unit 40L, it is possible to confirm subsequent cooking processes, input control conditions (for example, thermal power), and control the progress of the cooking process. Therefore, the user can concentrate on confirmation and operation in front of the left operation unit 30L.

Furthermore, the heating cooker of Embodiment 6 had the following features. i.e.
a main body 110 containing a top plate 15 and a heating chamber 113;
an induction heating source 9 for heating an object to be heated placed on the top plate 15;
a microwave heating source 189 for heating the food placed inside the heating chamber 113;
an integrated display unit 30;
a left side display portion 31L of the induction heating source 9;
an integrated control device MC that controls the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the integrated display unit 30, and the left display unit 31L;
A central operation unit 40M for giving commands from a user to the integrated control device MC, a left operation unit 40L and a right operation unit 40R,
The left operation unit 40L is an operation unit dedicated to the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9,
The central operation unit 40M has a second operation unit 40M2 for the microwave heating source and a cooperative operation unit 40MC for the cooperative cooking menu,
The cooperative operation unit 40MC has a function of displaying the cooperative cooking menu on the integrated display unit 30 (step SC1) and a function of causing the integrated control device MC to select one of the displayed cooperative cooking menus (step SC1). It has a step SC2) and a function to start the cooperative cooking menu (step SC3).
Further, the integrated control device MC displays the display information on the linked cooking menu and the cooking process information on the dedicated display unit 31L of the heating source (left heating unit 17HL) used in the cooking process 1 for the linked cooking menu to be executed. The configuration was provided with a function of displaying the "first specific screen" 30SPL on which is displayed.

As a result, the role of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is clarified from the stage of determining the cooperative cooking menu to the stage of starting cooking. All related displays and the like are executed on the left operation unit 40L and the first specific screen 30SPL (displayed on the left display unit 30L).
For this reason, similarly to the first embodiment, the effect of being able to provide the heating cooker 1 that is easy to use can be obtained.

Embodiment 7.
115 to 117 show a heating cooker according to Embodiment 7 of the present invention, and FIG. 115 is a front portion for explaining the layout of the input operation section and various display sections of the heating cooker. is a plan view of the. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the execution operation of the cooperative cooking menu of the heating cooker in FIG. 115 and the display information of various display units. 117 is a plan view of the front portion of the heating cooker of FIG. 115 for explaining the arrangement of the central operation section and various display sections. FIG. The same reference numerals are given to the same or corresponding configurations as those of the heating cookers described in Embodiments 1 to 6, and overlapping descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

The heating cooker 1 according to Embodiment 7 has a central display section 370, a left display section 31L, and a right display section 31R arranged on the upper surface of the main body 110. As shown in FIG.
The central display portion 370 is arranged at the position of the integrated display portion 30 of the first embodiment, and the left side display portion 31L of the seventh embodiment is arranged at the positions of the left side display portion 31L and the right side display portion 31R of the first embodiment. and a right display section 31R. The central display section 370, the left display section 31L, and the right display section 31R have liquid crystal display screens of the same size.

It is the right display section 31R that displays the right heating section 17HR. Further, it is the left display section 31L that displays the left heating section. However, in this Embodiment 7, the cooperative cooking menu may be displayed on the central display section 370, the left display section 31L, and the right display section 31R. This will be explained later.

43R5 is an input key for calling up the IH control menu and displaying it on the right display section 31R when the right heating section 17HR is used for cooking according to the IH control menu.
43L5 is an input key for calling up the IH control menu and displaying it on the left display section 31L when the left heating section 17HL is used for cooking according to the IH control menu.

43MS is an input key for commanding the start of cooking when cooking a compound cooking menu using a microwave heating source 189 (not shown) and an oven heating source 188 (not shown). 43MT is an input key for stopping the cooking operation of the composite cooking menu.

44R is a touch input key for selecting a cooking menu for a single cooking mode using the induction heating source 9. FIG. One can be selected from a plurality of IH control menus each time a touch operation is performed. For example, when the identification information 330 (not shown) such as the name of the food to be cooked is displayed at a predetermined position in the display screen of the right display section 31R, the right heating section 17HR induces the identification information 330 by the right heating section 17HR after a certain period of time. Heating is started.

43R1 is an input key for commanding the start and stop of the heating operation of the right heating unit 17HR.
43L1 is an input key for commanding start and stop of the heating operation of the left heating unit 17HL.
44L is a touch-type input key for selecting a cooking menu of a single cooking mode using the induction heating source 9; One can be selected from a plurality of menus each time a touch operation is performed. When the identification information 330 (not shown) such as the name of the food to be cooked is displayed at a predetermined position in the display screen of the left display section 31L, induction heating is started by the left heating section 17HL after a certain period of time. be started.

The central display unit 370 also serves as two display units for the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 for the heating chamber 113 arranged in the left-right central portion of the main body 110, and is also called a shared display unit. .

The central display section (common display section) 370 does not necessarily display the cooperative cooking menu unlike the integrated display section 30 of the first to sixth embodiments.
In this Embodiment 7, the input keys (operation buttons) for selecting the course of the cooperative cooking menu are not arranged in the left-right central portion of the input operation section 40 as in Embodiment 6 (FIG. 110).
As described above, the input keys 43R5 and 43L5 for selecting the course of the cooperative cooking menu are arranged on the left and right ends of the input operation section 40 one by one.

Since the configuration is as described above, the operation will be described below.
115 and 116, when the operation button 98 of the main power switch is pressed to close the main power switch 97 (not shown) and then the input key 43R5 is pressed, a specific (one) default setting is entered. A suitable initial heat source is determined for executing the cooperative cooking menu (eg, "hamburger"). Then, the linked cooking menu is displayed on the display section corresponding to the determined heat source.

For example, assume that the cooperative cooking menu M1 and the cooperative cooking menu M2 are stored in the integrated controller MC.
Here, for the cooperative cooking menu M1 (for example, hamburger), the left heating unit 17HL is in charge of the cooking process 1, and the microwave heating source 189 is in charge of the cooking process 2.
On the other hand, for the cooperative cooking menu M2 (for example, paella), the right heating unit 17HR is in charge of the cooking process 1, and the microwave heat source 189 and the oven heat source 188 are in charge of the cooking process 2. Integrated controller MC (not shown) has such an operation program.

A case where the input key 43RL on the left side is pressed in the above situation (step SC1) will be described. 116 indicates the portion where the input keys 43R5 and 43L5 are arranged in FIG. In other words, in the seventh embodiment, there are two cooperative operation units 40MC on the left and right.

First, the left heating unit 17HL specified in the cooking process 1 of the linked cooking menu M1 (for example, hamburger) is determined by the integrated controller MC.
The integrated controller MC determines whether the left heating section 17HL is being used and whether the right heating section 17HR is being used. This corresponds to the judgment as to whether or not the "permission condition 2" described in the embodiment is satisfied. At the same time, it is also determined whether or not "permission condition 1" is satisfied.

Next, the integrated control device MC confirms that the left heating unit 17HL is not in use, and confirms that the "permission condition 1" and the "permission condition 2" are satisfied. , the central display portion 370 and the left side display portion 31L corresponding to the left heating portion 17HL are caused to display the first specific screen 30SPL.

That is, the integrated control device MC causes the display of the "first specific screen" 30SPL including information such as step SC2 in FIG. The first specific screen 30SPL will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 117 below.

At step SC2, the cooking process information 332 (see FIG. 117) of the linked cooking menu M1 is displayed. The cooking process information 332 referred to here is information in the form of characters, graphics, or both.

Furthermore, at step SC2, the name of the heat source used is displayed. In this example, characters and graphics are displayed to indicate that they are the "left IH heating section" and the "microwave heating source".

As indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 116, the central display section 370 also displays the information of step SC2 at the same time. That is, not only the left side display section 31L in charge of the first cooking process 1, but also the central display section 370 that displays the operation of the microwave heating source 189 displays the information regarding the linked cooking menu M1 (for example, hamburger) at step SC2. is displayed as shown. On the other hand, the right side display section 31R does not display any information such as that in step SC2.

At the stage of step SC2, the user sees that the two display sections, ie, the left display section 31L and the central display section 370, are currently being displayed. , the left heating section 17HL and the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 in combination.

At this time, since the input key 43RL on the left side is pressed first (step SC1), the user expects that the left heating unit 17HL can cook. Heat cooking is not necessarily permitted in the left heating unit 17HL.

At this step SC2, when the input key 43L5 is pressed one more time, the linked cooking menu M2 (for example, paella) is displayed on the right display section 31R and the central display section 370. be. In other words, in the linked cooking menu M2, the cooking process 1 is performed by the right heating unit 17HR, and the cooking process 2 is performed by one or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. can be recognized by

After that, when the input key 43L5 is pressed one more time, the right heating section 17HR is in charge of the cooking process 1 in the linked cooking menu M1 (for example, hamburger), and the cooking process 2 is microwave heating. Since the source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are in charge, the linked cooking menu M1 is displayed on the left display section 31L and the central display section 370 this time. Thereafter, each time the input key 43R5 is pressed, the menus are displayed in the order described above (alternately between the linked cooking menus M1 and M2).
Note that the linked cooking menus M1 (for example, hamburger) and M2 (for example, paella) described above are just the default "first displayed" cooking items, and only these two items can be cooked. It doesn't mean

On the other hand, when the input key 43R5 on the right side is pressed, the information contents of the identification information of the linked cooking menu and the information of step SC2 differ depending on the difference between the linked cooking menus M1 and M2 as described above. However, if the same cooperative cooking menu (item to be cooked) is set so that it can be cooked by both the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL, the right input key 43R5 is operated and the left input key 43L5 is operated. Even if you operate it, the displayed contents will not change.

After that, even if either the left operation unit 40L corresponding to the left display unit 30L or the central operation unit 40M corresponding to the central display unit 370 is not operated, a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) after the stage of step SC2. ), the cooperative cooking mode is automatically started.

Step SC3 in FIG. 116 is automatically performed 15 seconds after step SC2. In other words, after 15 seconds have passed, the cooperative cooking menu is finalized. Input keys 43RS and 43LS (dedicated to the left and right heating units) as shown in FIG. 98 may be provided so that the user can directly instruct the start of the cooking process 1. FIG.

Next, as shown in step SC4 of FIG. 116, the left side display section 31L displays that the instruction to start the cooking process 1 of the linked cooking menu M1 has been received, and further displays that the cooking process 1 has started (step SC4). SC5). Before starting such induction heating cooking, the IH control unit 90 (not shown) detects placement of an object to be heated such as a metal pan, and self-checks that there is no abnormality. Also, the start of the heating operation may be notified from the voice synthesizer 95 (not shown).

Then, as in step SC6 of FIG. 116, the identification information of the linked cooking menu M1 (for example, the information of the name of the food to be cooked "hamburger") is displayed on the left display section 31L.
Information 332 indicating this cooking process 1 and the next cooking process 2 is also displayed.
Further, the control conditions applied to the cooking process 1 (for example, thermal power value, thermal power level, etc.) are displayed, and in addition, it is displayed that the control conditions can be changed by the user using the left operation unit 40L. .

On the other hand, in the central display section 370, although step SC2 is displayed for a certain period of time (for example, 15 seconds), the display disappears automatically thereafter (the entire display screen does not disappear).
Shortly before the end of the cooking process 1, the central display unit 370 automatically displays the information of the cooking process 2 after step SC6 shown in FIG.

When changing the linked cooking menu M1 (for example, hamburger) displayed in step SC2 of FIG. 116 to another linked cooking menu, the user needs to press the input key 43M1 (step SC3).

If the cooperative cooking menu M1 is selected in step SC3 of FIG. 116 (or the default display "Hamburger" remains), the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is pressed to immediately start the cooperative cooking mode. There is a need. When 15 seconds elapse without pressing the input key 43MS, the cooperative cooking menu at the stage of step SC3 is confirmed, and transition to the cooperative cooking mode is started. Thereafter, the operation is left to the operation of the left operation section 40L.

As can be seen from the above description, even if the right operation unit 40R is operated instead of the left operation unit 40L, selection of the cooperative cooking menu M1 and input of operation start/stop cannot be performed.

After a certain period of time from the display of step SC5 shown in FIG. 116, the display of the "first specific screen" 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode related to the cooperative cooking menu M1 on the central display section 370 disappears automatically. Therefore, the central display section 370 does not display steps SC3 to SC5 thereafter.
On the other hand, the display of the first specific screen 30SPL on the left side display portion 31L is continued.

Next, FIG. 117 will be described.
FIG. 117 shows the state of the central display section 370 and the left display section 31L at the stage of step SC2 described in FIG. Also shown are the operations of the left operating section 40L and the central operating section 40M.

As shown in FIG. 117, the first specific screen 30SPL is displayed on the left display portion 31L. As for the identification information 330, only the default display of "hamburger" is displayed. In addition, cooking process information (cooking process information section) 332 indicating the overall cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode is also displayed. From the cooking process information 332 and the additional information 331, it can be seen that it is before the "IH preheating" process.

Meanwhile, the central display unit 370 also displays a first specific screen 30SP similar to the first specific screen 30SPL.
The first specific screen 30SP of the central display portion 370 is slightly different from the first specific screen 30SPL. One of the differences is identification information 330 as shown in FIG.
In addition to the identification information 330 indicating the default display of "hamburger", identification information 330A and 330B such as other candidates such as "gratin" and "roast beef" are also displayed.

The second difference is the additional information 331. As shown in FIG. 117, after pressing the start button (input key 43MS), it is left to the operation of the left operation unit 40L.

The third difference is cooking process information (cooking process information section) 332 .
The fourth difference is the right heating section selection mark 334R and the left heating section selection mark 334L.
As shown in FIG. 117, when the input key 43L5 is first operated and the use of the left heating unit 17HL is permitted by the permission condition 2, the left heating unit 17HL is called "left" as shown in FIG. A heating section selection mark 334L is displayed.

If the input key 43L5 is operated first and the use of the left heating unit 17HL is not permitted and the use of the right heating unit 17HR is permitted by the determination of the permission condition 2, the first specification in FIG. On the screen 30SP, only the right heating section selection mark 334R of "Right" is displayed.

References T1 to T5 shown in FIG. 117 indicate the order in which the user's fingertip FG touches.
The first T1 indicates that the input key 43M1 is pressed to select the cooperative cooking menu.

The next T2 indicates that the input key 43MS is touched in order to give a command to start the cooperative cooking menu.
The next T3 indicates that the input key 43L1 is touched on the left operation unit 40L in order to give a command to actually start the linked cooking menu. As described above, even if the input key 43L1 is not touched, induction heating is automatically started at a certain thermal power (for example, "medium heat level") after a certain period of time has elapsed.

The next T4 indicates that the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 for changing (adjusting) the heating power during induction heating in the cooking process 1 of the linked cooking menu are touched on the left operation unit 40L.
T5 indicates that the input key 43L1 is touched in order to stop the induction heating of the cooking process 1 of the linked cooking menu on the left operation unit 40L. The cooperative cooking mode is not canceled even if the input key 43L1 is touched. This point is the same as the first embodiment.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the cooperative cooking menu is displayed on any one of the right display section 31R, the left display section 31L, and the central display section 370. FIG. Which display part first displays the linked cooking menu is determined by the operating program of the linked cooking menu. However, in the seventh embodiment, the linked cooking menu that is likely to be executed relatively frequently by the user may be set as the default setting menu so that the display section suitable for the linked cooking menu is preferentially displayed.

For example, assuming that there are 10 cooperative cooking menus M1 to M10, the cooperative cooking menu that is relatively frequently selected by the user is M1.
Then, if a function of "menu display by usage frequency" is added to the "function setting" explained in the first embodiment, the input keys 43L5 and 43R5 are pressed according to the accumulated number of times (frequency) used for cooking. M1 can be the cooperative cooking menu displayed first.
Alternatively, a function of "priority menu setting" may be directly added to enable manual setting so that the linked cooking menu M1 is always displayed first.

The linked cooking menu to be displayed may be set by other methods, but at the stage of step SC2, all the display sections are always displayed, and then the display section appropriate for the (specific) linked cooking menu is determined. It is convenient to make a control program called

Summary of Embodiment 7.
As is clear from the above description, the heating cooker of Embodiment 7 has the following configuration. i.e.
an induction heating source 9 as a first heating means;
a microwave heating source 189 which is a second heating means located away from the induction heating source 9;
an integrated controller MC that controls the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189;
a central display unit 370 that displays information about the microwave heating source 189;
A left display section 31L, which is a display means for the induction heating source 9,
The integrated control device MC has as many (multiple) linked cooking menus as the number of multiple types of cooking items for cooking one cooking item using the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189,
The integrated control device MC is configured to perform the following operations when receiving a command to display the cooperative cooking menu by the input key 43R5 or 43L5.
(1) The relationship between the induction heating source 9 and "permission conditions" such as "not being used before" is determined. Then, it determines whether or not the cooperative cooking menu can be executed.
(2) When it is determined that the cooperative cooking menu can be executed, the central display section 370 displays the first specific screen 30SP.
(3) Also, the first specific screen 30SPL is displayed on the left display portion 31L.
(4) On the first specific screen 30SP of the central display section 370, at least one of the linked cooking menus is displayed in a selectable manner. For that purpose, the input function of the corresponding input key 43M1 is enabled.
(5) When one cooperative cooking menu is selected, the permitted induction heating mode of either the left heating unit 17HL or the right heating unit 17HR is entered.
(6) For either the induction heating source 9 or the microwave heating source 189 to be used first, the operation corresponding to menus other than the linked cooking menu is restricted for a specific period.

Therefore, when the predetermined permission conditions are satisfied, the first specific screen 30SP and the first specific screen 30SPL for the cooperative cooking mode are displayed. The shift to the cooperative cooking mode by the left heating unit 17HL can be easily advanced.
Moreover, since the first specific screens 30SP and 30SPL themselves are not displayed when the permission conditions are not satisfied, there is no fear of misuse or misunderstanding by the user. In other words, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite heating cooker without impairing user operability.

Further, in Embodiment 7, when a cooperative cooking menu is selected by the input keys 43R5 and 43L5 arranged in the cooperative operation sections 40MC located on the right front portion and the left front portion of the top plate 15, the operation program of the cooperative cooking menu is executed. According to the content of the linked cooking menu and the cooking process can be checked by the user.

Further, thereafter, confirmation of the progress of the cooking process 1, input of control conditions (for example, thermal power), and progress of the cooking process can be confirmed on the first specific screen 30SPL of the left display section 31L.
Furthermore, the left operation unit 40L can be used to input control conditions and stop the heating operation. Therefore, the user can concentrate on various checks and operations in front of the left operation unit 17HL.

Furthermore, the heating cooker of Embodiment 7 has the following characteristic configuration. i.e.
a main body 110 containing a top plate 15 and a heating chamber 113;
an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be heated placed on the top plate 15;
a microwave heating source (second heating means) 189 for heating the food placed inside the heating chamber 113;
a left display portion 31L and a right display portion 31R of the induction heating source (first heating means) 9;
a display unit 370 of the microwave heating source 189;
an integrated control device MC that controls the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the left display section 31L, and the right display section 31R, respectively;
an input operation unit 40 for giving a command from a user to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 includes a first operation unit (left operation unit 40L, right operation unit 40R) for the induction heating source 9 and a second operation unit (central operation unit) for the microwave heating source 189. 40M, and a cooperative operation unit 40MC for a cooperative cooking menu using the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189,
The cooperative operation unit 40MC has a function of displaying the cooperative cooking menu on the display unit 370 (using the input keys 44L and 44R), a function of causing the integrated control device MC to execute the displayed one cooperative cooking menu, and It is a configuration with
Therefore, the user can operate the cooperative operation unit 40MC to perform heat cooking using both the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 in sequence, and it is expected that the operability for the user will be improved.

Further, in Embodiment 7, all the linked cooking menus can be displayed by operating any of the linked operation units 40MC (input keys 43R5 and 43L5) arranged at the right front part and the left front part of the top plate 15. can be selectively displayed.
Moreover, since the linked cooking menu is always displayed in the display unit of the heat source used in the selected and displayed linked cooking menu (used in the first cooking step 1), the content of the linked cooking menu and cooking can be controlled. There is an advantage that the user can easily check the process.

Furthermore, the heating cooker of Embodiment 7 has the following characteristic configuration. i.e.
a main body 110 containing a top plate 15 and a heating chamber 113;
an induction heating source 9 for heating an object to be heated placed on the top plate 15;
a microwave heating source 189 for heating the food placed inside the heating chamber 113;
a central display portion 370, a left display portion 31L and a right display portion 31R;
a left side display portion 31L of the induction heating source 9;
an integrated control device MC that controls the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the central display section 370, the left display section 31L, and the right display section 31R;
A central operation unit 40M for giving commands from a user to the integrated control device MC, a left operation unit 40L and a right operation unit 40R,
The left operation unit 40L is an operation unit dedicated to the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9,
The central operation unit 40M also serves as an operation unit for a microwave heating source,
Furthermore, the main body 110 has a cooperative operation unit 40MC for a cooperative cooking menu,
The cooperative operation unit 40MC has a function of displaying the cooperative cooking menu on the central display unit 370, the left display unit 31L and the right display unit 31R (step SC1),
When the cooperative cooking menu is displayed on any one of the central display section 370, the left display section 31L, or the right display section 31R, the left operating section 40L, the right operating section 40L, and the right operating section 40L corresponding to the display section displaying the cooperative cooking menu are displayed. A function of causing the integrated control device MC to select the linked cooking menu displayed on either the operation unit 40R or the central operation unit 40M (step SC2); a function of starting the linked cooking menu (step SC3); and

As a result, the role of the cooperative operation unit 40MC (input keys 43R5, 43L5) is clarified up to the stage of displaying (identification information of) one cooperative cooking menu, once the cooperative cooking menu is displayed, and the cooperative cooking mode is entered. When it is decided to shift (step SC3), the start and end of the cooking process, the change of the control conditions, the confirmation, etc. by the cooperative control menu are performed by the relevant operation unit for the heat source (for example, the left operation unit 40L) and the relevant operation unit. It has been made possible to execute it in the display section for the heat source (for example, the left display section 31L).
For this reason, similarly to the first embodiment, the effect of being able to provide the heating cooker 1 that is easy to use can be obtained.

Embodiment 8.
118 is a plan view of the front portion of the upper surface of the main body for explaining the arrangement of the input operation section and various display sections of the heating cooker according to Embodiment 8 of the present invention. FIG. 119 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated control device before shifting to the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 118. FIG. 120 is a flowchart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device up to transition to the linked cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 118. FIG. 121 is a flow chart 2 showing the control operation of the integrated control device up to transition to the linked cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 118. FIG. 122 is a plan view of the front part for explaining the arrangement of the input operation section and various display sections showing the modified example of the heating cooker of FIG. 118. FIG. The same reference numerals are given to the same or corresponding configurations as those of the heating cookers described in Embodiments 1 to 7, and overlapping descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

In FIG. 118, in order to explain the layout of the input operation unit 40 and various display units, a diagram showing the transition of the display contents of the left display unit 31L is added with a dashed line to the plan view of the front portion.
FIG. 118 shows the state immediately before starting the cooperative cooking mode.

This FIG. 118 shows the case where the left heating unit 17HL preheats first.
The target temperature for preheating is 180.degree. C., and when the input key 43MS is pressed to start the preheating operation, the content displayed on the left display section 31L changes from "180.degree. C. preheating started" to "180.degree. C. preheating".

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 118, when the preheating process is finished and the first cooking process 1 is started in the left heating unit 17HL, the display content of the left display unit 31L changes to "Coordinated cooking (process 1)". do.
The thermal power display units 67L and 67R (not shown) are composed of a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) installed in the spaces below the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L. The position where the light is emitted changes according to the firepower level.
In FIG. 118, the light-emitting display portion 67L surrounded by a dashed circle indicates the current heating power, and is blinking during the period until preheating is completed.

Next, input operations will be described.
When the input key 43MC is first operated as shown in FIG. 118 and the use of the left heating section 17HL is permitted by the judgment of permission condition 2, a left heating section selection mark 334L labeled "left" is displayed as shown in FIG. is displayed.

If the input key 43M2 is pressed, the right heating section 17HR can also be selected. However, when the right heating section 17HR has already been used for another cooking, the right heating section selection mark 334R "Right" is not displayed (only the left heating section selection mark 334L is displayed).

When the use of the left heating unit 17HL is not permitted and the use of the right heating unit 17HR is permitted by the determination of permission condition 2, the right heating unit selection of "right" is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP of FIG. Only mark 334R is displayed.

References T1 to T5 shown in FIG. 118 indicate the order in which the user's fingertip FG touches.
The first T1 indicates that the input key 43MC is pressed to select a cooperative cooking mode based on a specific cooperative cooking menu (for example, "hamburger").
The next T2 indicates that the input key 43M1 is pressed to select the cooperative cooking menu.

The next T3 indicates that the input key 43MS is touched in order to give a command to start the cooperative cooking menu.
The next T4 indicates that the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 for changing (adjusting) the heating power during induction heating in the cooking process 1 of the linked cooking menu are touched on the left operation unit 40L.

T5 indicates that the input key 43L1 is touched in order to stop the induction heating of the cooking process 1 of the linked cooking menu on the left operation unit 40L. The cooperative cooking mode is not canceled even if the input key 43L1 is touched. This point is the same as the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, after the input key 43MS is pressed on the central operation unit 40M to shift to the cooperative cooking mode, the input key 43L1 is touched to issue a command to actually start the heating operation in the cooperative cooking menu.
However, in this eighth embodiment, such an operation is eliminated.
Depending on the type of cooperative cooking menu, the operation T4 "heat power adjustment" may not be necessary. This is the case where the thermal power value for the cooking process 1 is set in advance in the operation program of the integrated control device MC.

Next, FIG. 119 will be described.
119 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 52 of Embodiment 1. FIG. The difference from FIG. 52 is that a step STR2X for determining whether permission condition 3 is satisfied is added.

The "permission condition 3" shown in FIG. 119 defines that "the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is equal to or lower than the threshold".
As described in FIG. 52 of Embodiment 1, in the “warm” (automatic range) of the range grill cooking (combined cooking) menu, the non-contact (infrared) temperature measurement unit 158 measures the temperature of the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113. The temperature and the wall surface temperature of the heating chamber 113 are detected, and when the "target temperature" is reached, the microwave oscillation is automatically stopped. Therefore, when the heat from the previous cooking remains inside the heating chamber 113 and the temperature is high from the beginning, the integrated controller MC prohibits automatic microwave heating.

The "permission condition 3" in the eighth embodiment defines the case where the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is lower than the reference temperature (for example, 70° C.).
At step STR2X in FIG. 119, it is determined whether or not the temperature of the heating chamber 113 satisfies the threshold temperature (for example, less than 70° C.). If permission condition 3 is not satisfied at step STR2X, the integrated display section 30 displays that the cooperative cooking mode cannot be entered (STR12). In addition to this, it is more certain if the speech synthesizer 95 notifies by voice.

Thus, in the eighth embodiment, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 for the first time when the permission condition 3 is satisfied in addition to the permission condition 1 and the permission condition 2. FIG.
In this way, it is possible to inform the user that the heating source to be used first (in this case, the microwave heating source 189) cannot be used at the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking menu.

At the stage of step STR12, when displaying or notifying that the temperature in the heating chamber 113 is too high to start cooking, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 can be quickly lowered by opening the door 114. The information may be provided by the integrated display unit 30 or the speech synthesizer 95. FIG.

If the determination in step STR2X is "Yes", the process proceeds to step RS1 in FIG.
Next, FIG. 120 will be described.
Step RS1 in FIG. 120 corresponds to step STR3 shown in FIG. 52 of the first embodiment.

In the cooperative cooking menu of the heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. 120, the induction heating source 9 is driven first, and then the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven (first cooperative cooking menu). ) (see FIG. 45).
A second cooperative cooking menu in the reverse order is also provided.

The steps in FIG. 120 are common to both the first cooperative cooking menu and the second cooperative cooking menu.
In step RS1, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display section 30 to display information on the cooperative cooking menu. As shown in FIG. 118, a “name of cooking item” (for example, “hamburger”) 330 is displayed as one type of identification information for each linked cooking menu.

In the next step RS2, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M1 has been operated. As described with reference to FIG. 118, by operating the two input keys 43M1, the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food to be cooked (for example, hamburger) that can be cooked in the linked cooking menu is displayed upward or downward in sequence. The display changes as you move. In this first embodiment, there are eight types of food to be cooked in total. Therefore, if the left input key 43M1 is operated once in the state of FIG. switch to

If the input key 43M1 is not operated (within a certain period of time), it is determined as "Yes" in step RS2, and the process proceeds to the next step RS3.
Step RS3 is a step of selecting any one of the two heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L displayed in the first specifying screen. By operating a pair of input keys 43M1 on the left and right, the user can select either one of the heating section specifying sections 333R and 333L.
Note that the right heating unit 17HR may be set as a default, and the heating unit specifying unit 333R may be displayed first on the first specifying screen 30SP, and the process may proceed to step STR7. Alternatively, the left heating unit 17HL may be selected. It may be set by default so that it is preferentially displayed.

In the next step RS4, it is determined whether or not an input operation for canceling the selection of the cooperative cooking menu has been performed. If the input key 43MT is operated, the determination is "No", and the process returns to "initial screen display" in step ST4 (see FIG. 119).

On the other hand, if the input key 43MT has not been operated, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step RS5.
If the input key 43MS is operated, the operation program proceeds to step RS9.
In step RS9, control conditions such as the finally selected heating unit (for example, the right heating unit 17HR) and the output value during microwave heating being 500 W are displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, Proceeding to the next step RS10, the cooperative cooking mode is entered from this stage.

The display contents of the first specific screen 30SP in step STR9 include process information such as that the right heating unit 17HR is used in the first cooking process 1, and the microwave heating source 189 is used in the next cooking process 2. is displayed on the process display section 332 . The contents and changes of these display screens are as described with reference to FIG.

When the mode is shifted to the cooperative cooking mode, the induction heating cooking is started when the input key 44R of the right operation section 40R is pressed. , the heating operation of the right heating unit 17HR may be automatically started. However, when the cooking process 1 is performed by the microwave heating source 189, step RS9 is not automatically advanced unless steps RS6 to RS8 are passed through, as will be described later.

If the input key 43MS is not operated in step RS5, the determination is "No", and the state of step RS1 for updating the display contents of the "first specific screen" 30SP prior to step RS1 is returned to (Fig. 119). If, for example, 30 minutes have passed since the input key 43MC was operated, and the state is still circulating between steps RS1 to RS5, the main power is automatically turned off, or the step You may make it return to ST4 (refer FIG. 119).

As is clear from FIG. 120, it is decided to use in the cooking process 1 at the stage before starting the cooking process 1 of the cooperative cooking menu, that is, immediately after the start of cooking of the cooperative cooking menu is commanded by the input key 43MS. The (planned) right heating unit 17HR becomes unusable. If there is a "preheating process" before the cooking process 1, the right heating unit 17HR cannot be used from the point before the preheating process.

Specifically, among the various input keys of the right operation unit 40R, the input key 44R is invalidated by the integrated control device MC. This "invalidation" means that no valid command signal is sent from the input key 44R to the integrated control device MC, and that even if a valid command signal is sent, the integrated control device MC does not accept the command signal. It has both the meaning of not treating it as a valid command signal.

The input key 43R1 is an input key for selecting heating in the right heating section 17HR. Also, the operation of the right IH coil 17R, which has started the heating operation, can be stopped. Therefore, the invalidation process as described above is not performed. During the preheating process and the cooking process 1, the heating of the right heating unit 17HR can be immediately stopped when the user presses the input key 43R1. However, the setting of the cooperative cooking mode itself cannot be canceled with this input key 43R1.

At the stage of step RS9, the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 for thermal power adjustment and the like do not perform the invalidation processing as described above. This is because the user can arbitrarily adjust the heating power of the induction heating in the cooking step 1.

If the right heating unit 17HR has already been used for another cooking menu at the time of step RS5 or RS9 (heating operation continues), the right heating unit 17HR cannot be used in the cooperative cooking mode. (step STR2X in the integrated control device MC), the above-mentioned "usage prohibition" processing is not performed. The right heating unit 17HR can be used for another cooking after completing the cooking process of the other cooking menu described above.

Next, proceeding to step RS10, the integrated control device MC controls the IH control section 90 to start driving the inverter circuit 81R of the right heating section 17HR. At the same time, the left display section 31L is also activated to display necessary information.

In the next step RS11, the first specific screen 30SP displays that the preheating process has started, or that the preheating has been completed thereafter, or provides an operation guidance to the user. An example of the operation guidance may be "Since preheating is completed, please place the hamburger in the cooking utensil such as a frying pan and start cooking". Such operation guidance is a kind of additional information 331 as described in the first embodiment. Note that the preheating temperature value 331T described in FIG. 112 of Embodiment 6 may be displayed.
In step RS11, the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP are updated when the display information changes as described above.

Next, in step RS12, it is determined whether or not the cancel processing of the cooperative cooking mode has been commanded by the input key 43MT. If a cancellation input is made at this stage, the process proceeds to the step of cancellation processing CX1 and returns to step ST4 (see FIG. 119).

If step RS12 is "Yes", the process proceeds to the next step RS13. In this step RS13, it is determined whether or not a thermal power adjustment (change) command has been issued by the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operation section 40R.

In step RS13, if there is a heating power adjustment (change) command, the process proceeds to step CX2 of change processing, and issues a heating power change command to the IH control unit 90. FIG.
In the next step RS14, it is determined whether or not a command to stop the heating operation in the right heating section 17HR has been issued by the input key 43R1. If there is a command to stop, the IH control unit 90 proceeds to a process of stopping the induction heating operation (step CX3).

The next step RS15 is to determine whether or not the end condition of the cooking process 1 is satisfied. For example, if the operation program of the linked cooking menu determines that the cooking process 1 is to heat continuously for up to 30 minutes, step RS15 becomes "Yes" when 30 minutes have passed since step RS10.

Alternatively, at the stage of step RS15, the user may be asked to confirm whether or not to perform extended heating, and after waiting for confirmation (input operation) from the user, the process may proceed to step RS16.

In the next step RS16, the IH control unit 90 is commanded to stop the induction heating operation, and a message such as "Cooking process 1 is finished" is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP. Alternatively, the end of the cooking process 1 may be notified by the voice synthesizer 95 .

In FIG. 120, steps RS6, RS7 and RS8 are steps required when the microwave heating source 9 is used in the cooking process 1. In FIG.

At step RS5, if the input key 43MS is operated, it is determined whether the door 113 is open. If the door 113 remains open, the closing detector 139 sends a door open signal to the integrated controller MC.

When the door 113 remains open as described above, the integrated control device MC prompts the user to close the door using the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 (step RS7).
Then, it is checked again in step RS6 whether the door 113 is closed after that, and if the door 113 is closed, the process proceeds to step RS8.

In step RS8, when the input key 43MS is used to instruct the start of microwave cooking, the process proceeds to step RS9. If the determination result of step RS8 is "No", the process returns to step RS6.

As is clear from the above description, when cooperative cooking 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113 (including when only the oven heating source 188 is used), these steps RS6 to RS8 are provided. Therefore, safety is ensured (prevention of microwave leakage) before the cooperative cooking 1 starts. In addition, it is possible to expect the effect of preventing hot air in the heating chamber 113 from leaking to the outside and not impairing the temperature rise characteristics.

Next, FIG. 121 will be described.
Step RS17 follows said step RS16.
In this step RS17, only the right heating section 17HR is released from the three "occupied states" of the right heating section 17HR, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188 performed in step RS9.

In the next step RS18, transition information to "cooking process 2" using the microwave heating source 189 is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP. From the start of the cooking process 1, the process display section 332 (see FIG. 118), which has been displayed in a horizontally elongated band shape, changes the display of "IH heating" to display such as "RG", "microwave", or "microwave grill". Change. This process display section 332 is continuously displayed until the cooking process 2 is finished.

Next, in step RS19, the food to be cooked (hamburger) heated on the top plate 15 is carried into the heating chamber 113 by cooking utensils (made of microwave-transmitting porcelain, etc.) or plates. be. Then, in this step RS19, it is determined whether or not the door 113 is closed. If the door 113 remains open, the closing detector 139 sends a door open signal to the integrated controller MC.

When the door 113 remains open as described above, the integrated control device MC prompts the user to close the door using the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 (step RS31).
Then, it is checked again in step RS19 whether the door 113 is closed after that, and if the door 113 is closed, the process proceeds to step RS20.

At step RS20, it is determined whether or not the input key 43MS has been instructed to start microwave cooking.
In step RS20, if the input key 43MS is operated to start heating, the process advances to step RS22 via step RS21 to judge whether the door 113 is closed. If the determination in step RS21 is "No", the recommendation to close the door 113 and the warning display and notification are performed by the same means as in step RS31 (step RS32).

Next, proceeding to step RS22, the integrated controller MC controls the microwave heating source 189 to start microwave cooking. At the same time, necessary information is updated and displayed on the first specific screen 30SP.

In the next step RS23, it is determined whether or not the door 113 is opened. At the moment when the door 113 is opened, a door open signal is sent from the closing detector 139 to the integrated control device MC.
If the door 113 is not open, it is determined in the next step RS24 whether or not the input key 43MT has been instructed to stop the "cooking process 2" of the cooperative cooking mode. If an input is made at this stage, the process proceeds to steps similar to the cancellation process CX1, the setting of the cooperative cooking mode is canceled, and the process proceeds to step RS30. This step RS30 is the same as step ST4 (see FIG. 119).

In the next step RS25, it is determined whether or not the termination condition of the cooking process 2 is satisfied. For example, if the operation program of the linked cooking menu determines that the cooking process 1 will be continuously heated for up to 30 minutes, step RS25 becomes "Yes" when 30 minutes have passed from the time of step RS22.

Alternatively, at the stage of step RS25, the user may be asked to confirm whether or not to perform extended heating, and after waiting for confirmation (input operation) from the user, the process may proceed to step RS30.

In the next step RS30, the microwave heating control unit 130 (see FIG. 21) is instructed to stop the microwave heating operation, and the first specific screen 30SP displays, for example, "Cooking process 2 has ended. ” is displayed. Alternatively, the end of the cooking process 2 may be notified by the voice synthesizer 95 .

In FIG. 121, steps RS26 to RS29 are steps required when the microwave heating source 9 is used in the cooking process 2. In FIG.

Next, steps RS26 to RS29 when there is a "No" determination in step RS23 will be described.
In step RS26, the microwave heating control section 130 (see FIG. 21) stops driving the inverter circuit (drive circuit) 121A upon receiving a stop command from the integrated control device MC. As a result, the oscillating operation of the magnetron 122 is instantaneously stopped.

The next step RS27 is to confirm whether or not the user intends to restart the cooking process 2. It is also possible that the user has inadvertently opened the door 113 . In other words, it is possible that they did not intend to stop the cooperative cooking in the middle.

Therefore, in this step RS27, for example, a message such as "Cooking has been stopped because the door was opened. Please press the start button to resume cooking" is displayed on the integrated display device 30, for example. Also, the voice synthesizer 95 may give the same notification.

After that, it waits for several minutes, for example, to see if this step RS27 becomes "Yes". If the restart operation signal does not come after the time elapses, the process may be returned to step ST4 (see FIG. 119).

Next, when the input key 43MS is pushed, the judgment in step RS27 becomes "Yes", so in the next step RS28, it is judged whether or not the door 113 is closed. If the door 113 remains open, the closing detector 139 sends a door open signal to the integrated controller MC.

When the door 113 remains open as described above, the integrated control device MC prompts the user to close the door using the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 (step RS33).
Then, it is checked again in step RS28 whether the door 113 is closed after that, and if the door 113 is closed, the process proceeds to step RS29.
At step RS29, it is determined whether or not the input key 43MS has been pressed, and if the input key 43MS has been pressed, the process returns to step RS22.

In step RS22, integrated controller MC controls microwave heating source 189 to start microwave cooking. At the same time, necessary information is updated and displayed on the first specific screen 30SP. For example, a display or notification such as "Microwave heating is restarted" is performed.

Next, FIG. 122 will be described.
In the heat cooker 1 of FIG. 118, the input key 43MS is pressed to shift to the linked cooking mode without setting the control conditions such as the heat value and heat level for the cooking process 1 on the first specific screen 30SP.

On the other hand, the heating cooker 1 shown in FIG. 122 sets the control conditions such as the thermal power value of the cooking process 1 on the first specific screen 30SP, and then presses the input key 43MS to shift to the cooperative cooking mode. It shows the case of change.

In the first specific screen 30SP, the cooking process information (cooking process information section) 332 displays "IH heating" as the cooking process 1, and when performing the preheating process for that purpose, "heat power 4" is set as the default value. It is set in the integrated control device MC (or IH control section 90).

By operating the pair of input keys 43L2, the user can select the thermal power value of the induction heating of the left heating unit 17HL to the user's desired value (limited to the predetermined thermal power value range of 3 to 6). . At this stage, if the input key 43MS is pressed, the cooperative cooking mode is entered with the heating power value set by the user.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 122, the left display section 31L displays "heat power 4 (preheating)". Since the result of input by the operation of the input key 43L2 is reflected in this display in real time, the latest thermal power value can be confirmed on the left operation unit 40L from the moment the input key 43MS is pressed to shift to the cooperative cooking mode.

In FIG. 122, the numbers T1 to T5 are given according to the order in which the fingertip FG is moved, but the preheating process can be started without operating the input keys 43L2 and 43L3. The heating power for the preheating process is set in the central operation unit 40M (heating power value 4 as described above), but if it is to be changed after entering the preheating process, it can be changed by touching the input key 43L2 or 43L3. can be changed.

Summary of Embodiment 8.
As is clear from the above description, the built-in composite heating cooker of Embodiment 8 has the following configuration. i.e.
a first heating means (induction heating source) 9;
a second heating means (microwave heating source) 189 for cooking in the heating chamber 113 provided inside the main body 110;
a third heating means (oven heating source) 188 that heats the heating chamber 113 by a heating principle and a heating method different from those of the second heating means 189;
first temperature sensors TS3 to TS6 for measuring the temperature of the object to be heated by the first heating means 9;
a second temperature sensor TS2 for measuring the temperature of the heating chamber 113;
a third temperature sensor 160 for measuring the temperature of the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
a control unit (integrated control device) MC that controls the first heating means 9, the second heating means 189, and the third heating means 188;
display means (integrated display unit) 30;
An input operation unit 40 that receives input from the user,
The control unit MC drives the first heating means 9 and the group of the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188 with a time lag to perform one cooking menu. a cooperative cooking program that executes
A complex cooking program that executes a complex cooking menu that uses the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188 in combination according to a predetermined combination,
When the control unit MC receives a selection command for heat cooking according to the linked cooking menu, when the temperature measured by the second temperature sensor TS2 is lower than a first temperature (for example, 70° C.), It was the structure characterized by shifting to the said cooperation cooking mode.
For this reason, it is determined whether or not the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is abnormally high before transitioning to cooperative cooking, and the transition to the cooperative cooking mode is determined. It is possible to avoid such a situation that it becomes impossible to cook, and to realize a highly convenient composite cooking device.

Furthermore, the composite cooking program includes an automatic cooking menu (for example, roast beef) that controls the second heating means 189 according to the temperature detected by the third temperature sensor 160,
The control unit MC permits execution of the automatic cooking menu when the temperature measured by the third temperature sensor 160 is lower than a second temperature (eg, 70° C.). is.
With this configuration, in the cooperative cooking mode, an “automatic cooking menu” can be implemented in which microwave heating cooking is automatically stopped according to the temperature measurement result from the third temperature sensor 160 . As a result, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite heating cooker without impairing the operability of the user.

Furthermore, the third temperature sensor 160 is one or more infrared sensors that measure the temperature inside the heating chamber 113 without contact,
The controller MC is configured to share the infrared sensor 160 when executing the linked cooking menu and the automatic cooking menu, respectively.
Therefore, sharing the infrared sensor is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

Furthermore, the first temperature (for example, 70° C.) and the second temperature were the same.
Therefore, the control program does not become complicated, and it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

As is clear from the above description, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 8 has the following configuration. i.e.
an induction heating source 9 comprising a first heating section (right heating section) 17HR and a second heating section (left heating section) 17H;
a microwave heating source 189 capable of heating the food in the heating chamber 113 at a location remote from the induction heating source 9;
an integrated controller MC that controls the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189;
an integrated display unit 30 for displaying information on the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189;
A left display section 31L, which is a display means for the induction heating source 9,
The integrated control device MC has as many (multiple) linked cooking menus as the number of multiple types of cooking items for cooking one cooking item using the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189,
The integrated control device MC is configured to perform the following operations when receiving an instruction to display the linked cooking menu by the input key 43MC.
(1) Regarding the induction heating source 9, the relationship between the "allowing conditions" such as "not having been used before" and "the temperature of the heating chamber 113 being low" is determined. Then, it determines whether or not the cooperative cooking menu can be executed.
(2) When it is determined that the cooperative cooking menu can be executed, the integrated display section 30 displays the first specific screen 30SP.
(3) In addition, the left display section 31L displays control conditions (for example, preheating temperature) related to the linked cooking mode or information about the operation of the linked cooking mode.
(4) On the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display section 370, at least one of the linked cooking menus is displayed in a selectable manner. For that purpose, the input function of the corresponding input key 43M1 is enabled.
(5) When one cooperative cooking menu is selected, wait for a command for starting the cooperative cooking mode from the input key 43MS.
(6) When an instruction to start the cooperative cooking mode is received from the input key 43MS, the permitted induction heating mode of either the left heating section 17HL or the right heating section 17HR is entered.
(7) For either the induction heating source 9 or the microwave heating source 189 to be used first, the operation corresponding to menus other than the linked cooking menu is restricted for a specific period.
(8) When a command for starting the cooperative cooking mode is received, induction heating is performed from either one of the permitted left heating unit 17HL or right heating unit 17HR (left operation unit 40L, right operation unit 40R). Receives the time control condition setting signal.

Therefore, when the predetermined permission condition is satisfied, the first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode is displayed. Transition to the coordinated cooking mode by the wave heating source 189 can be easily advanced.
In addition, since the first specific screen 30SP itself is not displayed when the permission conditions are not satisfied, there is no fear of misuse or misunderstanding by the user. In other words, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite heating cooker without impairing user operability.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, when the cooperative cooking menu is selected by the input key 43MC on the central operation unit 40M of the top plate 15, the heating source (left The user can confirm the information of the heating section 17HL or the right heating section 17HR) by the right heating section selection mark 334R and the left heating section selection mark 334L.

Furthermore, the user can confirm the contents of the linked cooking menu and the cooking process on the first specific screen 30SP of the central display section 370 .

Furthermore, after entering the induction heating process, it is possible to confirm the progress of the cooking process, input control conditions (for example, thermal power), and confirm the degree of progress of the cooking process on the left display section 31L.
Furthermore, it is possible to input control conditions such as heating power and time and stop the heating operation even during cooking using either the right operation unit 40R or the left operation unit 40L on the permitted side. Therefore, the user can concentrate on various checks and operations in front of either the left or right operation unit.

As is clear from the above description, the control program for the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 8 has the following configuration. i.e.
a main body 110 having a top plate 15 and a built-in heating chamber 113 having a door 114 that can be opened and closed;
a first heating means (induction heating source) 9 for heating the object to be heated placed on the top plate 15;
a second heating means (microwave heating source) 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113;
a third heating means (oven heat source 188) that performs heat cooking in the heating chamber 113 in cooperation with the second heating means 189;
an input operation unit 40 that receives user operations;
display means (integrated display section) 30 for displaying information about the operation of the first, second and third heating means 9, 189 and 188;
It is executed by a computer for controlling a composite heating cooker comprising a control unit (integrated control device) MC that controls the first, second, and third heating means,
Step 1 of activating the integrated display section 30, the left display section 31L, and the right display section 31R when the main power switch 97 is closed and the main power is supplied;
a step 2 of receiving a command signal 1 for selecting a linked cooking menu from the input operation unit 40;
Step 3 (STR1 to STR3: FIG. 119) for determining whether permission conditions are satisfied;
Step 4 (STC: FIG. 119) of displaying the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode on the display means 30 when the permission condition is satisfied in the step 3;
The cooperative cooking menu is selected from the input operation unit 40 in order to select one piece of identification information 330 from the pieces of identification information 330 that individually identify the items to be cooked displayed on the first identification screen 30SP. Step 5 (RS2: FIG. 120) for receiving command signal 2 to
Step 6 (RS5: FIG. 120) of waiting for command signal 3 for starting the cooperative cooking mode after step 5;
Step 7 (RS10: FIG. 120) of receiving the command signal 3 and issuing a drive command for starting the cooking process 1 to the first heating means 9;
The end of the cooking process 1 is detected (RS15), the end of the cooking process 1 or the shift to the cooking process 2 is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP (RS16, RS18), and the command to start the cooking process 2 Step 8 (RS20: FIG. 121) waiting for signal 4;
Step 9 (RS22: FIG. 121) for commanding the start of the operation of the cooking process 2 when the command signal 4 is received from the input operation unit 40 and the door 113 is closed;
During the cooking step 2, when it is detected that the door has been opened (RS23: FIG. 121), the microwave oscillation by the second heating means 189 is temporarily stopped, and step 10 of maintaining the cooking mode setting;
After step 10, when the command signal 4 is received from the input operation unit (RS27: FIG. 121), when the door 113 is closed (RS28), the operation of the cooking process 2 is started. Step 11 (RS22) for commanding
is a control program for a composite heating cooker that executes

With this configuration, it is possible to provide a cooking device that can effectively use three heating sources, the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188. FIG.
In addition, since the cooperative cooking menu can be executed, it can be used for a wide range of cooking with various types of heat. It is possible to realize a control program for a composite heating cooker that is highly safe and convenient without impairing operability.

Embodiment 9.
FIG. 123 is a vertical cross-sectional view mainly showing a heating chamber portion of a heating cooker according to Embodiment 9 of the present invention. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same or corresponding configurations as those of the heating cookers described in Embodiments 1 to 8, and overlapping descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 123 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the heating chamber 113 cut vertically at the front-rear central portion, and VL1 is a vertical central line vertically penetrating the left-right central point of the lower unit 200 of the heating cooker 1. FIG.

In the first to eighth embodiments, an example using a magnetron as the microwave generation source 122 has been described. Although a normal magnetron does not impart directivity to oscillated microwaves, a heating cooker using a microwave oscillator with directivity is proposed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2015-158351, for example.

According to the method proposed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2015-158351, there is an advantage that two or more different ingredients can be heated separately inside the same heating chamber.

Therefore, in the ninth embodiment, the present invention is applied to further improve the heating cooker using a directional microwave oscillator.
In FIG. 123, 122R is a microwave oscillator installed corresponding to the radiation port 384R formed in the right half position of the ceiling of the metal heating chamber 113, and the oscillated microwave has directivity. ing. Specifically, microwaves are emitted directly downward from the radiation port 384R.

122L is a microwave oscillator installed corresponding to the radiation port 384L formed in the left half position of the ceiling of the metal heating chamber 113, and the oscillated microwave has directivity. Specifically, microwaves are emitted directly downward from the radiation port 384L.
Oscillation of these two microwave oscillators 122L and 122R is independently controlled by a microwave heating controller 130 (not shown). Also, the intensities of the oscillated microwaves are controlled independently of each other.

The two microwave oscillators 122L and 122R are positioned symmetrically across the vertical center line VL1.
163A is an upper heater fixed to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113 . 163B is a lower heater fixed to the bottom surface of the heating chamber 113 .

A food table 380 is rotatably installed inside the heating chamber 113 and is rotationally driven by a motor 382 . In addition, a type that rotates within a range of 90 degrees or 180 degrees in a horizontal plane without rotating may be used. If it rotates, it is also called a rotary table.
381 is a support shaft that supports the food placing table 380 at the center. In addition, it is more convenient to take out the food table 380 directly from the heating chamber 113 . Therefore, a so-called “coupling structure” (not shown) is actually interposed between the upper end of the support shaft 381 and the food placing table 380 . Rolling bodies (not shown) such as support rollers are also installed at a plurality of locations below the food table.

383A is food A (ingredient A). 383B is also food B (ingredient B). For example, food A is, for example, a hamburger. Food B is, for example, frozen rice.

The microwave heating controller 130 (not shown) is controlled by an integrated controller MC (not shown) to start and stop oscillation of the two microwave oscillators 122L and 122R. The microwave heating control unit 130 (not shown) controls the microwaves oscillated from the microwave oscillators 122L and 122R according to the operation program of the cooperative cooking menu and the composite cooking menu of the integrated control device MC (not shown). Intensity is determined.

In the integrated control device MC of the ninth embodiment, as described in the first embodiment, the "first cooperative cooking menu" for performing the cooking process 1 with the induction heating source 9 and the cooking process with the microwave heating source 189 Both of the "second cooperative cooking menu" that performs 1 are provided.

Next, an example of actual cooking will be described.
Inside the heating chamber 113, two types of food A (food A) 383A and food B (food B) 383B can be heated and cooked at the same time. In that case, the intensity of the microwaves oscillated from the microwave oscillators 122L and 122R can be set according to the food A (ingredient A) 383A and the food B (ingredient B) 383B, and the heating time can also be set separately. Therefore, one food is not overheated.

Furthermore, when the food table 380 is rotated by 90 degrees by the motor 382, the food A (food A) 383A and the food B (food B) 383B are irradiated with microwaves from the microwave oscillators 122L and 122R. out of range. When the food table 380 is further rotated by 90 degrees, the positions of the food A (ingredient A) 383A and the food B (ingredient B) 383B are switched from the initial position.

As is clear from the above description, if the microwave oscillators 122L and 122R that have a structure that allows the position of the food to be cooked to be changed and that can irradiate directional microwaves are used, inside the heating chamber 113, , multiple cooking steps can be performed.

Further, in the "first cooperative cooking menu" in which the cooking step 1 is performed by the induction heating source 9, when the food A (hamburger) 383A and the food B (frozen rice) 383B are cooked, in the cooking step 2, the food A 383A is At this stage, the food B is put into the heating chamber 113 from a freezer/refrigerator or the like, and can be microwave-heated on the food table 380 at the same time. In this case, the food table 380 need not be rotated. According to this, the user can obtain the thawed and warmed rice and the hamburg steak at the same time.

Further, as described in Embodiment 1, in the "first cooperative cooking menu" in which the cooking process 1 is performed by the induction heating source 9, the cooking process 2 is performed in the heating chamber 113. According to this method, the cooking process can be further subdivided, so that heat cooking more suitable for foods (ingredients) can be performed.

In addition, in the case of the “second cooperative cooking menu” in which the cooking process 1 is performed with the microwave heating source 189, the cooking process 1 is performed in the heating chamber 113. Since different heating states can be executed, the effect of performing heating suitable for food (ingredients) can be expected.

In this ninth embodiment, the rotating or turning type food placement table 380 is used, but other methods may be used if the positions of the food A (ingredient A) 383A and the food B (ingredient B) 383B can be changed. But it's okay. For example, the food may be placed on a plate that moves back and forth.

Summary of the ninth embodiment.
As described above, the heating cooker 1 according to the ninth embodiment is
a first heating means (induction heating source) 9;
a second heating means (microwave heating source) 189 for cooking in the heating chamber 113 provided inside the main body 110;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means 9 and the second heating means 189;
an integrated display unit 30;
a food placing table 380;
An input operation unit 40 that receives input from the user,
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking program for executing a cooperative cooking menu in which one cooking is performed by driving the first heating means 9 and the second heating means 189 with a time lag. ,
The microwave generation sources 122L and 122R of the second heating means (microwave heating source) 189 irradiate the inside of the heating chamber 113 with directional microwaves,
The food placement table 380 is configured to change the relative positions of food (ingredients) to be cooked and the microwave generation sources 122L and 122R.
The integrated control device MC is characterized by having a function of judging whether or not conditions for permitting transition to the cooperative cooking mode are satisfied before starting the heating operation according to the cooperative cooking menu.
For this reason, the same effect as that described in Embodiment 1 can be expected, and as described above, the range of microwave heating inside one heating chamber 113 is further expanded, and it is suitable for many kinds of foods. There is an effect that it can be heated.

Embodiment 10.
FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking process of the linked cooking menu and the operation of the input operation unit of the heating cooker according to Embodiment 10 of the present invention. 125 is a flow chart 1 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 124. FIG. 126 is a flow chart 2 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 124. FIG. The same reference numerals are given to the same or corresponding configurations as those of the heating cookers described in Embodiments 1 to 9, and overlapping descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

The tenth embodiment is characterized in that the cooperative cooking menu consists of three cooking processes 1, 2 and 3.
Specifically, the cooking process 1 is performed by the microwave heating source 189, the cooking process 2 is similarly performed by the microwave heating source 189, and finally the food to be cooked is moved onto the top plate 15 to compensate for the insufficient heating. A cooking step 3 is provided for finishing induction heating.

Further, in this tenth embodiment, a measure is added to prevent the heating cooker 1 from receiving a command signal from the outside and setting the cooking mode, control conditions, etc., inadvertently.

First, a detailed description will be given with reference to FIG.
The cooperative cooking menu shown in FIG. 124 is the “second cooperative cooking menu” described in FIG. 45 of the first embodiment.

In the "second cooperative cooking menu" of this example, the microwave heating source 189 (second heating means 189) is operated first, and after the heating operation is completed, the induction heating source 9 is operated as the first heating means. Let Note that the oven heating source 188 may be operated as a third heating means at the same time as the second heating means.

As shown in FIG. 124, the second cooperative cooking menu consists of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is the period from when the input key 43MC is operated to execute the cooperative cooking menu until the heat cooking is started by the input key 43MS.

When the input key 43MC is operated and the "permission condition" described in the first embodiment is satisfied, the integrated control device MC displays the first specific screen 30SP. Note that FIG. 124 does not show the first specific screen 30SP.

When the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, one of the cooperative cooking menus can be selected by operating the input key 43M1. After that, if the input key 43MS is operated, the mode shifts to the linked cooking mode, and the heat cooking process of P2 is performed. When the identification information 330 of the cooperative cooking menu desired by the user is displayed at a predetermined position of the first specific screen 30SP (default display) at the stage when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, the input key 43M1 is displayed. operation is unnecessary.

P2 is a heat cooking period (cooking step 1) by the second heating means (microwave heating source 189).
This cooking process 1 is started when the integrated controller MC confirms that the door 114 (not shown) is opened once during the preparation period P1 and then closed. A door open/close signal from the closing detection unit 139 described in the first embodiment is used.

The cooking process 1 basically ends automatically when the heating time predetermined by the operation program of the linked cooking menu elapses or when the temperature of the food to be cooked rises to a set value (e.g., 90°C). . For example, in a certain cooperative cooking menu, heating is started with a microwave output of 500W. Further, if the user opens the door 114 at an arbitrary timing, the irradiation of microwaves is stopped instantaneously, and the heating operation is stopped.

In this tenth embodiment, the case where the input key 43MS of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is pressed to end the cooking process 1 is shown.

At the stage when the cooking process 1 is started, the integrated control device MC has already completed the determination of the permission conditions, so the heating section of the induction heating source 9 in use is known. In other words, the usage states of the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL are grasped.
Therefore, as a default setting, the integrated controller MC determines to use the "right heating unit" 17HR in the cooking process 3 of the cooperative cooking mode, and occupies this right heating unit 17HR.

P3 is a heating rest period from when the cooking process 1 by the second heating means is temporarily stopped until the cooking process 2 by the microwave heating source 189 is restarted.
This pause period P3 is a period required for checking the degree of heating of the food to be cooked in the cooking process 1, adding seasonings, or adding another food to be cooked in the cooking process 2. For example, in the cooking process 1, only the frozen food is heated as the food to be cooked, and in the cooking process 2, seasoning is added, or another food to be heated (non-frozen food, etc.) whose temperature rises faster than the frozen food is added. can be Therefore, the range of cooking is widened.
The heating pause step P3 ends when the input key 43MS is pressed, and the cooking step 2 of P4 is performed.

P4 is a heating cooking period (cooking step 2) by the microwave heating source 189 . In this cooking process, the user can individually set control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) by operating the input keys 43M2 and 43M3.
Then, when the input key 43MS is pressed to issue a command to stop cooking, the cooking process 2 ends, and the process proceeds to the heating pause period of P5.

During this heating pause period P5, the user opens the door 114, takes out the food from the inside of the heating chamber 113, and places it on the top plate 15. As shown in FIG. The object to be cooked is placed in an object to be heated such as a metal pan.
Then, when the input key 43MS is pressed to command the start of cooking, the heating pause step P5 ends, and the process proceeds to the heat cooking period (cooking step 3) of P6.

This heating pause period P5 is a period necessary for checking the degree of heating of the food to be cooked in the cooking process 2, adding seasonings, or adding another food to be cooked to perform the cooking process 3. . For example, in the cooking process 2, only the frozen food is heated as the food to be cooked, and in the cooking process 3, the food to be heated is immersed in seasoning or cooking liquid, or cooked by preheating separately, and the same food is heated. You can add it to things. Therefore, the range of cooking is widened.

P6 switches from cooking step 2 by the second heating means (microwave heating source) 189 to cooking step 3 by the first heating means (in this case induction heating source 9).
In this cooking step 3, if the right heating unit 17HR is used for cooking, the user can individually set control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) by operating the input keys 43R2 and 43R3. .

In the cooking process 3, if the left heating unit 17HR is used for cooking, the user can individually set control conditions (for example, cooking time and target temperature) by operating the input keys 43L2 and 43L3. Can be set.

Then, when the input key 43MT is pressed to command the stop of cooking, the cooking process 3 ends and the operation of the linked cooking mode ends.

As is clear from FIG. 124, it is not at the step of selecting the linked cooking menu, that is, at the time when the identification information 330 indicating the name of the cooking of the linked cooking menu is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, but the input key 43MS is used for cooking. From the time the start is determined, the right operation section 40R of the right heating section 17HR cannot be used.

Specifically, the integrated control device MC performs the following function restriction processing.
(1) An input signal from the right operation unit 40R is invalidated. As a result, during the cooking period (cooking process 1) to the cooking period (cooking process 3), the right heating unit 17HR cannot be used except in the cooperative cooking mode.
(2) The left operation unit 40L can be used even in the heat cooking period (cooking step 1) (the input signal from the left operation unit 40L is not invalidated).

In this way, when the cooking period (cooking process 1) begins, the integrated controller MC occupies only the right heating part 17HR of the induction heating source 9 in the cooking process 3 from the cooking process 1 stage.

Therefore, the right heating section 17HR is "occupied" by the selection of the linked cooking menu. Also, from the perspective of the entire induction heating source 9, the use of only a portion (right side) of the two heating portions is "restricted".

Even after the heat cooking period (cooking step 1) ends, the restricted state of the right heating unit 17HR is not released.
At the stage of the cooking process 1, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, and the user can easily understand that the cooperative cooking mode is entered. Therefore, the prohibition of operation by other cooking menus is not restricted. This is the same for the heating pause period P3 to the cooking step 2 as well.

Note that even if the integrated control device MC detects that the door 114 has changed from the open state to the closed state before starting the heat cooking period (cooking process 1), the temperature in the heating chamber 113 is If the temperature is higher than the reference value, there is a concern that the integrated control device MC and the non-contact (infrared) temperature measurement unit 158 may erroneously recognize the abnormally high temperature as the completion of cooking even before the single cooking menu is executed. .
Therefore, if the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is too high before the start of the heat cooking period (cooking step 1) and before the start of the cooking step 2, the first specific screen 30SP displays A message is displayed to the effect that microwave heating cannot be performed immediately.

As is clear from the above description, the heating cooker 1 of Embodiment 10 has the following configuration. i.e.
an induction heating source 9 comprising a first heating section (right heating section) 17HR and a second heating section (left heating section) 17H;
a microwave heating source (second heating means) 189 capable of heating the object to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 located away from the induction heating source 9;
an integrated controller MC that controls the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189;
an integrated display unit 30 for displaying information on the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189;
The integrated control device MC has as many (multiple) linked cooking menus as the number of multiple types of cooking items for cooking one cooking item using the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189,
The integrated control device MC is configured to perform the following operations when receiving an instruction to display the linked cooking menu by the input key 43MC.
(1) Regarding the induction heating source 9, the relationship between the "allowing conditions" such as "not having been used before" and "the temperature of the heating chamber 113 being low" is determined. Then, it determines whether or not the cooperative cooking menu can be executed.

(2) When it is determined that the cooperative cooking menu can be executed, the integrated display section 30 displays the first specific screen 30SP.

(3) On the first specific screen 30SP, at least one of the linked cooking menus is displayed so as to be selectable. For that purpose, the input function of the corresponding input key 43M1 is enabled.

(4) When one cooperative cooking menu is selected, wait for a command for starting the cooperative cooking mode from the input key 43MS.

(5) When an instruction to start the cooperative cooking mode is received, microwaves from the microwave heating source 189 are supplied to the heating chamber 113, and the cooking process 1 is started.

(6) When the cooking process 1 is finished automatically or by a user's instruction, the heating pause period P3 is entered (see FIG. 124). Then, it waits for a command for resuming the cooperative cooking mode (for cooking process 2) from the input key 43MS.

(7) When an instruction to start the cooperative cooking mode is received from the input key 43MS, microwaves from the microwave heating source 189 are supplied to the heating chamber 113, and the cooking process 2 is started.

Then, after the heating rest period P5, the heating cooking period P6 (cooking step 3) is entered. In this cooking process 3, the control conditions for induction heating can be set by operating the input keys 43M2 and 43M3.

As described above, also in the tenth embodiment, when the predetermined permission conditions are satisfied, the first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode is displayed. The transition to the cooperative cooking mode by the heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL and the microwave heating source 189 can be easily advanced.
In addition, since the first specific screen 30SP itself is not displayed when the permission conditions are not satisfied, there is no fear of misuse or misunderstanding by the user. In other words, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite heating cooker without impairing user operability.

Furthermore, there is a heating pause period P3 between the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, and the length of this heating pause period P3 is determined by the timing at which the user instructs restart of cooking with the input key 43MS.
That is, in the tenth embodiment, the cooking step 2 is necessary for checking the degree of heating of the food to be cooked in the cooking step 1, adding a seasoning, or adding another food to be cooked to perform the cooking step 2. period can be secured. Therefore, the usability is much better than in the first to ninth embodiments, and the user's cooking repertoire can be expanded.

Next, FIG. 125 will be described.
A basic operation program from power-on to start of preparation for cooking is stored in the storage device MM inside the integrated control device MC.
125 is a built-in type, the power plug 106A (not shown) is always connected to the commercial (AC) power source 99 from the time the kitchen furniture 2 is installed.
Therefore, the user presses the operation button 98 (not shown) of the main power switch to turn on the power (step SW1 in FIG. 125).

Then, as described in the first embodiment, a predetermined low power supply voltage is supplied to the integrated control device MC via the DC power converter 92 in the power circuit board 55, and the integrated control device MC is activated. The control program of the integrated control device MC itself starts diagnosing whether there is an abnormality in itself (SW2).

The IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the microwave heating control unit 130 check their own abnormality. The data of the check results of the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 are centrally collected by the integrated control unit MC to determine the presence or absence of an abnormality.

In step SW2, "transmit startup information to the outside" is transmitted from the wireless communication unit 49 to a "integrated information management device" or "integrated power control device" (HEMS controller) in a living space such as a kitchen. It means transmitting an operation information signal for announcing the start of operation of the heating cooker 1 to a domestic control device (not shown).

In step SW2, "obtain information (power consumption regulation command, etc.) from outside" is to obtain a command signal and information from the home control device (not shown) via the wireless communication unit 49. Say things.

In step SW2, the wireless communication unit 49 accesses the home control device and acquires information such as cooking menus and recipe information useful for health management within the range previously set by the user. For example, the information that the user of this heating cooker 1 has sent in advance to the home control device via the Internet line using a portable information terminal device or the like can also be obtained when the integrated display section 30 is activated. When some information is acquired, the information may be displayed on the common screen 30Z.

The integrated control device MC activates the integrated display unit 30 when no abnormality of the heating cooker 1 is found. Then, a message to the effect that "there is no abnormality, so cooking can be started" is displayed (SW3). The display screen at this initial time is the common screen 30Z described in FIG. 36 and the like of the first embodiment. Therefore, the standby common information 30N such as information indicating that the power is on is displayed. Simultaneously with these displays, the voice synthesizing device 95 notifies similar contents by voice.

Next, after completion of the abnormality determination as described above, the integrated control device MC uses the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 to issue a notification for prompting the user to select a heating means and provide voice guidance (SW). Then, the process proceeds to the next step SW5.

At step SW5, it is determined whether the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is open. If the door 113 remains closed, the process proceeds to step SW7.

Step SW7 determines whether or not the input key 43L1 or 43R1 has been operated as third selection means for selecting the "single cooking mode" using the induction heating source 9. FIG.

In order for the user to select the "single cooking mode" using the induction heating source 9, it is necessary to operate either the input key 43L1 of the left operating section 40L or the input key 43R1 of the right operating section 40R. There is

Therefore, in this step SW7, if either one of the input keys 43L1 or 43R1 is operated, it is determined "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SW8. When neither of the input keys 43L1 or 43R1 is operated, the process returns to step SW4.

At step SW8, the display of the common screen 30Z is stopped, and the third specific screen 30ST is displayed instead. The third specific screen 30ST is the same as that shown in FIG. 38 of the first embodiment.

When it is determined in step SW5 that the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is open, the process proceeds to step SW6. This step SW6 is a process for starting acceptance of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode. At the moment when the process proceeds to step SW6, the wireless communication unit 49 sends the "domestic control device" (not shown) to the heating cooker 1 in response to a remote control signal from the outside. Send a specific signal to indicate that it is not. In addition, even if the integrated control device MC itself receives a remote control signal from a "domestic control device" (not shown), it ignores the command of the remote control signal and carries out "non-remote control" processing. conduct.

At step SW9, it is determined whether or not the input key 43MC (or the input key 350 of the fourth embodiment) as first selection means for selecting the cooperative cooking mode has been operated.

If the input key 43MC (or the input key 350 shown in FIG. 98) has been operated, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SW10.
At step SW10, the display of the common screen 30Z is stopped, and the first specific screen 30SP is displayed instead.

On the other hand, if the input key 43MC (or the input key 350) is not operated, the process proceeds to the next step SW11.
At step SW11, it is determined whether or not the input key 43M1 as the second selection means for selecting the composite cooking mode has been operated.

If the input key 43M1 has been operated, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SW12.
At step SW12, the display of the common screen 30Z is stopped, and the second specific screen 30SC is displayed instead.
If the input key 43M1 is not operated in step SW11, the process returns to the previous step SW9.

As can be seen from FIG. 125, the period from step SW6 to steps SW10 and SW12 is a "remote operation non-compliant" period in which operation in response to a remote operation signal from the outside is not performed.

Next, FIG. 126 will be described.
FIG. 126 shows the continuation of the operational steps of FIG.
At step SW10, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed. In addition, voice guidance is performed so that input is performed by the input operation unit 40 in order to perform the cooperative cooking mode.

Then, in the next step SW13, it is determined whether or not the input key 43MS has been operated. If the determination here is "Yes", the process proceeds to the next step SW14, and the cooking process is started with the heat source corresponding to the linked cooking menu. The cooking process referred to here may be either the case of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 or the case of including the cooking process 3 and subsequent steps.

At step SW15, it is determined whether or not all the cooking processes (including the preheating process and the extension process) have been completed. When the cooking process is finished, the process proceeds to step SW22.

Step SW22 is almost the same as step SW4. However, since it is just after one heat cooking, there is a high possibility that the heating chamber 113 and the top plate 15 are at a high temperature. Therefore, in step SW22, information about the presence of the high temperature portion is displayed on the desired machine screen (common screen) 30Z.

On the other hand, in step SW12, the second specific screen 30SC is displayed. In addition, voice guidance is performed so that input is performed through the input operation unit 40 in order to perform the composite cooking mode.

Then, in the next step SW16, it is determined whether or not the input key 43MS has been operated. If the determination here is "Yes", the process proceeds to the next step SW17, and the cooking process is started with the heating source corresponding to the composite cooking menu. The cooking process referred to here may be either the case of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 or the case of including the cooking process 3 and above.

At step SW18, it is determined whether or not all the cooking processes (including the preheating process and the extension process) have been completed. When the cooking process is finished, the process proceeds to step SW22 described above.

Next, steps after step SW8 will be described.
At step SW8, the third specific screen 30ST is displayed. In addition, voice guidance is performed so that input is performed through the input operation unit 40 in order to perform the single cooking mode.

Then, in the next step SW19, it is determined whether or not the input key 43R1 in the right operation section 40R of the right heating section 17HR has been operated. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the input key 43L1 of the left heating unit 17HL has been operated. If the determination here is "Yes", the process proceeds to the next step SW20, and the cooking process of the single cooking menu by the induction heating source 9 is started. The cooking process referred to here is the cooking process 1 (including the preheating process).

At step SW21, it is determined whether or not all the cooking processes (including the preheating process and the extension process) have been completed. When the cooking process is finished, the process proceeds to step SW22 described above.

As can be seen from FIG. 125, the period from step SW10 to steps SW15, SW18, and SW21 is a "remote operation non-supported" period in which operation in response to a remote operation signal from the outside is not performed.
In other words, the period until all the cooking processes are completed is the "remote operation non-supported" period.
At the stages of steps SW15, SW18, and SW21, the integrated control device MC cancels the "remote operation not supported" process. Therefore, after step SW15 or SW18, when new heat cooking (for example, a single cooking mode of induction heating) is started, during the cooking process, a remote control signal from the outside, for example, the maximum power consumption value may be suppressed (peak cut command).

In the above explanation, the period of "remote control not supported" is from the stage of step SW6 to the stage (step SW15) when all the cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode are completed. Alternatively, it is from the stage of step SW6 to the stage (step SW18) when all the cooking processes in the composite cooking mode are completed.
However, this may be changed.
For example, when the cooking process 1 (including the preheating process) is performed by the right heating section 17HR of the induction heating source 9, the remote control signal from the outside is specified to the right heating section 17HR. In such a case, at the end of the cooking process 1, the "remote operation not supported" process may be cancelled. This also applies to the left heating unit 17HL.

However, in the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 that use the common heating chamber 113, if only one of them is canceled for the above-mentioned "not compatible with remote control" processing, the heating effect of the other heating source will be adversely affected. may affect

Summary of Embodiment 10.
As is clear from the above description, the heating cooker according to the tenth embodiment has the following characteristic configuration. i.e.
an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be heated in the upper part of the main body 110;
a microwave heating source (second heating means) 189 for heating the heating chamber 113 arranged inside the main body 110;
an oven heating source (third heating means) 188 that heats the heating chamber 113 by a heating principle different from that of the microwave heating source 189;
an input operation unit 40;
an input/output unit (wireless communication unit) 49 for communicating with the outside;
an integrated display unit 30;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first, second, and third heating sources 9, 189, and 188, respectively;
The integrated control device MC has a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are driven with a time difference, and the microwave heating source 189 A combined cooking mode in which the oven heating source 188 is driven simultaneously, driven with a time difference, or automatically switched and driven, and the first, second, and third heating sources 9, 189, and 188 are individually operated. It has a function to perform a single cooking mode driven by
After the main power is turned on by the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC
(1) display the standby initial screen (common screen) 30Z on the integrated display unit 30;
(2) when information is acquired from the input/output unit 49, it is displayed on the initial screen (common screen) 30Z;
(3) When any one of the combined cooking mode, the linked cooking mode, and the single cooking mode is received from the input operation unit 40, the initial screen 30Z is changed to a specific screen (first specific screen 30SP, Switch to second specific screen 30SC, third specific screen 30ST),
(4) in the state of the specific screen, shift to a standby state for receiving a cooking start command from the input operation unit 40;
(5) During the standby state, the cooking menu or control conditions are not changed according to the external command signal from the input/output unit 49, "not compatible with remote operation";
The configuration is characterized in that each operation is performed.

Therefore, an effect equivalent to that described in the first embodiment can be expected.
Furthermore, as described above, it is possible to prevent the operation conditions from being changed in response to the remote control signal unintended by the user during the cooperative cooking mode using a plurality of heating means and the combined cooking mode. The cooperative cooking mode, which takes a longer time than the cooking mode, and the cooking in the combined cooking mode correspond to the user's expectations and operations, and are expected to be easy to use.

Embodiment 11.
127 is a simplified plan view of a built-in composite cooking device according to Embodiment 11. FIG. 128 is a plan view 1 of the front part for explaining the arrangement of the input operation section and various display sections in FIG. 127. FIG. 129 is a plan view 2 of the same portion as FIG. 128. FIG. 130 is a plan view 3 of the same portion as FIG. 128. FIG. 131 is a plan view 4 of the same portion as FIG. 128. FIG. 132 is a plan view 5 of the same portion as FIG. 128. FIG. 133 is an enlarged plan view of an input operation section and various display sections showing a modification of FIG. 127. FIG. Parts that are the same as or corresponding to the configurations of Embodiments 1 to 10 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

FIG. 127 will be described.
In the eleventh embodiment, the heating chamber 113 is installed around the lateral center line CL1 of the main body 110 of the heating cooker 1 . A front opening of the heating chamber 113 is closed by a door 114 so as to be freely opened and closed.

The integrated display section 30 and the central operation section 40M are also provided centering on the horizontal center line CL. That is, it is installed centering on the left-right center line CL1 of the main body 110 .
Further, in a central operation section 40M located in the left-right central portion of the input operation section 40, various input keys 40MC, 43M1, 43MS, 43MT and an operation key 98 for supplying main power are arranged.

FIG. 128 will be described. FIG. 128 shows a scene of cooking "hamburger", one of the cooking menus, as the cooperative cooking mode.
FIG. 128 shows the state just before the next cooking step 1 is started after the preheating step of the induction heating source 9 is finished.

The integrated control device MC has set an "input waiting time" of 30 minutes at maximum from the time when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed. If an input key 43MS, which will be described later, is not operated during the input waiting time, error processing is performed, and the display returns to the predetermined waiting initial screen (common screen) 30Z.

As shown in FIG. 128, the display screen section 300 of the integrated display section 30 that displays information toward the top of the main body 110 has a fourth area 303 in addition to the first area 30L to the third area 30R. . The first area 30L to the third area 30R are the same as those described in the first embodiment, and are display areas whose substantial display area can be changed (see FIG. 131). However, the fourth area 303 has a fixed area during execution of the cooperative cooking mode, and is elongated so as to lie behind the first to third areas 30L to 30R.

The surface of the integrated display unit 30 is covered with a glass plate, and almost the entire area except for the portion directly above the fourth area 303 is a capacitive touch panel that senses the touch of the user's finger. ing.

In the state shown in FIG. 128, the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined to form a horizontally long display area.

Reference numeral 98 denotes an operation key (touch input type) of a main power switch 97 (not shown) capable of supplying and cutting off a commercial power supply 99 (not shown). The operation keys 98 are arranged in the center of the central operation unit 40M in the left-right direction. After the main power is turned on, the presence of the operation keys 98 is clearly indicated by illumination from below by light-emitting elements (not shown) such as LEDs provided below.

As is clear from FIG. 128, of the various input keys 43M1 to 43M3 provided in the central operation unit 40M of Embodiment 1, the input key 43MC and the input key 43M1 for selecting the composite cooking mode are Also in form 11, it exists as a touch-type input key.

The input key 43MC is a "first input key" for selecting the cooperative cooking mode. Also, the input key 43M1 may be called a "third input key" for selecting the composite cooking mode.

The two input keys 43M2 and 43M3 provided in the central operation unit 40M of the first embodiment are not provided in the central input operation unit 40M in the eleventh embodiment.
Instead, they are provided in the display screen section 300 of the integrated display section 30 in the form of "icons" that appear at appropriate timings. That is, as shown in FIG. 129, when the heating power for induction heating can be adjusted, icon-type input keys 335D and 335U automatically appear as a pair on the left and right.

335D is an input key for decreasing heat power, and 335U is an input key for increasing heat power. Each time one of these input keys 335D and 335U is touched, the heating power during induction heating is changed by one step by the IH control unit 90 . These input keys 335D and 335U are keys for inputting control conditions.

Also, the input keys 335D and 335U appear with their functions changed into an input key for decreasing the output and an input key for increasing the output when the microwave output can be adjusted. Similarly, it also changes to an input key for setting the cooking time. These function changes are executed by the integrated controller MC.

The integrated display unit 30 shown in FIG. 127 has a size larger than that of the integrated display unit 30 of the first embodiment. This is to secure a display area for the input keys 335D and 335U so that the user can reliably perform touch operations.

In FIG. 128, the input key 43MC is an input key for selecting the cooperative cooking mode. When this input key 43MC is pressed after the main power is turned on, it is determined whether the permission condition is satisfied or not is determined by the integrated control device MC. , and the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display section 30 when the conditions are satisfied.

The input key 43M1 is an input key (third input key) for selecting a compound cooking mode. When this input key 43M1 is pressed after turning on the main power, the integrated control determines whether or not the permission conditions are satisfied. The second specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 when it is performed by the device MC and the conditions are satisfied. Further, after the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode is displayed, the identification information 330 corresponding to the hamburger is selected from among a plurality of cooperative cooking menus (for example, "hamburger" and "paella"). used.

43MS is an input key for giving a cooperative cooking mode start command to the integrated control device MC. The input key 43MS also serves as an input key for giving a command to start the composite cooking mode. In other words, it is the "start input key" 43MS for heat cooking that is shared by both the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode.

43MT is an input key for giving a command to stop the heating operation in the cooperative cooking mode to the integrated control device MC. The input key 43MS also serves as an input key for giving a command to stop the heating operation in the composite cooking mode. That is, this input key 43MT is a "stop input key" for heat cooking shared by both the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode.

When the input key 43MS is touch-operated during execution of the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode, the cooperative cooking mode itself is cancelled.
Further, when the input key 43MT is touch-operated during execution of the cooking process in the compound cooking mode, the compound cooking mode itself is cancelled.

As for the input keys 43MC, 43M1 and 43MS, as shown in FIG. 128, the outer shells of the input keys are indicated by broken lines. This indicates that this input key itself has stopped the input function. In other words, in the eleventh embodiment, the integrated control unit MC illuminates the input keys only in situations where input is required from below with a light-emitting element (not shown) such as an LED to clearly indicate the existence of the input keys. show. However, when no input is required, the input keys are hardly conspicuous because the light-emitting elements do not emit light.

As shown in FIG. 128, an input key 43R1 for selecting a "single heating mode" by the right heating section 17HR is arranged on the right operating section 40R corresponding to the right heating section 17HR.
43RT is an input key for stopping the heating operation of the "single heating mode" by the right heating unit 17HR.

Further, an input key 43L1 for selecting the "single heating mode" by the left heating section 17HL is arranged on the left operating section 40L corresponding to the left heating section 17HL.
43LT is an input key for stopping the heating operation of the "single heating mode" by the left heating unit 17HL.

These input keys 43L1, 43R1, 43LT, and 43RT are also illuminated from below by light-emitting elements (not shown) such as LEDs when the input function is enabled, so that the presence of the input keys can be clearly recognized.

Since the example of FIG. 128 is the "cooperation cooking mode" in which the left heating unit 17HR is used in the cooking process 1, the right input key 43R1 also has an input function at this time. Therefore, if the right input key 43R1 is pressed even during execution of the cooperative cooking mode, then another input key (not shown) for selecting a cooking menu is displayed on the right operation unit 40R. An input key (not shown) for starting the heating operation of the right heating unit 17HR also appears at a certain timing.

In the scene of FIG. 128, since the left heating unit 17HL is used in the preheating process and the "cooperation cooking mode" is in progress, the left input key 43L1 does not need to be input at this time. Therefore, the input function is stopped. On the other hand, the input function of the input key 43LT is enabled so that the cooking process 1 can be started after the preheating process.

In the scene of FIG. 128, the additional information 331 is displayed as the information "You can start cooking by pressing the start button" so that the user can arbitrarily set the heating power for the induction heating in the cooking process 1.

FIG. 129 shows a state in which the stage of cooking process 1 has progressed slightly from the scene of FIG. 128 .
In the scene of FIG. 129, additional information 331 is displayed to indicate that the heating power can be adjusted so that the user can arbitrarily set the heating power for the induction heating in the cooking process 1 .

FIG. 130 shows a slightly more advanced situation than the scene of FIG.
On the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, the additional information 331 is displayed as information that "heating will be stopped when the left IH stop button is pressed." That is, when the user presses the input key 43LT of the left operation unit 40L, the cooking process 1 can be ended instantly. After that, the cooking process 2 can be performed.

FIG. 131 will be described. Fig. 131 shows a scene of cooking one of the cooking menus, "RG manual", as a composite cooking mode. “RG manual” is a cooking menu in which the microwave heat source 189 and the oven heat source 188 are used in the cooking process 1, and the oven heat source 188 is used in the subsequent cooking process 2.

In this RG manual, cooking step 1 drives microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188 simultaneously. In that case, if the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B of the oven heating source 188 are always energized at the same time, the heating power is limited to 50%. When the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are alternately energized at predetermined time intervals (eg, 10 seconds or 20 seconds each), they are energized at the rated maximum heating power (eg, 1000 W).

In this RG manual operation, the cooking time for cooking process 1 can be set by the user before the cooking process 1 starts. In addition, in the cooking process 2, the user can set the heat cooking time before the cooking process 2 starts.
FIG. 131 shows a scene where the default setting values are 1 minute for the cooking process 1 and 5 minutes for the cooking process 2 .

As shown in FIG. 131, the integrated display section 30 displays a second specific screen 30SC. This second specific screen 30SC also has a first area 30L on the left, a second area in the center, and a third area 30R on the right. The first area 30L to the third area 30R are the same as those described in the first embodiment, and are display areas whose substantial display area can be changed.

In FIG. 131, 336 is a touch input key (also referred to as an "icon") that allows the user to adjust the heat cooking time of the cooking process 1 displayed in the second area 30M.
A pair of input keys 336 appear above and below the second area. The timing of this appearance is controlled by the integrated controller MC, and is displayed in the second area only when input is required. An input key 336 displayed above the heating time information 30S is for lengthening the cooking time. Conversely, the input key 336 displayed below shortens the heat cooking time.

As shown in FIG. 129, the input key 335D for reducing thermal power on the first specific screen 30SP is the touch input key (also called "icon") 336 in FIG. 131 showing the second specific screen 30SC. is changing to That is, the same input key is used on different specific screens.

In FIG. 131, 337 is a touch input key (also referred to as an “icon”) that allows the user to adjust the heat cooking time of the cooking process 2 displayed in the third area 30R.
A pair of input keys 337 appear above and below the third area. The timing of this appearance is controlled by the integrated controller MC, and is displayed in the third area only when input is required. An input key 337 displayed above the heating time information 30GY is used to lengthen the cooking time. Conversely, the input key 337 displayed below shortens the heat cooking time.

FIG. 131 shows the scene immediately before starting the “RG manual” cooking menu.
As is clear from FIG. 131, the "start input key" 43MS of the composite cooking mode has an effective input function and is illuminated by a light emitting element (not shown) such as an LED.

On the other hand, the "stop input key" 43MT for heat cooking is in a stage where a command to stop the heating operation is not required, so the input function is disabled. And it is not illuminated from below by a light-emitting element (not shown) such as an LED.

As in the cooperative cooking mode, a maximum of 10 minutes of "input waiting time" is set from the moment when the second specific screen 30SC shown in FIG. 131 is displayed. If the input key 43MS is not operated during the input waiting time, error processing is performed, and the display returns to the predetermined waiting initial screen (common screen) 30Z. That is, even in the combined cooking mode, if cooking is not started within a certain period of time (for example, 10 minutes), the display returns to the standby initial screen 30Z for safety reasons.

Since the input key 43MS is not operated from the state of the first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC in this way, if an error is processed and the screen returns to the standby initial screen (common screen) 30Z, the standby state After returning to the display screen 30Z, the main power supply is automatically cut off in a short time (for example, within 2 minutes).

Since the example of FIG. 131 is the “RG manual” cooking menu using only the heating chamber 113, the “single cooking mode” cooking using the left heating unit 17HL can also be set at the stage of FIG. In other words, in the "RG manual" cooking menu, the induction heating source 9 is not used from the beginning, so the left input key 43L1 also has an input function in this scene of FIG. Therefore, even during execution of the RG manual combined cooking mode, by pressing the input key 43L1, it is possible to set the heat cooking using the left heating unit 17HL.

Similarly, cooking in the “single cooking mode” using the right heating section 17HR can also be set at the stage of FIG. Therefore, the right input key 43R1 also has an input function at this time. However, the "single cooking mode" using the right heating unit 17HR and the "single cooking mode" using the left heating unit 17HL cannot always be performed at the same time. For example, if the left heating unit 17HL is used and the thermal power of 2000 W is used first, the power control unit 72 may automatically limit the maximum thermal power that can be used in the right heating unit 17HR to, for example, 1000 W or less. be. Alternatively, when the right heating unit 17HR is used later, the integrated control unit MC may notify the upper limit value of the thermal power by display on the right display unit 31L or voice by the voice synthesizer 95.

The next FIG. 132 shows the scene at the stage where about five minutes have passed since the start of the "RG manual" cooking menu. That is, in the cooking process 1, the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are used to heat for 1 minute, and in the subsequent cooking process 2, the oven heating source 188 is used to cook for 5 minutes. This is the stage when the end time of process 2 is approaching.

As is clear from FIG. 132, the "start input key" 43MS of the composite cooking mode has stopped its input function and is not illuminated by a light emitting element (not shown) such as an LED.

On the other hand, the "stop input key" 43MT for heat cooking has an input function enabled so that the heating operation can be stopped at any time. Illuminated from below by a light-emitting element (not shown) such as an LED, the presence of the input key 43MT can be clearly seen.

Also, since the input key 336 and the input key 337 shown in FIG. 130 are no longer used, their input function is stopped and they are not displayed in the second specific screen 30SC. Or, even if it is displayed, the outline of the touch-type key is displayed only faintly. In FIG. 132, the contours of the input key 336 and the input key 337 are indicated by dashed lines.

FIG. 133 is a modification of the configuration shown in FIGS. 131 and 132. FIG.
In FIG. 133, 390 is a cooking mode display section provided at a position close to the left edge of the integrated display section 30, and functions as a light emitting section illuminated from below by a light source (not shown) such as an LED. .
After the input key 43MC is operated to start the input operation of the cooperative cooking mode, the cooking mode display section 390 is in a light emitting state during the period of the cooperative cooking mode.

391 is a cooking mode display section (light-emitting section) similarly arranged at a position close to the left edge of the integrated display section 30 . After the input key 43M1 is operated to start the input operation of the composite cooking mode, the cooking mode display section 390 is in a light emitting state during the period of the composite cooking mode.

As described above, in the modification shown in FIG. 133, when the integrated control device MC receives an input for selecting the combined cooking mode or the cooperative cooking mode through the input keys 43MC and 43M1 of the input operation unit 40, , the cooking mode display units 390 and 391 are displayed in a light-emitting state corresponding to the combined cooking mode or the cooperative cooking mode. Therefore, when the user performs an input operation toward the input operation unit 40, the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking mode can be easily discriminated, resulting in good operability. In addition, in the case of this modification, the configuration of the second specific screen 30SC for the combined cooking mode and the first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode may be the same. For example, the cooking process information (cooking process information section) 332 may be displayed on both the second specific screen 30SC and the first specific screen 30SP in the cooperative cooking mode.

Summary of Embodiment 11.
As is clear from the above description, the built-in composite heating cooker of Embodiment 1 implements the first invention in the following form. i.e.
Inside the main body 110, there are a heating chamber 113, an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be heated, and a microwave heating source ( a second heating means) 189; an oven heating source (third heating means) 188 that heats the heating chamber 113 by a heating principle different from that of the microwave heating source 189; An integrated control device (control unit) MC that controls the heating means,
The integrated control device MC includes a cooperative cooking mode in which a group consisting of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are started with a time lag, A combined cooking mode in which the wave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are started at the same time or with a time difference, or are automatically switched and driven,
When the integrated control device MC receives the input for selecting the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, the display operation corresponding to the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, that is, as an example, the first specific screen 30SP and the second specific screen 30SC, the user can easily identify the cooking mode.

Furthermore, in the modified example, cooking mode display units (light emitting units) 390 and 391 are provided as display operations corresponding to the combined cooking mode or the cooperative cooking mode by the integrated control device MC.

In any of these configurations, two heating sources such as the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 can be effectively used, and the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can be easily used properly. It is possible to provide a heating cooker that can

As described above, the heating cooker 1 shown in the eleventh embodiment has the following characteristic configuration. i.e.
an induction heating source 9 that heats the object to be heated in the upper part of the main body 110;
a microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113 disposed inside the body 110;
an oven heating source 188 that heats the heating chamber 113 with electrical energy;
an input operation unit 40 located on the upper part of the main body 110 and operated from above;
an integrated display unit (display means) 30 that is located at the top of the main body and displays upward;
an integrated control device MC that receives input from the input operation unit 40 and controls the integrated display unit (display means) 30,
The integrated control device MC includes a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are driven with a time difference, and a cooperative cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189 and the A combined cooking mode that automatically combines and drives the oven heating source 188,
The input operation unit 40 includes a main power switch operation key 98 for commanding power supply to the integrated control device MC, a first input key 43MC for selecting the linked cooking mode, and the combined cooking mode. and an input key 43MS for starting heat cooking in the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode,
The integrated control device MC displays the first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode or the combined screen 30SP on the integrated display unit 30 in response to the operation of the first input key 43MC and the third input key 43M1. When the second specific screen 30SC for the cooking mode is displayed and the input key 43MS for starting the heat cooking is operated during the input waiting period in which the first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC is displayed. , and a configuration for transitioning to the heating and cooking process.

With this configuration, the input operation unit 40 can start a series of cooking from turning on the main power source to starting cooperative cooking and compound cooking. Further, by confirming the display of the first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC and operating the input key 43MS for starting cooking with heat, the process proceeds to the cooking with heat, so that an erroneous operation can be avoided and user-friendliness is improved. .

In addition to the above configuration, the integrated control device MC stores permission conditions for permitting cooking in the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode,
The integrated control device MC is configured to display the first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC when the permission condition is satisfied.
For this reason, it is possible to prevent the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode from becoming inoperable in the middle, which is convenient for the user.

In the above configuration, the input waiting period is limited to a certain period of time (for example, 10 minutes) from the time the first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC is displayed.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inadvertent input waiting (standby) state caused by the user's forgetting to perform an operation or the like, and it is possible to improve safety.

Furthermore, in addition to the above configuration, when the start input key 43MS is not operated, the display of the first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC is stopped, and the standby initial screen 30Z is automatically displayed. It was a configuration that switches automatically.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inadvertent input waiting (standby) state caused by the user's forgetting to perform an operation or the like, and it is possible to improve safety.

Furthermore, in addition to the above configuration, the third input key 43M1 is configured to also serve as an input key for selecting a single cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are used alone. .
For this reason, by providing the second input key 43M1 having two functions in the input operation unit 40, which has a limited installation space, the space between the input keys and the size of the input keys can be increased, resulting in improved operability. contributes to the improvement of

In the above configuration, the input operation unit 40 further has an input key 43MT for stopping heat cooking in the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode,
When the stop input key 43MT is operated, the previously selected setting of the cooperative cooking mode or the combined cooking mode is canceled.
Therefore, in the input operation unit 40, it is possible to start a series of cooking operations from turning on the main power source to starting, ending, and stopping the cooperative cooking and compound cooking. Therefore, it is user-friendly. If the operation key 98 for turning on and off the main power is arranged on the input operation section 40, a series of operations from turning on to turning off the power can be performed on the input operation section 40, further improving operability.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the central operation unit 40M arranged in the left-right central portion of the upper surface of the main body 110 includes the first input key 43MC, the third input key 43M1, and the input key for starting cooking. 43MS, the stop input key 43MT, and an operation key 98 for turning on and off the main power are collectively arranged.
With this configuration, the user can efficiently operate the central operation unit 40M in front of the front side of the heating chamber 113 located in the left-right central portion of the main body 110, and the opening and closing of the door 114 can be performed directly from the central operation unit 40M. It can be easily done at the front side position. Therefore, the overall operability during cooking can be improved.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, the first input key 43MC, the third input key 43M1, the input key 43M2, the start input key 43MS and the stop input key 43MT are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. ,
The display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 is behind the first input key 43MC, the second input key 43M1, the input key 43M2, the start input key 43MS, and the stop input key 43MT. In addition, they were arranged in adjacent positions.

With this configuration, the user can check the display contents of the integrated display section 30 located adjacent to the input operation section 40, and perform a series of operations from turning on the main power source to starting and stopping cooperative cooking and compound cooking. can start cooking. Therefore, it is user-friendly.

In the eleventh embodiment, the upper surface of the input operation unit 40 is an operation surface so that it can be operated from above the main body 110, and the integrated display unit 30 can also be operated from above the main body 110 so that the display screen 30D can be confirmed. is pointing upwards. Therefore, the user can check and operate the main operating parts and the display screen only by directing the line of sight obliquely downward or directly downward on the front side of the top plate 15, so that various cooking using three heat sources can be performed. Even so, the operability can be improved.

In the above configuration, the first specific screen 30SP is further provided with touch-type input keys 335D and 335U for selecting control conditions or heating units in the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode.
The second specific screen 30SC is further provided with touch-type input keys 336 and 337 for selecting control conditions in the cooking process of the composite cooking mode.
For this reason, instead of providing the input keys on the input operation unit 40 where it is difficult to secure a large installation space, the input keys appear in the first specific screen 30SP and the second specific screen 30SC at the timing when input is required. Therefore, the necessary input functions can be ensured without impairing the operability of the various input keys in the input operation unit 40 .

Furthermore, the first specific screen 30SP is further provided with touch-type input keys 335D and 335U for selecting control conditions or heating units in the cooking process of the linked cooking mode,
The input key 335D is configured to be shared as the input means 336 for setting control conditions on the second specific screen 30SC.
Therefore, necessary input functions can be ensured without impairing the operability of various input keys in the input operation unit 40 .

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the second input key 43M1 is an input key for selecting a single cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are used alone. , and also an input key for selecting the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode.
For this reason, rather than providing important input keys individually on the input operation unit 40 where it is difficult to secure a large installation space, one second input key 43M1 is provided with three functions. There is room for installation intervals and sizes, further contributing to the improvement of operability.

Further, the input operation unit 40 is arranged on the upper surface of the main body 110, and includes the operation unit of the first selection means (input key) 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, and the operation unit of the composite cooking mode. An operation unit for second selection means (input key) 43M1 for selecting a cooking mode and an operation unit for input means (input key) 43MS for starting heat cooking,
The operation part of the first selection means 43MC is arranged corresponding to the first area 30L of the integrated display part 30 and the first specific screen 30SP.
Therefore, when operating the first selection means 43MC, it is easy for the user to confirm the name (identification information 330) of the linked cooking menu displayed in the first area 30L, resulting in good operability for the user.

In the eleventh embodiment described above, the entire input operation unit 40 is always exposed when viewed from above the main body 110, but it may be stored above the main body 110 when not in use.
For example, a space that can accommodate at least the central operation unit 40M may be provided below the top plate 15, and the input operation unit 40 may be pulled forward to be operated when in use.

Embodiment 12.
134 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker according to Embodiment 12 of the present invention. FIG. Parts that are the same as or correspond to the configurations of Embodiments 1 to 11 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

FIG. 134 will be described.
A feature of the twelfth embodiment is that cooking in a combined cooking mode using the heating chamber 113 can be performed during cooking by the induction heating source 9 .

FIG. 134 shows a series of control steps in the integrated control device MC from when the input key 43MC of the input operation unit 40 is pressed until the cooking process in the composite cooking mode is completed. However, control operations corresponding to the operations of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B, which are the main parts of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 for detecting opening/closing of the door 114 of the heating chamber 113, are omitted from the drawing.

FIG. 134 shows an example of a control method that allows the use of the combined cooking mode during the induction heating (single cooking mode) in the left heating unit 17HL.
Step SX1 is a step in which the integrated control device MC receives the operation signal of the input key 43MC. Next, the maximum heating power of the cooking process performed by the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9 and the power regulation value according to the total power regulation signal received via the wireless communication unit 49, or the power control unit 72 Check the peak cut set value set by the user (SX2).

In the next step SX3, it is determined whether or not the various power regulation values and peak cut set values described above will be exceeded when the combined cooking mode is started.
For example, if the left heating unit 17HL is operating with a thermal power of 1500 W and the maximum power consumption in the combined cooking mode is preset to 3000 W, 4500 W or more is required. For example, the power consumption of the two cooling fans 60 and 61 is added.

As described in the first embodiment, if the maximum power consumption (total power consumption) constituting the "permission condition" is 5000 W, the determination at step SX3 is "Yes". Temporarily, when it is "No", it progresses to disapproval processing SX14. The disapproval processing here means temporarily displaying a message to the effect that "the amount of electric power is exceeded and RG cooking cannot be performed at present" on the third specific screen 30ST displayed on the integrated display unit 30, or performing a voice This means that the synthesizing device 95 issues a similar warning.

If it is determined in step SX3 that the "permission condition" is satisfied, the process proceeds to step SX4.
At step SX4, the integrated controller MC permits execution of the complex cooking mode and issues all necessary commands. Therefore, the third specific screen 30ST displayed on the integrated display section 30 disappears, and the second specific screen 30SC is displayed on the integrated display section 30 instead.

After that, on the second specific screen 30SC, one composite cooking menu that is defaulted as the composite cooking menu is displayed. For example, the name of the cooking menu "RG cooking" is displayed. The cooking menu “RG cooking” uses the heating chamber 113 to cook by combining microwave heating and oven heating. In addition to this cooking menu, one or two other cooking menu candidates may be displayed at the same time.

When the user selects a compound cooking menu with input key 43M1 (step SX5) and gives a heating start command with input key 43MS (step SX6), the compound cooking mode is started (SX7).
When the executed composite cooking menu passes an arbitrary time set by the user or a certain time predetermined by the integrated control device MC side, the process advances to step SX10 via step SX9, and the cooking process automatically starts. Stop.

It should be noted that if the user has performed an operation to stop cooking in the middle using the input key 43MT, a "No" determination is made in step SX, and the process proceeds to step SX10.
At step SX11, the second specific screen 30SC displays that the cooking process of the composite cooking mode has ended. Also, in conjunction with this, the voice synthesizer 95 may notify that the cooking is finished.

If the cooking process of the left heating unit 17HL by the induction heating source 9 has not yet been completed at the stage of step SX11, the determination at step SX12 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to the next step SX13. Then, the second specific screen 30SC disappears from the integrated display section 30, and the third specific screen 30ST is displayed again instead.

Therefore, according to the twelfth embodiment, cooking in the combined cooking mode using the heating chamber 113 can be performed during cooking by the induction heating source 9, so that the user can combine the induction heating source and the microwave heating source. Composite cooking by the oven heating source can be performed concurrently, improving convenience.

Summary of Embodiment 12.
As described above, in the heating cooker 1 shown in the twelfth embodiment, the third invention is implemented by the following configuration. i.e.
a heating chamber 113 inside the body 110;
an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be heated in the upper part of the main body 110;
a microwave heating source (second heating means) 189 for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
an oven heating source (third heating means) 188 that heats the heating chamber 113 by a heating principle different from that of the second heating means 189;
an input operation unit 40;
display means including an integrated display section 30, a left display section 31L, and a right display section 31R;
An integrated control device MC that controls the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188,
The integrated control device MC includes a group consisting of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, a cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 is driven with a time difference, and a microwave heating mode. A combined cooking mode in which the heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven simultaneously or with a time difference, or are automatically switched and driven, the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating and a single cooking mode in which each of the sources 188 is driven independently,
The integrated control device MC, in the input operation unit 40,
(1) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected, displaying the first specific screen 30SP on the display means;
(2) when the combined cooking mode is selected, displaying the second specific screen 30SC on the display means;
(3) when the single cooking mode using the induction heating source 9 is selected, the third specific screen 30ST is displayed on the display means;
The input operation unit 40 is arranged on the upper surface of the main body 110 and includes individual operation units 40L and 40R for the induction heating source 9 and a cooperative operation unit 40MC,
The cooperative operation unit 40MC includes first input means 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, second input means 43M1 for selecting the combined cooking mode, and input means 43MS for starting heat cooking. place and
A single cooking mode using the first heating means 9 can be selected by the individual operation units 40L and 40R,
A plurality of compound cooking menus that can be executed in the compound cooking mode by the programs of the individual compound cooking menus stored in the integrated control device MC are selected according to the heating means to be driven and the order of driving the microwave heating source 189. pre-determined from among the oven heating sources 188,
While the second specific screen 30SC is displayed, the microwave heating source 189 can It is a configuration that allows you to select a single cooking mode that uses .
Also, by selecting a specific composite cooking menu (for example, “oven”), a single cooking mode using the oven heat source 188 can be selected.

With this configuration, cooking in the combined cooking mode can be executed during cooking by the induction heating source 9, thereby further improving convenience for the user.

Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment as well, when the cooperative cooking mode is selected by the first input means 43MC, the integrated control device MC determines whether or not the permission conditions are satisfied, and if the permission conditions are satisfied, is configured to display the second specific screen 30SC.
Further, when the composite cooking mode is selected by the second input means 43M1, it is determined whether or not the permission condition is satisfied, and if the permission condition is satisfied, the second specific screen is displayed. be.
Therefore, the user can avoid situations in which the cooking process in the cooperative cooking mode or the combined cooking mode is unexpectedly stopped due to power shortage or the heating operation is restricted.

Further, when the combined cooking mode is selected while the single cooking mode is being executed by the induction heating source 9, the integrated control device MC displays the second specific screen instead of displaying the third specific screen 30ST. It is configured to display the screen 30SC and wait for input of the composite cooking mode (see steps SX6 and SX7 in FIG. 133).
Therefore, when cooking in the combined cooking mode is executed during cooking by the induction heating source 9, the second specific screen 30SC is automatically displayed instead of the display of the third specific screen 30ST, and the user's operation is performed. The user's convenience can be further improved by providing assistance and transmitting necessary cooking information.

Embodiment 13.
135 is a plan view of the front portion of the heating cooker according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention for explaining the arrangement around the input operation section and integrated display section. FIG.
136 is an enlarged plan view for explaining a change in display contents of the integrated display section in the heating cooker of FIG. 134. FIG.

FIG. 135 will be described.
The thirteenth embodiment is characterized in that independent cooking by the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 can be performed by an independent RG operation section 40RG.

135 is an enlarged plan view of a portion corresponding to FIG. 93 of Embodiment 1. FIG.
In the thirteenth embodiment, the central operation unit 40M includes various input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2, 43MS and 43MT for the linked cooking menu.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the input operation section 40 includes three of a right operation section 40R (not shown), a central operation section 40M, and a left operation section 40L (not shown). Although not shown, the operation keys (touch input type) 98 of the main power switch 97 are located on the upper surface of the main body 110 (not shown) as in the central operation unit 40M, as in the first embodiment. .

40RG is an RG operation section provided adjacent to the left end of the central operation section 40M. This RG operation unit 40RG is slightly different from the RG operation unit 40MG described in the fourth embodiment.

The RG operation unit 40RG is commonly used when the “single cooking mode” using either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 is performed.
In addition, the RG operation unit 40RG cannot be used when implementing a "combined cooking mode" that uses either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 (simultaneously, with a time difference, or automatically switching). . In the compound cooking mode, similarly to the first embodiment, it is necessary to first press the input key 43M1.

On the other hand, since the central operation unit 40M is commonly used when executing the "cooking menu" using either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, the cooperative operation unit 40MC is. Also, the input keys 43M1, 43M2, 43M3 and 43MS are used for input in the composite cooking mode.

In the first embodiment, the central operation unit 40M is used to input the "cooking mode" of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. It is held by an operation unit 146 (not shown). As described in the second embodiment, the front operation portion 146 is an operation portion that is supported by the front portion of the main body 110 and protrudes forward to be operated by the user.

In FIG. 135, 43MS is a touch-type input key that can command the start of the heating operation by the linked cooking menu when the linked cooking menu using the heating chamber 113 is selected. This input type key 43MS is slightly different from the function of the input type key 43MS of the first embodiment, and has two functions of starting and stopping heat cooking.

When the input key 43MS is pressed once by the user, it transmits a command signal to start the heating operation to the integrated control device MC, and when it is pressed again after that, it transmits a command signal to stop the heating operation. Depending on the number of times you operate in this order, different signals will be sent. This point is different from the input key 43MS of the first embodiment.

As in the first embodiment, the screen configuration of the integrated display section 30 is composed of a first area (left area) 30L, a second area (central area) 30M, and a third area 30R.

43MC is not an input key to select using a combined cooking mode using oven heat source 188 and microwave heat source 189. This input key 43MC is an input key for commanding only display of the linked cooking menu. When this input key 43MC is pressed most quickly after turning on the main power, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed.
When the input key 43M1 is pressed before the input key 43MC, the second specific screen is displayed.

Next, FIG. 135 will be described.
The independent RG operation unit 40RG is not surrounded by a special frame when viewed from above the main body 110 (not shown). In FIG. 134, the range of the RG operation unit 40RG is enclosed by a solid line frame.

351 is a touch-type or press-type input key. This input key selects the "single cooking mode" using either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188. When this input key 351 is pressed most quickly after the main power is turned on, the third cooking mode is selected. A specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display section 30 .

Reference numeral 352 denotes an input key for giving a command to start the cooking process of the "single cooking mode" to the integrated control device MC, and is a touch-type or press-type input key.
This input key 352 also issues a command to stop the cooking process in the "single cooking mode". When the input key 352 is pressed once by the user, it transmits a command signal to start the heating operation to the integrated control device MC, and when it is pressed again after that, it transmits a command signal to stop the heating operation. A different signal is generated according to the number of operations performed in this order. Instead of transmitting two types of signals themselves, the integrated control device MC performs discrimination processing on the received order of "start" and "stop".

The input keys 351 and 352 are illuminated by a light source (not shown) such as a light emitting diode (LED) installed below and appear to glow during the transition to the single cooking mode.

In addition, as described in Embodiment 1, the individual light-emitting portions 270 to 278 illuminated by light sources (not shown) such as light-emitting diodes are aligned horizontally while the input function of each input key is valid. are placed in These individual light emitting sections 270 to 278 have the same functions as the individual light emitting sections 27M1 to 27M6 provided in the first embodiment.

As in the first embodiment, a pair of input keys 43M1 are provided at positions corresponding to the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30, and a pair of input keys 43M2 are also provided in the second area 30M.
43M3 is an input key similarly corresponding to the first area 30R. These input keys 43M1 to 43M3 are also touch type keys.

Next, FIG. 136 will be described.
FIG. 136 explains changes in the display contents of the integrated display section 30 .
First, the following description assumes that one cooking menu is being performed in the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9 . The cooking menu in this case may be either the single cooking mode or the cooperative cooking mode.

FIG. 136(A) shows an example in which the cooking menu is "simmered" in the single cooking mode.
Induction heating cooking is started with the left operation unit 40L, and the cooking process takes 30 minutes. A schematic diagram 280 of a container such as a pot is displayed in the first area 30L of the third specific screen 30ST.
30G is a note displayed across the second area 30M and the third area 30R. It is displayed that 30 minutes of simmering cooking is in progress. In this case, stew cooking means induction heating with a small heat power of about 100 W to 300 W, but in order to change the heating intensity, the heat power may be repeatedly changed (pulsated) in a short time.

During the single cooking mode, the input keys 351, 352 are illuminated by light sources (not shown) such as light emitting diodes, and the corresponding two individual light emitting portions 271, 272 are also illuminated. That is, the input keys 351 and 352 indicate that they have an input function.

When the input key 351 is pressed, the integrated controller MC determines whether or not to permit the single cooking mode.
The "permission conditions" for this determination are the following three.
(1) A cooking menu using the heating chamber 113 is not set in the current cooking process.
(2) The peak cut value setting is 5000 W or more.
(3) When there is a power reduction command signal received from an external "integrated information management device" or "integrated power control device" (HEMS controller), etc., the peak cut value of the reduction command is 5000W or more.

If the cooperative cooking mode is implemented and the cooking process 1 uses the heating chamber 113, the current cooking process is the cooking process 2, and cooking is performed in the "non-heating chamber 113" such as the left heating unit 17HL or the right heating unit 17HR. If so, it satisfies the permission condition (1) above.

It should be noted that since the determination of the permission condition cannot be completed at the moment the input key 351 is pressed, upon receiving the signal of the input key 351, the integrated control device MC causes the speech synthesizer 95 to perform the following: It is good to issue a voice guide such as "I'm making a judgment now. Please wait a moment."

When all of the above three "permission conditions" are satisfied, the single cooking mode is permitted. Therefore, when the display of the cooperative cooking mode currently being implemented does not have a large adverse effect, the third specific screen 30ST is promptly displayed. That is, the state of FIG. 136(A) is automatically switched to the state of FIG. 136(B).

In the state of FIG. 136(B), "oven" is displayed as the cooking menu in the first area 30L of the third specific screen 30ST, because this is the default setting.
For example, when the user wants to execute "Range Manual", it is necessary to press the input key 351 once or several times after the third specific screen 30ST is displayed.

The integrated control device MC displays one single cooking menu using either the oven heating source 188 or the microwave heating source 189 in the first area 30L each time the input key 351 is pressed once. .

For example, when the user presses the input key 352 with the display as shown in FIG. 136(B), the cooking menu is "oven" and the single cooking mode is started.
At the stage of FIG. 136(B), the heating target temperature of the heating chamber 113 is set to 180° C. and the heating time is set to 10 minutes. However, by appropriately pressing the input keys 43M2 and 43M2, the heating time information 30S and the heating time information 30GY can be appropriately changed. This may be done after the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are energized and the actual heating operation is started.

On the integrated display section 30, the display of the third specific screen 30ST in FIG. However, as in this case, it may not be desirable to occupy the integrated display unit 30 for 10 minutes until the oven cooking is finished. For example, it is a case where an abnormality detection is notified on the first specific screen 30SP. Alternatively, it is a case where the time to shift to the next cooking process is approaching and it is better for the user to know in advance and prepare.

In such a case, the integrated control device MC automatically returns the contents of the integrated display section 30 to the first specific screen 30SP or displays the third specific screen 30ST shown in FIG. 136(A) whenever necessary. You can change it back to

Although not shown, the thirteenth embodiment has the left display section 31L and the right display section 31R as described in the first embodiment. The state shown in FIG. 136(B) is maintained while the "oven" single cooking mode is displayed on the left display portion 31L. In other words, it is determined that even if the integrated display section 30 is occupied in the "oven" single cooking mode, it does not hinder confirmation of the cooking process of the induction heating cooking.
The present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the content displayed on the integrated display unit 30 on the left display unit 31L or the right display unit 31R, and the content such as the cooking progress state of the "oven" single cooking mode, They may be displayed alternately. For example, the display may be automatically switched every 10 seconds or so.

When the cooking process of the single cooking menu of "oven" progresses and ends as planned after 10 minutes, the integrated controller MC changes the contents of the integrated display section 30 from the state shown in FIG. 136(B) to the state shown in FIG. do. That is, the screen is returned to the initial third specific screen 30ST. Then, as shown in FIG. 136(C), a cautionary message 30G saying "Stewed and cooked for another 20 minutes" is displayed.

In the above configuration, during the induction heating cooking by the left heating unit 17HL, the cooking process of the single cooking menu of "oven" is started. The third specific screen 30ST for oven cooking has become a competing relationship.
Therefore, the display of the third specific screen 30ST of the induction heating cooking process in the integrated display section 30 may be stopped when the single cooking menu of “oven” is selected with the input key 351 . After that, it may be displayed on the left side display section 31L.

Furthermore, as another method, even after the third specific screen 30ST for oven heating cooking has been displayed on the integrated display unit 30 and the cooking process has started, the user can directly touch the third specific screen 30ST to turn left or right. The display screen may be switched directly by sliding in the direction.
For example, the touch gesture determination device 302 described in the fifth embodiment may be provided so that the user can arbitrarily switch the display screen 30D of the integrated display screen 30. FIG.

Summary of the thirteenth embodiment.
As described above, in the heating cooker 1 shown in the thirteenth embodiment, the ninth invention is implemented by the following configuration. i.e.
a heating chamber 113 inside the body 110;
an induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for heating the object to be heated in the upper part of the main body 110;
a microwave heating source (second heating means) 189 for heating the food contained in the heating chamber 113;
an oven heating source (third heating means) 188 that heats the heating chamber 113 by a heating principle different from that of the second heating means 189;
an input operation unit 40;
display means comprising an integrated display section 30, a left display section 31L and a right display section 31R;
An integrated control device MC that controls the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188,
The integrated control device MC includes a group consisting of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, a cooperative cooking mode in which the induction heating source 9 is driven with a time difference, and a microwave heating mode. A combined cooking mode in which the heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven simultaneously or with a time difference, or are automatically switched and driven, the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating and a single cooking mode in which each of the sources 188 is driven independently,
The integrated control device MC, in the input operation unit 40,
(1) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected, displaying the first specific screen 30SP on the display means;
(2) when the combined cooking mode is selected, displaying the second specific screen 30SC on the display means;
(3) when the single cooking mode using the induction heating source 9 is selected, the third specific screen 30ST is displayed on the display means;
The input operation unit 40 is arranged on the upper surface of the main body 110, and includes individual operation units 40L and 40R for the first heating means 9, and for the single cooking mode of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. RG operation unit 40RG and cooperation operation unit 40MC,
The cooperative operation unit 40MC includes first input means 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, second input means 43M1 for selecting the combined cooking mode, and input means 43MS for starting heat cooking. place and
The RG operation unit 40RG includes a fourth input means (input key) 351 for selecting the single cooking mode of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and a fifth input key for starting cooking in the single cooking mode. and an input means (input key) 352 of
A single cooking mode using the induction heating source 9 can be selected by the individual operation units 40L and 40R,
A plurality of compound cooking menus that can be executed in the compound cooking mode by the programs of the individual compound cooking menus stored in the integrated control device MC are selected according to the heating means to be driven and the order of driving the microwave heating source 189. pre-determined from among the oven heating sources 188,
With the first specific screen 30ST displayed, by selecting the specific single cooking menu (for example, "warm") with the fourth input means 351, single cooking using the microwave heating source 189 is performed. It is a configuration in which the mode can be selected.
Further, by selecting a specific single cooking menu (for example, “oven”) with the fourth input means 351, a single cooking mode using the oven heat source 188 can be selected.
In other words, in parallel with cooking by the induction heating source 9, independent cooking by the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 can be performed via the unique RG operation unit 40RG.

With this configuration, the cooking menu of the single cooking mode by the microwave heat source 189 or the oven heat source 188 can be executed during the heat cooking by the induction heat source 9, and the user's convenience can be further improved.

In the thirteenth embodiment, since the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 can be driven simultaneously or with a time difference, or can be automatically switched and driven, a cooking menu of a combined cooking mode can be executed. It is possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can effectively utilize three heat sources and can handle a wide variety of cooking.

(Other related inventions)
As related inventions implemented in the heating cooker 1 shown in Embodiments 1 to 13, the main ones are as follows.

(Part 1)
a first heating means (induction heating source) 9;
a second heating means (microwave heating source) 189 for cooking in the heating chamber 113 provided inside the main body 110;
a control unit (integrated control device) MC that controls the first heating means 9 and the second heating means;
display means (integrated display section 30, left display section 31L, right display section 31R);
An input operation unit 40 that receives input from the user,
The control unit MC has a cooperative cooking program for executing a cooperative cooking menu in which one cooking is performed by driving the first heating means and the second heating means with a time difference,
The combined heating cooker, wherein the control unit MC determines whether or not a permission condition for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode is satisfied before starting the heating operation according to the cooperative cooking menu.

Further, the cooperative cooking program includes a cooking step 1 using one of the first heating means and the second heating means, and a cooking step using the other, which is performed after the cooking step 1. 2. A composite heating cooker having 2.

Further, the control unit MC displays, on the display means, a display requesting an input necessary for shifting to the cooperative cooking mode when the permission condition is satisfied.
Further, the control unit MC displays the first specific screen 30SP for the linked cooking mode on the display means when the permission condition is satisfied.

According to the heating cooker having this configuration, it is possible to obtain a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide variety of heat cooking using three heating means.
In addition, since the cooperative cooking mode can be executed only when the permission conditions are satisfied, it is possible to avoid inadvertently stopping the cooperative cooking at a stage unintended by the user or being restricted.

(Part 2)
a main body 110 having a top plate 15 and containing a heating chamber 113;
a first heating means (induction heating source) 9 for heating the object to be heated placed on the top plate 15;
a second heating means (microwave heating source) 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113;
a control unit (integrated control device) MC that controls the first heating means and the second heating means;
an input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the control unit MC;
display means ((integrated display unit 30, left display unit 31L, right display unit 31R);
a door 114 for freely opening and closing the opening of the heating chamber 113;
A door closing detection unit 139 that detects opening of the door 114,
The control unit MC has a function of executing a cooperative cooking mode in which a cooking process 1 using the first heating means and a cooking process 2 using the second heating means are sequentially performed,
The control unit MC determines whether a permission condition is satisfied before starting the heating operation in the cooperative cooking mode, and permits transition to the cooperative cooking mode when the permission condition is satisfied. ,
When receiving a command to start the cooperative cooking mode, the control unit MC starts the cooking process 1 regardless of the door open/close signal from the door closing detection unit 139,
The control unit MC starts the cooking process 2 when the cooking process 1 is completed, the door 114 is closed, and an instruction to start the cooking process 2 is received. A composite heating cooker characterized by:

Further, the control unit MC determines whether or not a permission condition is satisfied before starting the heating operation in the cooperative cooking mode, and when the permission condition is satisfied, the control unit MC instructs the transition to the cooperative cooking mode. allow,
When the control unit MC receives a command to shift to the linked cooking mode, the control unit MC can start the cooking process 1 regardless of the door open/close signal from the door closing detection unit,
The controller MC starts the cooking process 2 when the cooking process 1 is completed, the door 114 is closed, and an instruction to start the cooking process 2 is received. ,
The control unit MC detects the state in which the door 114 is once opened and then closed by a signal from the door closing detection unit. A composite heating cooker configured to perform a composite cooking mode.

Further, when the door 114 is closed when the cooking process 1 is finished, the control unit MC detects that the door 114 is once opened after that, and furthermore, the door 114 is closed after that. A composite heating cooker characterized by starting said cooking process 2 when receiving a command to start said cooking process 2 in said state.

According to the heating cooker having this configuration, it is possible to obtain a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide variety of heat cooking by using the microwave heating source 189 together.
Further, when a command to shift to the linked cooking mode is received, the cooking process 1 in the linked cooking mode can be started regardless of whether the door is opened or closed. However, efficient cooking can be avoided.

(Part 3)
a first heating means (induction heating source) 9 for heating the object to be heated from below in the upper part of the main body 110;
a second heating means (microwave heating source) 189 for heating the heating chamber 113 arranged inside the main body 110;
a third heating means (oven heating source) 188 for heating the heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40;
A control unit (integrated control device) MC that controls the first, second, and third heating means respectively,
The first heating means 9 has a right heating portion 17HR located in the upper right portion of the main body 110 and a left heating portion 17HL located in the left portion,
The input operation unit 40 has dedicated operation units 40L and 40R for the right heating unit 17HR and the left heating unit 17HL, and a common operation unit 40M for the first, second and third heating means,
The control unit MC has a function of performing a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188 and the first heating means 9 are driven with a time lag. death,
The control unit MC further has a function of performing a combined cooking mode in which the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188 are driven simultaneously or automatically with a time lag,
The combined heating cooker, wherein the shared operation unit 40M includes selection means (43MC, 43M1) for selecting either one of the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode.

According to this configuration, the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking can be easily started using the shared operation unit 40M. In other words, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite heating cooker that has three heating sources and can handle a wide range of cooking menus without impairing the user's operability.

Further, the input operation unit 40 includes first operation units 40L and 40R dedicated to the first heating means 9 and a second operation unit 40M2 shared by the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188 ( See FIG. 17) and
The time difference at which the first heating means 9 and the two groups of the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188 are started to be driven is the time difference between the first operation portions 40L and 40R and the A combined heating cooker characterized in that the second operation unit 40M2 can be adjusted by the timing of operation by the user has been disclosed.

According to this configuration, the user can freely provide a cooking pause period between the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2 in the linked cooking mode, and can check the finished state of cooking in the cooking process 1 and perform cooking for the cooking process 2. Preparatory work, etc. can be performed.

(Part 4)
a first heating means 9 for heating the object to be heated from below in the upper part of the main body 110;
a second heating means 189 for supplying microwaves to a heating chamber 113 located inside said body;
a third heating means 188 for heating the heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40;
a plurality of display means 30, 31L, 31R;
a control unit MC that controls the first, second, and third heating means,
The first heating means 9 has a right heating portion 17HR located in the upper right portion of the main body 110 and a left heating portion 17HL located in the left portion,
The display means 30 has dedicated display parts 31L and 31R for the right heating part 17HR and the left heating part 17HL, and an integrated display part 30 shared by the first, second and third heating means. ,
The control unit MC has a function of performing a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188 and the first heating means 9 are driven with a time lag. death,
The control unit MC further has a function of performing a combined cooking mode in which the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188 are driven simultaneously or automatically with a time lag,
In the integrated display unit 30 or the dedicated display units 31L and 31R, a first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode and a second specific screen of the composite cooking mode are displayed according to the selection of the cooperative cooking mode and the composite cooking mode. A composite heating cooker characterized in that the screen 30SC and the screen 30SC are displayed alternatively.

According to this configuration, the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking can be confirmed on the first specific screen and the second specific screen, respectively. In other words, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite heating cooker that can use three heat sources singly or in combination without impairing the operability of the user, and that can handle a wide range of cooking menus.

(Part 5)
a first heating means 9 for heating the object to be heated from below in the upper part of the main body 110;
a second heating means 189 for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 113 inside said body 110;
a third heating means 188 for heating the heating chamber 113;
cooking mode selection means 43MC, 43M1, 43L5, 43R5;
a plurality of display means 30, 31L, 31R;
a control unit MC that controls the first, second, and third heating means 9, 189, and 188, respectively;
The first heating means 9 has a right heating portion 17HR located in the upper right portion of the main body 110 and a left heating portion 17hL located in the left portion,
The display means has dedicated display parts 31L and 31R for the right heating part and the left heating part, and an integrated display part 30 shared by the first, second and third heating means,
The control unit MC
(1) a single cooking mode in which the first, second and third heating means 9, 189 and 188 are individually driven;
(2) a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188 and the first heating means 9 are driven with a time difference;
(3) a combined cooking mode in which the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188 are driven simultaneously or automatically with a time lag;
has the function of
The display means 30, 31L, 31R are used for inputting or confirming control conditions according to one cooking mode selected by the selection means from among the single cooking mode, the cooperative cooking mode, and the combined cooking mode. specified screens 30SP, 30SPL, and 30SPR.

According to this configuration, it is possible to confirm the contents of the control conditions displayed on the first and second specific screens 30SP and 30SC for the cooperative cooking mode and the compound cooking. In other words, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite heating cooker that can use the three heat sources singly or in combination without impairing the user's operability, and that can handle a wide range of cooking menus.

(Part 6)
a first heating means (induction heating source) 9 for heating the object to be heated from below in the upper part of the main body;
a second heating means (microwave heating source) 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113 disposed inside the main body 110;
a third heating means (oven heating source) 188 for heating the heating chamber;
an input operation unit 40;
a control unit MC that controls the first, second, and third heating means,
The input operation unit 40 has dedicated operation units 40L and 40R for the first heating means and a common operation unit 40M (40M2) for the first, second and third heating means,
The control unit MC has a function of performing a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188 and the first heating means 9 are driven with a time lag. death,
The control unit MC further has a function of performing a combined cooking mode in which the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188 are used together or automatically switched,
The shared operation unit 40M (40M2) comprises a first selection means (43MC) for selecting the cooperative cooking mode and a second selection means (43M1) for selecting a compound cooking menu,
After the main power supply is supplied to the control unit MC, when the input operation of the first selection means 9 is performed before the second selection means (43M1), (the first specific screen 30SP is displayed and) the input process of the cooperative cooking mode is started,
After the main power is supplied, if the input operation of the second selection means 189 is performed before the first selection means (43MC) (the second specific screen 30SC is displayed), the complex A combined heating cooker is disclosed in which a cooking mode input step is initiated.

According to this configuration, it is possible to confirm the contents of the control conditions for the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking through the first and second specific screens 30SP and 30SC, centering on the shared operation section 40M (40M2). In other words, by operating various selection means of the common operation unit 40M (40M2) by the user, the three heating sources can be used singly or in combination, making it possible to handle a wide range of cooking menus. A cooker can be realized.

Furthermore, on the upper surface of the main body 110, display means 30 is further provided adjacent to the shared operation unit 40M (40M2),
The shared operation unit 40M (40M2) has the second selection means (43M1) arranged next to the first selection means (43MC),
A third selection means (43M2) is provided on the opposite side of the first selection means (43MC) across the second selection means,
In the cooperative cooking mode, the first selection means (43MC) displays a plurality of cooperative cooking menus on the display means 30, the second selection means (43M1) selects one cooperative cooking menu, and the A third selection means (43M2) has an input step of selecting the control condition of the linked cooking mode or the heating part of the first heating means,
The composite cooking mode is an input for displaying a composite cooking menu on the display means 30 by the second selection means (43M1) and selecting control conditions for the composite cooking mode by the third selection means (43M2). It was a configuration with a process.

With this configuration, while using one common operation unit 40M (40M2), the first selection means (43MC) and the second selection means (43M1) are operated in accordance with the order in which the first selection means (43MC) and the second selection means (43M1) are operated first. You can choose between cooking mode and combined cooking mode. Therefore, even in a situation where it is difficult to secure a large space for the operation unit, it is possible to realize a highly convenient composite heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking menus by sharing the operation unit.

(Part 7)
a first heating means (induction heating source) 9 for heating the object to be heated from below in the upper part of the main body 110;
a second heating means (microwave heating source) 189 that supplies microwaves to the heating chamber 113 arranged inside the main body;
a third heating means (oven heating source) 188 for heating the heating chamber;
an input operation unit 40;
display means (integrated display section 30, left display section 31L, right display section 31R);
an integrated control device MC that controls the first, second, and third heating means 9, 189, and 188, respectively;
The integrated control device MC has a function of performing a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188 and the first heating means 9 are driven with a time lag. have
The integrated control device MC further has a function of performing a combined cooking mode in which the second heating means 189 and the third heating means 188 are driven simultaneously, driven with a time difference, or automatically switched,
The operation unit 40 includes third selection means 43L1 and 43R1 for selecting the first heating means 9, first selection means 43MC for selecting the linked cooking mode, and second selection means for selecting a composite cooking menu. and a selection means 43M1,
After the main power is supplied, the integrated control device MC displays the initial screen (see FIG. 36) at a stage where none of the first, second and third selection means 9, 189 and 188 can be selected. means (integrated display unit 30, left display unit 31L, right display unit 31R),
After the initial screen is displayed, when the input operation of the first selection means 43MC is started before the third selection means 43L1, 43R1 and the second selection means 43M1, the cooperation cooking mode is activated. The first specific screen 30SP for input is displayed,
After the main power is supplied, the integrated control device MC starts the input operation of the second selection means 43M1 before the third selection means 43L1, 43R1 and the first selection means 43MC. In this case, the second specific screen 30SC for inputting the composite cooking mode is displayed.

According to this configuration, centering on the first to third selection means 43L1, 43R1, 43MC, 43M1 displayed on the display means (integrated display section 30, left display section 31L, right display section 31R), individual ( A heating) cooking mode, a cooperative cooking mode and a combined cooking mode can be implemented respectively. Therefore, the three heating sources can be used singly or in combination, and a highly convenient composite heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking menus can be realized.

Other embodiments.
In Embodiment 1, regarding the induction heating source 9 that is first used in the (first) cooperative cooking menu (see FIG. 45), the operation other than the cooperative cooking menu is prohibited or restricted from the input operation unit 40. Although the left heating section 17HL and the right heating section 17HR have been described, the central heating section 17HM shown in the fifth embodiment may also be included.

Furthermore, in the second cooperative cooking menu (see FIG. 45), the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, or both of them are driven simultaneously to start the cooking process. 189 or oven heating source 188, or both, may be prohibited or restricted from being operated by menus other than the cooperative cooking menu. In both the first cooperative cooking menu and the second cooperative cooking menu, it is possible to perform a wide range of cooking using a plurality of heating means in the cooperative cooking menu by preferentially securing the heat source required in the cooking process. .

In the description of the first to thirteenth embodiments, when the integrated control device MC receives an input for selecting the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, as a display operation corresponding to the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode , the first display screen 30SP dedicated to the cooperative cooking mode is displayed, or the second display screen 30SC dedicated to the combined cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display section 30, the left side display section 31L, or the like.
Instead of such a mode of switching the entire screen, the basic configuration of the first display screen 30SP and the second display screen 30SC may be unified, and the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking mode may be clearly distinguished. good.

For example, as described with reference to FIG. 104 of Embodiment 5, the cooperative cooking menu display information 362 indicating that the cooperative cooking menu is being displayed may be displayed in the combined cooking mode as well. That is, by clearly displaying the cooking modes of "compound cooking" and "cooperative cooking", it becomes easy to distinguish between the two display screens.

Further, a light-emitting display unit such as the light-emitting display unit 27L described in the first embodiment is provided in each of the display units for the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, and when one of them emits light, It is sufficient to make it possible to recognize the cooking mode on the side emitting light. This idea is also shown in the modification shown in FIG. 133 of the eleventh embodiment. In FIG. 133, a cooking mode display unit (light emitting unit) 390 that is illuminated when the cooperative cooking mode is selected is provided at a position adjacent to the integrated display unit 30, and when the combined cooking mode is selected. , a cooking mode display portion (light emitting portion) 391 illuminated by light is provided.
As described above, when implementing the present invention, the first display screen 30SP and the second display screen 30SC described in the first embodiment and the like are not necessarily required.

As described above, when the integrated control device MC receives an input for selecting the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, and performs a display operation corresponding to the combined cooking mode or the linked cooking mode, such A configuration in which cooking mode display units (light emitting units) 390 and 391 are provided may be used.

In the explanations of the first to ninth embodiments, the cooperative cooking menu consists of two cooking processes 1 and 2, but as explained in the tenth embodiment, the cooking process 3 is further required. You may make it a cooperative cooking menu.
For example, the cooking process 1 is performed by the left heating part 17HL of the induction heating source 9, and the cooking process 2 is performed by the microwave heating source 189. Finally, the food is returned to the top plate 15 to compensate for the insufficient heating. A cooking step 3 is provided for purposes such as adjusting, adding seasonings and other cooking liquids, and the like.

As one example, on the right heating unit 17HR, the final cooking is done while visually confirming directly. In other words, this is a case in which the material to be cooked, which has been substantially completed in the cooking step 2, is moved onto the right heating unit 17HR, and weakly heated for a long period of time to increase the maturity of ingredients such as meat and vegetables and broth.

In the above description, when one of the cooperative cooking menus is specified, the heating sources to be used and their order are automatically determined.

For example, “item to be cooked A” and “item to be cooked B”, which are one of the linked cooking menus, are relatively frequently used by the user, and both of them are used in the cooking process 1 by the right heating unit 17HR. Therefore, it is assumed that the user is accustomed to cooking in the right heating section 17HR.

After that, when the user selects "item to be cooked C", which is one of the linked cooking menus, if the left heating unit 17HL is designated, the user may be confused about the operation because the user is not used to using it. be.

Therefore, if there is no problem with either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL from the determination result of the permission condition by the integrated control device MC, when selecting the cooperative cooking menu for the first time, on the first specific screen 30SP, the user The familiar right heating unit 17HR may be preferentially displayed. That is, for example, when selecting the heating section, the "right heating section" may always be displayed, and then the user may perform an input designating the left heating section 17HR.

On the other hand, if the heating unit desired by the user cannot properly heat due to restrictions such as the heating power value for heating the food to be cooked and the energization control pattern of induction heating, the operation of the integrated control device MC side If the program allows only the specified (default setting) heating section to perform cooking, the user will not be misused or misunderstood. For example, when the user selects a heating unit with relatively weak heating power such as the central heating unit 17HM described in Embodiment 5, the cooking device 1 side notifies the user and corrects the problem (heated pot or the like). It is better to guide the object (to move the object to another heating unit).

In the first embodiment, after cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122, there are two routes: an internal route passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113, and an external route passing through the outside of the heating chamber 113 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121. There was one, but you can replace this route and change it as follows.
(1) Internal path: A path that cools the inverter circuit board 121 with outside air sucked by the third cooling fan 128 through the second air inlet 152F, introduces the cooling air into the heating chamber 113, and reaches the exhaust duct 102.
(2) External path: The heat radiation part 122H of the magnetron 122 is cooled by the outside air sucked by the fourth cooling fan 129 from the second air inlet 152B, and the cooling air is guided to the outside of the heating chamber 113, and finally to the exhaust duct 102 .

In general, the heat radiating section 122H of the magnetron 122 has a structure in which a plurality of heat radiating plates (radiating fins) are stacked, and cooling air passes through the narrow space between the heat radiating plates to exchange heat (radiate heat). Therefore, the cooling air pressure loss is large. In other words, airflow resistance is large.
Therefore, by exhausting the cooling air passing through the heat radiation part 122H of the magnetron 122 without entering the heating chamber 113 (by shortening the length of the air path), the internal path and the external path are balanced. is. This is effective when the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 have the same performance. That is, as described in the first embodiment, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 have exactly the same structure, the same shape, and the same rated specifications, so that the procurement cost at the time of manufacturing can be reduced. It is one promising proposal for

Further, after cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122, the internal path for the cooling air RF6 passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113 was eliminated, and the inverter circuit board 121 was cooled as described in the fifth embodiment. The rest of the cooling air RF7 may be discharged as it is to the outside of the heating cooker 1 through the duct 307 to simplify the cooling air passage inside the lower unit 200. FIG. By reducing the airflow resistance, the rated air blowing capacity of the fourth cooling fan 129 can be changed to a lower level. This has advantages such as being advantageous in terms of cost.

In the case of users who do not need both the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 at the same time as shown in the first to thirteenth embodiments, the sales of the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 and the installation work on the kitchen furniture 2 are performed separately. Become. The lower unit 200 is set as an optional item, for example. In such a case, for example, if a packing form for selling the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 as a set and a packing form for selling only the upper unit 100 are separately set, the convenience at the time of sale is impaired. never

In carrying out the present invention, it is not essential to configure the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 in separate housings as shown in the first to twelfth embodiments. Therefore, the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 may be configured from one housing (body case HC) from the beginning.

In Embodiments 1 to 13, the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 are made of thin metal plates. However, one or both of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 may be made of a plastic material. For example, it may be made of a thermoplastic plastic material. One material example is PET or PA, PP or ABS, or the like. "PET" refers to polyethylene terephthalate. "PA" means polyamide, and "PP" means polypropylene. It may be determined in consideration of heat resistance temperature and durability as a structure. Moreover, only a part of the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 may be made of plastic, and the remaining parts may be made of a metal plate material.

The induction heating circuit may employ various driving methods such as a half-bridge circuit, a full-bridge circuit, etc., depending on the form and number of the IH coils 17L and 17R. For example, full bridge circuits are proposed in Japanese Patent No. 6130411 and Japanese Patent No. 617h23.

In addition, the IH coil is not limited to a doughnut-shaped shape. , a flat first sub-heating coil and a flat second sub-heating coil having a width dimension smaller than the radius of the main heating coil.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when induction heating is started, even if the heating power is not set, the induction heating operation is started under the default conditions (heating power value and heating power level), and then the user decides the desired heating power. I used a method of operation. However, a method other than this method may be used. For example, after turning on the main power supply, it is necessary to determine the target induction heating source, thermal power value (watt), and thermal power level (one of the stages such as thermal power "high" to "low") and issue a start command. Some operation methods may be adopted, and such methods do not affect the essential effects of the present invention.

In Embodiment 1, both the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 of the upper unit 100 were not operated during the period in which only microwave cooking was performed. Either or both of the second cooling fans 61 may be operated. When at least one of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 is operated, outside air is continuously introduced into the internal space of the upper unit 100, which has the advantage of keeping the temperature of the upper unit 100 low.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, the lower air passages during microwave heating are air passages (internal passages) for cooling the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 and for cooling the inverter circuit board 121. There are two air passages (external passages) for cooling air, and these two air passages are finally gathered in one exhaust duct 102 and then through a common exhaust port 20 to heat. It was discharged to the outside of the cooker 1.

However, it is not necessary to do so via a single (common) exhaust duct, nor to collect the exhaust flow to a single exhaust port 20 . For example, a second exhaust port separate from the exhaust port 20 is provided at a different position (a position directly below the exhaust cover 19), and from the second exhaust port, cooling air is directed to either the internal route or the external route. You may make it exhaust. In particular, in the form (embodiment 1) in which the partition plate 52 partitions the rear portion of the upper unit 100 into the front and rear, it is preferable that the exhaust port faces the gap GP1 formed on the rear side of the partition plate 52 .

As described in Embodiment 1, for example, immediately after one induction heating cooking is finished, when microwave heating cooking is started, if the temperature of the top plate 15 is still high (in an emergency) may operate the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 at the same time during microwave cooking. Such a form also meets the basic object and spirit of the present invention.

In the first to thirteenth embodiments, the operation key 98 of the main power switch 97 is arranged in the input operation section 40 exposed on the upper surface of the main body case HC, and is operated from above the main body case HC. . Although the operation key 98 is sometimes called an operation button, it basically has the same structure.

However, the present invention is by no means limited to this form of the input operation unit 40 . For example, the input operation unit 40 need not always be exposed when viewed from above the body case HC, and may be stored inside the body case HC when not in use. Conventionally known forms of storage include those that move horizontally, such as drawers, and those that rotate around a single fulcrum.

The method of rotating and storing is called the operation part of the kangaroo pocket mechanism, and is proposed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2004-28569, 2004-3845, and 3-2h26. It is Also, the main power switch 97 may be a seesaw type switch as disclosed in JP-A-2004-3845.

Even the input operation unit 40 that is rotated and stored in this way can be operated from above (direction) of the main body case HC when in use. That is, since the user can turn on the main power source of the heating cooker 1 while standing near the front of the heating cooker 1, there is no problem in carrying out the present invention. In addition, the operability is good without forcing the user to take an unreasonable posture.
The input operation unit 40 that is rotated and retracted in this manner may be provided on the right front cover 112 described in the first embodiment, for example.

In addition, a kangaroo pocket mechanism that has a heating part (gas burner, etc.) exposed (facing) on the top plate and a heating part in a heating chamber (grilling chamber), and rotates and stores each operation part. A heating cooker employing the operation unit of is also proposed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-172941.

In the first to thirteenth embodiments, an example in which a magnetron is used as the microwave generation source 122 has been described, but microwaves may be generated by other means. For example, a heating cooker using a semiconductor oscillator has been proposed in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2019-509587, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 51-9562, and the like.

In Japanese Patent Publication No. 2019-509587, the microwave generator includes a small signal generator (one or more) configured to generate a high frequency signal at a first power level, and from this small signal generator a solid-state radio-frequency signal amplifier (one or more) for amplifying the radio-frequency signal of the . The solid-state amplifier then amplifies the first high frequency signal having a first low power level to a second high frequency signal having a second high power level and supplies the signal to a heating chamber containing food to be cooked. was
When implementing the present invention, a microwave generation source configured with such a semiconductor device may be used.

In the first embodiment, it has been explained that the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 are operated independently of the heating operation by the induction heating source 9 of the upper unit 100 . That is, it has been explained that when the induction heating source 9 is used, the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 are not operated when the upper (first) cooling fan 60 for cooling is operated. However, this does not mean that the (first) cooling fan 60 and the lower (third, fourth) cooling fans 128, 129 are not operated at the same time.

For example, as described in FIG. 28 of Embodiment 1, all the cooling fans are turned off for a short period of time at the stage of checking for abnormalities at startup (see step ST2 in FIG. 28) before selecting the heating source to be used. It is also possible to adopt a method in which the integrated control unit MC checks whether abnormal currents or voltages are generated in the circuit after trial operation only, and in this case, each cooling fan 60, 61, 128, and 129 may be activated all at once, or may be sequentially activated one by one for a short period of time. This arrangement does not impair the essential effect of the present invention.

In Embodiment 1, the user had to select either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL (FIG. 53, step STR5). That is, first, either the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL is selected by the input key 43M2.
However, the present invention does not necessarily require such a heating section selection step.

For example, in Japanese Patent No. 6230712 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2014-44852,
A plurality of heating coils arranged regularly so as to be adjacent to each other under a top plate on which an object to be heated is placed, an inverter circuit for supplying high-frequency current to the heating coils, and a heating target directly above the heating coils. An object-to-be-heated placement determination unit that determines whether an object is placed, an input operation unit provided on the upper surface of the main body, and a control device,
The control device displays the object to be heated in the display area of the display screen based on the result of the object to be heated placement determination unit determining that the object to be heated is placed on the heating coil. to display the number of icons corresponding to
The control device detects that the user touches the first icon corresponding to the first object to be heated, and operates so that the cooking conditions for the first object to be heated can be input. An induction cooker is disclosed.

Also, in Japanese Patent No. 5202064,
A top plate on which an object to be heated such as a pot is placed, a plurality of induction heating coils distributed below the top plate, a sensor for detecting the object to be heated, and a predetermined area near the top plate. Continuously arranged band-shaped operation display means and control means,
The control means identifies an occupied area on the top plate of the object to be heated based on the output of the sensor, and further drives the induction heating coil corresponding to the identified occupied area and its peripheral area. Identifying the area of the object to be heated, estimating the center position and size of the identified occupied area, and displaying the operating means in the specific area of the operation display means based on the estimation result to activate the operating means. An induction cooker is disclosed that allows access by external operation by

In other words, instead of placing an object to be heated such as a pot on a specific position of the top plate for cooking, the object to be heated can be placed relatively freely over a wide area on the top plate and the position of the heated portion can be controlled. A technology has been proposed in which the cooking can be started by detecting on the part side.

Also in the present invention, the technique as described above can be applied. That is, it is not necessary to display the right heating section selection mark 334R and the left heating section selection mark 334L, which indicate that driving is permitted on the integrated control device MC side, on the first specific screen 30SP as described in the first embodiment. .

In addition, the operation of first selecting either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL using the input key 43M2 becomes unnecessary, and the usability can be further improved.

Further, in the heat cooker 1 of Embodiments 1 to 9, the input operation unit 40 is provided with a large number of input keys 43MC, 43M1 to 43M3, 43R1 to 43R4, 43L1 to 43L4, etc. for multifunctionality. Therefore, there is a concern that a user who is not accustomed to the operation cannot easily perform the desired operation.
Therefore, for a user who does not want to use all the functions from the beginning, when a specific switch is operated, the display of the input key itself is erased, and the input function of the input key is disabled. A form in which a reduced visual effect is expected may be used. Japanese Patent Publication No. 2009-243771 has already proposed a heating cooker in which usable functions are limited according to the user's desire.

Also in the present invention, either one of the linked cooking menu and the combined cooking menu may be set to be disabled by the user's operation. In that case, the input key 43KP described in the first embodiment may be used for setting, or an input key or a push button switch, etc., may be provided that allows the user to limit and expand functions simply by touching.

Of the processes described in the embodiments, all or part of the processes described as being automatically performed can also be performed manually. All or part of the processes described as being performed manually can also be performed automatically by known methods.

In the first to twelfth embodiments, there are two induction heating units 17H, a left heating unit 17HL and a right heating unit 17HR, and inverter circuits 81L and 81R are also arranged one by one corresponding to these two heating units. However, it may be modified as follows.
(1) A method of coordinating and driving the IH coils of the two adjacent heating units when heating a large object that straddles two adjacent heating units (as a typical example, a Japanese patent See No. 5,188,215).

(2) four IH coils having substantially the same shape and size and wound in the same direction below the top plate 15 and arranged close to each other in substantially the same plane below the top plate; and two inverter circuits that supply power to the IH coils, the four IH coils are divided into two coil groups (groups), and from the two inverter circuits to each of the two IH coil groups A method of supplying power to each (see Japanese Patent No. 5299590 as a typical example).

(3) A circular IH coil (central IH coil) arranged below the top plate 15 and (a plurality of) auxiliary IH coils arranged to surround the circular IH coil. A method comprising a first inverter circuit that supplies power to the central IH coil and a second inverter circuit that supplies power to the auxiliary coil group (see Japanese Patent No. 5257542 as a representative) .

(4) a sub-IH coil group consisting of a main IH coil for heating an object placed on the top plate and a plurality of sub-IH coils installed adjacent to each other outside the main IH coil; a main inverter circuit for supplying a high-frequency current to the main IH coil; a sub-inverter circuit group for independently supplying a high-frequency current to each of the sub-IH coils; the main IH coil and the plurality of sub-IH coils; To-be-heated object placement determination unit for determining whether or not the same object to be heated is placed on at least one of the secondary IH coils, and the outputs of the main inverter circuit and the sub-inverter circuit group an energization control circuit, wherein a plurality of the sub IH coils are provided at predetermined intervals with a predetermined insulating space around the main IH coil, and the outer diameter shape of the sub IH coil is The side edge portion adjacent to the outer peripheral edge of the main IH coil has a curved shape along the outer peripheral edge of the main IH coil, and the energization control circuit controls the main inverter so that the thermal power value set by the user. The output of the circuit and the output of the sub-inverter circuit group are controlled to a predetermined distribution to perform a cooperative heating operation. In this case, a method of maintaining the output distribution before the change (as a representative, see Japanese Patent No. 5642168).

Each circuit, part, and component of the device shown in the figure is functionally conceptual, and does not necessarily have to be physically configured as shown in the figure. Furthermore, the integrated control device MC, the microwave heating control unit 130, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the display unit drive circuit 63 described in FIG. The forms are not limited to those shown in the drawings, and all or part of them can be configured by functionally or physically distributing and integrating them in arbitrary units according to functions, operating conditions, and the like.

Each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 is implemented by a processing circuit. A processing circuit that implements each function may be dedicated hardware, or may be a processor that executes a program stored in a memory.

When the processing circuit is a processor, each function of the integrated controller MC and the IH controller 90 is implemented by software, firmware, or a combination of software and firmware. Software and firmware are written as programs and stored in the storage device MM, which is a memory. The processor implements each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 by reading and executing the programs stored in the storage device MM.

These programs cause the microcomputer to execute control procedures of the integrated control device MC and the IH control section 90 . Note that the storage device MM is typically non-volatile or volatile semiconductor memory such as RAM, ROM, flash memory, EPROM, and EEPROM.

Furthermore, part of the data and programs in the storage device MM and the storage device 90R shown in FIG. In this case, the heating cooker 1 acquires necessary data and program information by accessing an external recording medium (storage server).

Furthermore, the operation programs of the integrated control device MC, the microwave heating control section 130, the heating chamber control section 159, and the display section driving circuit 63, which are described particularly with reference to FIG. If desired, it may be possible to update to an improved version as appropriate. In this case, the modification program may be obtained through the wireless communication unit 49, for example.

The induction heating source (first heating means) 9 for cooking on the top plate 15 may be changed to a gas combustion burner. In this case, the gas flow rate valve is configured to be controlled by the controller.

In the first to thirteenth embodiments, the input operation unit 40, the left (first) operation unit 40L, the cooperation operation unit 40MC, the RG operation unit (second operation unit/third operation unit) 40MG, the right (first) operation unit The operation unit 40R has been described as a "contact input" operation unit in which the user touches an input key to issue an input command. But it's okay. Furthermore, the voice input method may be changed to input by recognizing the user's voice. In the case of the voice input method, a microphone or a voice receiving section for receiving the user's voice and converting it into a voice recognition signal corresponds to the input operation section.

In Embodiments 1 to 13, the means for selecting various cooking menus, control conditions, etc. displayed on the first specific screen 30SC, the second specific screen 30SP and the third specific screen 30ST is the input operation unit 40. , may be provided in the display screens of the integrated display section 30 or the left and right display sections 30L and 30R.

For example, in Japanese Patent No. 5833699, which proposes compound cooking, a display screen of compound cooking is displayed, the name of the menu of compound cooking is displayed in the display screen, and the menu selection part is displayed by the user. A technique of selecting a menu by touching it directly with a finger has been proposed.

Therefore, the menu of compound cooking and cooperative cooking, the name of the object to be cooked (one type of identification information), etc. are displayed on the first specific screen 30SC and the second specific screen 30SP, and the display portion (also called the “icon” portion) is displayed. ) may be directly touched by the user with a finger to select a cooperative cooking menu or the like.

In Embodiments 1 and 2, the wireless communication unit 49 receives a command signal transmitted from the outside of the heating cooker 1, and from the heating cooker 1, each operation signal and command signals L1 to L10 are sent to the outside. Although it has been transmitted, information indicating the progress of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, such as the start and end, may also be transmitted. The user can know the progress information using a portable terminal device or the like, which improves convenience.

Further, in Embodiments 1, 2 and 10, the wireless communication unit 49 exchanges command signals, operation signals, etc. with the outside. good.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The substantial scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning of equivalents of the scope of claims.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The heating cooker and kitchen furniture according to the present invention can be widely used not only in the kitchens of general houses but also in the kitchens of public facilities, shops, and the like.

1 heating cooker 2 kitchen furniture 2A installation opening 2B front opening 2G stepped portion 2P mouth edge upper surface 2S right side surface 3 surface material 4 surface material 5 surface material 6 surface material 7 frame line 8 wall 9 induction heating source (first heating means)
10 upper unit body 15 top plate 16 upper case (upper housing)
16A flange 16B rear vertical wall 16F front vertical wall 16L side vertical wall 16R side vertical wall 16S bottom wall (bottom wall surface)
17C coil base (coil support frame)
17CH arm 17H induction heating unit 17HL left heating unit 17HM center heating unit 17HR right heating unit 17L IH coil (induction heating coil)
17M IH coil (induction heating coil)
17R IH coil (induction heating coil)
18 opening 19 exhaust cover 20 exhaust port 21 decorative frame 22 reinforcing plate 23 right input control device 24 left input control device 25 decorative frame 26 cushion material 27 light emitting display 27L light emitting display 27M light emitting display 27R light emitting display 27L1 to 27L4 Individual Light-emitting section 27M1-27M6 Individual light-emitting section 27R1-27R5 Individual light-emitting section 28 Power switch control device 30 Integrated display section (central display section)
30A Display text 30AD Additional screen 30B Display text 30C Two-dimensional information 30D Display screen 30E Caution display 30F Explanation 30G Caution 30H Recommendation 30J Specific text 30K Heat source display 30L First area 30M Second area 30MY Microwave heating time information 30N Common information during standby 30GY Heating time information for grill cooking 30P Reference information (guidance information)
30Q Character information (additional information)
30R Third area 30S Heating time information 30SC Second specific screen 30SP First specific screen 30SPL First specific screen 30ST Third specific screen 30T Target temperature information 30V Output level information 30W Display window 30X Output value (watt value) information 30Y Candidate display area
30Z common screen 31L left display section 31LW display window 31R right display section 31RW display window 32 central operation board 33 rectifier circuit 34 power supply circuit A
35 rectifier circuit 36 power supply circuit B
37L drive circuit 37R drive circuit 40 input operation unit 40L left operation unit (first operation unit on the left side)
40M central operation unit (common operation unit)
40M2 2nd operation section/3rd operation section 40MC Linked operation section 40MG RG operation section (2nd operation section/3rd operation section)
40R right operation unit (first operation unit on the right)
40RG RG operation unit 41 operation board
41L Left side touch key board 41R Right side touch key board 42 Input key 43L1~43L4 Input key 43M1 Input key 43M2 Input key 43M3 Input key 43KP Input key 43L1~43L4 Input key 43M1~43R3 Input key 43MC Input key (first input key)
43MS input key 43MSL input key 43MT input key (second input key)
43R1 to 43R4 Input key 44L Input key 44R Input key 45L Input key 45M Input key 45R Input key 46L Window 46R Window 47 Input key 48 Infrared transmitter 49 Wireless communication unit (wireless communication module)
50 holder 51 screw 51F screw 52 partition plate 52A exhaust window 53 exhaust port plate 53A through hole 54 filter circuit board 55 power supply circuit board 56 choke coil 57 transformer 58 capacitor 59 diode bridge circuit (diode module)
60 first cooling fan (upper cooling fan)
60A air outlet 60C fan case 60M motor 60P drive circuit 60T rotary shaft 61 second cooling fan 61A air outlet 61C fan case 61M motor 61P drive circuit 62 cooling fan drive circuit 63 display drive circuit 64 air vent
64S auxiliary vent 67L heating power indicator 67H heat retention indicator 67R heating power indicator 68 heating source indicator 68L indicator 68M indicator 68R indicator 69 high temperature indicator 70 cover 71 support plate 72 electric power controller (demand controller)
73 signal transmission unit 74 drive circuit 75 DC power supply circuit 76 resonance capacitor 77a input current detection unit 77b output current detection unit 78a diode bridge 78b reactor 78c smoothing capacitor 79a IGBT
79b IGBTs
79c Diode 79d Diode 80 Inverter Circuit Board 81 Inverter Circuit 81L Inverter Circuit 81R Inverter Circuit 82 Heat Sink 82F Radiation Fin 83 Power Control Switching Element 84 Vibration Sensor 85 Electric Part 90 IH Control Section 90R Storage Device 91 Power Supply Circuit 92 DC Power Conversion Section 93 Temperature detection circuit 94L Induction heating circuit 94R Induction heating circuit 95 Voice synthesizer 95S Speaker 96 Clock circuit 97 Main power switch 98 Main power switch operation button or operation key 99 Commercial power supply (commercial AC power supply)
100 upper unit 101 lower case (lower housing)
101A flange 101B rear wall surface (rear vertical wall)
101C inclined portion 101F front plate 101H body portion 101U bottom plate 101L side vertical wall 101R side vertical wall 101T front horizontal wall 102 exhaust duct 102A internal passage 102B internal passage 102E end portion 104 cavity 105 control device 106 power cord 106A plug 110 main body 111 Inclined portion 112 Front cover 112P Mounting leg 113 Heating chamber 113A Opening 113B Rear wall (rear wall surface)
113T recessed portion 114 door 115 handle portion 120 microwave heating device 120P power supply circuit portion 121 inverter circuit board 121A inverter circuit (drive circuit)
122 magnetron (microwave source)
122A Oscillating section 122H Heat radiating section 123 Waveguide 124 Antenna case 125 Antenna 126 Antenna drive motor 126A Rotating shaft 127 Power circuit board 128 Third cooling fan (lower cooling fan) (cooling fan A)
129 fourth cooling fan (lower cooling fan) (cooling fan B)
130 microwave heating control unit 131 door open/close detection mechanism 132A latch switch 132B door switch 133 monitor switch 134 pin 135 pin 136A interlocking rod 136B interlocking rod 137 support plate 138A communication port 138B communication port 139 closure detection unit 140 oven heating device 141 space ( ceiling space)
142 space (side space)
145 tray 146 front operation unit 147 display unit 150 case A
151 Case B
152B intake port (second intake port)
152F intake port (second intake port)
152S1 Auxiliary intake port 152S2 Auxiliary intake port 153 Duct 154 Case C
154A lid body 154B main body 158 non-contact temperature measuring section (infrared temperature measuring section)
159 heating chamber control unit 160 temperature sensor 161 detection window 162 cooking plate 163 heater 163A upper heater 163B lower heater 164 vent (first intake port)
165 recess (air intake duct)
166L left partition plate 166R right partition plate 167 upper heat shield plate 168 lower heat shield plate 169 upper case 170 lower case 171 partition plate 172 passage 173 communication port 174 communication port 176 hinge 178A relay 178B relay 180 feed port 181 cover 182 relay 184 seal Material 185 Radio wave sealing chamber 186 Screw 188 Oven heating source (heating chamber heating source) (third heating means)
189 microwave heating source (second heating means)
190 frame 191 cover 192 inner frame 192W viewing window (opening)
193 Inner seal frame 194 Chalk chamber 195 Seal plate 196 Seal plate 197 Upper shield plate 199 Wind direction plate 200 Lower unit 201 Inlet 270 to 277 Light-emitting display unit 280 Schematic diagram (image diagram)
300A upper space 300B lower space 301R right side space 301L left side space 302 front space 303 space 304 support fitting 304V vertical portion 304H horizontal portion (flange portion)
305 vent hole 306 communication window 307 exhaust duct 308 vertical portion 309 communication window 310 electrode 311 operation panel unit 312 operation information input unit 313 operation determination unit 314 gesture mode determination unit 315 gesture input information determination unit 316 gesture area determination unit 317 reference parameter storage Part 318 Notification part 319 Reference information storage part 326 Cushioning material 330 Name of object to be cooked (identification information)
331 additional information 331T preheating temperature value 332 cooking process information (cooking process information section)
334L Left heating section selection mark 334R Right heating section selection mark 335D Input key (icon)
335U input key (icon)
336 input key (icon)
337 Input key (icon)
340 Input key 350 Input key 351 Input key 352 Input key 360 Icon 361 Linked cooking menu display information 362 Control menu display section 370 Central display section (common display section)
380 Food Placement Table (Rotating Table)
381 Spindle 382 Motor 383A Food (Foodstuff A)
383B Food (Ingredient B)
390 Cooking mode display unit (light emitting unit)
391 cooking mode display unit (light emitting unit)
AH Upper air passage AL Top plate exposed area BH Depth BT1 Dedicated power supply (built-in battery)
CK IH coil installation space DP1 depth (dimensions)
F1 First air passage F2 Second air passage FG User's fingertip FI Entrance FO Exit GP1 Gap GP5L Gap GP5R Gap GP6 Gap GP7 Gap GP8 Gap GP9 Gap GP10 Gap HC Body case HL1 First horizontal line HL2 Second horizontal line H1 Maximum height Height dimension HP1 First horizontal plane HV Effective height dimension HX Maximum height dimension IP1 Touch information (input operation information)
IP2 Input information IP3 Selection value signal IP4 Selection value signal IP5 Image signal LA Projection size LF Exhaust port size MC Integrated control device MM Storage device N Object to be heated RF1 Cooling air RF2 Cooling air RF3 Cooling air RF4 Cooling air RF5 Cooling air RF6 Cooling air TR: Transition period UH: Lower air passage VL1: Vertical center line W1: Width of installation opening W2: Maximum width of installation space W3: Maximum width of cooker WH: Inside width (frontage).

Claims (17)

a heating chamber inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated in the upper part of the main body;
a second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
a third heating means for heating the heating chamber by a heating principle different from that of the second heating means;
an input operation unit;
display means;
A control unit that controls the first, second, and third heating means,
The control unit includes a group consisting of the second heating means and the third heating means, and a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means is driven with a time difference, A combined cooking mode in which the heating means and the third heating means are driven simultaneously or with a time difference, or are automatically switched and driven, and the first, second, and third heating means are each independently It has a function to perform a single cooking mode driven by
The control unit, in the input operation unit,
(1) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected, displaying a first specific screen on the display means;
(2) when the combined cooking mode is selected, displaying a second specific screen on the display means;
(3) when the single cooking mode using the first heating means is selected, displaying a third specific screen on the display means;
With the second specific screen displayed, in the input operation unit, the second input means for the combined cooking mode inputs one combined cooking menu in the combined cooking mode, the second heating means or the and one single cooking menu in a single cooking mode using a third heating means, and any one of these can be selected. a heating chamber inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated in the upper part of the main body;
a second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
a third heating means for heating the heating chamber by a heating principle different from that of the second heating means;
an input operation unit;
display means;
A control unit that controls the first, second, and third heating means,
The control unit includes a group consisting of the second heating means and the third heating means, and a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means is driven with a time difference, A combined cooking mode in which the heating means and the third heating means are driven simultaneously or with a time difference, or are automatically switched and driven, and the first, second, and third heating means are each independently It has a function to perform a single cooking mode driven by
The control unit, in the input operation unit,
(1) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected, displaying a first specific screen on the display means;
(2) when the combined cooking mode is selected, displaying a second specific screen on the display means;
(3) when the single cooking mode using the first heating means is selected, displaying a third specific screen on the display means;
When the cooperative cooking mode is selected and when the combined cooking mode is selected, the control unit determines whether the permission condition is satisfied, and when the permission condition is satisfied, the first specific screen Alternatively, a composite heating cooker characterized by displaying the second specific screen. The permission conditions when the cooperative cooking mode is selected are that the first heating means and the second heating means are not in use, and that the set upper limit regulation value of maximum power consumption is equal to or greater than a threshold. The composite heating cooker according to claim 2 , characterized by: 3. The composite heating cooker according to claim 2 , wherein the permission condition when the composite cooking mode is selected is that the temperature of the heating chamber is equal to or lower than a threshold. further comprising a door for freely opening and closing the opening of the heating chamber, and a closing detector for the door,
The control unit uses the second heating means or the third heating means when the closing detection unit confirms that the door is closed while the second specific screen is displayed. 2. The combined heating cooker according to claim 1 , wherein a single cooking mode can be started. further comprising a door for freely opening and closing the opening of the heating chamber, and a closing detector for the door,
The cooperative cooking mode includes a cooking step 1 using the first heating means and a cooking step 2 using at least one of the second heating means and the third heating means. ,
The control unit can start the cooking process 1 regardless of whether the closing detection unit confirms that the door is closed in the state where the first specific screen is displayed, and when the cooking process 1 ends. 2. The combined heating cooker according to claim 1 , wherein the cooking process 2 can be started when the closing detection unit confirms that the door is open and then confirms that the door is closed. 2. The composite heating cooker according to claim 1 , wherein said second input means further comprises light emitting means for displaying that the input function is valid. 7. The composite heating cooker according to claim 6 , wherein said composite cooking menu is displayed on said second specific screen so as to be selectable by said second input means. A plurality of cooperative cooking menus to be performed in the cooperative cooking mode are displayed in a predetermined order on the first specific screen, and each time the input operation unit is operated, the menus can be sequentially selected. The composite heating cooker according to claim 1 . further comprising first input means for selecting the cooperative cooking mode,
The first input means and the second input means use common input keys,
2. The combined heating cooker according to claim 1 , wherein the content of the selection command is determined by the control unit according to the number of times of operation. The composite cooking menu to be executed in the composite cooking mode is divided by a heating control pattern for driving the second heating means and the third heating means,
7. The composite heating cooker according to any one of claims 1 to 6 , wherein a name identifying the heating control pattern is displayed on the second specific screen. The input operation unit is arranged on the upper surface of the main body and includes an individual operation unit for the first heating means and a cooperative operation unit,
The cooperative operation unit includes first input means for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, second input means, and input means for starting heat cooking, respectively;
2. The combined heating cooker according to claim 1 , wherein a single cooking mode using said first heating means can be selected by said individual operating portion. The input operation unit is arranged on the upper surface of the main body and includes an individual operation unit for the first heating means and a cooperative operation unit,
The cooperative operation unit includes first input means for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, second input means, and input means for starting heat cooking, respectively;
The individual operation unit can select the single cooking mode using the first heating means,
The composite cooking mode has a plurality of the composite cooking menus, and each of the composite cooking menus has the heating means to be driven and the driving order selected from the second heating means and the third heating means in advance. 2. The composite heating cooker according to claim 1 , characterized in that it is determined to be a heating chamber inside the body;
a first heating means for heating an object to be heated in the upper part of the main body;
a second heating means for heating the food contained in the heating chamber;
a third heating means for heating the heating chamber by a heating principle different from that of the second heating means;
an input operation unit;
display means;
A control unit that controls the first, second, and third heating means,
The control unit includes a group consisting of the second heating means and the third heating means, and a cooperative cooking mode in which the first heating means is driven with a time difference, A combined cooking mode in which the heating means and the third heating means are driven simultaneously or with a time difference, or are automatically switched and driven, and the first, second, and third heating means are each independently It has a function to perform a single cooking mode driven by
The control unit, in the input operation unit,
(1) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected, displaying a first specific screen on the display means;
(2) when the combined cooking mode is selected, displaying a second specific screen on the display means;
(3) when the single cooking mode using the first heating means is selected, displaying a third specific screen on the display means;
The input operation unit is arranged on the upper surface of the main body and includes an individual operation unit and a cooperative operation unit of the first heating means,
The cooperative operation unit is provided with first input means for selecting the cooperative cooking mode, second input means for selecting the combined cooking mode, and input means for starting heat cooking,
A single cooking mode that uses the first heating means can be selected by the individual operation unit,
In the program of the compound cooking mode executed by the control unit, the heating means to be driven and the order of driving are determined in advance for each compound cooking menu,
By selecting one of the compound cooking menus while the second specific screen is displayed, a single cooking mode using the second heating means or the third heating means can be selected. Composite heating cooker characterized. When the cooperative cooking mode is selected or when the combined cooking mode is selected, the control unit determines whether the permission condition is satisfied, and if the permission condition is satisfied, the first 15. The composite heating cooker according to claim 14 , wherein the specific screen or the second specific screen is displayed. When the combined cooking mode is selected, the control unit determines whether the permission condition is satisfied, and displays the second specific screen when the permission condition is satisfied,
Further, when the combined cooking mode is selected while the single cooking mode is being executed by the first heating means, the control section controls the displaying of the third specific screen instead of displaying the third specific screen on the display means. 15. The combined heating cooker according to claim 14 , wherein the 2 specific screen is displayed to wait for input of the combined cooking mode. a first heating means for heating the object to be heated in the upper part of the main body;
a second heating means for heating an object to be cooked in a heating chamber disposed inside the main body;
a third heating means for heating the heating chamber by a heating principle different from that of the second heating means;
an input operation unit;
display means;
a control unit that controls the first, second, and third heating means,
The control unit controls a cooperative cooking mode in which the group of the second heating means, the third heating means, and the first heating means are driven with a time difference, and the second heating means. A function to perform a combined cooking mode in which the third heating means are driven simultaneously or with a time difference, or automatically switched and driven, and a single cooking mode in which the first heating means is driven alone. have
The control unit selects a first specific screen for executing the linked cooking mode, a second specific screen for executing the combined cooking mode, and a third specific screen for executing the single cooking mode on the display means. displayed in a unilateral way,
In a state in which any one of the first specific screen, the second specific screen, and the third specific screen is displayed, the control unit receives a cooking start command from the input operation unit. go to
The input operation unit has a dedicated operation unit for the first heating means and a common operation unit for the first, second and third heating means,
The shared operation unit includes first selection means for selecting the linked cooking mode and second selection means for selecting the combined cooking mode,
After power is supplied, the control unit
displaying the first specific screen when the input operation of the first selection means is started before the second selection means;
displaying the second specific screen when the input operation of the second selection means is started before the first selection means ;
The control unit displays the third specific screen when the input operation of the dedicated operation unit is started before the first selection unit and the second selection unit. heating cooker.

Images